ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200705 - TeleComceptstelecomcepts.com/old_site/downloads/Neax2400/ICS...

ND-45687 (E)ISSUE 4

STOCK # 200705

Command Manual

JULY, 1998

NEC America, Inc.

®

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications,functions, or features, at any time, without notice.

NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its em-ployees and customers. The information contained herein is theproperty of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced withoutprior written approval from NEC America, Inc.

NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.

Copyright 1998

NEC America, Inc.

Printed in the U.S.A.

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE MARCH, 1994 DATE JANUARY, 1995 DATE JULY, 1995 DATE JULY, 1998


DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 ICSCommand Manual Revision Sheet Page 1/12

ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

i ii iii iv v vi vii viii ix x xi xii xiii xiv

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 196

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263 264 265 266

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

281 282 283 284 285 286 287 288 289 290 291 292 293 294

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

309 310 311 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335 336

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359 360 361 362 363 364

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

379 380 381 382 383 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400 401 402 403 404 405 406

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

407 408 409 410 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

421 422 423 424 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 432 433 434

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

435 436 437 438 439 440 441 442 443 444 445 446 447 448

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

449 450 451 452 453 454 455 456 457 458 459 460 461 462

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

463 464 465 466 467 468 469 470 471 472 473 474 475 476

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

477 478 479 480 481 482 483 484 485 486 487 488 489 490

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

491 492 493 494 495 496 497 498 499 500 501 502 503 504

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

ISSUENo.

505 506 507 508 509 510 511 512 513 514 515 516 517 518

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 1 1

ISSUENo.

519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 532

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2

1

ISSUENo.

533 534 535 536 537 538 539 540 541 542 543 544 545 546

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

2

1

ISSUENo.

547 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3

2

1

ISSUENo.

561 562 563 564 565 566 567 568 569 570 571 572 573 574

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3

2

1

ISSUENo.

575 576 577 578 579 580 581 582 583 584 585 586 587 588

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3

2

1

ISSUENo.

589 590 591 592 593 594 595 596 597 598 599 600 601 602

PAGE No.




DATE DATE DATE DATE



8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3

2

1

ISSUENo.

603 604 605 606 607 608 609 610 611 612 613 614 615 616

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3

2

1

ISSUENo.

617 618 619 620 621 622 623 624 625 626 627 628 629 630

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

3

2

1

ISSUENo.

631 632 633 634 635 636 637 638 639 640 641 642 643 644

PAGE No.

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

ISSUENo. PAGE No.

ND-45687 (E)ISSUE 4

JULY, 1998

NEAX2400 ICSCommand Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix

LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

CHAPTER 2 COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42.2 Data Entry Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

2.2.1 Assigning New Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.2.2 Displaying or Changing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62.2.3 Cautions Pertaining to Entry Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

3. ERROR CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

4. COMMANDS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16AABD Assignment of ACC Restriction Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28AADC Assignment of Additional Digit Translation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29AAED Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30AAKP Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39AANI Assignment of ANI Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42AARP Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44AARS Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45AATC Assignment of Authorization Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46AATM Assignment of ATM Module Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48ACBC Assignment of Call by Call Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50ACDD Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial in Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55ACDN Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56ACFO Assignment of Call Forwarding Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59ACFS Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61ACIC Assignment of CIC Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63ACID Assignment of Caller ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65ACMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66ACND Assignment of Calling Number Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67ACNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68ACOC Assignment of Central Office Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

ND-45687 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTSPage i

Revision 4.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

ACPE Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70ACPG Assignment of Call Pickup Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74ACSA Assignment of Connection Service Index A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77ACSC Assignment of CSC Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79ACSI Assignment of Connection Service Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81ADA1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84ADA2 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88ADIM Assignment of Dial Intercom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92ADPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95AEFR Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96AEKD Assignment of External Key Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98AEVT Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99AFCD Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100AFCP Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102AFRS Assignment of Flexible Route Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106AHLS Assignment of Hot Line Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108AHMS Assignment of Hold Music Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112AICD Assignment of Intercom Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115AIDD Assignment of User ID Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117AIOC Assignment of IOC Port Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118AISA Assignment of Individual Speed Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122AISD Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124AISP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126AIZP Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127AKYD Assignment of Key Data for D term . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131ALDN Assignment of Listed Directory Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152ALPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156AMAT Assignment of Master Attendant Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157AMDD Assignment of MODEM Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158AMND Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161ANCD Assignment of Night Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163ANDD Assignment of Name Display Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 64ANND Assignment of Necessary Digits Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166AOFC Assignment of Office Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168AOPR Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169AOSP Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171APAD Assignment of PAD Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172APCR Assignment of Primary Call Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174APHN Assignment of Phantom Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-45687 (E)Page iiRevision 4.0


Page

APSW Assignment of Password Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177ARAC Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179ARDN Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180ARNP Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181ARPC Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182ARRC Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183ARSC Assignment of Route Restriction Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185ARTD Assignment of Route Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187ARTE Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204ARTI Assignment of Trunk Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214ASAT Assignment of Specific Attendant Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221ASCL Assignment of Station Class Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222ASDC Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224ASDT Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226ASFC Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229ASGD Assignment of Special Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233ASHC Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234ASHP Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237ASHU Assignment of Station Hunting Group-UCD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242ASID Assignment of Special Incoming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247ASLU Assignment of Slumber Time Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 50ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252ASPD Assignment of Speed Calling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 1ASTD Assignment of State Translation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 2ASTN Assignment of Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265ASTP Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266ASYD Assignment of System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268ATAS Assignment of TAS Service Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269ATCC Assignment of Terminal Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270ATCP Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271ATDP Assignment of Toll Code Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 73ATGL Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276ATIM Assignment of Date and Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277ATMD Assignment of Timing Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279ATNR Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285ATTD Assignment of Trunk Test Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290AUAD Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292AUCD Assignment of UCD Control Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294AUNE Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295AUNT Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296AUOG Assignment of UCD Overflow Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298

ND-45687 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTSPage iii

Revision 4.0


Page

AVTC Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 9AVTL Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300AVTM Starting of Virtual Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304BAID Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305BKUP Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306BKUPI Kinds of Memory Backup [for IMG x, IMGxh , IMGdxh and UMGx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309BOSD Backup of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316CARR Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322CASD Continuous Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343CCSE Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360CDSD Continuous Deletion of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363CMOD Change of System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 8CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380CTDK Connection of Test-Desk and LTST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2DCON Display of Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383DDA1 Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385DDA2 Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386DFSN Display File Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387DFTD Display of System Message With Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388DHDF Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390DISS Display of Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391DLEN Display of LENS Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398DLSL Display of Lock Out Station-LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402DLSS Display of Lock Out Station-Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 4DMBL Display of Make Busy LENS Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406DMBS Display of Make Busy Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408DMBT Display of Make Busy Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410DOSD Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412DPKG Display Setting on Port Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416DPSW Display Package Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419DSTN Display of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426DTF1 Display of Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441DTF2 Display of Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449DTF3 Display of Traffic Data 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453INST System Install [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456INSTI System Install [for IMG x, IMGxh , IMGdxh , and UMGx] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460LPRO Processor Occupancy List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472MBBS Make Busy of Processor Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474MBLE Make Busy of LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-45687 (E)Page ivRevision 4.0


Page

MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 76MBRT Make Busy of Route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480MBST Make Busy of Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481MBTC Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482MBTK Make Busy of Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483MMNF Make Menu File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484NDBU Name Display Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up [for Engineering use only] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487RALM Release Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489RLST Release of Station/Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490RVTL Remove Virtual Tie Line Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493SINZ System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497SPTS Scanning of Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498SRTS Scanning of Route Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503TDBU Traffic Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505TSTL Test Station Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506TTLC Test Trunk Line Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509XATM X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513XHFC X-ray HFC [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516XHFD X-RAY HD or FDD [for IMG x, IMGxh, and IMGdxh ] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

CHAPTER 3 HOTEL SYSTEM ASSIGNMENT COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521AACL Administration Station Class Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 2AANP Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527AASN Administration Station Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529AASP Assignment of Administration Special Access Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530AAST Assignment of Administration Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540ADLI Assignment DLINT Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545ADNR Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546ADSS Assignment of Direct Station Select Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548AFXC Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549AGCL Guest Station Class Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550AGNP Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554AGSN Guest Station Number Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556AGSP Assignment of Guest Special Access Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557AGST Assignment of Guest Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567AHKP Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572AHSU Assignment of Suite Room Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 74AHSY Assignment of Hotel System Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576ASCR Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577ASPF Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579ASPS Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

ND-45687 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTSPage v

Revision 4.0


Page

ATCR Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592HISS Display of Hotel Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594HMBU Hotel Main Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595RAST Remove Administration Station Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 7RGST Remove Guest Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602RHSU Remove Suite Room Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606

CHAPTER 4 LIST UP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609LABD ACC Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614LAKP Attendant Key Information Data List (for Business System). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614LAND Automatic Number Identification Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614LANI ANI Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614LARP Area Code Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614LATC Authorization Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614LCBC Call By Call Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615LCCD Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615LCDN Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615LCEG List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615LCEL List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615LCFC Call Forwarding /Connection Service Index Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616LCFS Call Forwarding Station Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616LCIC CIC Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616LCID Caller ID Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616LCMO Clock Manual Override Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCND Calling Number Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCNP Calling Number Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCOC Central Office Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCPG Call Pickup Group Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCPL Call Pickup Group Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCSA Connection Service Index A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617LCSC CSC Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618LDA1 DTE Attribute Data 1 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618LDA2 DTE Attribute Data2 List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618LDID Dial In Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619LDIM Dial Intercom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619LDNI Day/Night Information List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619LDPC Determinate Point Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619LEFR EPN Facility Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619LEKD External Key Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620LEVT List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620LFCD Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620LFCP Call Forwarding by Calling Service List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 20LFRS Flexible Route Selection Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-45687 (E)Page viRevision 4.0


Page

LHLS Hot Line Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621LHMS Hold Music Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621LHMS2 Hold Music Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621LICD Intercom Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621LIZP Internal Zone Paging Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621LKYD Key Data for D term List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622LLEN LENS Data List (for Business System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622LLMG Alarm Grade Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622LLPE Line Privacy Expansion Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623LMAT Master Attendant Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623LMDD MODEM Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623LNDD Name Display Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623LNND Necessary Digit Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624LNPD Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624LNPT Numbering Data List for PTT Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624LOPR Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625LOSD List Up of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625LPAE Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625LPAT PAD Data /Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626LPCR Primary Call Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626LRAC Remote PBX Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626LRCF List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626LRDN Remote Control Day/Night List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627LREF Reference Number Information Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627LRNP Reverse Numbering Plan Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 27LRPC Remote Point Code for Centralized Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627LRTC Route/Service Feature Class Data and Tenant Restriction Class/Tenant Restriction

Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627LRTD Route Class Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628LRTE Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630LRTI Trunk Application Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632LSAT Specific Attendant Number Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 33LSDA Speed Calling Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633LSDC Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 33LSGD Special Group List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633LSHG Station Hunting/UCD Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634LSHL Station Hunting/UCD Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634LSID Special Incoming List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635LSLP Selection Translation Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 35LSLU Slumber Time Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635LSMD Service Module Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635LSTN Station Data (Number Group) List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636LSYD System/Unit/Status Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637

ND-45687 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTSPage vii

Revision 4.0


Page

LTAS TAS Service Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638LTCP Time/Pattern Information Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638LTDP Toll Code Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638LTRK Trunk Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638LUAD UCD Delayed Announcement Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638LUCD UCD Control Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639LUNE Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639LVTC Virtual Tie Line Call Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639LVTL Virtual Tie Line Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639

CHAPTER 5 HOTEL SYSTEM LIST UP COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641LANP Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641LASP Administration Special Access Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641LDNR Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641LDSS Direct Station Select Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641LFXC List Up of Fixed Connection (Nail Down Connection Data) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642LGNP Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642LGSP Guest Special Access Code List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642LHEN LENS Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642LHKP Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 42LHST Station Data (Numbering Group) List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 42LHSU Suite Room Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643LHSY Hotel System Parameter List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643LSCR Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643LSPF Special Access Code Floor Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 43LSPS Same Number Special A ccess Code Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644LTCR TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644

TABLE OF CONTENTS ND-45687 (E)Page viiiRevision 4.0

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Page

Figure 2-1 Entry Procedure Example (ASPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Figure 2-2 Data Entry Example (ASDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5Figure 2-3 Example of Entry Procedure (ASHP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Figure 2-4 D term (8-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 2Figure 2-5 D term (16-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Figure 2-6 D term (24-Button Type) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Figure 2-7 Line Test Sequence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Figure 2-8 Functional Block Diagram of TSTL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

ND-45687 (E) LIST OF FIGURESPage ix

Revision 4.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF FIGURES ND-45687 (E)Page xRevision 4.0

LIST OF TABLES

Table Page

Table 2-1 General Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Table 2-2 System Control Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Table 2-4 Restriction Data Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Table 2-5 Administration, Measurement Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Table 2-6 Hotel/Motel System Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263Table 2-8 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Backed Up. . . . . . . . . . . . 317Table 2-9 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Displayed . . . . . . . . . . . . 412Table 2-10 Reference Table for Type of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 16Table 2-11 Counteraction Table against Command Execution Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487Table 2-12 Type of Circuit Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499Table 2-13 Kind of Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610

ND-45687 (E) LIST OF TABLESPage xi

Revision 4.0


LIST OF TABLES ND-45687 (E)Page xiiRevision 4.0

from the

nd is an

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

This manual describes commands used with the NEAX2400 ICS systems. These commands are enteredMAT (Maintenance Administration Terminal) to perform office and data control system operations.

This manual is organized to present ICS/IMS commands in alphabetical order. Included with each commaexplanation of its function, applicable data entry procedures, and other related matters.

ND-45687 (E) CHAPTER 1Page 1

Revision 4.0


CHAPTER 1 ND-45687 (E)Page 2Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

he com-

rmed

IS and follow-

.

.

data tod.

for your

CHAPTER 2 COMMANDS

1. GENERAL

This chapter includes the following sections:

• Section 2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE This section explains the procedures for assigning, deleting, and displaying data through the use of tmands.

• Section 3. ERROR CODE LIST

This section explains the error codes which are displayed when an erroneous operation has been perfoor when data which does not conform to the predetermined format has been entered from the MAT.

• Section 4. COMMANDSThis section explains NEAX2400 ICS commands. Commands are divided by system usage: ACD, CCBusiness systems and Hotel system. Commands are in alphabetical order within each section. Theing categories are included for each category:

a. Floppy Disk Name:Indicates the name of the floppy disk on which the program for the particular command resides

b. Function:Outlines the function of the command.

c. Precautions: Outlines precautions to be aware of when assigning data.

d. Related Reference Command: Indicates other commands which are used to assign, delete, change and display the same data

e. Entry Procedure: Provides an explanation of the CRT display of the MAT and notes precautions concerning the be entered. For some commands, the procedures for deleting or adding data are also explaine

Note: The parameter values shown are examples only; they should not be used when entering data system.


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

display

meter

2. DATA ENTRY PROCEDURE

2.1 Outline

The parameters to be assigned for each of the commands are shown in Figure 2-1 .

For each command there is a specific entry procedure (Item 5), which explains how to enter, delete, anddata.

Figure 2-1 Entry Procedure Example (ASPA)

Note: For the ASPA command, the parameters to be entered differ according to the data for para“SRV”. Therefore, separate screens display for different “SRV” parameters.

Assignment of Special Access Code

TN: 1 ACC: 888 CI: N SRV: UNIF SKIP: 0 WRT?


TN: 1 ACC: 11 CI: N SRV: ANNC TYPE: 1 ATN: 2 EQP: 122 WRT?

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index N: NormalH: Hooking SRV: Kind of Service (Enter UNIF.) UNIF: Office Termination SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from the Ac-

cess Code.

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index N: NormalH: HookingSRV: Kind of Service (Enter ANNC.) ANNC: Announcement ServiceTYPE: Announcement Equipment TypeEQP: Announcement-Equipment Number (2-15)

• For Office Termination: • For Announcement Service:

(5) Entry Procedure


COMMANDS

ly and

2.2 Data Entry Example

The following is an example for the ASDT command. All data values shown are for this example onshould not be entered as data for your system.

Figure 2-2 Data Entry Example (ASDT)

(5) Entry Procedure

Assignment of Station Data

TN:1 STN:3112

LENS:000002

TEC:14 RSC:1 SFC:1

WRT?

CRT Display of the MAT

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)

1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB3: DP/PB 12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal via Dterm14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data Terminal via Data Module18: Virtual Line Appearance

19-22: Not used23: ISDN Terminal

24-31: Not usedRSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)

RSCs are assigned in the ARSC com-mand.

SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)SFCs are assigned in the ASFCcommand.

Meanings and Values of Parameters


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

next pa-

apply

screen.

arameters displayed,-

meters

e data,

2.2.1 Assigning New Data

Enter the data from the MAT and press ENTER. The cursor on the screen automatically moves to the rameter. Repeat this operation for all parameters.

After all necessary data has been entered, “WRT?” will display on the screen. To “Write” the data (i.e., tothe data to the switch), press “Y” and ENTER.

For example, for the ASDT command, enter the following data:TN: 1 + ENTERSTN: 3112 + ENTERLENS: 000002 + ENTERTEC: 14 + ENTERRSC: 1 + ENTERSFC: 1 + ENTER

After all the necessary data has been entered for Steps (1) through (6) above, “WRT?” displays on theConfirm that the data is correct, then press “Y”. If an error in data entry has been found, press “N” and correctthe data.

2.2.2 Displaying or Changing Data

To display the data, enter the same value as that of the data already assigned. If the values for certain phave been entered, the subsequent parameters are automatically displayed. When all the data has been“DEL?” appears on the screen. To delete the data, press “Y” and ENTER. To keep the data, press “N” and ENTER.

For example, when the existing values for TN and STN for ASDT are entered, all subsequent paraand their assigned values are automatically displayed.After the last parameter, “DEL?” is displayed. To delete the data, press “Y” and ENTER. To keep thpress “N” and ENTER.


COMMANDS

mmand.meters in entered.

ntering

2.2.3 Cautions Pertaining to Entry Procedure

• The parameters to be displayed on the screen of the MAT are not always the same for any specific coFor some commands, parameters that have already been entered may be replaced with other parathe course of data entry operations. The parameters to be displayed may differ according to the data(See the example in Figure 2-3.)

• The data values shown in “(5) Entry Procedure” are examples only; they should not be used when edata for your system.

Figure 2-3 Example of Entry Procedure (ASHP)

Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot

TN:1 STN:3221 SECRETARY: 3200 CNT:2 2 STN:3222

Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot

TN: 1 STN:3221 SECRETARY: 3200 SECRETARY STN:3111 WRT?

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number (The station number of the

Pilot Station.) SECRETARY: Indication of Secretary StatioPHANTOM: Indication of Phantom Station (Enter 0.)0: No AssignmentCNT: Number of stations to be entered.

(Recommend Max. 20 stations)

SECRETARY STN: Station Number of the Secretary Station

• To assign a Station Hunting-Terminal Group with a Secretary Station but no Phantom Number:

(a) Enter all STNs in the Hunting Group.

(b) Assign Secretary Station.


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

3. ERROR CODE LIST

Table 2-1 General Errors

ERROR No. MEANING

000F The communication line is bad. (Transfer Error)

0010 This command is aborted. (Return to Menu)

0011 The command is being used at another terminal, or you must re-enter a password.

0012 The data entered cannot be used in this system.

0013 The data entered has already been used. (Double Assignment)

0014 Data input/output format is incorrect.

0015 The data entered is not the data of the same group.

0016 The data entered is over the number that can be assigned.

0017 The data stored in the external memory cannot be read out.

0018 The data cannot be written into memory.

0019 The pattern data is all zeros. (ATCP command)

001B Transfer (LP-PM) Error.

001C MAT access denied for software protection.

001D SP-SM, O&M BUS transfer error.

001E One MP’s DM is different from another.

001F Bus transfer error. (Processor < --- > Processor)

0020 Cannot be used, because this command is not in this system.

3XXX Data cannot write into DM





COMMANDS

Table 2-2 System Control Errors

ERROR No. MEANING

0101 Unit is not yet mounted.

0102 Group mounting error. (Unmounted or unmatched).

0103 Inserted package location is incorrect.

0104 DM segment is not set in system data.

0105 The unit cannot be deleted because data exists.

0106 The SM cannot be deleted because SMINT data exists.

0107 Designated Processor is not yet mounted.

Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors

ERROR No. MEANING

0201 Station/Trunk is not assigned yet.

0202 Station/Trunk is already assigned.

0203 LENS is not assigned yet.

0204 LENS is already assigned.

0205 Numbering Plan mismatch.

0206 Number Group mismatch.

0207 Station cannot be used as the opposite party of the hot line.

0208 Designated LENS is already assigned as SMINT.

0209 This data can not be assigned. STN must be assigned as a Dterm (TEC = 12).

0210 Pickup Group is already assigned.

0211 Hunting Group is already assigned.

0212 Pickup Group is not assigned yet.

0213 Hunting Group is not assigned yet.

0214 This station dies not belong to a UCD Group.

0215 Hunting Group assignment is not allowed.

0216 Overflow of UCD assignment number. (MAX. OF 7 UCD Groups)

0217 Secretary hunt station cannot be deleted.

0218 This station does not belong to the Pilot hunt group.

0219 This station does not belong to the Circular hunt group.


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

0220 The LEN assignment for the ATT-CON is not correct.

0221 The data cannot be assigned because the station is in the same UCD Group.

0222 The station is not the first in the UCD Group.

0223 Designated port is already assigned as a Hot Line.

0224 Designated port is already assigned as a Nailed Down Connection.

0225 Outside Trunk Class (ARTD) has not been assigned for this route.

0226 Assignment error of DTE attribute data-2.

0227 DTE Attribute data-2 not assignable for other then DM/DA (terminal equipment)

0228 The designated Station is not assigned to the same MG Number.

0229 Mismatch of designated Signaling Station of Intercom Station Group.

0230 Deletion is not allowed. (Busy)

0231 Station cannot be deleted because it is a secretary station.

0232 Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station.

0233 Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station.

0234 Signaling Station Data is not assigned yet.

0235 The My-Line has not yet been assigned.

0236 The Prime-Line has not yet been assigned.

0237 FKY 49 can only be assigned on keys 1-16.

0238 Mismatch of LP Number of My Line/Master station.

0239 Attribute data-1 not assigned yet.

0240 Station cannot be assigned. (Double assignment)

0241 LDN cannot be assigned. (Double assignment)

0242 Phantom station cannot be assigned. (Double assignment)

0243 Phantom station cannot be assigned. (Five phantom numbers have been assigned.)

0245 An Attendant console has not been assigned yet.

0250 Telephone class is not correct.

0251 Deletion is not allowed because UCD Announcement Data has been assigned.

0255 Speed calling service is not provided.

0260 The data entered is over the number of the group that can be assigned.

Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors (Continued)

ERROR No. MEANING


COMMANDS

0261 Abbreviated digit code (ADC) is not assigned yet.

0262 Auto/Manual/Dial Intercom group not assigned yet.

0263 Dial Intercom group not assigned yet.

Table 2-4 Restriction Data Errors

ERROR No. MEANING

0300 There is NO SMDR service.

0301 SMDR data write error.

0302 SMDR data read error.

0303 SMDR sorting error.

0401 Digit Code request exists.

0402 Numbering Plan has been read out which cannot be processed.

0403Mismatch of Digit Code Input Number of Digits.(Input No. of Digits Internally Developed)

0404 Enter Outside Route Number in Route Data.

0405 Enter 1 digit as the Digit Code.

0406 Enter 3 digits, 6 digits as the Digit Code.

0407 Restriction Data input error.

0408 Enter TDI = 3 only, because other data is not assigned yet.

0410 RRI/RES is not correct.

0411 Line Signal Processing Read error.

0412 Data is outside the processing range.

0415 Unit not mounted.

0416 The LSG in route class data corresponding to the LENS is inconsistent.

0417 The PC does not correspond to the LENS.

0418 Number of digit are shortage or over/input code is illegal.

Table 2-3 Station/Trunk Data Errors (Continued)

ERROR No. MEANING


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

Table 2-5 Administration, Measurement Errors

ERROR No. MEANING

0501 Timer value write error.

0510 ACT No. cannot be read out.

0511 CPU system change is not allowed.

0512 TDSW output system change is not allowed.

0513 TDSW CLOCK system change is not allowed.

0514 System change has failed.

0515 INT card is defective.

0516 DRAM copy is no good.

0517 CRAM copy is no good.

0518 CPU system change has failed. (1)



0521 Periodic Diagnosis Program is being called.

0522 TDSW OUTPUT ST-BY- ACT change has failed.

0523 TDSW OUTPUT ACT- ST-BY change has failed.

0524 TDSW0 CLOCK output is abnormal.

0525 TDSW1 CLOCK output is abnormal.

0526 TDSW0, 1 CLOCK output is abnormal.

0527 Another memory is being tested.

0528 MP has only a single system (Side-0 only).

0529 The CPU is performing another task.

0530 The circuit card or processor is not mounted or in MB.

0531 SP in ACT cannot be set MB.

0532 The issue data of main memory or port microprocessor cannot be read.

0533 Cannot be made idle because MB Switch was used to make busy.

0534 Standby LP access has been disabled.

0535 The PBUS is not mounted or is in MB state.

0536 All PBUS cannot be made busy.


COMMANDS

0537 Cannot be set to a MB state since another CSP is not available.

0539 Lamp control impossible. (Specified LENS is not assigned to the station.)

0540 CPU operation mode read failure.

0541 Operating mode change failure (Not allow hardware MB).

0542 CPU mode change memory write failure.

0543 The standby CPU PKG is not mounted.

0544 The standby CPU PKG is in a MB state.

0545 The standby COPY PKG is in a MB state.

0546 Standby COPY PKG SRQ key on.

0547 Act COPY PKG SRQ key on.

0550 Password service bit cannot be assigned because password code is not yet assigned.

0551 Entered password code is not assigned in Grade-2.

0552 Cannot be deleted because password is in service.

0553 This data is inhabited except in the APSW command.

0554 This data can only be assigned by using the “AIOC” command.

0560 Trunk Test Data not assigned yet.

0600 Designated SMPN is already assigned.

0601 Designated KOSM and NOSM are already assigned.

0602 The last MB order is being executed.

0603 Designated SM is not assigned yet.

0610 Service Module Memory Read Error.

0611 Service Module Memory Write Error.

0615 Tenant of ACD not assigned yet.

0616 Control agent position not assigned yet.

0617 Incoming destination split data not assigned yet.

0618 Split data not assigned yet.

0619 Cannot be deleted because ACD position data already assigned.

0620 The ACD System configuration data was not sent to MIS.

0700 Route class data cannot be deleted because trunk data assignment exists.

Table 2-5 Administration, Measurement Errors (Continued)

ERROR No. MEANING


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

0701 The designated data is not assigned.

0800 HFC/IOC Status is not read.

0801 HFC/IOC Faulty processing.

0802 Cannot be set MB status using HFC/IOC at HFC/IOC MB set.

0803 The designated HFC/IOC is not mounted.

0804 HFC/IOC Operation mode read failure.

0805 HFC/IOC mode change memory write failure.

0806 HFC/IOC mode change failure.

0807 HFC/IOC MB set/cancel memory write failure.

0808 HFC/IOC MB set/cancel failure.

0809 The designated HFC/IOC is not in an ACT state.

0810 Standby memory read failure.

0811 Standby memory reset failure.

0812 Standby memory write failure.

0813 Program load error.

0814 Cannot set HFC/IOC mode because CPU mode is COPY mode.

0815 Date format error of HFC.

0816 Request order error of HFC.

0817 HFC internal error (file).

0818 System management file does not exist on HFC.

0819 FD does not exist in the HFC.

081A HFC select error.

081B The selected HFC is busy.

081C The selected HFC is not mounted or fault processing.

081D Selected HFC data transfer error.

081E Selected HFC response time out.

081F Signaling cable error on HFC.

0820 HFC error (other).

0821 The Received data is abnormal.


ERROR No. MEANING


COMMANDS

A00F The communication line is bad (Disconnected error).

A10F The communication line is bad (Parity error).

A20F The communication line is bad (Sent error).

A30F The communication line is bad (Received error).

Table 2-6 Hotel/Motel System Errors

ERROR No. MEANING

0350 System is not Hotel; cannot be used

0351 Cannot be used for Hotel System

0352 TEC and station not for Administration

0353 TEC and station not for Guest Room

0354 Restriction Data check failure

0355 No Floor Service

0356 Being used by Guest Service Telephone

0357 Being used by Suite Room Group

0358 Station cannot be used as the opposite party of the One touch.


ERROR No. MEANING


Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

e com-in chap-

4. COMMANDS

The table below lists ICS commands, their associated floppy disk (FD), and the systems in which thesmands can or cannot be used (CCIS, ACD, Business, Hotel/Motel). Hotel only commands are detailed ters 3 and 5 of this manual. For ACD specific commands, please refer to the ACD System Manual.

See the Table of Contents for page numbers where these commands are described in the manual.

COMMAND FULL COMMAND NAME FD NAMESYSTEM

CCIS ACD BUS H/M

AABD Assignment of ACC Restriction Data CM0-03 × ×

AACL Administration Station Class Change CM3-01 – ×

AADC Assignment of Additional Digit Translation CM0-02 × ×

AAEDAssignment of Announcement Equipment Data CM0-02,

CM3-02× ×

AAKP Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position CM0-01 × –

AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data CM0-04 × ×

AANI Assignment of ANI Data CM0-04 × ×

AANP Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data CM3-01 – ×

AARP Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data CM0-02 × ×

AARS Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data CM0-04 × ×

AASN Administration Station Number Change CM3-01 – ×

AASP Assignment of Administration Special Access Code CM3-01 – ×

AAST Assignment of Administration Station Data CM3-01 – ×

AATC Assignment of Authorization Code Data CM0-02 × ×

AATM Assignment of ATM Module Data CM0-10 × –

ACBC Assignment of Call by Call Service CM0-09 × ×

ACDD Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial In Service CM0-04 × ×

ACDNAssignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing

CM0-03 × ×

ACFO Assignment of Call Forwarding Data CM0-02 × ×

ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class CM0-02 × ×

Note: ×: Command can be used–: Command cannot be used


COMMANDS

ACFS Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data CM0-04 × ×

ACIC Assignment of CIC Code Data CM0-08 × × ×

ACID Assignment of Caller ID Data CM0-10 × ×

ACMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override CM0-02 × ×

ACND Assignment of Calling Number Data CM0-09 × ×

ACNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data CM0-09 × ×

ACOC Assignment of Central Office Code CM0-01 × ×

ACPE Assignment of Call Pickup expand Group Data CM0-11 × ×

ACPG Assignment of Call Pickup Group CM0-01 × ×

ACSA Assignment of Connection Service Index A CM0-02 × ×

ACSC Assignment of CSC Data CM0-08 × × ×

ACSI Assignment of Connection Service Index CM0-02 × ×

ADA1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1 CM0-02 × ×

ADA2 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2 CM0-03 × ×

ADIM Assignment of Dial Intercom Data CM0-03 × ×

ADLI Assignment DLINT Package CM3-02 – ×

ADNR Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction CM3-02 – ×

ADPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data CM0-08 × × ×

ADSS Assignment of Direct Station Select Data CM3-02 – ×

AEFR Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction CM0-02 × ×

AEKD Assignment of External Key Data CM0-02 × ×

AEVTAssignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS

CM0-11 × ×

AFCDAssignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed-Down Connection) Data

CM0-03 × ×

AFCP Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number CM0-09 × ×

AFRS Assignment of Flexible Route Selection CM0-02 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

AFXCAssignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System

CM3-02 – ×

AGCL Guest Station Class Change CM3-01 – ×

AGNP Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data CM3-01 – ×

AGSN Guest Station Number CM3-01 – ×

AGSP Assignment of Guest Special Access Code CM3-01 –×

AGST Assignment of Guest Station Data CM3-01 – ×

AHKP Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern CM3-02 – ×

AHLS Assignment of Hot Line Station CM0-02 × ×

AHMS Assignment of Hold Music Data CM0-04 × ×

AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data CM0-04 × ×

AHSU Assignment of Suite Room Station CM3-02 – ×

AHSY Assignment of Hotel System Parameter CM3-01 – ×

AICD Assignment of Intercom Data CM0-03 × ×

AIDD Assignment of User ID Data CM0-13 × ×

AIOC Assignment of IOC Port Data CM0-03 × ×

AISA Assignment of Individual Speed Calling CM0-02 × ×

AISD Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data CM0-04 × ×

AISP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern CM0-02 × ×

AIZP Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data CM0-11 × –

AKYD Assignment of Key Data for Dterm CM0-01 × × ×

ALDN Assignment of Listed Directory Number CM0-01 × ×

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control SYS × ×

ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data CM0-11 × ×

ALPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion CM0-04 × ×

AMAT Assignment of Master Attendant Data CM0-01 × ×

AMDD Assignment of MODEM Data CM0-01 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



COMMANDS

AMND Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits CM0-01 × ×

ANCD Assignment of Night Connection Data CM0-02 × ×

ANDD Assignment of Name Display Data CM0-04 × ×

ANND Assignment of Necessary Digits Data CM0-01 × ×

ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan Data CM0-01 × –

AOFC Assignment of Office Name CM0-11 × ×

AOPR Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing CM0-02 × ×

AOSP Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern CM0-02 × ×

APAD Assignment of PAD Data CM0-02 × ×

APCR Assignment of Primary Call Restriction CM0-02 × ×

APHN Assignment of Phantom Station Number CM0-02 × ×

APSW Assignment of Password Data CM0-03 × ×

ARAC Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code CM0-01 × ×

ARDN Assignment of Remote Control Day/Night CM0-08 × × ×

ARNP Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data CM0-01 × ×

ARPCAssignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service

CM0-08 × × ×

ARRCAssignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data

CM0-02 × ×

ARSC Assignment of Route Restriction Class CM0-02 × ×

ARTD Assignment of Route Class Data CM0-01 × ×

ARTE Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data CM0-04 × ×

ARTI Assignment of Trunk Application Data CM0-09 × ×

ASAT Assignment of Specific Attendant Number CM0-01 × ×

ASCL Assignment of Station Class Data CM0-01 × –

ASCR Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction CM3-02 – ×

ASDC Assignment of Six Digits Least-Cost Routing CM0-02 × ×

ASDT Assignment of Station Data CM0-01 × × –


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

ASFC Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class CM0-02 × ×

ASGD Assignment of Special Group CM0-02 × ×

ASHC Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular CM0-01 × ×

ASHP Assignment of Station Hunting-Pilot CM0-01 × ×

ASHU Assignment of Station Hunting-UCD CM0-01 × ×

ASID Assignment of Special Incoming CM0-02 × ×

ASLU Assignment of Slumber Time Data CM0-04 × ×

ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code CM0-01 × –

ASPD Assignment of Speed Calling Code CM0-02 × ×

ASPF Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data CM3-01 –×

ASPS Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number CM3-01 –×

ASTD Assignment of State Translation Data CM0-03 × ×

ASTN Assignment of Station Number CM0-01 × –

ASTP Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern CM0-02 × ×

ASYD Assignment of System Data CM0-03 × ×

ATAS Assignment of TAS Service Data CM0-02 × ×

ATCC Assignment of Terminal Configuration CM0-03 × ×

ATCP Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information CM0-02 × ×

ATCR Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction CM3-02 – ×

ATDP Assignment of Toll Code Restriction CM0-02 × ×

ATGL Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp CM0-02 × ×

ATIM Assignment of Date and Time SYS × ×

ATMD Assignment of Timing Data CM0-11 × ×

ATNR Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class CM0-02 × ×

ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order CM0-03 × ×

ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data CM0-01 × ×

ATTD Assignment of Trunk Test Data CM0-03 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



COMMANDS

AUAD Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data CM0-03 × ×

AUCD Assignment of UCD Control Data CM0-04 × ×

AUNE Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN CM0-01 × ×

AUNT Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data CM0-03 × ×

AUOG Assignment of UCD Overflow Group CM0-01 × ×

AVTC Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data CM0-09 × ×

AVTL Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data CM0-09 × ×

AVTM Assignment of Virtual Tie Line CM0-09 × ×

BAID Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only] SYS × ×

BKUP Kinds of Memory Backup SYS × ×

BKUPI Kinds of Memory Backup CM0-10 × ×

BOSD Back Up of One-Touch Call Memory Data CM0-04 × ×

CARRContinuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction

CM0-04 × ×

CASD Continuous Assignment of Station Data CM0-11 × –

CATK Continuous Assignement of Trunk Data CM0-11 × ×

CCSE Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment CM0-08× × ×

CDSD Continuous Deletion of Station Data CM0-11 × –

CMOD Change of System Mode SYS × ×

CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp CM0-03 × ×

CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs CM0-03 × ×

CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class CM0-11 × –

CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number CM0-11 × –

CTDK Connection of Test-Desk and LTST CM0-03 × ×

DCON Display of Connection Status CM0-03 × ×

DDA1 Display of DTE Attribute Data-1 CM0-03 × ×

DDA2 Display of DTE Attribute Data-2 CM0-02 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

DFSN Display File Serial Number CM0-04 × ×

DFTD Display of System Message with Details SYS × ×

DHDF Display of File Information [for Engineering use only] CM0-10

DISS Display of Program Issue CM0-03 × ×

DLEN Display of LENS Data CM0-01 × ×

DLSL Display of Lock Out Station-LENS CM0-03 × ×

DLSS Display of Lock Out Station-Number CM0-03 × ×

DMBL Display of Make Busy LENS Data CM0-03 × ×

DMBS Display of Make Busy Station CM0-03 × ×

DMBT Display of Make Busy Trunk CM0-03 × ×

DOSD Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory CM0-04 × ×

DPKG Display Setting on Port Package CM0-11 × ×

DPSW Display Package Switch CM0-11 × ×

DSTN Display of Station Data CM0-01 × ×

DTF1 Display of Traffic Data CM0-03 × ×

DTF2 Display of Traffic Data CM0-03 × ×

DTF3 Display of Traffic Data 3 CM0-03 × ×

HISS Display of Hotel Program Issue CM3-02 – ×

HMBU Hotel System Main Memory Backup CM3-02 – ×

INST System Install SYS × ×

INSTI System Install CM0-10 × ×

LABD ACC Restriction Data List CM0-06 × ×

LAKP Attendant Key Information Data List CM0-05 × –

LAND Automatic Number Identification Data List CM0-06 × ×

LANI ANI Data List CM0-06 × ×

LANP Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List CM3-03 – ×

LARP Area Code Restriction Data List CM0-06 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



COMMANDS

LASP Administration Special Access Code Data List CM3-03 – ×

LATC Authorization Code Data List CM0-05 × ×

LCBC Call by Call Service Data List CM0-09 × ×

LCCD Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List CM0-06

LCDN Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List CM0-06 × ×

LCEG List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data CM0-11 × ×

LCEL List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data CM0-11 × ×

LCFC Call Forwarding, Connection Service Index Data List CM0-05 × ×

LCFS Call Forwarding Station Data List CM0-04 × ×

LCIC CIC Data List CM0-08 × × ×

LCID Caller ID Data List CM0-08 × ×

LCMO Clock Manual Override Data List CM0-06 × ×

LCND Calling Number Data List CM0-09 × ×

LCNP Calling Number Pattern Data List CM0-09 × ×

LCOC Central Office Code Data List CM0-05 × ×

LCPG Call Pickup Group Data List CM0-05 × ×

LCPL Call Pickup Group Data List CM0-05 × ×

LCSA Connection Service Index Data List CM0-05 × ×

LCSC CSC Data List CM0-08 × ×

LDA1 DTE Attribute Data-1 List CM0-06 × ×

LDA2 DTE Attribute Data-2 List CM0-06 × ×

LDID Dial In Service Data List CM0-06 × ×

LDIM Dial Intercom Data List CM0-06 × ×

LDNI Day/Night Information List CM0-04

LDNR Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03 – ×

LDPC Determinate Point Code Data List CM0-08 × × ×

LDSS Direct Station Select Data List CM3-03 – ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

LEFR EPN Facility Restriction Data List CM0-06 × ×

LEKD External Key Data List CM0-05 × ×

LEVT List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS CM0-09 × ×

LFCD Fixed Connection (Nail-Down Connection) Data List CM0-06 × ×

LFCP Call Forwarding by Calling Service List CM0-09 × ×

LFRS Flexible Route Selection Data List CM0-06 × ×

LFXC Fixed Connection (Nail-Down Connection) Data CM3-03 – ×

LGNP Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List CM3-03 – ×

LGSP Guest Special Access Code List CM3-03 – ×

LHEN LENS Data List CM3-03 – ×

LHKP Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List CM3-03 – ×

LHLS Hot line Data List CM0-05 × ×

LHMS Hold Music Data List CM0-06 × ×

LHMS2 Hold Music Data List CM0-06 × ×

LHST Station Data (Numbering Group) List CM3-03 – ×

LHSU Suite Room Data List CM3-03 – ×

LHSY Hotel System Parameter List CM3-03 – ×

LICD Intercom Data List CM0-06 × ×

LIZP List Up of Internal Zone Paging Data CM0-11 × −

LKYD Key Data for Dterm List CM0-05 × ×

LLEN LENS Data List CM0-05 × –

LLMG Alarm Grade Data List CM0-11 × ×

LLPE Line Privacy Expansion Data List CM0-06 × ×

LMAT Master Attendant Data List CM0-05 × ×

LMDD MODEM Data List CM0-05 × ×

LNDD Name Display Data List CM0-06 × ×

LNND Necessary Digit Data List CM0-05 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



COMMANDS

LNPD Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List CM0-05 × –

LNPT Numbering Data List for PTT Network CM0-06

LOPROutgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List

CM0-06 × ×

LOSD List Up of One Touch Speed Call Memory Data CM0-04 × ×

LPAE Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List CM0-05 × ×

LPAT PAD Data Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List CM0-05 × ×

LPCR Primary Call Restriction Data List CM0-06 × ×

LPRO Processor Occupancy List CM0-11

LRAC Remote PBX Access Code Data List CM0-05 × ×

LRCFList Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List

CM0-05 × ×

LRDN Remote Control Day/Night List CM0-08 × × ×

LREF Reference Number Information Data List CM0-09

LRNP Reverse Numbering Plan Data List CM0-05 × ×

LRPC List Up of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service CM0-08× × ×

LRTCRoute/Service Feature Class/Tenant Restriction Data List

CM0-05 × ×

LRTD Route Class Data List CM0-05 × ×

LRTE Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data CM0-06 × ×

LRTI Trunk Application Data List CM0-09 × ×

LSAT Specific Attendant Number Data List CM0-05 × ×

LSCR Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03 – ×

LSDA Speed Calling Data List CM0-05 × ×

LSDC Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List CM0-06 × ×

LSGD Special Group List CM0-06 × ×

LSHG Station Hunting UCD Data List CM0-05 × ×

LSHL Station Hunting UCD Data List CM0-05 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



Revision 4.0

COMMANDS

LSID Special Incoming List CM0-06 × ×

LSLP Selection Translation Pattern List CM0-06 × ×

LSLU Slumber Time Data List CM0-04 ×

LSMD Service Module Data List CM0-06 ×

LSPF Special Access Code Floor Data List CM3-03 – ×

LSPS Same Number Special Access Code Data List CM3-03 –×

LSTN Station Data (Number Group) List CM0-05 × –

LSYD System/Unit/Status Data List CM0-05 × ×

LTAS TAS Service Data List CM0-05 × ×

LTCP Time/Pattern Information Data List CM0-06 × ×

LTCR TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03 – ×

LTDP Toll Code Restriction Data List CM0-05 × ×

LTRK Trunk Data List CM0-05 × ×

LUAD UCD Delayed Announcement Data List CM0-06 × ×

LUCD UCD Control Data List CM0-06 × ×

LUNE Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List CM0-06 × ×

LVTC Virtual Tie Line Call Data List CM0-09 × ×

LVTL Virtual Tie Line Data List CM0-09 × ×

MBBS Make Busy of Processor Bus CM0-03 × ×

MBLE Make Busy of LENS CM0-01 × ×

MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor CM0-03 × ×

MBRT Make Busy of Route CM0-04 × ×

MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout CM0-03 × ×

MBST Make Busy of Station CM0-01 × ×

MBTC Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous CM0-04

MBTK Make Busy of Trunk CM0-01 × ×

MMNF Make Menu File CM0-11


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



COMMANDS

NDBU Name Display Data Backup CM0-04 × ×

PMBUPort Microprocessor Memory Back Up [for Engineering use only]

CM0-11 × ×

RALM Release Alarm SYS × ×

RAST Remove Administration Station Data CM3-01 – ×

RGST Remove Guest Station Data CM3-01 – ×

RHSU Remove Suite Room Station CM3-02 – ×

RLST Release Station/Trunk CM0-03 × ×

RVTL Remove Virtual Tie Line Data CM0-09 × ×

SINZ System Initialize SYS × ×

SPTS Scanning of Port Status CM0-11 × ×

SRTS Scanning of Route Status CM0-11 × ×

TDBU Traffic Data Back Up CM0-03 × ×

TSTL Test Station Line CM0-03 × ×

TTLC Test Trunk Line Connection CM0-03 × ×

XATM X-ray ATM Module Diagnosis CM0-10 × ×

XHFC X-ray HFC CM0-10 × ×

XHFD X-ray HD or FDD CM0-10 × ×


CCIS ACD BUS H/M



Revision 4.0

AABDCM0-03Business, Hotel

ice Fea-.

C).

its can

siness, tel

AABD Assignment of ACC Restriction Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-03

2. Function

This command is used to assign and display Speed Calling Restriction Data, which is added to the Servture Class of an individual station assigned for Speed Calling, in order to restrict it from originating calls

3. Precautions

• This command assigns Speed Calling Restriction Data to each station’s Service Feature Class (SF

• The Abbreviated Digit Codes (ADC) must already be assigned in the ASPD command.

Note: Speed Calling Override Service must be assigned (ASYD, SYS2, Index 1, b6=1).

4. Related Reference Command

List up: LABD

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number ADC: Speed Calling Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) RES: Restriction Data

0: Restricted1: Allowed

Note 1: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of three (3) digbe assigned.

TN:1 ADC:123

SFC:X RES:0

WRT?The SFC automatically displays.


AADC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

n Num-

igned in

refore

siness, tel

AADC Assignment of Additional Digit Translation


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display additional digit information pertaining to the Patterber Location designated in the AOPR command.

3. Precautions

Before using this command, it must be confirmed that a Pattern Number Location (PNL) has been assthe AOPR (Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing) command.


List up: LOPR

5. Entry Procedure

PNL: Pattern Number Location (1-255)(Option 1-999)

DC: Additional Digit Information Max. 4 digits Note 1 (If PNL < 128)Max. 24 digits Note 2 (If PNL > 127)(Option Max. 24 Digits PNL: 1-999)

Note: If additional digits are required (1-4) data is assigned by software in PNL tables 1-127.

Note: If additional digits are required (1-24) data is assigned by software in PNL tables 128-255. Thewhen additional digits are required from 5-24, assign PNL 128-255.

Assignment of Additional Digit Translation

PNL:1

DC:100

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AAEDCM0-02/CM3-02Business, Hotel

ent, on

ed (Lan-

ssigned

guage

siness, tel

AAED Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data

1. Floppy Disk Name: CM0-02/CM3-02

CM0-02 (Business System) CM3-02 (Hotel System)

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display trunk information related to Announcement Equipma tenant basis.

For the Hotel system it is also possible to assign Language Class when Language Service is employguage Service is a function of the Property Management System (PMS))

3. Precautions

• When the Announcement Equipment is to be used as a general announcement trunk, “0” must be afor parameters C, R, A, and M.

• This command is not necessary if the announcement device terminates at a station.

• Parameter “LANG” is displayed and data can be entered when ASYD SYSl, INDEX 161, b2 = 1 (LanService is provided).

• When assigning the announcement equipment (EQP = 15) for Alert Service, enter “1” to parameter “M”.Enter the “0” to the Parameter “LANG” when the Language Service is Provided.


List up: LPAE

-Parameter RT-Assignment: ARTDDisplay: ARTD List up: LRTD

-Parameter TK-Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLENList up: LTRK, LLEN

LHEN


AAED CM0-02/CM3-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For a single connection:

TN: Tenant Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number

0: Dead Level Number 1: Unused Number (Not used in Hotel System)2: Remote Access to PBX3: May be used for other purposes4: Outgoing Trunk Busy Announcement5-6: May be used for other purposes7: Route Restriction Announcement8-14: May be used for other purposes 15: Alert Service (for Hotel system)16: Timed Reminder Set Message (for Business system)

Wake Up Call Set (for Hotel system)17: Service Set-up Failure Message (for Hotel system)18: Timed Reminder Service Cancel Message (for Business system)

Wake Up Call Reset (for Hotel system)19: Service Cancel Failure Message (for Hotel system)20: Room Cut-Off Announcement (for Hotel system)21: Do Not Disturb Announcement (for Hotel system)22: Timed Reminder/Wake Up Call Message for Announcement Trunk23-31: Group Announcement (for Hotel system)32: Delay Announcement-Attendant 33: Not used34: Automated Attendant (lst Announcement)35: Automated Attendant (2nd Announcement)36: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 1) 37: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 2) 38: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 3) 39: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 4) 40: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 5)41: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 6)42: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 7)

Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data

TN:1 EQP:0 LANG:0 C:0 R:0 A:0 M:0

RT:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0


e.

s.

43-48: Not used49-53: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 1st announcement)54-58: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 2nd announcement)59-121: Not used122-125: Multiple Announcement126-127: Not used

LANG: Language Class (for Hotel system) 0: Common (Language to be designated for each guest individually) 1: Japanese2: English3: German 4: French5: Spanish6: Chinese7: Russian8-15: Spare designations to be used for languages other than those listed abov

C: Duration of Connection0/1: Disconnect in 30 seconds./The connection is held until the station release

R: Sending RBT (Ring Back Tone)0/1: Send RBT/Do not send RBT

A: Send Answer Signal0/1: Do not send Answer Signal/Send Answer Signal

M: Multiple Connection (Enter 0)0: Single connection (TK is not needed for a single connection.)

RT: Route Number


AAED CM0-02/CM3-02Business, Hotel

• For a multiple connection:

TN: Tenant Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number:

0: Dead Level Number 1: Unused Number (Not used in Hotel System)2: Remote Access to PBX3: May be used for other purposes4: Outgoing Trunk Busy-Announcement5-6: May be used for other purposes7: Route Restriction Announcement8-14: May be used for other purposes15: Alert Service (for Hotel system)16: Timed Reminder Set Message (for Business system)

Wake Up Call Set (for Hotel system)17: Service Set-up Failure Message (for Hotel system)18: Timed Reminder Service Cancel Message (for Business system)

Wake Up Call Reset (for Hotel system)19: Service Cancel Failure Message (for Hotel system)20: Room Cut-Off Announcement (for Hotel system)21: Do Not Disturb Announcement (for Hotel system)22: Wake Up Call Message for Announcement Trunk (for Hotel system)23-31: Group Announcement (for Hotel system)32: Delay Announcement-Attendant 33: Not used34: Automated Attendant (lst Announcement)35: Automated Attendant (2nd Announcement)36: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 1) 37: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 2) 38: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 3) 39: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 4)40: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 5)41: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 6)

Assignment of Announcement Equipment Data

TN:1 EQP:0 LANG:0

C:0 R:0 A:0 M:1

RT:1 TK:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0


e.

.

42: Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb (for Slumber Time Group 7) 43-48: Not used49-53: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 1st announcement)54-58: Delay Announcement - Attendant (for the 2nd announcement)59-121: Not used122-125: Multiple Announcement126-127: Not used

LANG: Language Class (for Hotel system) 0: Common (Language to be designated for each guest individually) 1: Japanese 2: English3: German 4: French 5: Spanish6: Chinese7: Russian8-15: Spare designations to be used for languages other than those listed abov

C: Duration of Connection0/1: Disconnect in 30 seconds/The connection is held until the station releases

R: Sending RBT (Ring Back Tone)0/1: Send RBT/Do not send RBT

A: Send Answer Signal:0/1: Do not send Answer Signal/Send Answer Signal

M: Multiple Connection (Enter 1)1: Multiple connection

RT: Route Number TK: Number of the trunk connected to the Announcement Equipment.


AAKP CM0-01

Business

swer-

exes 8

nd.

NDEX

siness
AAKP Assignment of Attendant Console Key Position

2. Function

This command is used to set the functions of the top row of ICI (Incoming Call Identification) keys for aning incoming calls at the Attendant Console.

3. Precautions

• This command is used for Business System only.

• This command can be executed under one of the following conditions.

a. The ATI circuit card is not mounted.

b. The ATT has been made busy by means of the MB switch on the ATI circuit card.

c. The DAY/NIGHT key on the ATT is set to the NIGHT position.

• When the location of keys has been changed, the number of waiting call display (ASYD, SYS2, Indand 9) becomes invalid.

• The attendant console number (ATN) is the number assigned at TK parameter of the ATRK comma

• The maximum number of Attendant Consoles should be assigned by the ASYD command, SYS 1, I9.


Revision 4.0

AAKPCM0-01Business

• The location of the keys can be set by this command is shown in below.

Desk console

ATT Key Position (Desk Console - Business)

L5

31 2

Alarm PositionAvailable

PositionBusy

Night

PositionBusy

Night

Vol

CancelL6

In this illustration, the function indicated in each ( ) is the default function, which becomes valid if no other function has been set by this command, or if the function set has been deleted. Therefore when the default function indicated in ( ) is to be used, data entry is not necessary.

6 (TIE) 5 (Busy) 4 (NANS) 1 (TF)

2 (EMG/SCB) 3 (CAS/ICPT)


AAKP CM0-01

Business

Attendant Console

ATT Key Position (Attendant Console)

00 09

80

60

40

20

STATION•STATUS

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08

8981 82 83 84 85 86 87 88

6961 62 63 64 65 66 67 68

4941 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

2921 22 23 24 25 26 27 28

AM PM ADJUST

TIME

STATION / TRUNK NUMBER

ANS

HOLD

ATND

BUSY

RING

L1

KEY NUMBER

1

L2 L3 L4 L5 L6

(TF) (SCB) (ICPT) (NANS) (BUSY) (TIE)

RCL ATND LDN

65432

2ABC

1 3DEF

5JKL

6MNO

4GHI

8TUV

9WXY

7PRS

0P #ER

O

MNALM NIGHT CW SRC

MJALM PB DES

H M


Revision 4.0

AAKPCM0-01Business


List up: LAKP

-Parameter ATN- Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN

5. Entry Procedure

ATN: Attendant NumberKYN: Key Number (1-6)FUNC: FUNCTION CODE (1-16)

1: CAS Line2: Off-Hook Alarm3: Priority Call 1 4: Priority Call 2 5: Priority Call 3 6-16: Not used

Assignment of ATT Key Position

ATN:1

KYN:1 FUNC:1

WRT?


AAND CM0-04

Business, Hotel

umber

the self

siness, tel

AAND Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display ANI data for the number of digits of calling station nand the office code on each route basis for the Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Service.

3. Precautions

• The route number set in parameter RT should have been designated in ARTD, ANI (CDN19) = 1.


List Up: LAND

-Parameter RT-Assignment: ARTDDisplay: ARTDList Up: LRTD

5. Entry Procedure

• Assigning the ANI data sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attendant of office [the individual ATT Number is assigned]:

a. When a uniformed number of digits is not used

RT: Route Number AT: STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0)

0: STA Outgoing CC: Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 0)

0: Main Central KT: Expansion of STA Number Length (Enter 0)

0: OFFSKIP: Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) ADD: Office Code to be Added (1-10)DC: Office Code (Max. 10 digits)

Assignment of Automatic Number Identification Data

RT: 1 AT: 0CC: 0 KT: 0SKIP:3 ADD: 3DC: 123

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AANDCM0-04Business, Hotel

dant of

b. When a uniformed number of digits is used

RT: Route NumberAT: STA Outgoing/ATT Outgoing (Enter 0)

0: STA OutgoingCC: Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 0)

0: Main CentralKT: Expansion of STA Number Length (Enter 1)

1: ON STNL: STA Number Length (1-8)SKIP: Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) ADD: Office Code to be Added (Max. 10 digits) DC: Office Code (Max. 10 digits)

• Assigning the ANI (data to be sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attenthe self office [the individual ATT Number is not assigned]:


1: ATT OutgoingDC: Office Code (Max. 10 digits)


RT: 1 AT: 0CC: 0 KT: 1STNL:5 SKIP:3 ADD: 3DC: 123

WRT?


RT: 1 AT: 1DC: 123

WRT?


AAND CM0-04

Business, Hotel

dant of
• Assigning the ANI data to be sent out when an outgoing call has been placed from a station/Attenthe satellite office:

0: STA Outgoing CC: Main Central/Satellite Central (Enter 1)

1: Satellite CentralCOC: Central Office Code (Max. 5 digits) SKIP: Call Originator Digit to be Skipped (0-10) ADD: Office Code to be Added (1-10) DC: Office Code (for the number of digits assigned to parameter ADD, Max. 10 digits)


RT: 1 AT: 0CC: 1 COC: 80 SKIP:3 ADD: 3DC: 123

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AANICM0-04Business, Hotel

r tenant

e

-

siness, tel

AANI Assignment of ANI Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display ANI (Automatic Number Identification) data sent peby the request from opposite office.

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, ASYD SYS-1 INDEX 125 b4 - b7 (Type of MFC Signaling System) should bentered.

• When toll number is not added to ANI data, enter a blank in parameter “TS” (press SPACE key and RETURN key).

• When ASYD SYS-2 INDEX 15, b2 is “1”, the following number is sent as ANI data.

a. Calling party is a station:Calling party’s station number is sent.

b. Calling party is an Attendant or tandem connection:“LDN” assigned in this command is sent.

If “0” assigned in b2, “LDN” assigned in this command is sent.


List Up: LANI

-Parameter RT-Assignment: ARTDDisplay: ARTDList Up: LRTD


AANI CM0-04

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

a. Enter the data for parameters TN through LDN.

TN: Tenant numberTS: Call number of toll (Max. 8 digits)LS: Call number of local (Max. 8 digits)LDN: Listed directory number (Max. 8 digits)

b. The display changes as follows:

DC: Digit Code

Assignment of ANI Data

TN: 1

TS: 0471 LS: 83 LDN: 0351

TN: 1DC: 0471-83-0351

WRT?

“LDN” entered in step (a)

“LS” entered in step (a)

“TS” entered in step (a)


Revision 4.0

AARPCM0-02Business, Hotel

ling is

siness, tel

AARP Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display area/office code restriction data.

3. Precautions

• The Destination (Area/Office) Code (DC) does not include the access code or the digit “1”, if 1 + diarequired.


List up: LARP

-Parameter RSC- Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSC

5. Entry Procedure

OGRT: Outgoing Route Number RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)DC: Destination (Area/Office) Code (3/6 digits) RES: Restriction Data (0/1)

0: Area/Office code is Restricted 1: Area/Office code is Allowed

Assignment of Area Code Restriction Data

OGRT:12 RSC:1 DC:976 555 RES:0

WRT?


AARS CM0-04

Business, Hotel

he exist-

siness, tel

AARS Assignment of Alternative of Route Service Data


2. Function

Various service connections between the outgoing route and the incoming route are to be restricted or ting restrictions on such service connections are to be canceled.

3. Precautions

• If data is not set, connections are to be restricted.


None

5. Entry Procedure

ICRT: Incoming Route Number OGRT: Outgoing Route Number RSV: Route Service

0: Not used1: AMP

CLS: Class DataWhen RSV = 1 0: Restriction1: OGT2: ICT

ICRT: 1 OGRT: 2RSV: 0 CLS: 0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AATCCM0-02Business, Hotel

moryng cri-

ness, Ho
AATC Assignment of Authorization Code Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the Authorization Code.

3. Precautions

• The Authorization Code is used in Remote Access to the PBX.

• When SYS-1 INDEX 19, bit 7 = 1 has been assigned by ASYD command (Using volume of Data Meat the time of assigning Authorization Code is reduced), Authorization Codes must meet the followiteria:

a. Authorization Codes must have 3 to 7 digits.

b. Authorization Codes that contain “0” from the 3rd digit to the 7th digit cannot be assigned.


List up: LATC

-Parameter SFC-Assignment: ASFC Display: ASFCList up: LRTC

-Parameter RSC-Assignment: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC

te


AATC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For changing restrictions set by the SFC and RSC:

TN: Tenant Number DC: Authorization Code (Max. 10 digits) ACR: Authorization Code Restriction (Enter 1.)

1: RestrictedSFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)

• For canceling all restrictions set by the RSC:

TN: Tenant Number DC: Authorization Code (Max. 10 digits)ACR: Authorization Code Restriction (Enter 2.)

2: Allowed

Assignment of Authorization Code Data

TN:1 DC:4444

ACR:1 RSC:0 SFC:0

WRT?

Assignment of Authorization Code Data

TN:1 DC:4444

ACR:2

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AATMCM0-10Business

ness
AATM Assignment of ATM Module Data

2. Function

This command allows assignment/change of ATM module data from the MAT of the PBX.

3. Precautions

• This command is used for Business system only.

• 6100-version software or later must be installed in the system.

• The ATM module must be connected with the PBX.

• Only the Act-side ATM module can be accessed by this command.


List up: AIOC

5. Entry Procedure

a. Designate ATM Module Number

Select the ATM Module Number using the arrow key and press ENTER.

b. Request the printout of send/received data.

Yes: Print the send/received data list.

No: View the send/received data list on the screen.

Assignment of ATM Module Data

Please choose the ATM module no. #1 #2 #3

Assignment of ATM Module Data ATM Module #X ACT : PORTX

Do you request to print out the send/receive data? Yes/No


AATM CM0-10

Business

c. Data Assignment Example

• Enter the data and press ENTER. The data is sent to the ATM Module.

Assignment of ATM Module Data ATM Module #X ACT : PORTX0000000000

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

1111111111BBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB

2222222222CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC

333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333333

DDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDDD

444444444444444444444444444444EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

EEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE

Send Information

Received Information


Revision 4.0

ACBCCM0-09Business, Hotel

R com-

ness, Ho
ACBC Assignment of Call by Call Service

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display the Call by Call Information for an ISDN Network.

3. Precautions

• Before assigning data, assign the Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR), using the AOPmand.


List up: LCBC

5. Entry Procedure

• For AT&T and Feature Access:

TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7)OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095)RA: Order of Route Advance (0-7)MD: Service Mode

0: Call by Call Service INT: National/International (0/1)

0: National Call1: International Call

NET: Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T

SERV: Feature/Service (0/1) 0: Feature

CODE: Facility Coding Value0: Transmit Network Selection 5: Operator 6: Pre-subscribed Transmit Network Operator

SCC: SCC Distinguish number (Max. 3 digits)

te

Assignment of Call by Call Service Data

TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0 MD:0

INT:0 NET:0

SERV:0 CODE:0

SCC:201

WRT?


ACBC CM0-09

Business, Hotel

• For AT&T and Service Access (WATS BAND/SDN)

TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7)OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095) RA: Order of Route Advance (0-7)MD: Service Mode


0: National 1: International

NET: Kind of Network (0/1) 0: AT&T

SERV: Feature/Service (0/1)1: Service

CODE: Facility Coding Value1: WATS BAND/SDN

BAND: WATS Band Number (0-9)SCC: SCC Distinguish Number (Max. 3 digits)



INT:0 NET:0

SERV:1 CODE:1 BAND:1

SCC:201

WRT?


Revision 4.0


• For AT&T and Service Access (MEGACOM, etc.)

TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7) OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-4095)RA: Order of Route Advance (0-7) MD: Service Mode

0: Call by Call ServiceINT: National/International (0/1)


NET: Kind of Network (0/1)0: AT&T

SERV: Feature/Service (0/1)1: Service

CODE: Facility Coding Value2: MEGACOM 8003: MEGACOM5: WATS maximal subscribed band 6: ACCUNET



INT:0 NET:0


SCC:201

WRT?


ACBC CM0-09

Business, Hotel

• For NT (Public, etc.)




NET: Kind of Network (0/1) 1: NT

SERV: Feature/Service (0/1)0: Feature

CODE: Facility Coding Value0: Public 1: Private 2: INWATS 4: FX 5: Tie Trunk8: TRD Call



INT:0 NET:1

SERV:0 CODE:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0


• For NT (OUTWATS)




NET: Kind of Network (0/1) 1: NT

SERV: Feature/Service (0/1) 0 : Feature

CODE: Facility Coding Value3: OUTWATS

BAND: WATS Band Number (0-9) (Max. digits)



INT:0 NET:1


WRT?


ACDD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

th DID

ness, Ho
ACDD Assignment of Change Digit Code for Dial in Service

2. Function

This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Change Digit Code for the ISDN line wiAddressing.

3. Precautions

• This Command is used when DID Number Conversion is necessary.

• Enter the B-Channel Route Number in parameter “RT”.


List up: LDID

5. Entry Procedure

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode

D: Day ModeN: Night Mode

RT: Route NumberDC: Digit Code (Max. 7 digits)CDC: Change Digit Code (Max. 24 digits) AD: Additional Dialing (Enter 0.)XFR: Exchange Transfer (0/1)

0: Transfer is restricted1: Transfer is allowed

te

DAY/NIGHT:D RT:10DC:24CDC:36AD:0 XFR:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ACDNCM0-03Business, Hotel

f a distant

oper-efore-

ness, Ho
ACDN Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete or display the number of digits to be added to the access code ooffice that has been assigned via the AMND command.

3. Precautions

• The “ARTD” command is to be used to assign data “1” to the parameter “CD” (CDN: 58) prior to the ation of this command. It is also necessary to assign the distant office code via “AMND” command bhand.

• As far as tenants are concerned, the same conditions apply as the “AMND” command.


List up: LCDN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number DC: Destination Code (Max. 10 digits) CDN: Number of Digits of Consecutive Dialing

te

Assignment of Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing TN: 1

DC: 23456

CDN: 7

WRT?


ACFO CM0-02

Business, Hotel

sis. Notenection.

ness, Ho
ACFO Assignment of Call Forwarding Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display various call forwarding service data, on a tenant bathat the destinations of forwarded calls can be the attendant console, a station, or an outside Night con

3. Precautions

None


List up: LCFC

5. Entry Procedure

• To designate a station as the Call Forwarding destination:

TN: Tenant NumberCF: Call Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 1-3)

1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Call Forwarding-Intercept Note

CFI: Call Forwarding Destination (Enter 2.)2: Station

STN: Station Number

Note: Including when the connection between IC call from Tie Line and the station is restricted.

te

Assignment of Call Forwarding Data

TN:1 CF:1

CFI:2

STN:3112

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ACFOCM0-02Business, Hotel

e as-

• To designate an ATT as the Call Forwarding destination:

TN: Tenant NumberCF: Call Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 1-3.)

1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Call Forwarding-Intercept4: Night Connection Outside

CFI: Call Forwarding Destination (1-2) (Enter 1.)1: Attendant Console (ATT)2: Station

• For Night Connection Outside:

TN: Tenant Number CF: Call-Forwarding service (1-4) (Enter 4.)

4: Night Connection Outside ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1

Note 1: When 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of 3 digits can bsigned.


TN:1 CF:2

CFI:1

WRT?


TN:1 CF:4

ADC:234

WRT?


ACFR CM0-02

Business, Hotel

tenant

ad

ness, Ho
ACFR Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class

2. Function

This command is used to assign and display various kinds of trunk call forwarding restriction data on abasis.

3. Precautions

• Data must be assigned to activate the feature.


List up: LRCF

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberTSFI: Transfer Service Feature Index (1-15)

1: Call Forwarding (All Calls/-Don’t Answer/-Busy Line/Unused Number/DeLevel)

2: Direct in Termination (Night only) 3: Direct in Termination (Day and Night)4: Direct Inward Dialing (DID)5: TAS6: Night ATT7: Remote Access to PBX 8-14: Not used15: CAS Line Connection (Satellite)

CCI: Call Category Index (0-15) 0: Attendant Call (Information Service Call)1: LDN2: FX

te

Assignment of Call Forwarding Restriction Class

TN:1 TSFI:1

CCI:0 RES:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ACFRCM0-02Business, Hotel

3: WATS 4: Tie Line 5: CCSA 6: Recall 7: Call Forwarding-Busy Line8: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer9: Not used 10: Special Common Battery 11: Inter-Position Transfer12: Priority Call13: Off Hook Alarm 14: CAS (Main) 15: Not used

RES: Restriction Data (0/1) 0: Transfer service is Restricted1: Transfer service is Allowed


ACFS CM0-04

Business, Hotel

Line /

rward-

ness, Ho
ACFS Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, display, and delete destinations for Call Forwarding-All Calls / BusyDon’t Answer on a per-station basis.

3. Precautions

• Parameters RCV, SRV, and CFD can be assigned when parameter FUNC = 1.

• Parameter RCV can be displayed and assigned when ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 79, b2 = 1 (Split Call Foing In Service).


List Up: LCFS

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DSTN, DLENList Up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

te


Revision 4.0

ACFSCM0-04Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• Assignment of Transfer Destination:

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberFNC: Function Number (Enter “1”)

1: Assignment RCV: Receive Kind (T/S)

T: C.O./Tie LineS: Station

SRV: Call Forwarding Kind (A/B/D)A: C.F.-All CallsB: C.F.-Busy LineD: C.F.-Don’t Answer

CFD: Call Forwarding Destination No. (Max. 12 digits)

• Display of Transfer Destination Data:

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberFNC: Function Number (Enter “2”)

2: Data Display

Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data

TN: 1 STN:2000FNC: 1RCV: T SRV: ACFD: 2001

WRT?

RCV displays when Split CallForwarding Service is performed.

Assignment of Call Forwarding Station Data

TN: 1 STN:2000FNC: 2

CF-AXXXXXCF-BXXXXXCF-DXXXXX

The transfer destination datadisplays here.


ACIC CM0-08

CCIS, Business, Hotel

hannel

r iden-

the ClC

si-

-

f two.

, Busine
ACIC Assignment of CIC Code Data

2. Function

This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the LENS (Line Equipment Number) on the basisof each PC (Determinate Point Code) and CIC (Circuit Identification Code) of the CSCG (Common CSignaling Controller Group).

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, confirm that the following assignments have already been completed.

a. LSG: 12 is assigned to the Route Class Data of the route to which the CIC concerned belongs. (By useof ARTD Command)

b. The PC of the above-mentioned route is assigned. (By use of ADPC Command)

c. The Trunk Data of the CIC concerned is assigned. (By use of ATRK Command)

• Unless the Route Number identified from the LENS entered by this command and the Route Numbetified from the PC coincide with each other, LENS cannot be assigned.

• When changing the CSCG, follow the procedure described below.

a. Enter the PC. If the CSCG Number is already assigned, it is displayed and the cursor moves toparameter position, and entry is awaited.

b. Then, make the following entry: SPACE + ENTER. (The cursor moves to the CSCG parameter potion.)

c. All Point codes in the network, with the exception of the point code of the system being programmed, must be assigned in the ACIC command.

• The number of offices on a route from the originating office and the terminating office is a maximum o


List up: LCIC

ss


Revision 4.0

ACICCM0-08CCIS, Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

PC: Determinate Point Code (1-16383)CSCG: Common Channel Signalling Controller Group Number (130-255)CIC: Circuit Identification Code Number (1-255)LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

XX X XX X

Assignment of CIC Code Data

PC:1 CSCG:130

CIC:1

LENS:000020

WRT?

Level (0-7)Group (00-23)Unit (0-3)MG (00-31)


ACID CM0-10

Business, Hotel

ich are

ness, Ho
ACID Assignment of Caller ID Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display calling number data for the following services, whavailable for I version Series 6200 software or higher:

• Call Block

• Distinctive Ringing - Caller ID

For detailed information on these services, see the System Data Design Manual.

3. Precautions

• This command is available for ISSUE 15 or higher MAT command program.

• A maximum of 12 calling numbers can be assigned to a single station.


List up: LCID

5. Entry Procedure

TYPE: 1 (Fixed)TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberCID: Calling ID Number (Max. 28 digits)SRV: Service Kind (5/6)

1-4: Not used5: Call Block6: Distinctive Ringing - Caller ID

RGP: Ringer Pattern (0, 1, 5-7)

te

Assignment of Caller ID Data

TYPE: 1TN: STN:CID:SRV:

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ACMOCM0-02Business, Hotel

g

ness, Ho
ACMO Assignment of Clocked Manual Override

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display Clocked Manual override data, which is used for changinroutes during a specific time period, such as a holiday (Month/Day/Hour/Minute).

3. Precautions

None


List up: LCMO

5. Entry Procedure

BLOCK: Block Number (0-7) PTN: Pattern Number (0-7) START: Start Time (MM/DD HH-MM)END: End Time (MM/DD HH-MM)

te

Assignment of Clocked Manual Override

BLOCK:0 PTN:0

START:12/24 00-00END :12/25 12-30

WRT?


ACND CM0-09

Business, Hotel

e ISDN

P com-

ness, Ho
ACND Assignment of Calling Number Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display a Service Identification Number (SID) sent to thNetwork.

3. Precautions

• Before assigning data with this command, assign the Calling Number Pattern (CNP) using the ACNmand.


List up: LCND

Entry Procedure

CNP: Calling Number Pattern (1-255)SKIP: Skip Digit (Enter 0)ADD: Number of Digits of the Additional Number (0-24)DC: Digit Code of the Additional Number (Max. 24 digits)

te

Assignment of Calling Number Data

CNP:1 SKIP:0ADD:7DC:2014386

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ACNPCM0-09Business, Hotel

e route

ness, Ho
ACNP Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data

2. Function

This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Calling Number Pattern (CNP) to thwhich allows SID to Network-Present service.

3. Precautions

• Enter the B-Channel Route Number in parameter “RT”.


List up: LCNP

5. Entry Procedure

OG/IC: Kind of Connection (Enter 0)RT: Route NumberCNP: Calling Number Pattern (1-255)

te

Assignment of Calling Number Pattern Data

OG/IC:0 RT:10CNP:1


ACOC CM0-01

Business, Hotel

ant con-

ness, Ho
ACOC Assignment of Central Office Code

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display a C.O. line code and tie line code corresponding to particulartrunks.

3. Precautions

• The Central Office Code assigned by this command is displayed as a 4-digit number on the attendsole. This command operates in accordance with the ARTD command parameter R/L (CDN25).


List up: LCOC

-Parameter RT-Assignment: ARTDDisplay: ARTDList up: LRTD

-Parameter TK-Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLENList up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberDC: Digit Code (4 digits)

te

Assignment of Central Office Code

RT:1 TK:1

DC:9000

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ACPECM0-11Business, Hotel

stationsL” can

th

e

ness, Ho
ACPE Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group

2. Function

This command is used to assign, change and delete Call Pickup Expand Group data. A maximum of 50can be displayed at a time on the MAT screen. In addition, using special keys such as “INS” and “DEfacilitate data entry.

3. Precautions

• A maximum of 50 stations can be assigned in a Call Pickup Expand Group.

• The following special keys are available when ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode is selected.

• Assign an access code for a Call Pickup Expand Group using the ASPA command.


List up: LCEG, LCEL

KEY FUNCTION

ESCThis key is used to skip Call Pickup Group station data entry before reaching the 50station. “WRT?” appears on the screen when this key is pressed.

INSThis key is used to insert a station at the location where the cursor is positioned. Thprevious station is advanced by one when a new station is inserted.

DEL This key is used to delete a station at the location where the cursor is positioned.

te


ACPE CM0-11

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• Mode Selection

Press the ↑ and ↓ keys to select your desired mode. Press the ENTER key.

Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group

Operation Mode : Mode Selection : Cursor up Key Cursor down Key

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGEDELETION Mode Activation : Return Key


Revision 4.0

ACPECM0-11Business, Hotel

en the

• Assignment/Change of Call Pickup Expand Group

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberCNT STN: Station numbers in a Call Pickup Expand Group

Note 1: WRT? appears when all station data has been assigned in a Call Pickup Expand Group or whESC key is pressed.

Note 2: Meanings of each parameter are indicated in this area.

Note 3: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective when entering CNT STN data.

Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group ASSIGNMENT

TN: STN: Message AreaWRT? Note 1

Note 3CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN

11: 21: 31: 41: 2: 12: 22: 32: 42: 3: 13: 23: 33: 43: 4: 14: 24: 34: 44: 5: 15: 25: 35: 45: 6: 16: 26: 36: 46: 7: 17: 27: 37: 47: 8: 18: 28: 38: 48: 9: 19: 29: 39: 49:10: 20: 30: 40: 50:

Note 2


ACPE CM0-11

Business, Hotel

station Whenr returns

• Deletion of Call Pickup Expand Group

Note: DEL? appears when all station data of a C.P.E.G. is displayed on the screen. If the designated has not been assigned as a Call Pickup Group station, “Not Assigned!! Assign? (Y/N)” appears.the Y key is pressed, the display is changed to ASSIGNMENT mode. By pressing N, the cursoto the station number entry.

Assignment of Call Pickup Expand Group DELETION

TN: a STN: b Message AreaWRT? Note

CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN

11: xxxxx 21: xxxxx 31: xxxxx 41:xxxxx 2: xxxxx 12: 22: 32: 42: 3: 13: 23: 33: 43: 4: 14: 24: 34: 44: 5: 15: 25: 35: 45: 6: 16: 26: 36: 46: 7: 17: 27: 37: 47: 8: 18: 28: 38: 48: 9: 19: 29: 39: 49:

10: xxxxx 20: xxxxx 30: xxxxx 40: xxxxx 50:xxxxx


Revision 4.0

ACPGCM0-01Business, Hotel

r groups,

in over

er

oup

y the

time

ness, Ho
ACPG Assignment of Call Pickup Group

2. Function

This command is used to assign, change, delete, and display call pickup group via the TN and STN

3. Precautions

• In the Assign mode, a maximum of 50 stations can be assigned to one group per system. For all othea maximum of 20 stations can be assigned.

• In the Change Mode, use the “DELETE ” key for deletion of a station in the Group. To insert a stationthe Group, use the “INSERT” key. Exchanging can be accomplished by entering a new station Numberthe existing station Number.

• In the Deletion Mode, if there are no data for the group, “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. If “Y” isentered, the mode changes to Assignment Mode. If “N” is entered, the operation returns to station numbentry.

• Special Key Table

These keys are effective in the operation mode “Assignment” and “Change” only.


List up: LCPG, LCPL

- Parameter STN - Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGSTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

KEY FUNCTION

ESC This key is used when it is desired to skip entry operation at the time of Call Pickup Grstation entry. If this key is pressed, the operation skips to “WRT?”.

INSERT This key is used when it is desired to insert a station ahead of the station indicated bcursor at the time of Group Station entry.

DELETE This key is used when it is desired to delete the station indicated by the cursor at theof Call Pickup Group station entry.

te


ACPG CM0-01

Business, Hotel

er

5. Entry Procedure

• Enter the kind of mode.

• To assign a Call Pickup Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number.CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the Call Pickup Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

Note: ESC, INSERT and DELETE Keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN.

Note: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. When entering othparameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION

Note: Select the desired mode by using the (UpArrow) or (Down Arrow); then press theENTER key.

←

←

Assignment of Call Pickup Group TN:1 STN:2400

WRT? Y

CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN CNT STN

6: 2405 11: 16: 2: 2401 7: 2406 12: 17: 3: 2402 8: 2407 13: 18: 4: 2403 9: 2408 14: 19: 5: 2404 10:2409 15: 20:


Revision 4.0

ACPGCM0-01Business, Hotel

er

• To change a Call Pickup Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number.CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the Call Pickup Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

Note: ESC, INSERT and DELETE Keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN.

Note: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. When entering othparameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.

• To Delete a Call Pickup Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station Included in the Call Pickup Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)


WRT? Y


6: 2405 11: 2410 16: 24152: 2401 7: 2406 12: 2411 17: 24163: 2402 8: 2407 13: 2412 18: 24174: 2403 9: 2408 14: 2413 19: 24185: 2404 10: 2409 15: 2414 20: 2419


DEL? Y


6: 2405 11: 2410 16: 24152: 2401 7: 2406 12: 2411 17: 24163: 2402 8: 2407 13: 2412 18: 24174: 2403 9: 2408 14: 2413 19: 24185: 2404 10:2409 15: 2414 20: 2419

Station numbers of the stations be-longing in the call pickup groupare displayed automatically.


ACSA CM0-02

Business, Hotel

ion. This.

GST

ness, Ho
ACSA Assignment of Connection Service Index A

2. Function

This command is used to route incoming calls from selected routes and trunks to a predetermined statis for a CAS Line and Direct in Termination (Day Only). This command is used with the ACSI command

3. Precautions

• This data must be assigned in accordance with Connection Service Index A (CSIA)

• CAS data at the Satellite Station

a. It is necessary to set the TEC (Telephone Class) of the CAS Line to “15” in the ASDT/AAST/Acommand.

b. A ring-down incoming call from a C.O. line is terminated at the CAS Line.

• When assigning CSIA as 3 using this command, the ADC must be set using the ASPD command


List up: LCSA


-Parameter TK-Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RIGST Display: ASDT, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

te


Revision 4.0

ACSACM0-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For CAS line or DIT

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberCSIA: Connection Service Index A (Enter 1 or 2)

1: CAS line2: Direct-In Termination (DAY Only)

STN: Station NumberTN: Tenant Number

• For DIT-Outside

RT: Route Number TK: Trunk Number CSIA: Connection Service Index A (Enter 3.)

3: Direct-In Termination-Outside (DAY only)ADC: Speed Calling Abbreviated Digit Code (for CSIA3)

Assignment of Connection Service Index

RT:2 TK:1CSIA:1TN:1 STN: 3111

WRT?

Assignment of Connection Service Index 2

RT:2 TK:1CSIA:3ADC:11

WRT?


ACSC CM0-08


ontrol-accom-

w.

houldommo-

, Busine
ACSC Assignment of CSC Data

2. Function

This command permits the registration, deletion and display of the CSC (Common Channel Signaling Cler) number corresponding to the CSCG (Common Channel Signaling Controller Group) number and modation location of the CCH (Common Channel Handler) for CCIS/DCH (D-Channel Handler) for ISDN.

3. Precautions

• The relationship between CIC (Circuit Identification Code) Group Numbers and CICS is shown belo

CIC Group 0 CIC8, CIC16, .... CIC Group 1 CICl, CIC9, CIC17, ....CIC Group 2 CIC2, CIC10, CIC18, ....

CIC Group 7 CIC7, CIC15, CIC23

• Even if the CIC has only 7 circuits, the CSC number of accommodation location of the CCH/DCH sbe assigned to 8 CIC groups from 0 to 7. It is acceptable to use the CSC number or CCH/DCH accdation location.

• For both the basic route and the alternative route totaled, a maximum of eight CSC/CCH/DCH Numbers canbe assigned.


List up: LCSC

ss


Revision 4.0

ACSCCM0-08CCIS, Business, Hotel

dicates

5. Entry Procedure

CSCG: CSC Group Number (2-255) Note 1

CCH: Accommodation location of the Common Channel Handler Note 2 XX X XX

CSC Common Channel Signaling Controller NumberCIC Group: CIC Group Number (display only)

Note 1: When the CSCG number is even, it indicates a basic route. When the CSCG number is odd, it inan alternate route.

Note 2: For CCIS, assign the accommodation location of the CCT/CCH even in the case of CCT.“CCH” is assigned.For ISDN, the following data should be assigned to the parameter CCH.B-Channel:Basic Accommodation LocationD-Channel:Accommodation Location

Assignment of CSC Data

CSCG:130

CCH:00005 CIC GROUP X

WRT?

“X” indicates a CIC group number. Everytime the CCH/DCH accommodation loca-tion is input, it is incremented by 1 (0-7).

Line Group (00-23)Unit (0-3)MG 00-31


ACSI CM0-02

Business, Hotel

ion. This

(day,mand.

ness, Ho
ACSI Assignment of Connection Service Index

2. Function

This command is used to route incoming calls from selected routes and trunks to a predetermined statis for Direct-In Termination (Day and Night), Night Connection and Remote Access to the System.

3. Precautions

• This data must be assigned in accordance with the Connection Service Index (CSI).

• This command must be used when assigning Night Connection Fixed, and Direct-In Termination.

• This command must be used for Remote Access from a Ring Down Trunk.

• When providing the Night Connection-Off Site Extension or Direct-In Termination-Off Site Extension night/night) service, register a station number to which an incoming call is terminated using this com

• When setting the CSI to 6 or 7 using this command, the ADC must be set by the ASPD.


List up: LCFC

-Parameter RT-Assignment: ARTD

Display: ARTD List up: LRTD

-Parameter TK-Assignment: ATRK

Deletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLEN

List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST

Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

te


Revision 4.0

ACSICM0-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For Remote Access to PBX:

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberCSI: Connection Service Index (Enter 5.)

5: Remote Access to PBX

• For Direct-In Termination or Night Connection:

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberCSI: Connection Service Index (Enter 3 or 4.)

3: Direct-In Termination (Day and Night Mode) 4: Night Connection

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number


RT:6 TK:1

CSI:5

WRT?


RT:2 TK:1

CSI:4

TN:1 STN:3113

WRT?


ACSI CM0-02

Business, Hotel

e Ex-

• For Direct-In Termination-Outside or Night Connection-Outside

RT: Route Number TK: Trunk NumberCSI: Connection Service Index (Enter 7.)

6: Night Connection-Outside 7: Direct-In Termination-Outside (Day and Night Mode)

ADC: Speed Calling Abbreviated Digit Code

Note: When assigning Direct-In Termination-off Site Extension (CSI = 7), or Night Connection-off Sittension (CSI = 6), the ADC must be entered.

Assignment of Connection Service Index 2

RT:2 TK:1

CSI:7

ADC:11

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ADA1CM0-02Business, Hotel

storeder

ness, Ho
ADA1 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 1

2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete Attribute Data 1 for each terminal (DTE). Attribute Data 1 isas the office data of the switching unit, and is rarely modified in normal operation. Attribute Data 2, on the othhand, is stored on the data terminal side and is modified in the course of operation.

3. Precautions

• This data can be set for the following TEC (Telephone Equipment Class):

TEC = 13 (DTE via Dterm)

Refer to command ASDT, AAST.

• Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN).

• If ESC key is pressed at the time of attribute data entry, the operation skips to “WRT?”


List up: LDA1 Display: DDA1

-Parameter STN-Assignment: ASDT, AASTDeletion: ASDT, RASTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

te


ADA1 CM0-02

Business, Hotel

Item

N, and

ta entry,

ed.

5. Entry Procedure


• To assign, change, or delete DTE Attribute Data 1.

Note 1: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of Attribute Data parameter. Data entry starts from theNumber of the parameter designated here.Note, however, that at each data entry, the Item Number is incremented automatically.

Note 2: If, at the time of data entry, SPACE + ENTER key is entered, the cursor returns to parameter CDthen operation can be started from Item Number.

Note 3: After the data of the last Item Number has been set or when ESC key is pressed at the time of da“WRT?” is displayed. TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number

Note 4: After TN and STN have been entered, they will be displayed until the data for CDN = 7 is enter

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION

Note: Select the desired mode by using the (UpArrow) or (Down Arrow) key; then pressENTER.

←

←

Assignment of DTE Attribute Data-l

TN:1 STN:3555 CDN:8 Note 1 WRT? Y FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT

MEDIA: 1 CNTP: 0TCP : 0 FCY : 3 PRI : 0 RST : 0 SRP: 0 CI : 0

Note 2, 3

Note 4


Revision 4.0


CDN: Counter Display NumberMEDIA (CDN = 1): Media (1-15)

1: Voice2: Data 3: FAX4: TELEX5: TELETEX6: Image7-15: Not used

CNTP(CDN = 2): Connection Protocol (0-15)

0: 2400 Protocol1: X.20 2: X.21 3: V.24 200 Series4: X.20 bis 5: X.21 bis 6-15: Not used

TCP (CDN = 3): Transmission Control Protocol (0-255)

0: Free Wheeling1: Synchronous Non Protocol 2: X.253: X.75 4: IBM27805: IBM37406: IBM37707: IBM37808: IBM BSC Polled (3270 Terminal)9: IBM BSC Polling (3270 HOST)10: IBM SDLC Polled (3270 Terminal)11: IBM SDLC Polling (3270 HOST) 12: TELETEX13: TELEX14: FAX GIII MH15: FAX GIII MR16: FAX GIV MH 17: FAX GIV MR 18-255: Not used

FCY (CDN = 4): Facility (0-3)

0: Bothway1: Outgoing 2: Incoming 3: Not used


ADA1 CM0-02

Business, Hotel

PRI(CDN = 5): Priority (0/1)

0: Outgoing 1: Incoming

RST (CDN = 6): Restriction (0/1)

0: Connection is restricted 1: Connection is not restricted

SRP (CDN = 7): Send Receive Priority (0/1)

0: Data Receive Priority for Called Party1: Data Send Priority for Called Party

CI(CDN = 8): Calling Indicator (0/1)

0: CI signal Interval Control 1: CI signal Continuous Control


Revision 4.0


or code

mmand

nation

ness, Ho
ADA2 Assignment of DTE Attribute Data 2

2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete Attribute Data 2 for each terminal (DTE).

3. Precautions

• When the designated station is not a DTE (DA/DM), the Attribute Data cannot be assigned and errwill result. Note 1

• In the parameter MDM1 and MDM2, a zero value means that there is no MODEM.

• Attributes requiring a switch setting on the DM can be displayed but cannot be changed by this coand Error code will result if an attempt is made to change these attributes. Note 1

Note 1: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explaon the screen.


• If the ESC key is pressed while entering attributes, the operation skips to “WRT?”


Display: DDA2List up: LDA2 -Parameter STN-Assignment: ASDT, AASTDeletion: ASDT, RASTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

te


ADA2 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

Item

CDN,

• To assign, change, or delete DTE Attribute Data 2.

Note 2: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of Attribute Data parameter. Data entry starts from theNumber of the parameter designated here. The Item Number is incremented automatically.

Note 3: If, at the time of data entry, SPACE + RETURN key is entered, the cursor returns to parameterand operation can be started from Item Number.

Note 4: After the last Item Number has been set or when ESC key is pressed, “WRT?” is displayed.

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number CDN: Counter Display Number FUNCTION: Function corresponding to the CDN is displayed.

The correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names) is shown below:

CDN FUNCTION 1 DTR 2 AUTO3 MDM14 MDM25 SPD6 PRTY7 ASYC8 HDX 9 STOP10 CODE

Assignment of DTE Attribute Data-2

TN:1 STN:3555 CDN:14 Note 2 WRT? Y

FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT

DTR: 1AUTO: 1MDM1: 0MDM2: 0SPD: 0PRTY: 0ASYC: 0HDX: 0STOP: 0CODE: 0PRFN: 0HL : 0HTL : 0RA : 0

Note 3, 4


Revision 4.0


11 PRNF12 HLT 13 HL14 RA

The parameters of each function are as follows:

DTR (CDN = 1): DTR (ER) Control

0: Check1: No Check

AUTO(CDN = 2): Auto Answer (0/1)

0: Manual Answer1: Auto Answer

MDM1(CDN = 3): Originating MODEM Number (0-8)

0: No MODEM 1-8: MODEM Number

MDM2(CDN = 4): Incoming MODEM Number (0-8)

0: No MODEM 1-8: MODEM Number

SPD (CDN = 5): Bit Speed Rate (0-31)

0: 50 bps1: 75 bps2: 110 bps 3: 150 bps 4: 200 bps 5: 300 bps 6: 600 bps7: 1200 bps8: 2400 bps9: 4800 bps10: 9600 bps11: 19.2 K bps12: 48 K bps (SYNC)13: 56 K bps (SYNC)14: 64 K bps (SYNC)15-31: Not used

PRTY(CDN = 6): Parity Addition (0/1)

0: No Parity1: Parity

ASYC(CDN = 7): Asynchronous (0/1)

0: Asynchronous1: Synchronous


ADA2 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

HDX (CDN = 8): Half/Full Duplex (0/1)

0: Full Duplex 1: Half Duplex

STOP(CDN = 9): Stop Bit (0/1)

0: 1 Bit1: 2 Bit

CODE(CDN = 10): Kind of Data (0-15)

0: No Character1: ASCII (7-bit) Even Parity 2: ASCII (7-bit) Odd Parity3: ASCII (7-bit) Parity is “0” 4: ASCII (7-bit) Parity is “1” 5: JIS (7-bit) Even Parity 6: JIS (7-bit) Odd Parity7: JIS (8-bit) 8: EBCDIC (8-bit)9: IA#5 (7-bit)10: ITA#2(5-bit)11: EBCD 12-15: Not used

PRFN(CDN = 11): Profile Number (0-63)HL(CDN = 12): Hot Line Terminal (0/1)

0: No Hotline 1: Hotline

HTL (CDN = 13): Hot Line Origination (0/1)

0: DTR (ER) Signal On 1: Normal Origination

RA(CDN = 14): Kind of RA (0-15)

0: PROTIMS1: PROTlMS2: DMI Mode 2 3: PROTIMS4: V. 110 5: V. 120 6: X.30 7-15: Not used

Note: In the case of PROTIMS, assign “0”.


Revision 4.0

ADIMCM0-03Business, Hotel

service

and,

ber of

MG

ness, Ho
ADIM Assignment of Dial Intercom Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display of Dial Intercom Group Number for Dial Intercom and of the station Numbers of Dterm stations which constitute the Dial Intercom Group.

3. Precautions

• For providing Dial Intercom Service, it is necessary to assign the following in advance: ASYD commSYS1, Index 59, b7 = 1.

The number of Dterm stations that can be accommodated in a Dial Intercom Group and also the numdigits for Call Number (Dial Intercom STN) are determined by parameter “N” (Dial Intercom Digit Num-ber).

• To parameter “ICMSTN” (Dial Intercom Station Number), enter “My Line” Station Number of Dterm station.

• Compose a Dial Intercom Group with Dterm stations of the same TN (Tenant Number) under the same (Module Group).

• From 1 to 50 Dial Intercom Groups can be composed on each MG (Module Group) basis.


List Up: LDIM

te


ADIM CM0-03

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For one digit Dial Intercom STN

MG NO: Module Group NumberG-ID: Group ID Number (1-50) N: Dial Intercom Digit Number (0/1) (Enter 0.)

0: one (1) digit (0-9) Dial Intercom STNBCR: Bridge Call Restriction (0/1)


ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN (2-10) TN: Tenant Number ICM STN: Intercom Station Number

Assignment of Dial Intercom Data

MG N0:1 G-ID:1 N:0 BCR:0 ICMCT:10 TN:1Dial Intercom STN ICM STN Dial Intercom STN ICM STN

0 110001 110012 110023 110034 110045 110056 110067 110078 110089 11009

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ADIMCM0-03Business, Hotel

• For two digits Dial Intercom STN

MG NO: Module Group NumberG-ID: Group ID Number (1-50)N: Dial Intercom Digit Number (0/1) (Enter 1.)

1: two (2) digits (00-31) Dial Intercom STN BCR: Bridge Call Restriction (0/1)

0: Restricted 1: Allowed

ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN (2-32) TN: Tenant Number ICM STN: Intercom Station Number

Assignment of Dial Intercom DataMG N0:1 G-ID:1 N:1 BCR:O ICMCT:32 TN:1

Dial Intercom STN ICM STN Dial Intercom STN ICM STN00 11000 16 1101601 11001 17 1101702 11002 18 1101803 11003 19 1101904 11004 20 1102005 11005 21 1102106 11006 22 1102207 11007 23 1102308 11008 24 1102409 11009 25 1102510 11010 26 1102611 11011 27 1102712 11012 28 1102813 11013 29 1102914 11014 30 1103015 11015 31 11031

WRT?


ADPC CM0-08


g to the

, Busine
ADPC Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data

2. Function

This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Determinate Point Code correspondinRoute Number.

3. Precautions

• Assign “12” to LSG of the Route Class Data corresponding to the Route Number.


List up: LDPC

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberPC: Determinate Point Code (1-16383)

ss

Assignment of Determinate Point Code Data

RT: 1

PC: 10

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AEFRCM0-02Business, Hotel

a is as-

ness, Ho
AEFR Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction

2. Function

This command is used to assign and display Facility Restriction Class (FRL) data. This restriction datsigned between RSC1 (Calling Party’s Restriction Class) and RSC2 (Called Party’s Restriction Class).

3. Precautions

• This data has Tenant table development (ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 94, Bit 1, INDEX 59, bit 1).


List up: LEFR

-Parameter RSC-Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSC, AOPRList up: LRTC, LOPR

te


AEFR CM0-02

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

DAY/NIGHT/URGENT: Day/Night/Urgent Mode D: Day ModeN: Night ModeU: Urgent Mode

TN: Tenant NumberFRI: Facility Restriction Index (0-31)

0: STA to STA (Dial Access) 1: STA to STA (Via ATTCON)2: STA to TRK (Dial Access) 3: STA to TRK (Via ATTCON)4: TRK to STA (Dial Access) 5: TRK to STA (Via ATTCON)6: TRK to TRK (Dial Access) 7: TRK to TRK (Via ATTCON)8-31: Not used

RSC1: Calling Restriction Class (0-15)RSC2: Called Restriction Class (0-15) RES: Restriction Data (0/1)


Note: Parameters FRI, RSC1, RSC2, are automatically incremented.

Assignment of EPN Facility Restriction

DAY/NIGHT/URGENT:D

TN:1 FRI:0 RSC1:0 RSC2:0 RES:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AEKDCM0-02Business, Hotel

he PFT

it

ness, Ho
AEKD Assignment of External Key Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display data for Day/Night control via an external key of tcircuit card.

3. Precautions

• A maximum of eight (0-7) external keys can be assigned, corresponding to eight circuits of the PFT circucard. The external key can control two PFT circuit cards per MG (16 circuits).


List up: LEKD

5. Entry Procedure

MG: Module Group Number (00-31) NCU PKG: PFT Circuit Card Number (0/1) CTN: External Key Number (0-7)CP: Change Control Pattern (1-4)

1: Not used 2: Day/Night Change 3: Not used 4: Not used

CNT: Number of Input Parameters (Enter the number of Tenants) (1-8)TN: Tenant Number

te

Assignment External Key Data

MG:0 NCU PKG:0

CTN:0 CP:2 CNT:1

TN:1

WRT?


AEVT CM0-11

Business, Hotel

ot the

Signal

AEVT Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS.

3. Precautions


• When the parameter VRY (Verification of Connection) is assigned as “1”, if the received number is nsame as the called number assigned in the parameter CALLED, connection is not established.


List up: LEVT

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberDESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 6 digits)CALLING: Calling Number (Max. 24 digits)CALLED: Called Number (Max. 24 digits)C_RT: CCIS Signal Route NumberC_TK: CCIS Signal Trunk NumberVRY: Verification of Connection

0: Not required1: Required

OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC Service (0-4095) NoteRA: Order of Route Advance of CBC Service (0-7) Note

Note: This parameter appears when Route Number (RT) and Trunk Number (TK) is the same as CCISRoute Number (C_RT) and CCIS Signal Trunk Number (C_TK), respectively.

Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS

RT: TK:DESTINATION:CALLING:CALLED:C_RT: C_TK:VRY:

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AFCDCM0-03Business, Hotel

pertain-

t the

link.

rminal

nec-

ness, Ho
AFCD Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign (connect link), delete (release link), and display the data (linked LENS) ing to Fixed Connections (Nailed Down Connections).

3. Precautions

• The types of terminal equipment utilized for these connections are indicated below:

a. Ordinary Telephone (Line circuit)b. Trunk (DTI, etc.) c. Digital Signaling Trunk (DST)d. MODEM Trunk (MDMT) e. Conference Trunk (CFT)f. Data Module (DM) g. Dterm [DATA] (DLC)

• If “CONTROL MEMORY BUSY” is displayed when assigning data via this command, it means thalast operation is still being executed. Therefore, additional data is to be assigned after pressing the ENTERkey.

• The display “EXECUTING” means that the terminal equipment is being released or connected to a

• The next operation will wait until the current operation has been completed.

• This command requires confirmation of the designated terminal equipment. If the designated teequipment is in the busy state, the link will be released by this command.

• The status of the link is supervised periodically by the CPU. If the link is not in a “Nailed Down Contion”, the link will be forcibly released and reconnected.


List up: LFCD

te


AFCD CM0-03

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

LENS-A: Line Equipment Number (Side-A) EAD-A: Equipment Additional Data (00-1F; Hexadecimal)LENS-B: Line Equipment Number (Side-B) EAD-B: Equipment Additional Data (00-1F; Hexadecimal)[LENS]

XX X XX X

Assignment of Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data

LENS-A:000001 EAD-A:00

LENS-B:000002 EAD-B:00

WRT?



Revision 4.0

AFCPCM0-09Business, Hotel

ll For-

Calling

trunk

siness, tel

AFCP Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number


2. Function

This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the Call Forwarding Destination for the Cawarding-Recognition Service of ISDN.

3. Precautions

• The Call Forwarding Destination can be assigned on the basis of the Calling Party Number or the Party Attribute.

• When the Calling Forwarding Destination is a trunk line, assign the Abbreviated Digit Code for theline using the ASPD command.

• The “Calling Party” may be treated as:

a. All digits

b. Some portions ignored; Example: ignore 003, where 003 is the access code.

c. The entire number is ignored, reverting back to traditioned Call Forwarding services.


List up: LFCP


AFCP CM0-09

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• When the Call Forwarding Destination is a station


D: Day Mode N: Night Mode

TN: Tenant NumberCALLINGPARTY: Called No. + Calling No. (Max. 32 digits)CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3)

0: Call Forwarding-All Calls1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Direct-In Termination

ITC: Information Transfer Capability (0-3)0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data)2: Audio (MODEM)3: Not used

CFD: Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 0 (Station)]STN: Station Number of Call Forwarding Destination (Max. 5 digits)

Assignment of Forwarding Service by Calling Number

DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:0 STN:4000

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AFCPCM0-09Business, Hotel

• When the Call Forwarding Destination is an attendant console

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode (D/N)


TN: Tenant Number CALLING PARTY: Called No. + Calling No. (Max. 32 digits)CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3)

0: Call Forwarding-All Calls1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line 2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Direct-In Termination

ITC: Information Transfer Capability (0-3)0: Speech 1: Unrestricted (Digital Data)2: Audio (MODEM)3: Not used

CFD: Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 1 (ATT)]


DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0CFD:1


AFCP CM0-09

Business, Hotel

its can

• When the Call Forwarding Destination is a trunk line

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode (D/N)


TN: Tenant Number CALLING PARTY: Called No. + Calling No. (Max. 32 digits) CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature Index (0-3)

0: Call Forwarding-All Calls1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line2: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer 3: Direct-In Termination

ITC: Information Transfer Capability (0-3)0: Speech1: Unrestricted (Digital Data)2: Audio (MODEM)3: Not used

CFD: Call Forwarding Destination [Enter 2 (Outside)]ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note

Note: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of three (3) digbe assigned.


DAY/NIGHT:D TN:1 CALLING PARTY:2019676 CFSI:3 ITC:0 CFD:2 ADC: 100

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AFRSCM0-02Business, Hotel

neces- com-

PC) de-s

nment

e Routeand.

ameter

to the, at the

is mo-g 91213are delet-

siness, tel

AFRS Assignment of Flexible Route Selection


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display area and/or office code data for the related OPR.

3. Precautions

• After an Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in this command, it issary to assign alternate route information in the AOPR (Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing)mand.

• It should be noted that the access code may or may not be included in the Number Pattern Code (Npending upon the assignment of CDN 13 (AC) in the ARTD command. If zero (0) is assigned, the accescode is not included. If one (1) is assigned, the access code must be included.

• Route Number (RT) is assigned to the Type of Service parameter (LCR or LCRS) in the ASPA (Assigof Special Access Code) command.

• When data has been assigned in this command, Reverse Numbering Plan Data with respect to thNumber must also be assigned in the ARNP (Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data) comm

• When assigning such a number as shown below to parameter “NPC”, always assign “1” to par“FLG”.

Example:

When assigning 90 and 900 to NPC: Number Input Number for NPC FLG

90 90T 1900 900 0

• When an NPC is assigned for the first time, OTHER OPR is displayed. This parameter will assignsame OPR all other numbers in the same sequence which differ only by the last digit. (For exampletime of setting 91213, the OPR for 91210-2 and 91214-9 can be set by OTHER OPR.)

• If no assignment is to be made in OTHER OPR, press SPACE + ENTER.

• When deleting an NPC for which all other last digits are assigned to the same OPR, OTHER OPRmentarily displayed and all assignments in this parameter are deleted. (For example, when deletinand the same OPR has been assigned for 91210-2, and 91214-9 in OTHER OPR, all assignments ed.)


AFRS CM0-02

Business, Hotel

umRoute

differ


List up: LFRS


-Parameter OPR-Assignment: AOPRDeletion: AOPR Display: AOPRList up: LOPR

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number RT: Route NumberFLG: Number Pattern Code Flag (0/1)NPC: Number Pattern Code

NPC is the Toll Distinctive Code (TDC), NPA, and or NXX. This data can be a maximof twelve (12) digits. This data sometimes may need the assignment of the Trunk access code.

OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) OTHER OPR: Other Outgoing Route Selection Pattern (0-255)

“OTHER OPR” is used when the Number Pattern Codes to be assigned to an OPRonly by the last digit, and all numbers in the sequence (0-9) are to be assigned.

Assignment of Flexible Route Selection

TN:1 RT:1 FLG = 0

NPC:91213

OPR:0


Revision 4.0

AHLSCM0-02Business, Hotel

r to thisand.

ta is as-

siness, tel

AHLS Assignment of Hot Line Station


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the destination of a Hot Line station.

3. Precautions

• A hot line station is assigned by assigning the called party’s data to the station to be employed. Prioassignment, the Hot Line station must be assigned a TEC of 13, 14 or 18 in the ASDT/AAST comm

• When deleting a Hot Line station, the called party’s data is also deleted in this command.

• When changing the called party’s hot line data, the current data must be deleted before the new dasigned.

4. Related Reference Commands

List up: LHLS

-Parameter STN-

Assignment: ASDT, AASTDeletion: ASDT, RASTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN


AHLS CM0-02

Business, Hotel

its can

5. Entry Procedure

• For Station:

HOT TN: Hot Line Tenant NumberSTN: Hot line Station Number TYPE: Connection Type (Enter 1.)

1: STNCON TN: Opposite Party’s Tenant Number STN: Opposite Party’s Station Number

For ADC:

HOT TN: Hot Line Tenant Number STN: Hot Line Station NumberTYPE: Connection Type (Enter 2.)

2: ADCCON TN: Opposite Pady’s Tenant Number ADC: Speed Calling Code (4 Digits) Use the Code assigned in command ASPD.Note

Note: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of three (3) digbe assigned.

Assignment of Hot Line Station

HOT TN:1 STN:3112

TYPE:1

CON TN:1 STN:3111

WRT?


HOT TN:1 STN:3112

TYPE:2

CON TN:1 ADC:123

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AHLSCM0-02Business, Hotel

• For Trunk Line Appearance:

HOT TN: Hot Line Tenant NumberSTN: Hot Line Station Number TYPE: Connection Type (Enter 3.)

3: Trunk Line CON RT: Opposite Party’s Route Number TK: Trunk Number


HOT TN:1 STN:3112

TYPE:3

CON RT:1 TK:1


AHMS CM0-04

Business, Hotel

ding to

hown.

siness, tel

AHMS Assignment of Hold Music Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete the LENs of Music on Hold Equipment (DAT card) accorroutes.

3. Precautions

• The relationship between parameter “HMSC” and LENs of Hold Music Equipment (DAT card) is as sin the table below. When assigning this data, the DAT card must be mounted in the mounting slot specified


List up: LHMS

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route Number HMSC: Hold Music Data (0-15)

HMSC LENS of DAT HMSC LENS of DAT

0 000050 8 001050

1 000070 9 001070

2 000090 10 001090

3 000110 11 001110

4 000130 12 001130

5 000150 13 001150

6 000170 14 001170

7 000190 15 001190

Assignment of Hold Music Data

RT:1

HMSC:7

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AHMS2CM0-04Business, Hotel

ding to

of Heldion and

ic i

siness, tel

AHMS2 Assignment of Hold Music Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete the LENs of Music on Hold Equipment (DAT card) accorroutes.

3. Precautions

If a Route is assigned in Route Number of Held Trunk, it cannot also be assigned in Tenant Number Station and Route Number of Held Trunk, and if a Route is programmed in Tenant Number of Held StatRoute Number of Held Trunk, it cannot be programmed in Route Number of Held Trunk.

The 8TLTR card is the only circuit card that is supported for these multiple music inputs.

The total number of music inputs using Expanded Music on Hold Service is sixteen (16).

The 8TLTR card may be set for either 600 ohms impedance or 900 ohms impedance, therefore the musnputto the 8TLTR card must match.


List up: LHMS2


AHMS2 CM0-04

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• Assignment Based on Tenant Number of Hold Station

TN: Tenant Number (Note 1)HMSC: Hold Music Data (0-15)STA: Extension Hold Station Data

0: Out of Service1: In Service

Note 1: IMG (ICS), IMGx = 1 ~ 15IMGxh, IMGdxh, MMG/UMG (ICS) = 1 ~ 63

• Assignment Based on Route Number of Held Trunk

RT: Route Number (Note 2 )HMSC: Hold Music Data (0-15)

Note 2: IMG (ICS), IMGx = 1 ~ 31IMGxh, IMGdxh, MMG/UMG (ICS) = 1 ~ 255


TYPE: Extension Hold Music Data KindENTRY: Registration Kind UP/DOWN key: Select

RETURN: ExecuteTenant Number of HOLD StationRoute Number of Held TrunkTenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk

TN: xx (Note 1 )HMSC: 0STA: 0WRT?



RETURN: ExecuteTenant Number of HOLD StationRoute Number of Held TrunkTenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk

RT: 1 - 255 (Note 2 )HMSC: 0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AHMS2CM0-04Business, Hotel

• Assignment Based on Tenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk

TN: Tenant NumberRT: Route NumberHMSC: Hold Music Data (0-15)



RETURN:ExecuteTenant Number of HOLD StationRoute Number of Held TrunkTenant Number of Hold Station and Route Number of Held Trunk

TN: xxRT: 1- 255HMSC: 0 - 15

WRT?


AICD CM0-03

Business, Hotel

de will

an error

siness, tel

AICD Assignment of Intercom Data


2. Function

This command assigns and deletes Intercom Station Numbers to Intercom Groups.

3. Precautions

• When assignment of a Signaling Station with no Intercom Station Number is attempted, an error coresult. Note

• When assignment of a Signaling Station with the same number as the Intercom Station is attempted,code will result. Note

Note: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display more information.


List up: LICD


Revision 4.0

AICDCM0-03Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

MG No.: Module Group Number (00-31)G-ID: Group ID Number (1-50) A/M: Automatic/Manual Intercom

0: Automatic 1: Manual

BCR: Intercom Bridge Restriction0: Restricted 1: Allowed

ICMCT: Number of Intercom stations in the group (2-16) TN: Tenant NumberICM STN: Intercom Station Number - Enter as many as designated in paramter ICMCTSIG STN: Signaling Station Number - Enter as many as designated in paramter ICMCT

Note: The Signaling Station is the station at which the Intercom Station will ring down.

Assignment of Intercom Data

MG: 0 G-ID:1 A/M:0 BCR:1 ICMCT:3 TN:1

NO. ICM STN SIG STN1 3000 30012 3001 30023 3002 3003

WRT? Y

Numbers entered in parameter ICMCT


AIDD CM0-13

Business, Hotel

vailable

AIDD Assignment of User ID Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display User ID data for the following services, which are afor the 6200-version software or higher:

• Audit Trail to Track the MAT usage

• Lock Out Maintenance Port

For detailed information on these services, see the System Data Design Manual.

3. Precautions


• Alphanumeric characters are used for the parameters USER NAME and ID CODE.


None

5. Entry Procedure

NO: Assignment Number (1-15)USER NAME: User Name (Max. 16 digits)ID CODE: ID Code (Max. 8 digits)RETYPE ID CODE: Enter the above ID code again.

Assignment of User ID Data

NO:USER NAME:ID CODE:RETYPE ID CODE:

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AIOCCM0-03Business, Hotel

erminal

ng status-0,1

ction

siness, tel

AIOC Assignment of IOC Port Data


2. Function

By this command, attribute data of various terminals connected with the IOC can be assigned. Type of Tand Communication System data are to be assigned to IOC Ports 0-7.

3. Precautions

• Port numbers which can be entered are displayed under the Port Number. (Depending on the mountiof the circuit cards, the port number may be displayed as [0123****] or [****4567], etc.) In case IOCare not accommodated, activation of this command will result in an error message.

Note: Assigned ports are numbered. Unassigned ports are indicated by an asterisk (*).

• After you press ENTER, only the data you selected will display.

• In case the terminal is MAT, select “System Monitoring Function Is Provided/Not Provided.”(FAULT MESSAGE)

If any other item has been designated, no display will be made.

• When the IOC attribute data is changed, the IOC card will be initialized, which will clear the port funmemory.


None

5. Entry Procedure

a. To select the type of terminal:

PORT NUMBER: I/O Port Number (0-7)

Note: MAT is used in the U.S.A. CMAT is not used in the U.S.A.

Assignment of IOC Port Data

PORT No. (0-7) 0 TERMINAL FAULT MESSAGE

PRINTER/MCIMAT

CMATSMDRATM Module

IN

___


AIOC CM0-03

Business, Hotel

b. When Printer/MCI has been designated as the type of terminal:

• The data of the communication system to be selected is displayed.

c. When MAT has been designated as the type of terminal:


NON4800

8 bit

2 bit3006001200240048009600

ODDEVENNON

1 bit1+1/2 bit2 bit

CHARACTER BIT

7 bit DATA CHANGE Yes / No

STOP BITPARITY BITSPEED (bps)

PRINTER/MCITERMINALPORT No. (0-7) 1


IN

__

DATA CHANGE Yes / No

4800SPEED (bps)

FAULT MESSAGEMATTERMINAL0PORT No. (0-7)



Revision 4.0

AIOCCM0-03Business, Hotel

unica-

d. When the protocol has been designated as Non Protocol (Free Wheel)

• When SMDR (Non Protocol) has been designated as the type of terminal, the data of the commtion system to be selected is displayed.

e. When SMDR (BSC) has been designated as the type of terminal.


PROTOCOLFree-wheelingBSC (Polling)BSC (Contention)


CHARACTER BIT

8 bit7 bit

STOP BIT2 bit1 bit1+1/2 bit2 bit

PARITY BITNONODDEVENNON

SPEED (bps)48003006001200240048009600

SMDRTERMINALPORT No. (0-7) 1



Bi-syncMono-sync

8 bit7 bit

ST1ST2

SYNC CHARACTERCHARACTER BITSYNC SIGNAL


PORT No.(0-7) 1 TERMINAL SMDR

PROTOCL SPEED (bps) PARITY BIT STOP BIT

BSC Polling 4800 NON 2 bit


AIOC CM0-03

Business, Hotel

f. When ATM Module has been designated as the type of terminal (Note 1):


Note 1: Available on 6200-version software and later.


PORT No.(0-7) 2TERMINALATM Module

SPEED (bps)PARITY bitSTOP bit

9 6 0 0N O N1 bit

CHARACTER bitATM Module No.

8 bit #1#2#3

DATA CHANGE Yes /No


Revision 4.0

AISACM0-02Business, Hotel

h individ-

fic station

t

siness, tel

AISA Assignment of Individual Speed Calling


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the number of speed calling codes assigned to eacual station.

3. Precautions

• MST (Master Station)

A speed calling area is assigned to a specific station. The speed calling codes assigned to that specican be changed.

• SLV (Slave Station)

The speed calling area assigned to the master station is shared by the slave stations; therefore, the speed call-ing codes assigned cannot be changed by a slave station.

• One block consists of 10 speed calling codes.

• There are 100 blocks per MG.

• When assigning the individual speed calling entry area of the Attendant Console, use the Specific AttendanNumber previously assigned in the ASAT command.

• The master station and slave stations must be stored in the same MG.


List up: LSDA

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN


AISA CM0-02

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For Master Station:

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number MST/SLV: Station type (Enter M .)

M: Master StationBLOCK: Number of Blocks (1-10)

• For Slave Station:

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberMST/SLV: Station type (Enter S.) S: Slave Station STN: Master Station Number BLOCK: Number of Blocks (1-10)

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling

TN:1 STN:3112

MST/

SLV:M

BLOCK:1

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling

TN:1 STN:3111

MST/SLV:S

STN:3112 BLOCK:1


Revision 4.0

AISDCM0-04Business, Hotel

on each

siness, tel

AISD Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display the destination number of Individual Speed Callingstation basis.

3. Precautions

None.


-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST Deletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DSTN, DLEN List Up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

• Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberFNC: Function (Enter 1)

1: AssignmentSPD: Speed Calling Digit Code (2 digits)TEL: Telephone Number (Max. 24 digits)

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data

TN: 1 STN: 2000

FNC: 1

SPD: 00 TEL:


AISD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

• Display of Individual Speed Calling Data

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberFNC: Function (Enter 2)

2: Display

Assignment of Individual Speed Calling Data

TN: 1 STN: 2000FNC: 2

SPD: TEL SPD: TEL 00 XXXXX 05 XXXXX01 XXXXX 06 XXXXX02 XXXXX 07 XXXXX03 XXXXX 08 XXXXX04 XXXXX 09 XXXXX

The Speed Calling Digits code and theTelephone Number are displayed here.


Revision 4.0

AISPCM0-02Business, Hotel

oming

umber

siness, tel

AISP Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display additional digit information with respect to the IncSelection Translation Pattern Number.

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, it must be confirmed that an Incoming Selection Translation Pattern N(PNI) has been assigned in the ASTP (Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern) command.


List up: LSLP

5. Entry Procedure

PNI: Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15)DC: Additional Digit Information (Max. 4 digits)

Assignment of Incoming Selection Pattern

PNI:1

DC:44

WRT?


AIZP CM0-11

Business

ed group data must

l Zone

nal

. To

rns to

siness
AIZP Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, change and delete Internal Zone Paging group data. If the designatnumber has already been assigned, the current data is displayed. If new data is to be assigned, the oldbe deleted before entering new data.

3. Precautions


• 6100-version software or later must be installed in the system.

• Each Internal Zone Paging group must be composed of Dterm stations (TEC = 12).

• In the ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode, a maximum of 24 stations can be assigned to one InternaPaging group.

• A maximum of 99 groups can be assigned to one tenant.

• One Dterm station can be assigned to multiple Internal Zone Paging groups.

• Irrespective of tenant data table development, any Dterm station in the system can be assigned to an InterZone Paging group.

• In the ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode, use the “DELETE” key for deletion of a station in the groupinsert a station in the group, use the “INSERT” key.

• In the DELETION mode, if there are no data for the group, “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. If “Y”is entered, the mode changes to ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode. If “N” is entered, the operation retutenant number entry.


Revision 4.0

AIZPCM0-11Business

ing

ursor

of


These keys are effective in ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE mode.


List up : LIZP

5. Entry Procedure


• Select the desired mode by using arrow key and press the ENTER key.

KEY FUNCTION

ESCThis key is used when it is desired to skip entry operation at the time of Internal Zone PagGroup station entry. If this key is pressed, the operation skips to “WRT?”.

INSERTThis key is used when it is desired to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cat the time of group station entry.

DELETEThis key is used when it is desired to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the timeInternal Zone Paging Group station entry.

Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data ASSIGNMENT

Operation Mode? Mode Selection :Cursor up key. :Cursor down key.

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGEMode Activation :Enter key.

DELETION


AIZP CM0-11

Business

ment is

• To assign an Internal Zone Paging group

TN : Tenant number of calling stationIZPG : Internal Zone Paging group (01-99)IZPTN : Tenant number of IZPSTNIZPSTN : Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group

(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

• When all the data is entered or ESC key is pressed, “WRT?” appears. If “Y” is entered, data assigncomplete. If “N” is entered, the operation returns to tenant number entry.

Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data ASSIGNMENT

TN :1 TN : Tenant NumberIZPG : Internal Zone Paging Group

(1-99)IZPG :24 IZPTN : IZP Tenant Number

IZPSTN :IZP StationWRT? Y

CNT IZPTN IZPSTN CNT IZPTN IZPSTN CNT IZPTN IZPSTN--- ----- ------ --- ----- ------ --- ----- ------1: 1 1000 9: 98 2000 17: 123 30002: 1 1001 10: 98 2001 18: 123 30013: 1 1002 11: 98 2002 19: 123 30024: 1 1003 12: 98 2003 20: 123 30035: 1 1004 13: 98 2004 21: 123 30046: 1 1005 14: 98 2005 22: 123 30057: 1 1006 15: 98 2006 23: 123 30068: 1 1007 16: 98 2007 24: 123 3007


Revision 4.0

AIZPCM0-11Business

-

• To delete an Internal Zone Paging group.

TN : Tenant number of calling stationIZPG : Internal Zone Paging group (01-99)IZPTN : Tenant number of IZPSTNIZPSTN : Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group


• After the assigned data is displayed, “DEL?” appears.

If “Y” is entered, the display and the actual data are cleared, and the operation returns to tenant number entry.

If “N” is entered, only the display is cleared and the operation returns to tenant number entry.

Assignment of Internal Zone Paging Data DELETION

TN :1 TN : Tenant NumberIZPG : Internal Zone Paging Group

(1-99)IZPG :24 IZPTN : IZP Tenant Number

IZPSTN :IZP StationDEL? Y

CNT IZPTN IZPSTN CNT IZPTN IZPSTN CNT IZPTN IZPSTN--- ----- ------ --- ----- ------ --- ----- ------1: 1 1000 9: 2 2000 17: 3 30002: 1 1001 10: 2 2001 18: 3 30013: 1 1002 11: 2 2002 19: 3 30024: 1 1003 12: 2 2003 20: 3 30035: 1 1004 13: 2 2004 21: 3 30046: 1 1005 14: 2 2005 22: 3 30057: 1 1006 15: 2 2006 23: 3 30068: 1 1007 16: 2 2007 24: 3 3007


AKYD CM0-01

ACD, Business, Hotel

/feature

f the

r (key

CD, siness, tel

AKYD Assignment of Key Data for D term


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display the following key data corresponding to each linebuttons of Dterm:

• Line Key Data

• Function Key Data

• Intercom Key Data

Note: The Dterm (16-button type and 24-button) has the default key data (Refer to (3) “Precautions”). Idefault data is to be used, assignment in AKYD is not necessary.

The table below shows the specification pertaining to data assignment for the Dterm series.

Figure 2-4 through Figure 2-6 show the association between line/feature buttons and the button numbenumber: KYN) of the Dterm series.

TYPE OF Dterm LINE/FEATURE BUTTON

NUMBER OF BUTTONS

8-button type 8 (KYN = 1-8)




Revision 4.0

AKYDCM0-01ACD, Business, Hotel

Figure 2-4 D term (8-Button Type)

Line/Feature

Buttons

01 02 03

05 06 07

04

08

MICO

1 2 3

ABC DEF RECALL

4 5 6

GHI JKL MNOFNC

7 8 9

PQRS TUV WXYDCNF

* 0 #OPER

LINE /SPD

HOLD TRF ANS SPKR


AKYD CM0-01



Line/Feature

Buttons

01 02 03

05 06 07

04

08

MICO

1 2 3

ABC DEF RECALL

4 5 6

GHI JKL MNOFNC

7 8 9

PQRS TUV WXYDCNF

* 0 #OPER

LINE /SPD

HOLD TRF ANS SPKR

09 010 011

013 014 015

012

016


Revision 4.0


TECm-

d to ay

t Lineine andestric-


3. Precautions

• Before assigning the key data for Dterm by this command, be sure to assign the station data (TN, STN, = 12 (Dterm)) of the Dterm by ASDT/AAST command. The station number assigned by ASDT/AAST comand is referred to as “My Line”.

Note: The “My Line” corresponds to the physical port associated with the LENS of a DLC/ELC card.

• By assigning another station line to a function button via this command an incoming call terminatestation line other than My Line can be answered or can be transferred to elsewhere as in the case of the MLine. A station line other than My Line is referred to as a “Sub Line”. A “Sub Line” can be assigned noonly to a Dterm but to any conventional telephone. In addition, the station data for My Line and Submust be assigned via the ASDT/AAST command before the key data is assigned. When the Sub Lthe My Line belong to different tenants, use the ATNR command and clear the “Tenant to Tenant Rtion”.

126

115

104

93

82

71

24

18

23

17

12

06

11

05

22

16

212019

151413

SPKRANSTRFHOLD

/SPD

LINE

OPER

#0*

CNFWXYDTUVPQRS

987

FNCMNOJKLGHI

654

RECALLDEFABC

321

MICO

10

04

090807

030201

Buttons

Line/Feature


AKYD CM0-01


ee Prime

the

e as-by the8: Vir-

is

ata can Add-On

bit0 = 1.roup 1,p 4 canle group

• A Multi-Line key (the key for My Line and Sub Line) on the Dterm can be assigned as “Prime Line”. If thPrime Line is not assigned, the My Line serves as the Prime Line. When the user goes off-hook, thLine is automatically selected on the Dterm.

• A virtual line can be assigned as a Sub Line of the Dterm. The virtual line can be used the same way as My Line for outgoing calls and other service operations.

Note: Virtual Line-----A virtual LENS exists only in memory, but does not exist physically. Data can bsigned but no hardware is provided for it; ex. LENS = 000311. The virtual LENS is assigned ASDT/AAST command in the same way as for an ordinary line. (The telephone class is TEC = 1tual Line)

• The Dterm (16-button type) provides 16 line/feature buttons. The default data for each line/feature button as follows:

If the default data is to be used, assignments using the AKYD command will not be necessary. Station dbe assigned using the ASDT/AAST command unless a key is changed, the default data is used or theModule is used. All buttons must be programmed if any of the default data is changed.

The ability to assign line appearances across module groups is available when system one index 321The way this functions is that stations within module group 0 can appear on stations within module gstations within module group 2 can appear on stations in module group 3, stations within module grouappear on stations in module group 5 and stations within module group 6 can appear on stations in modu7. This feature is available for Dterm Series III instruments only.

1Pick-up

2FWD-BY

3FWD-

4OVER-RIDE

5VOICE

6MSG

7S&R

8LAST#

9PRIME LINE

10 11 12 13 14 15 16SYS-SPEED

KEYS 10 - 15 SPEED-CALL ONE TOUCH


Revision 4.0


assign

(Not

ey in

(Num-

epa-signed,ction keys

regis-

When assigning the line/feature buttons as function keys, take the following precautions:

a. My Line Key must be programmed.

b. Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned as KYI = 0 (Not used)

c. The following function keys are basically fixed. (Refer to Figure 2-4):

FKY = 13: CONF (Three-Way Calling)FKY = 18: TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls)FKY = 20: HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold)FKY = 28: ANSWERFKY = 51: MICFKY = 52: SPEAKER FKY = 57: RECALL

d. When DK Operation service (Incoming Line Preference, Idle Line Preference) is to be provided,“1” to parameter LN PRE. Also, assign ORG (Originate) button as a function button.

• The default key data provided for Dterm (16-button type) is also provided for the Dterm (24-button type).When assigning the key data of the line/feature button, take the following precautions:

a. My Line Key must be assigned in KYN = 1-24, and KYN = 25-40 should be assigned KYI = 0used).

My Line in KYN = 17-24 cannot be assigned without assigning any Line Key or any Function KKYN = 1-16.

b. The following function keys are basically fixed:

FKY = 13: CONF (Three-Way Calling)FKY = 18: TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls)FKY = 20: HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold)FKY = 28: ANSWERFKY = 51: MICFKY = 52: SPEAKERFKY = 57: RECALL

c. Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used).

• The FKY = 49: Speed Calling-One Touch cannot be assigned to a Key Number (KYN) larger than 16.bers larger than 16 are for feature application).

• For Call Forwarding-Busy Line and Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer, refer to ASYD SYS1 Index 5 (srate/common access for C.F.-Busy Line and C.F.-Don’t Answer). If common access codes are asonly one key is required to activate the features. If separate access codes are assigned, separate funmust be assigned.

• For Dterm (24-button type) the FKY = 55: One-Touch changeover (PAGE) should be assigned whentering destination numbers as one-touch speed calling code more than 12.


AKYD CM0-01


ed with (24 des-

by this

reing pre-

sed).

ing the

tton isur

Note: Dterm (24-button type) is equipped with 12 one-touch buttons. Each of these buttons is assign2-page memory (Page 0 and Page 1). One destination number can be assigned on a page basistination numbers in all). Therefore, when originating an outgoing call, the page of one-touch button can be designated function key.

• There is no default key data provided for Dterm (8-button type). Thus, the key data for all the line/featubuttons must be programmed. When assigning the key data of the line/feature button, take the followcautions:

a. My Line Key must be assigned in KYN = 1-8, and KYN = 9-16 should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not u

b. The following function keys are basically fixed:

FKY = 13: CONF (Three-Way Calling)FKY = 18: TRANSFER (Call Transfer-All Calls)FKY = 20: HOLD (Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold)FKY = 28: ANSWERFKY = 51: MICFKY = 52: SPEAKERFKY = 57: RECALL

c. Not used line/feature buttons should be assigned KYI = 0 (Not used).

• In conjunction with intercom service, take the following precautions:

a. Before assigning the Intercom Key Data by this command, assign the Intercom Group Data uscommand AICD/ADIM.

b. When providing the Intercom service, assign “The response priority when the SPEAKER bupressed or the station goes off-hook” by parameter “PRl”. (Refer to Step (a) of (5) “Entry Procede”).When not providing the Intercom service, assign PRI = 0.

• When this command is used, the DLC/ELC card must be reinitialized (MB switch UP-DOWN).


Revision 4.0


(a). Theentered

om key.see Step

1) and

” is


List up: LKYD

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AASTDeletion: ASDT, RASTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LLEN, LHST, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

It is recommended that the following procedure be read carefully before entering data in this command.

• Assign the data for the My Line before assigning the Prime Line data. For data assignment, see StepTN and STN of the My Line are also displayed in Steps (b), (c), (d) and (e) but do not need to be again.

• Assign the function button data. Each button can be used as a Function key, Sub Line key, and IntercFor data entry procedure of function keys, see Step (c). For data entry procedure of Sub Line keys, (d). For data entry procedure of Intercom keys, see Step (e). The display changes at each of these steps.

Note: When all data corresponding to a specific KYN has been entered, the KYN increases by one (+the MAT is then ready to accept the data for the next KYN.

Note: “WRT?” prompt is displayed after all function button data has been assigned or when “ESCpressed while MAT displays KYN information.


AKYD CM0-01


a. Enter the Station number of the Prime Line.

TN: Tenant Number (for My Line) STN: Station Number (for My Line)TP: Type of Dterm (0-3)

0: Dterm (8 or 16-button type) = Buttons 1 - 16 assignable Note 11: Dterm (8 or 16-button type) With Add on Module or Dterm (24-button type) =

Buttons 1-40 assignable Note 22: Dterm (8 or 16-button type) = Buttons 1-16 and FLEX Keys assignable Note 33: Dterm (8 or 16-button type) With Add on Module or Dterm (24-button type) =

1-40 and FLEX Keys assignable Note 4

Note 1: When assigning Buttons up to 16.

Note 2: When assigning Buttons more than 16.

Note 3: When assigning Buttons up to 16 and FLEX keys.

Note 4: When assigning Buttons more than 16 and FLEX keys.

RING: Ringing Information (0-3) 0: No Multi-lines ring. 1: All the Multi-lines ring.2: Only the Prime Line rings.3: Ringing Data is to be set for each individual Multi-line.

PRI: Priority of Answering a Call (0-4)

Note: To answer a call on a line having no priority, a button must be pressed.

Assignment of Key Data for Dterm

TN:1 STN:3000


Revision 4.0


L: As per the Preference pattern when the SPEAKER button is pressed.D: Dial Intercom Line (Ringing Station)A: Automatic Intercom Line (Ringing Station)M: Manual Intercom Line (Signaling Station)

PRILINE PREFERENCE

REMARKS1 2 3

0 L – –

1 D L –

2 A L –

3 M L –

4 A M L


AKYD CM0-01


b. Enter the Line Preference Data:

LN PRE: Line Preference (0/1): 0: Prime Line Pickup1: Key Line Select

SPK: Line Preference for Speaker button (0 Only): 0: Prime Line Preference

ANS: Line Preference for Answer button (0-2): 0: Prime Line Preference1: Incoming Line Preference2: Ringing Line Preference

ORG: Line Preference for Originating button (0/1):0: Prime Line Preference1: Idle Line Preference

MWD: Message Waiting Data Display Selection (0/1) 0: MW data display on the top line1: MW data display on the bottom line

PL TN: Tenant Number of the Prime Line. STN: Station Number of the Prime Line.S: OG from Prime Line (0/1)

0: Allowed1: Inhibited


TN:1 STN:3000

TP:0 RING:3 PRI:0 LN PRE:1

SPK:0 ANS:0 ORG:0 MWD:0

PL TN:1 STN:3000 S:0


Revision 4.0


c. For using keys as Function Keys

TN: Tenant Number (for My Line)STN: Station Number (for My Line)KYN: Key Number

KYN = 1-16 (TP = 0)KYN = 1-40 (TP = 1)

KYl: Service Index0: Not used 1: Function Key

FKY: Function Key Number1: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (FWD-BY)2: Call Forwarding-All Calls (FWD) 3: Executive Right of Way (OVERRIDE) 4: Call Waiting 5: Call Back (CALL BACK)6: Message Reminder (MSG) 7: Save and Repeat (S&R)8: Last Number Dialed (LAST #)9: Boss-Secretary-Message Waiting Lamp Control; Set 10: Call Hold (CALL HOLD) 11: Boss-Secretary-Message Waiting Lamp Control; Cancel 12: Call Pickup-Group (PICK) 13: Three-Way Calling (CONF) 14: Voice Call (VOICE) 15: Speed Calling-System (SYS SPEED) 16: FNC17: CAS SHF18: Call Transfer-All Calls (TRANSFER) 19: UCD Busy Out20: Non-Exclusive Hold/Exclusive Hold (HOLD)21: Flash Button (FLASH)22: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (FWD-DA) 23-24: Not used 25: ISDN Malicious Call Trace26: Speed Calling-Station (Group) (STA SPEED) 27: Originate (ORG) 28: Answer (ANS)29: Data (DATA) 30: Display/Auto (DSPY/AUTO)


TN:1 STN:3155

KYN:2 KYI:1 FKY:12


AKYD CM0-01


31: Data Transfer (DTX)32: Not used 34-47: OAI/ACD (Note 1) 33: Wake Up Set (WUS) 34: Wake Up Reset (WUR)35: Do Not Disturb Set (DDS) 36: Do Not Disturb Reset (DDR) 37: Room Cut Off Set (RCS) 38: Room Cut Off Reset (RCR) 39: Message Waiting Set (MWS)40: Message Waiting Reset (MWR)41: Check In (C/I)42: Check Out (C/O)43: Status (STS) 44: Audit (AUD)45: Enter (ENT)46: Clear Enter (E)47: UCD Call Waiting Lamp (In case Business System)/END (END)/

(In case H/M System)48: Privacy Set/Release49: Speed Calling-One Touch50: Do Not Disturb (DND) 51: MIC52: Speaker53-54: Not used 55: PAGE 56: OFF/ON HOOK FOR HEADSET57: Recall58: Not used 59: Release Key60: Manual Signaling Key61: DSS62-82: Not used83: Retain for Eight Conference Equipment84: Serial Call85 Internal Zone Paging86 Not used

Note 1: For systems with OAI/ACD, 34-47 OAI/ACD.

Note 2: For H/M system. (System Series 6100 version software or earlier.)

Note 2


Revision 4.0


87: Wake Up Set (WUS)88: Wake Up Reset (WUR)89: Do Not Disturb Set (DDS)90: Do Not Disturb Reset (DDR)91: Room Cut Off Set (RCS)92: Room Cut Off Reset (RCR)93: Message Waiting Set (MWS)94: Message Waiting Reset (MWR)95: Check In (C/I)96: Check Out (C/O)97: Status (STS)98: Audit (AUD)99: Enter (ENT)100: Clear Enter (E)101: END (END)102-112: Not used113: Calling Number/Calling Name DisplayNote114: Not used115: Call Pickup ExpandNote116: Not used117: Ringer Mute Note118: Call Return Note119-320: Not used

Note: For H/M System (System software: 6200 or later version)

Note


AKYD CM0-01


d. For using the key as a Multi-Line key.

TN: Tenant Number (for My-Line)STN: Station Number (for My-Line) KYN: Key Number (1-16) KYI: Service Index (Enter 2.)

2: Multi-line KD: Kind of Line (Enter 0.)

0: Line TN: Tenant Number (for Sub-Line) STN: Station Number (for Sub-Line)RG: Ringing Information for Each Line (0-7)

Valid only if Ring = 3 in Item (a).

RG(0-7)RINGING

DELAY TIMEDAY NIGHT

0 No Ringing No Ringing

1 Ringing No Ringing 0 sec.

2 No Ringing Ringing 0 sec.

3 Not used Not used

4 Ringing Ringing 30 sec.





TN:1 STN:3155

KYN:2 KYI:2 KD:0

TN:1 STN:3111 RG:0


Revision 4.0


e. For using the key for an Intercom

TN: Tenant Number (for My-Line)STN: Station Number (for My-Line) KYN: Key Number (1-16)KYI: Service Index (Enter 2.)


1: Intercom-OptionICM: Kind of Intercom

0: Automatic1: Manual2: Dial

G-ID: Group ID Number (1-50)

f. For using the key for a DSS key on DSS Console

TN: Tenant Number (for My-Line)STN: Station Number (for My-Line) KYN: Key Number (1-40)KYI: Service Index (Enter 2.)


2: DSS Console KeyTN: Tenant Number (for DSS)STN: Station Number (for DSS)


TN:1 STN:3155

KYN:3 KYI:2 KD:1

ICM:0 G-ID:1


TN:1 STN:3155

KYN:4 KYI:2 KD:2

TN:1 STN:3112


ALDN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

onsole

siness, tel

ALDN Assignment of Listed Directory Number


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the Listed Directory Number (LDN) to an Attendant Cwhen DID service is in operation.

3. Precautions

• The number if digits in the LDN must be the same as the number of digits in a station number.


List up: LSTN, LHST

5. Entry Procedure

• When LDN Night Transfer service is not provided.

TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER(Y/N): Enter N.

Assignment of Listed Directory Number

TN:1 LDN:3322

NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N): N

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ALDNCM0-01Business, Hotel

• When LDN Night Transfer service is provided.

a. Station

TN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory NumberNIGHT TRANSFER(Y/N): Enter Y. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 1.)

1: STNSTN: Station Number

b. Number of Outside Party

TN: Tenant NumberLDN: Listed Directory NumberNIGHT TRANSFER(Y/N): Enter Y.TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 2.)

2: OutsideOUTSIDE: Number of Outside Party


TN:1 LDN:3322NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):YTYPE:1 STN:5100 WRT?


TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):YTYPE:2 OUTSIDE:8421567WRT?


ALDN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

c. Abbreviated Digit Code

TN: Tenant NumberLDN: Listed Directory Number NIGHT TRANSFER(Y/N): Enter Y. TYPE: Night Transfer Type (Enter 3.)

3: ADCADC: Abbreviated Digit Code


TN:1 LDN:3322 NIGHT TRANSFER (Y/N):YTYPE:3 ADC:888


Revision 4.0

ALLCSYSBusiness, Hotel

ile line

ata 1, be

siness, tel

ALLC Assignment of Line Load Control

1. Floppy Disk Name: SYS

2. Function

This command is used to designate start and stop of line load control.

3. Precautions

• Starting of Line Load Control will result as follows:

a. Only the stations specified by parameter SFI = 16 of the ASFC command can originate a call whLoad Control is in effect. All other stations will be restricted.

b. Whether incoming calls will be restricted during Line Load Control is determined by System DINDEX 59. If incoming restriction is in effect, an incoming call from a C.O. line or tie line will notterminated.

• For ICS, control of all LPs (ALL LP ? Y) cannot be designated.


None


ALLC SYS

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For a specific LP

ALL LP?: Operation Mode Selection (Enter N.)N: Only One LP

LP: Local Processor (or for IMGxh, Local Partition Number)LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS:

0: Line Load Control Stop1: Line Load Control Start2: Automatic Line Load Control is in execution (display only) 3: Status of all LPs not coinciding (display only)

Note: Of the above parameters, only 0 and 1 can be designated.

• For all LPs

ALL LP?: Operation Mode Selection (Enter Y.)Y: ALL LPs

LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0: Line Load Control Stop1: Line Load Control Start2: Automatic Line Load Control is in execution (display only) 3: Status of all LPs not coinciding (display only)

Note: Of the above parameters, only 0 and 1 can be designated.

Assignment of Line Load Control

ALL LP? N LP:0

LINE LOAD CONTROL

STATUS: 0

WRT?

Assignment of Line Load Control

ALL LP? Y LINE LOAD CONTROL STATUS: 0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ALMGCM0-11Business, Hotel

give thehe default

instance,

ALMG Assignment of Alarm Grade Data


2. Function

This command is used to make a flexible change of system message output grades. The PBX user canproper alarm grade to each system message according to its requirements. When assigning no data, talarm grades are automatically adopted.

3. Precautions

All of the system messages listed in the System Maintenance Manual are changeable except “6-A”.


Display: DFTDList Up: LLMG

5. Entry Procedure

• Initial Display

Note 1: When this value is not changed, the display changes to the entry of a system message. In this “WRT” does not appear on the screen.

Note 2: When the N key is pressed, the cursor returns to the entry of grade.

Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

Grade 0 and higher are registered Note 1SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <- -> 17 - Z

WRT ? Y Note 2LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ

GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3<- - - - - ->

Low High


ALMG CM0-11

Business, Hotel

• Assignment (for changing default Alarm Grade Data)

Note: A system message corresponding to the input data appears on the screen.


Grade 0 and higher are registered.SYSTEM MESSAGE:0-A <- -> 17 - Z

SYSTEM MESSAGE: 1 - UNote LMP 0:NON 1:SUP 2: MN 3:MJ

DLKC DATA TRANSFER FAILURE (PERMANENT)GR(Print out Grade) : 0 1 2 3

<- - - - - ->Assignment Low High

LMP: MJ GR: 0 WRT ? Y

MSG LMP GR MSG LMP GR MSG LMP GR1-A MJ 3 1-J MJ 3 1-S MJ 31-B SUP 1 1-K SUP 1 1-T SUP 11-C MN 2 1-L MN 2 1-U MN 21-D NON 0 1-M NON 0 1-V NON 01-E SUP 1 1-N SUP 1 1-W SUP 11-F NON 0 1-O NON 0 1-X NON 01-G SUP 1 1-P SUP 1 1-Y SUP 11-H MN 2 1-Q MN 2 1-Z MN 21-I SUP 1 1-R SUP 1


Revision 4.0

ALMGCM0-11Business, Hotel

• Change (for changing assigned Alarm Grade Data)






<- - - - - ->Change / Deletion Low High

LMP:SUP GR: 0 WRT ? Y



ALMG CM0-11

Business, Hotel

• Deletion (for deleting assigned Alarm Grade Data)






<- - - - - ->Change / Deletion Low High

LMP: MN GR: 0 WRT ? Y



Revision 4.0

ALPECM0-04Business, Hotel

hich is

n

siness, tel

ALPE Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the eight-party Conference Trunk (CFT card), wseized in Line Privacy Expansion Service, on a per-tenant basis.

3. Precautions

• Assign “1” to parameter TN when “1” is assigned to parameter “TNF”.

• The Station Number assigned to parameter “STN” must correspond to the assignment of No. 0 circuit othe CFT card.


List up: LLPE

5. Entry Procedure

TNF: Tenant Flag0: Separate 1: Common

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number

Assignment of Line Privacy Expansion

TNF:1

TN:1

STN:3112

WRT?


AMAT CM0-01

Business, Hotel

r Console

Nightl place

ndant

siness, tel

AMAT Assignment of Master Attendant Data


2. Function

When more than one Attendant Console has been installed per tenant, this command assigns a Mastefor controlling the Day/Night function of all the Attendant Consoles on a tenant basis.

3. Precautions

• If this Master Console is placed in the Night mode, all incoming calls will be directed to TAS or a Connection Fixed station. Removing the handset and/or pressing the Night key on the ATTCON, wilthe console in the Night mode.


List up: LMAT

-Parameter ATN- Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRK Display: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberATN: Attendant Number or Night Attendant Number MASTER: Master Attendant Number NIGHT: Night Master Attendant Number

Note: Parameters MASTER and NIGHT are displayed when a Master Attendant or Night Master Attehas already been assigned.

Assignment of Master ATT Data

TN:1

ATN:1 MASTER ATT


Revision 4.0

AMDDCM0-01Business, Hotel

h CDN

Item

N,

.

siness, tel

AMDD Assignment of MODEM Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display MODEM Trunk Data.

3. Precautions


• If the ESC key is pressed at the time of MODEM data entry, the operation skips to “WRT”?.


List up: LMDD

5. Entry Procedure

MDM No.: MODEM Number (1-16)

Note: Once the MDM No. has been entered for CDN 1, it does not need to be entered again for eacassignment.

Note 1: This parameter (CDN) is the Item Number of MODEM Data parameter. Data entry starts from theNumber of the parameter designated here.Note, however, that at each data entry, the Item Number is incremented automatically.

Note 2: If, at the time of data entry, SPACE + ENTER key is entered, the cursor returns to parameter CDand then operation can be started from Item Number.

Note 3: After the data has been set or when ESC is pressed at the time of data entry, “WRT?” displays

Assignment of MODEM Data ASSIGNMENT

MDM NO:1 CDN:9 Note1 WRT? Y

FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT FUNC DT

DR : 0 R : 0 HDX: 0 MD : 0 2W/4W: 0SPEED: 0 ASYNC: 0 FCY : 0 RSGT: 0

Note 2, 3


AMDD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

CDN: Counter Display Number (0-9) DR(CDN = 1): Data Ready On (0-3)

0: Check1: No Check 2: Supervise3: Not Supervise

R(CDN = 2): Modem Ringing (0/1)

0: No Ring at MODEM 1: Ring at MODEM

HDX (CDN = 3): Half/Full Duplex (0/1)

0: Full Duplex1: Half Duplex

MD(CDN = 4): MODEM/DST (0/1)

0: MODEM1: DST

2W/4W (CDN = 5): 2W MODEM/4W MODEM (0/1)

0: 2W 1: 4W

SPEED (CDN = 6): Bit Speed (0-31)

0: 50 bps 1: 75 bps 2: 110 bps3: 150 bps4: 200 bps5: 300 bps6: 600 bps7: 1200 bps 8: 2400 bps 9: 4800 bps 10: 9600 bps11: 19.2 Kbps12: 48 Kbps13: 56 Kbps14: 64 Kbps15-31: Not used

ASYNC (CDN = 7): Asynchronous (0/1)

0: Asynchronous 1: Synchronous


Revision 4.0

AMDDCM0-01Business, Hotel

FCY(CDN = 8): Facility (0-3)

0: Outgoing/Incoming 1: Outgoing only2: Incoming only3: Not used

RSGT(CDN = 9): RS-CS Guard Time (0-15)

0-7: Not used 8: 0 ms 9: 30 ms10: 60 ms 11: 120 ms 12: 240 ms 13: 360 ms 14: 720 ms 15: 1080 ms


AMND CM0-01

Business, Hotel

ny trunk

n num-

ich the

ameter

siness, tel

AMND Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the maximum necessary digits to be sent out on aroute. This data determines the register release timing.

3. Precautions

• Destination Code: Enter the minimum number of digits, including the access code, of the destinatiober required to determine the maximum digits to be dialed.

• Maximum Necessary Digits: Enter the maximum number of digits, including the access code, for whregister must wait when the Destination Code is dialed.

• When this command is used for Forced Account Codes/Authorization Codes, the Tenant (T/N) parmust be assigned as zero (0).


List up: LNND


Revision 4.0

AMNDCM0-01Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number DC: Destination Code (Max. 10 digits) MND: Maximum Necessary Digits (1-24)TOLL: Toll Code Identification (0/1)

0: Local Code1: Toll Code

AN: Account Number0: Out of Service1: Account Code

RATE: Option Service Data Always assign “0”A/D: Analog/Digital Line Data

0: Analog1: Digital

Assignment of Maximum Necessary Digits

TN:1 DC:999

MND:10 TOLL:1

AN:1 RATE:0

A/D:0

WRT?


ANCD CM0-02

Business, Hotel

r Failure

T (As-

SI (As-

siness, tel

ANCD Assignment of Night Connection Data


2. Function

This command is necessary to assign the correspondence between C.O. trunks and the 12NCU (PoweTransfer) circuit card when the PBX is in the Night Mode.

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, confirm that the 12NCU the (PFT) circuit card has been assigned in AUNsignment of Unit Data) command.

• The correspondence between C.O. trunks and the stations in the Night Mode is assigned in the ACsignment of Connection Service Index) command.


List up: LCFC

- Parameter RT -Assignment: ARTDDisplay: ARTDList up: LRTD

- Parameter TK -Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLENList up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

MG: Module Group Number (00-31) NCU PKG: PFT Card Number (0-3)PORT: Port Number of PFT Card (0-11)RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk Number

Assignment of Night Connection Data

MG:0

NCU PKG:0 PORT:0

RT:1 TK:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ANDDCM0-04Business, Hotel

Station

1, bl.

siness, tel

ANDD Assignment of Name Display Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete the User Information (Name, etc.) corresponding to eachNumber in Name Display Service.

3. Precautions

• Station Numbers must be assigned.

• This command cannot be used when OAI Name Display Service is in use.

• The number of digits to be assigned to parameter “NAME” is determined by ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 24

• The following must be set: ASYD1, Index 31, b1, b2 =1.


List up: LNDD

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant number STN: Station Number NAME: User’s Office Name (8 digits/16 digits)

Assignment of Name Display Data

TN:1

STN:3112

NAME:NEC TOKYO

WRT?


ANND CM0-01

Business, Hotel

k route.

n be en-

ust be

deter-

siness, tel

ANND Assignment of Necessary Digits Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the necessary number of digits for a particular trun

3. Precautions

• When entering the Incoming/Outgoing Call code, IC/OG can be entered as characters inputs or catered numerically as 0/1.

• Number of Necessary Digits: The Number of Necessary Digits (NND), including the access code, massigned.

• The number of digits for an Incoming Connection (IC) is not available. Therefore, data assignment is notrequired.

• This data must be assigned when SRV = OGC/OGCA is assigned via “ASPA” command. This datamines the number of necessary digits to be sent out to the distant office.


List up: LNND


5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberIC/OG: IC: Incoming Call

OG: Outgoing Call (Enter OG.)NND: Number of Necessary Digits (1-24)

Assignment of Necessary Digits Data

RT:1 IC/OG:OG

NND:5

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ANPDCM0-01Business

the ser-

ata need

ed. (0/

signed.

lreadying plan

ice”

N, ...,essary

ield on

siness
ANPD Assignment of Numbering Plan Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determinevice which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation).

3. Precautions


• If the numbering plan data is being used in common by all tenants accommodated in the system, donly be assigned for TN = 1.

Note: This type of assignment will only function correctly if ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assign1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for all Tenants)

• When changing any of the numbering plan data, the old data must be deleted before new data is as

• When the first digit of a particular numbering plan is to be deleted and the first DC (Digit Code) is ain use (i.e. Station Number) the Station Numbering data must first be deleted before the new numberdata can be assigned via this command.

• When entering the Connection Status Index (CI) information, “Normal”, “Hooking”, or “Busy Servmust be designated by entry of the character N, H, or B.

• Consideration should be given when the system has various digits stations (2 digit STN, 3 digit STetc.) whose first digit is the same number. In this case, only a station whose NND (Number of NecDigits) values are the same in the ASPA. ANPD command can be displayed in the Busy Lamp FATTs. The remaining stations which do not meet the above condition cannot be displayed.


List up: LNPD


ANPD CM0-01

Business

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number1ST DC: 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #)CI: Connection Status Index

N: Normal ServiceH: Hooking Service B: Busy Service

NND: Number of Necessary Digits (1-6) BLF: Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT

0: Out of Service 1: In service

Assignment of Numbering Plan Data

TN:1 1STDC:5

CI:H

NND:1 BLF:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AOFCCM0-11Business, Hotel

“

siness, tel

AOFC Assignment of Office Name


2. Function

This command provides users with a facility to assign their office name. The office name appears on the displayand on printed out sheets.

3. Precautions

• Up to 20 characters can be assigned (inclusive of blanks and numbers).

• To delete the data, press the “space” key 20 times.

• Entry of “/” key cannot cease this command while you are entering data. To end this command, pressESC”key, then “Return to menu? (Y/N)” is displayed on the screen.


ASYD, SYS, INDEX96-115

5. Entry Procedure

OFFICE NAME: Office Name (Max. 20 characters)<RETURN>: Execute<ESC>: Menu

Assignment of Office Name Assignment

Office Name: NEC TOKYO

WRT? Y

Return to menu? (Y/N)


AOPR CM0-02

Business, Hotel

ng Num-umber.

een as-

igned or as “0”

ust be

igned to

siness, tel

AOPR Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display the routing pattern for each Outgoing Pattern Routiber (OPR), and to assign, delete and display the SKIP information for skipping digits and the Pattern NLocation (PNL) for adding the digits designated in the AADC (Assignment of Additional Digit) command

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, confirm that an Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has bsigned in the AFRS (Assignment of Flexible Route Selection) command.

• When a Pattern Number Location (PNL) is assigned or deleted in this command, it must also be assdeleted in the AADC command. However, this is not applicable when the PNL parameter is assigned(invalid).

• In the event that a Tie Line is busy and route advance is to a DDD Line, a value larger than 128 massigned to the PNL.

• A maximum of 256 OPR’s (0-255) can be assigned, and a maximum of eight (8) routes can be asseach OPR.


List up: LOPR

-Parameter TDPTN- Assignment: ATCP Deletion: ATCP Display: ATCP List up: LTCP

-Parameter PNL-Assignment: AADC Deletion: AADC Display: AADC List up: LOPR


Revision 4.0

AOPRCM0-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7)OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255) RA: Order of Route Advance (0-7)E: Route Advance End Indication (0/1: Ended/-) RT: Outgoing Route Number SKIP: Number of digits to be skipped (0-24) PNL: Pattern Number Location (0-255) (Option 0-999)OVFT: Overflow Tone (0/1: -/Overflow Tone) PRSC: Priority Restriction Class (0-15)

Assignment of Outgoing Pattern Routing

TDPTN:0 OPR:0 RA:0

E:0 RT:1 SKIP:0

PNL:1 0VFT:0 PRSC:0

WRT?


AOSP CM0-02

Business, Hotel

ing Se-

O) has

siness, tel

AOSP Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display skip and additional digit information for each Outgolection Translation Pattern Number.

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, confirm that an Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNbeen assigned in the ASTP (Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern) command.


List up: LSLP

5. Entry Procedure

PNO: Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15)SKIP: Number of digits to be skipped (0-24)ADD: Number of digits to be added (0-4)DC: Additional Digit Information (Max. 4 digits)

Assignment of Outgoing Selection Pattern

PNO:1 SKIP:1ADD:2 DC:12 WRT?


Revision 4.0

APADCM0-02Business, Hotel

k to sta-

g call

siness, tel

APAD Assignment of PAD Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display PAD control data for tandem connections, and truntion connections.

3. Precautions

• Details of PAD data are as follows:

PAD Data 0: Switch Setting of the Circuit Card NotePAD Data 1: 2 dB PAD ON NotePAD Data 2: 4 dB PAD ON NotePAD Data 3: 6 dB PAD ON NotePAD Data 4: 8 dB PAD ON NotePAD Data 15: PAD OFF

Note: Switch setting depends on the Trunk Circuit Card.

• When data is not assigned in this command, the PAD is set for PAD OFF.

• When assigning Station connection, IC PAD data is valid for outgoing call from the station/incominfrom the trunk.


List up: LPAT



APAD CM0-02

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TDM/ST: Tandem Connection or Station Connection T: Tandem ConnectionS: Station

ICRT: Incoming Route Number OGRT: Outgoing Route Number IC PAD: Incoming PAD Data (1-15)OG PAD: Outgoing PAD Data (1-15)IC/OG PAD Data is as follows:

0: No APAD Setting1: 2 dB PAD On Note2: 4 dB PAD On Note 3: 6 dB PAD On Note4: 8 dB PAD On Note5-14: Not used15: PAD OFF

Note: Switch setting depends on the Trunk Circuit Card.

Assignment of PAD Data

TDM/ST:T

ICRT:1 OGRT:1

ICPAD:1 OGPAD:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

APCRCM0-02Business, Hotel

es.

siness, tel

APCR Assignment of Primary Call Restriction


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display Primary Call Restriction data for specific digit cod

3. Precautions

• Parameter PDC includes the Access Code.


List up: LPCR

-Parameter RSC- Assignment: ARSCDeletion: ARSCDisplay: ARSC List up: LRTC

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number BLOCK: Block Number (0-49) PDC: Primary Call Digit Code (Max. 24 digits)RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)RES: Restriction Data


Assignment of Primary Call Restriction

TN:1 BLOCK:0

PDC:67854

RSC:15 RES:0

WRT?


APHN CM0-02

Business, Hotel

a Phan- called

the cor-

umber

siness, tel

APHN Assignment of Phantom Station Number


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display a phantom number for a station.

3. Precautions

• Numbers that are being used as station or LDN numbers cannot be used as phantom numbers.

• One Phantom Number can be assigned to one Station Number. However, when an incoming call totom Number has terminated to the corresponding station, no station hunting is performed even if thestation is a member station of a hunt group.

• An assigned Phantom Number can be deleted by one of the following two methods:

a. Designate the desired Phantom Number, then delete it.

b. Enter a space for the desired Phantom Number and delete the Phantom Number by designatingresponding Station Number.

• A maximum of five phantom numbers can be assigned to a station. (Including individual phantom nand phantom number in a hunting group)


List up: LPAE

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN


Revision 4.0

APHNCM0-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberPHSTN: Phantom NumberPH: Hunting Condition of Phantom No. (0/1)

0: Individual Phantom No. 1: Phantom No. in a Hunting Group

STN: Station Number

Assignment of Phantom Station Number

TN:1 PHSTN:6666PH:0 STN:3113 WRT?


APSW CM0-03

Business, Hotel

s A Gradeis com-

cter in the

each port

n the

.

siness, tel

APSW Assignment of Password Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display Password Service data. Two grades of passwordare as-signed in Data Type 1 of this command. A Grade 1 password allows unlimited access to the commands. 2 password allows access to a limited number of commands, which are designated in Data Type 2 of thmand.

3. Precautions

• The Password code is a four (4) character alphanumeric code. A space cannot be used as a charapassword code.

• After the data is assigned by this command, Password service is available when data is assigned to in ASYD, SYS 1, Index 116-123.

• When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explanation oscreen.

• A Grade 2 password code cannot be assigned without assigning a Grade 1 password.

• A maximum of sixteen (16) different commands can be assigned to each Grade 2 password.

• When a command name consists of more than five (5) characters, enter the first four (4) characters


None


Revision 4.0

APSWCM0-03Business, Hotel

-

5. Entry Procedure

a. To enter Grade 1 and Grade 2 password codes

TYPE: Data Type (Enter 1.)1: Password Code Data

GRD-1: Grade-1 Password Code CNT: Number of GRD-2 Passwords to be assigned (1-16) GRD-2: Grade-2 Password Code (s)

b. To enter the commands to be accessed by each Grade 2 password code:

TYPE: Data Type (Enter 2.)2: Grade-2 Command Data

GRD-2: Grade-2 Password Code CNT: Number of commands to be accessed (1-16)CMMND: Command Names (4 Characters)

Assignment of Password Data

TYPE.1

GRD-1: 8888

CNT: 2 2 GRD-2:2222

When the data has been entered, the next Grade-2 Password Code can be assigned.

Priority of Grade-2 Password Codes is displayed.

Assignment of Password Data

TYPE: 2

GRD-2: 2222

CNT: 2 2 CMMND:ATRK

WRT?Priority of Grade-2 Password Command Name isdisplayed.

When the number of CMMNDs designated in CNT have been entered, ‘WRT?’ displays.


ARAC CM0-01

Business, Hotel

mote Ac-

ommand.

sign the

siness, tel

ARAC Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code


2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete the access code and its corresponding tenant number for Recess to System.

3. Precautions

• An access code designated in any other command cannot be assigned, changed or deleted in this c

• The tenant number entered in this command is the one to be used for Remote Access to System.

• When Remote Access to System service is executed from a DID trunk, this command is used to asAccess Code for it. The Access Code is an unused station number.


List up: LRACDisplay: DSTN

5. Entry Procedure

ICTN: Tenant Number of IC TrunkACC: Access Code (Max. 5 digits) TN: Tenant Number for Authorization Code

Assignment of Remote PBX Access Code

ICTN:1 ACC:999 TN:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ARDNCM0-08CCIS, Business, Hotel

on theed by

ll the

CIS, siness, tel

ARDN Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control


2. Function

This command is used for assigning, deleting, and displaying the PC (Point Code) of the Satellite PBXbasis of the Point Code Index No. of the Main PBX. If the Day/Night mode of the Main PBX is changmeans of this command, the Day/Night mode of the satellite PBX is also changed.

3. Precautions

• When there are plural Satellite PBX Offices By grouping Tenant Numbers, mode can be changed on aSatellite PBX offices or on each Tenant basis.

• This command is used only at the Main PBX.


List up: LRDN

5. Entry Procedure

INDEX: Point Code Index for Remote Day/Night Change (0-15) PC: Point Code (1-16383)

Assignment of Day/Night Remote Control

INDEX:1

PC:10

WRT?


ARNP CM0-01

Business, Hotel

nce withplied.

D com-

to RTr Dis-

siness, tel

ARNP Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display an access code for each individual route in accordathe ARTD command. This data must be assigned when SMDR, LCR, and/or Universal Senders are ap

3. Precautions

• This data must be assigned for billing management (When SMDR has been assigned in the ARTmand).

• This data becomes necessary when LCR or LCRS has been assigned in the ASPA command.

• In the case of the No.7 CCIS, LCR service must be used.

• In the case of the No.7 CCIS, the Office Code (Office ID Number) of the self office is to be assigned= 0. The Office Code assigned is used in Centralized Billing-CCIS service and Calling/Called Numbeplay-CCIS service.


List up: LRNP


Display: ARTDList up: LRTD

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberACC: Access Code (Max. 3 digits)

RT0: (Max. 4 digits)OTHER: (Max. 3 digits)

Note: When RT = 0, ACC is a maximum of four (4) digits.

Assignment of Reverse Numbering Plan Data

RT:1 ACC:11

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ARPCCM0-08CCIS, Business, Hotel

, delete

CIS, siness, tel

ARPC Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service


2. Function

This command is used to Centralized Service of Message Center within No.7 CCIS Network, to assignand display the Remote Point Code under the centralized office.

3. Precautions

This command is used by only No.7 CCIS Network Systems.


List up: LRPC

5. Entry Procedure

CSN: Centralized Service Number (1-7)

CNT: Remote Point Code Counter (1-32)RPC: Remote Point Code (1-16383)

1 Message Center

2-7 Not used

Assignment of Remote Point Code for Centralized Service

CSN: 1 CNT:3 3 RPC: 3

WRT? Y

Entry Number


ARRC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

Route

ant

siness, tel

ARRC Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data


2. Function

This command is used for restriction of alternative routing of an Incoming Route (ICRT) to an Outgoing (OGRT).

3. Precautions



List up: LRCF

-Parameter RT- Assignment: ARTDDisplay: ARTDList up: LRTD

5. Entry Procedure

• For restriction via an Attendant Console:

ICRT: Incoming Route Number OGRT: Outgoing Route Number ARI: Alternative Route Index (A/D) (Enter A.)

A: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via the AttendConsole.

RES: Restriction DataIn case of Attendant Console (ATT)0: Alternate routing is restricted1: Alternate routing is allowed

Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data

ICRT:1 OGRT:1

ARI:A RES:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ARRCCM0-02Business, Hotel

ial

• Via Direct Dial Access from a station:

ICRT: Incoming Route Number OGRT: Outgoing Route Number ARI: Alternative Route Index (A/D) (Enter D.)

D: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via Direct DAccess from a station.

RES: Restriction DataIn case of Dial Access (DIAL)0: Alternate routing is restricted1: Alternate routing is allowed2: Toll Restriction is required

Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction Pattern Data

ICRT:1 OGRT:1

ARI:D RES:1

WRT?


ARSC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

triction

RI

a new

siness, tel

ARSC Assignment of Route Restriction Class


2. Function

This command is used to assign and display route restriction information according to the Route ResClass (RSC) of the station and the Route Number (RT).

3. Precautions

• Restriction data RES = 2 is valid only in the case of RRI = 3 when Toll Restriction is assigned.


• Data can be entered on a Day/Night basis, if specified in ASYD, SYS 1, Index 75, Bit 0.

• If SPACE and ENTER are pressed at the time of restriction data entry, the operation can be returned to Rentry.

• If the ESC key is pressed at the time of restriction data entry, the operation can skip to “WRT?”.

• For Hotel/Motel System, System data (ASYD, INDEX 170, -b3) must be assigned in order to activateRestriction class (RSC) for stations is Room Cut Off or Do Not Disturb mode.


List up: LRTC



Revision 4.0

ARSCCM0-02Business, Hotel

triction

5. Entry Procedure

• ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE Mode

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night ModeD: Day ModeN: Night Mode

TN: Tenant Number RT: Route NumberRSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) RSC13: When setting Room Cut Off RSC14: When setting Do Not Disturb RSC15: When setting Room Cut Off and Do Not DisturbRRI: Route Restriction Index (0-3)

0: IC Restriction Via ATT 1: IC Restriction Directly 2: OG Restriction Via ATT 3: OG Restriction Directly

RES: Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Connection is allowed2: Toll Restriction is required

Note: For Hotel/Motel System, with respect to Do Not Disturb, Room Cut Off service, when Route ResClass (RSC) is changed (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 170, b3 = 1), assign RSC13, 14 and 15.

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION

Note: Select the desired mode by use of (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.

←

←

TN:1 D/N:D RT:1 RRI:1 RSC:1 WRT?Y

RSC - 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

RRI 0 - 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 11 - 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 02 - 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 03 - 1 1 1 1 1 2 0 0 0 2 1 2 0 1 1 1

RES


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

oming

siness, tel

ARTD Assignment of Route Class Data


2. Function

Route Class Data, which provides each individual trunk route with specific functions (i.e,.outgoing, incsignaling, type of trunk, outgoing service, etc.), is to be assigned or deleted using this command.

3. Precautions

• Data entry can be initiated from any Counter Display Number (CDN).

• If the ESC key is pressed at the time of data entry, the operation can skip to “WRT?”.


List up: LRTD

5. Entry Procedure

• Enter the desired mode

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION


←

←


Revision 4.0

ARTDCM0-01Business, Hotel

gress

• Enter the Route Class Data

Note: CDN is the Item Number of Route Class Data parameter. The Item Number is incremented automatically.

Note: If SPACE and ENTER are pressed at the same time, the cursor returns to the parameter CDN.

Note: If the ESC key is pressed, the operation can skip to “WRT?” even if route class data entry is in pro(Refer to (3) Precautions).

RT: Route Number CDN: Counter Display Number (1-69)FUNC: A function corresponding to CDN, such as OSGS, is displayed.

Assignment of Route Class Data

RT:2 CDN: 6

CDN FUNC DT CDN FUNC DT CDN FUNC DT

1 OSGS :2 9 TQ :02 ONSG :33 ISGS :14 INSG :05 TF :36 TCL :87 L/T :18 RLP :2

Enter the Route Number.

Type the CDN number. Whenyou press ENTER, the cursorjumps to the correspondingfunction.

Enter the data, using thechoices displayed on the rightside of the screen.

“WRT?” displays after the lastCDN in the sequence or whenESC is pressed.


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

Shown below is the correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names):

CDN FUNCTION CDN FUNCTION

1 OSGS 35 WINK

2 ONSG 36 VAD

3 ISGS 37 CLD

4 INSG 38 FA

5 TF 39 BC

6 TCL 40 TCM

7 L/T 41 TDMQ

8 RLP 42 TRSC

9 TQ 43 BT

10 SMDR 44 PRV

11 TD 45 A/D

12 DR 46 CW

13 AC 47 TPQ

14 TNT 48 BL

15 LSG 49 TRKS

16 SMDR2 50 DPLY

17 H/M 51 not used

18 MC 52 2W/4W

19 ANI 53 FAAT

20 D 54 GW

21 MSB 55 TCMA

22 MSW 56 SMDR3

23 TR 57 HDT

24 OC 58 CD

25 R/L 59 CCH

26 RVSD 60 TC/EC

27 TL 61 IRE

28 ANS 62 SCR

29 TELP 63 LYER1

30 PAD 64 NET

31 OGRL 65 INT

32 ICRL 66 DC

33 HD 67 HKS

34 GUARD 68 SCF

69 SMDR4


Revision 4.0


Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination.

OSGS: Signal Interface for Outgoing(0-15) (CDN = 1) 0: No.7 CCIS

1: Ring Down2: Second Dial Tone3: Not used4: Sender (Immediate Start)5: Not used6: Sender (Delay Dial Start) 7: Sender (Wink start) 8-15: Not used

ONSG: Signal Selection for Outgoing (0-15) (CDN = 2) 0: Not used

1: DP, 10 pps, 33% Make2: PB, 60 msec. Interruption or No.7 CCIS3: DP/PB 4: MF5: DP, 20 pps, 33% Make 6: Not used7: DP, 20 pps, 50% Make 8: PB, 120 msec. Interruption9: DP, 10 pps, 40% Make 10: MFC11-15: Not used

ISGS: Signal Interface for Incoming (0-15)(CDN = 3) 0: No.7 CCIS

1: Ring Down 2: Second Dial Tone3: Not used4: Sender (Immediate Start) 5: Not used6: Sender (Delay Dial Start) 7: Sender (Wink Start) 8-15: Not used


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

(TRK

INSG: Signal Selection for Incoming (0-15)(CDN = 4) 0: Not used

1: DP, 10 pps, 33% Make2: PB, 60 msec. Interruption or No.7 CCIS3: DP/PB 4: MF5: DP, 20 pps, 33% Make 6: Not used7: DP, 20 pps, 50% Make 8: PB, 120 msec. Interruption9: DP, 10 pps, 40% Make 10: MFC 11-15: Not used

TF: Type of Trunk Function (0-3) (CDN = 5) 0: Not used

1: Outgoing Trunk (OGT)2: Incoming Trunk (ICT)3: Bothway Trunk (BWT)

TCL: Trunk Class (1-31)(CDN = 6) This data is assigned in order to terminate Incoming Calls at their designated keys

ICI Key Lamps) on the Attendant Console.1: DDD Line2: FX Line 3: WATS Line 4: Tie Line/Announcement Trunk 5: CCSA Line 6: Toll Terminal 7: CAS Line8: Paging9: Code Call Trunk 10: Dictation Trunk11: General Paging Trunk12: Radio Paging Trunk13-31: Not used

L/T: Line/Trunk Identification (CDN = 7) This data should always be assigned as “1”

0: Not used (Line)1: Trunk

RLP: Trunk Release Pattern (0-3)(CDN = 8) 0: Calling Party Release (Outgoing only)

1: Not used2: First Party Release (either station or trunk side) 3: Not used


Revision 4.0


ming

com-Code

cess

cess

TQ: Outgoing Trunk Queuing (0/1)(CDN = 9) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

SMDR: Detailed Billing Information (0/1)(CDN = 10) 0: SMDR Out of Service (ORT not required)

1: SMDR In Service (ORT required for receiving dialed digits)

TD: Toll Denial-Battery Reversal Always assigned as zero (0)(CDN = 11)

DR: Distinctive Ringing Pattern (0/1) (CDN = 12) This parameter designates whether distinctive ringing will be provided for an inco

call.0: Distinctive Ringing is not required (ASYD, SYS 3, Index 3, Bit 0 = 0) 1: Distinctive Ringing is required (ASYD, SYS 3, Index 3, Bit 0 = 1)

AC: Flexible Routing Pattern Designation (0/1)(CDN = 13) When outgoing route selection pattern number is to be determined by the AFRS

mand, “1” is to be assigned if the Access Code is included in the Number Pattern (NPC).0: When flexible routing is executed, numbers are translated excluding the Ac

Code.1: When flexible routing is executed, numbers are translated including the Ac

Code.

TNT: Tenant Number Check(CDN = 14) This data should always be assigned as zero (0).

0: Tenant number check is not required in trunk selection.

LSG: Line Signal (0-15)(CDN = 15) 0: Loop

1: Ground Start C.O.Line2: CDH 3: Caller ID (Loop)4: Loop5: E&M Tie Line6: DX7: 24V48: Loop DID 9-11: Not used12: Speech Line (for No.7 CCIS or Bch of ISDN) 13: Signal Line (for No.7 CCIS or Dch of ISDN) 14: Not used 15: Not used

SMDR2: Detailed Billing Information (0-15)(CDN = 16)


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

The following explains what hexadecimal data “1” means for SMDR2:

• For incoming calls SMDR is required because Bit 0 is assigned as one (1).

• SMDR is required for toll and local outgoing calls because Bit 1 is assigned as zero (0).

• Metering pulses are detected by the system; therefore Bit 2 is zero (0) and Bit 3 is zero (0).

b3 b 2 b1 b0

0/1: -/Incoming Call (SMDR is re-quired)

0/1: SMDR is required for toll and local out-going calls/SMDR is required only for tolloutgoing calls.

0:1:2:3:

Metering pulses are necessary. Hexadecimalassignment is “01.”

Example:

8 4 2 1

b3 b2 b1 b0

0 0 0 1 b0 = bit 0b1 = bit 1. . .


Revision 4.0


H/M: Hotel service in CCIS No. 7. (CDN = 17) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

MC: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 18)

ANI: 911-ANI Service(CDN = 19) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service

D: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 20)

MSB: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 21)

MSW: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDNI = 22)

TR: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 23)

OC: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 24)

CONTENTS / INPUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

b0

0-Detailed billing is not required for incoming calls.

× × × ×

1- Detailed billing is required for incoming calls.

× × × ×

b1

0- Detailed billing is required for toll and local outgoing calls.

× × × ×

1- Detailed billing is required only for toll local outgoing calls.

× × × ×

b2,3

0-

1-Metering pulses are used. × × × ×

2-

3-


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

nswer

f time

ircuit

R/L: Attendant-Identification of Incoming Trunk Display(CDN = 25) 0: TN, RT, TK display

1: C.O. Line Number display

RVSD: Trunk Reversal Identification (CDN = 26) This data is necessary when a specific Trunk route provides battery reversal for a

supervision.0: Battery Reversal System1: Third Wire System

TL: Tone Level(CDN = 27) When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.

ANS: Answer signal from Trunk side.(CDN = 28) 0: No answer signal is given.

1: Answer signal is given.

TELP: Time Elapse Indication Service (0/1) (CDN = 29) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

Note: TELP (Time Elapse Indication) is a warning tone sent to the caller after a predetermined period ohas elapsed (usually 3 minutes).

PAD: This data determines Pad control on the ODT/DTI circuit card Note (CDN = 30) ODT DTI

0: No Pad 0: 8 db Pad1: 2 dB Pad 1: 2 dB Pad2: 4 dB Pad 2: 4 dB Pad3: 12 dB Pad 3: 6 dB Pad4: 16 dB Pad 4: 8 dB Pad5: Not used 5: Not used6: Not used 6: Not used

7: Pad Off

Note: CDN30=0: PAD value can also be set by switch setting on the ODT /DTI circuit card.CDN30= 1 ~ 6: Actual PAD value depends on PAD ROM on the trunk circuit card. (See the “CCard Manual”.


Revision 4.0


OGRL: Release timing for outgoing trunk connection.(CDN = 31) (Normally assigned as 0.)

0: 608 msec. 1: 224 msec. 2: 288 msec. 3: 352 msec.4: 416 msec. 5: 480 msec. 6: 544 msec. 7: 608 msec. 8: 672 msec. 9: 736 msec. 10: 800 msec.11: 864 msec. 12: 928 msec. 13: 992 msec. 14: 1056 msec.15: 1120 msec.

ICRL: Release timing for incoming trunk connections.(CDN = 32) (Normally assigned as 0.)

0: 288 msec. Note1: 224 msec. 2: 288 msec. 3: 352 msec. 4: 416 msec. 5: 480 msec. 6: 544 msec. 7: 608 msec. 8: 672 msec. 9: 736 msec. 10: 800 msec.11: 864 msec. 12: 928 msec. 13: 992 msec. 14: 1056 msec. 15: 1120 msec.

Note: 160 msec. in case of Loop Dialing Trunk


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

HD: Trunk Hold Timing. (Normally assigned as 0.)(CDN = 33) 0: 10 sec.

1: 2 sec.2: 4 sec. 3: 6 sec.4: 8 sec.5: 10 sec. 6: 12 sec. 7: 14 sec. 8: 16 sec. 9: 18 sec. 10: 20 sec. 11: 22 sec. 12: 24 sec. 13: 26 sec. 14: 28 sec. 15: 30 sec.

GUARD: Outgoing inhibit timing after trunk release. (Normally assigned as 0.)(CDN = 34)

0: 3072 msec.1: 512 msec. 2: 1024 msec.3: 1536 msec.4: 2048 msec. 5: 2560 msec.6: 3072 msec.7: 3584 msec.8: 4096 msec.9: 4608 msec.10: 5120 msec.11: 5632 msec. 12: 6144 msec. 13: 6656 msec. 14: 7168 msec. 15: 7680 msec.


Revision 4.0


WINK: Width of a Wink Signal. (Normally assigned as 0.) (CDN = 35) 0: 160 msec.

1: 64 msec.2: 96 msec.3: 128 msec. 4: 160 msec. 5: 192 msec. 6: 224 msec. 7: 265 msec. 8: 288 msec. 9: 320 msec. 10: 352 msec.11: 384 msec. 12: 416 msec. 13: 448 msec. 14: 480 msec. 15: 512 msec.

VAD: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 36)

CLD: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 37)

FA: Forced Account/Forced Authorization Code(CDN = 38) 0: Check is not required

1: Check is required (For Remote Access to System)

BC: C.O. Line Idle Balance Condition (0/1) Note (CDN = 39) 0: Not balanced

1: Balanced

Note: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.

TCM: Terminal Class Mark (0/1) (CDN = 40) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

TDMQ: Tandem Off Hook OG Queuing (0/1)(CDN = 41) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

TRSC: Trunk Restriction class (0-15)(CDN = 42) 0: Out of Service

1-15: In Service

BT: For any condition other than CCIS, assign data “0”. For CCIS voice route and/or to (CDN = 43) send ANI across CCIS signaling route, assign data “1”.


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

ata

PRV: Line Trunk Privacy (0/1):(CDN = 44) 0: Privacy Out of Service

1: Privacy In Service For Busy Verification, Call Waiting, Executive Right of Way, Paging, Dictation, DCommunication, etc.).

A/D: Analog/Digital Line Data (0/1):(CDN = 45) 0: Analog

1: Digital Assign data “1” only for digital T1 routes or Bch of ISDN routes

CW: Call Waiting Service (0/1):(CDN = 46) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

TPQ: Priority OG Queuing (0/1): (CDN = 47) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

BL: Detection of Blocking Signal: (CDN = 48) 0: Not detected

1: Detected

TRKS: Trunk Selection Sequence: Note(CDN = 49) 0: Select from the trunk which becomes idle first.

1: Select from the trunk which becomes idle last.

Note: Assign this data reversing to the mate office data (for No. 7 CCIS).

DPLY: Number Display of Dterm between offices: (CDN = 50) 0: Not Provided

1: Provided

(CDN = 51) Not Used

2W/4W: 2 Wires/4 Wires (CDN = 52) 0: 2 Wires

1: 4 Wires

FAAT: Authorization Code for ATT: (CDN = 53) 0: Depends on RSC of ATT

1: Authorization Code always required.

GW: Gateway Option:(CDN = 54) 0: Out of Service

1: Data Signaling Trunk 2-15: Not used


Revision 4.0


TCMA: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 55)

SMDR3: Detailed billing for outgoing in tandem connection:(CDN = 56) 0: Required

1: Not required

HDT: Heterogeneous Data Trunk:(CDN = 57) 0: Not Heterogeneous Data Trunk

1: Heterogeneous Data Trunk

CD: Consecutive Dialing: (CDN = 58) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

CCH: Common Channel Handler:(CDN = 59) 0: CCH is not mounted (normal setting)

1: CCH is mounted (ISDN or CCIS line)

TC/EC: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 60)

IRE: Inter-reringing signal (0/1)(CDN = 61) 1: Supervisory

When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.

SCR: Step Call Restriction for Tie Line Call (0/1):(CDN = 62) 0: Step Call is restricted

1: Step Call is not restricted

LYERl: Layer 1 (For ISDN):(CDN = 63) 0: 23B + D

1: 30B + D

NET: User/Net Identification (For ISDN):(CDN = 64) 0: User Side (normal setting)

1: Network side

INT: Interface Specification (For ISDN):(CDN = 65) 0: No.7

1: N-ISDN 22: Not used3: INS 15004: Not used5: AT & T (#4/#5 ESS)6: Not used7: NT DMS100/DMS250


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

DC: Dialed Number Confirmation (For ISDN):(CDN = 66) 0: Sub Address

1-2: Number of Main Address Digits to be translated.

HKS: Hooking Service (CDN = 67) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

SCF: Split Call Forwarding Note (CDN = 68) 0: Transfer to a station for incoming C.O./Tie Line call.

1: Transfer to a station for incoming station call.

Note: This data is valid when ASYD, SYS, INDEX 79, b2 = 1.

SMDR4: Detailed billing for incoming in tandem connection:(CDN = 69) 0: Required

1: Not required


Revision 4.0


The Table below shows examples of standard route class settings.

PARAMETERKIND OF TRUNK ROUTE

CICT COGT CBWTTIE

LINEDID LINE

CCIS LINE ISDN LINE (PRI)

CDN FUNCTION VOICE DATA B-CH D-CH

1 OSGS 0 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0

2 ONSG 0 3 3 3 0 2 2 2 2

3 ISGS 1 0 1 2 7 0 0 0 0

4 INSG 3 0 3 3 3 2 2 2 2

5 TF 2 1 3 3 2 3 0 3 0

6 TCL 1 1 1 4 5 4 4 4 4

7 L/T 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

8 RLP 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 2 2

9 TQ 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

10 SMDR 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0

11 TD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

12 DR 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

13 AC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

14 TNT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

15 LSG 0 0 0 5 8 12 13 12 13

16 SMDR2 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0

17 H/M 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

18 MC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

19 ANI 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

20 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

21 MSB 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

22 MSW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

23 TR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

24 OC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

25 R/L 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

26 RVSD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

27 TL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

28 ANS 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

29 TELP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

30 PAD 0 0 0 0 0 4 7 4 7

31 OGRL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

32 ICRL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

33 HD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

34 GUARD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0


ARTD CM0-01

Business, Hotel

35 WINK 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

36 VAD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

37 CLD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

38 FA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

39 BC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

40 TCM 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

41 TDMQ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

42 TRSC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

43 BT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

44 PRV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

45 A/D 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

46 CW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

47 TPQ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

48 BL 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

49 TRKS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

50 DPLY 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

51 not used

52 2W/4W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

53 FAAT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

54 GW 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

55 TCMA 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

56 SMDR3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

57 HDT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

58 CD 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

59 CCH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

60 TC/EC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

61 IRE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

62 SCR 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

63 LYER1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

64 NET 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

65 INT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 5

66 DC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

67 HKS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

68 SCF 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

69 SMDR4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

PARAMETERKIND OF TRUNK ROUTE

CICT COGT CBWTTIE

LINEDID LINE

CCIS LINE ISDN LINE (PRI)

CDN FUNCTION VOICE DATA B-CH D-CH


Revision 4.0

ARTECM0-04Business, Hotel

on Route

D

siness, tel

ARTE Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign and display Expansion Route Class Data for Route Numbers.

Initially, all zeroes display under DT (Expansion Route Class Data) on the screen.

When a Route Number is specified and the route has been programmed, the corresponding ExpansiClass Data is displayed. The data can be changed when necessary.

Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN).

3. Precautions

• Data of CDN1-8 (TCMN-MT) are effective only for the trunk routes for which 4 (MF) is assigned in ARTCDN = 2 (ONSG) or 4 (INSG). For all other trunk routes, assign “0” to all of these data.


List up: LRTE

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route Number CDN: Counter Display Number FUNC: A function corresponding to CDN, such as TCMN, is displayed.DT: Data entered for Expansion Route Class

Assignment of Expansion Route Class Data

RT:2 CDN: 5

CDN FUNC DT CDN FUNC DT CDN FUNC DT

1 OSGS :2 9 TQ 02 ONSG :33 ISGS :14 INSG :05 TF :36 TCL :87 L/T :18 RLP :2


Type the CDN number. When youpress ENTER, the cursor jumps tothe corresponding function.

Enter the data, using the choicesdisplayed on the right side of thescreen.



ARTE CM0-04

Business, Hotel

The table below shows the correspondence between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names):


1 TCMN 27 H1

2 TCMC 28 DT

3 MFSP 29 CI

4 KPST 30 OID

5 KPPT 31 TKS

6 STC 32 PAD2

7 MC 33 TRM

8 MT 34 TRPX

9 TONE 35 LDR

10 PPTM 36 TSC

11 MPTM 37 SATS

12 LPTM 38 RVPX

13 RSAX 39 DQ

14 CST 40 SLOV

15 CSEG 41 SDTO

16 CSEU 42 ADVPRA

17 CSEL 43 IND

18 CMP 44 UUI

19 TALK 45 DCH

20 FOT 46 CMRT

21 RST 47 PREF

22 TOCI 48 DFS

23 TOCD 49 BOB

24 ODGD 50 HO1CH

25 RLS 51 IFR

26 GWD 52 CONV

53 CNI


Revision 4.0


Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination:

TCMN: Number of digits of TCM (S Code) (0-3)(CDN = 1) 0: No digit

1: 1 digit 2: 2 digits3: Not used

TCMC: TCM and KP Sending Sequence (0-3) (CDN = 2) 0: KP-ST

1: KP TCM-ST2: TCM KP-ST 3: KP (TCM) -ST

MFSP: Sending Speed (0-15)(CDN =3) Tone ON Tone OFF Digit/sec.

0: 68 msec. 68 msec. 7.51: 56 msec. 56 msec. (CCITT No.5) 2: 68 msec. 32 msec. 10 3: 68 msec. 36 msec. 10 4: 48 msec. 48 msec. 10 5: 52 msec. 52 msec. 10 6-15: Not used

(In case of MFC)0: 24.0 sec. 8: 16.0 sec.1: 5.5 sec. 9: 17.5 sec.2: 7.0 sec 10: 20.0 sec.3: 8.5 sec. 11: 22.0 sec.4: 10.0 sec. 12: 24.0 sec.5: 11.5 sec. 13: 26.0 sec.6: 13.0 sec. 14: 28.0 sec.7: 14.5 sec. 15: 30.0 sec.

KPST: Duration of KP sending (0-15) Note(CDN = 4) 0: 48 msec. 8: 112 msec.

1: 56 msec. 9: 120 msec.2: 64 msec. 10: 128 msec.3: 72 msec. 11: 136 msec.4: 80 msec. 12: 144 msec.5: 88 msec. 13: 152 msec.6: 96 msec. 14: 160 msec.7: 104 msec. 15: 168 msec.


ARTE CM0-04

Business, Hotel

signal


Note: When the monitor signal is Reverse and the data is set to“0,” KP sending is stopped by reservemonitor at the related distant office.

KPPT: Pause after KP sending (0-15) (CDN = 5) 0: 48 msec. 8: 112 msec.

1: 56 msec. 12: 144 msec.5: 88 msec. 13: 152 msec.6: 96 msec. 14: 160 msec.7: 104 msec. 15: 168 msec.


STC: Stop Code (0-15)(CDN = 6) 0-11: Not used

12: MF13: Not used14: DTMF15: MF (for MF signaling)

MC: MP Start Cause (0/1) (CDN = 7) This data must always be set to “0”.

0: As per ST1: Not used

MT: MF Frequency (0/1) (CDN=8) 0: DTMF (4×4)

1: MF (2 out of 6)


Revision 4.0


TONE: TONE Designation for TRK Call(CDN = 9) Termination (0-15) Note

0: DT1-15: Not used

Note: This data is effective when 2 (Second Dial Tone) is set in ARTD, CDN = 3 (ISGS).

PPTM: Sender Prepause (0-15) (CDN = 10) 0: Standard Note 8: 2000 msec.

1: 600 msec. 9: 2200 msec.2: 800 msec. 10: 2400 msec.3: 1000 msec. 11: 2600 msec.4: 1200 msec. 12: 2800 msec.5: 1400 msec. 13: 3000 msec.6: 1600 msec. 14: 3200 msec.7: 1800 msec. 15: 3400 msec.

Note: Depends on the data in SYS1, Index 131 of ASYD.


MPTM: Sender Minimum Pause Note (CDN = 11) 0: 10 PPS/600 msec., 20 PPS/450 msec.

1: 600 msec. 9: 2200 msec.2: 800 msec. 10: 2400 msec.3: 1000 msec. 11: 2600 msec. 4: 1200 msec. 12: 2800 msec. 5: 1400 msec. 13: 3000 msec.6: 1600 msec. 14: 3200 msec.7: 1800 msec. 15: 3400 msec.8: 2000 msec.

Note: Possible to use when adjusting the inter-digit timer in DP line.


ARTE CM0-04

Business, Hotel

Adding


LPTM: Sender Inter-Digit Pause Index (0-15) Note (CDN = 12) 0: DP/1 sec., PB/0.5 sec.

1: 600 msec. 9: 2200 msec.2: 800 msec. 10: 2400 msec.3: 1000 msec. 11: 2600 msec.4: 1200msec. 12: 2800 msec. 5: 1400 msec. 13: 3000 msec.6: 1600 msec. 14: 3200 msec.7: 1800 msec. 15: 3400 msec.8: 2000 msec.

Note: Possible to use when adjusting the duration of Pause in the case of Speed Calling - System ordigits.


RSAX: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 13)

CST: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 14)

CSEG: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 15)

CSEU: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 16)


Revision 4.0


e,

CSEL: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 17)

CMP: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 18)

TALK: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 19)

FOT: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 20)

RST: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 21)

TOCI: Trunk Override Calling (0/1)(CDN = 22) 0: Override inhibited (Calling side)

1: Tie Line Override Service is provided (Calling side)

TOCD: Trunk Override Called (0/1) (CDN = 23) 0: Override inhibited (Called side)

1: Tie Line Override Service is provided (Called side).

ODGD: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 24)

RLS: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 25)

GWD: Gate Way Data Service (0-15)(CDN = 26) 0: Out of service

1: Gate way system2-15: Not used

Hl: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 27)

DT: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 28)

CI: ISDN transmitting information (0 - 15) Note (CDN = 29) 0: Out of service

1: 16-Digit Caller Number Service, Attribute Information Notification Servicand Calling Sub-Address Transfer Service

2-15: Not used

Note: Information transfer from ISDN line to CCIS line function.


ARTE CM0-04

Business, Hotel

OlD: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 30)

TKS: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 31)

PAD2: Pad Control Data 2 (0-7) (CDN = 32)

Note: PAD value can also be set by switch setting on the 8TLT card.

TRM: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 33)

TRPX: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 34)

LDR: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 35)

TSC: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 36)

SATS: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 37)

RVPX: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 38)

DQ: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 39)

DATA SEND RECEIVE

0 No Pad

1 2 dB 2 dB

2 3 dB 3 dB

3 12 dB 11 dB

4 16 dB 11 dB

5 6 dB 6 dB

6 Not used

7 0 dB 0 dB


Revision 4.0


SLOV: Slumber Time Override Service (0/1)(CDN = 40) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

SDTO: System message automatic output when Connection Acknowledge signal has not (CDN = 41) been received (0/1).

0: Out of Service 1: In Service

ADVPRA: ISDN PRI Failure Routing Service (0/l) Note(CDN = 42) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

Note: This data is valid for dummy routes.

IND: Inter-office Name Display (CDN = 43) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

UUI: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 44)

DCH: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered. (CDN = 45)

CMRT: Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunks (0/1)(CDN = 46) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service

PREF: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 47)

DFS: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 48)

BOB: Broad Band (0/1)(CDN = 49) 0: 64K

1: Nx 64K

HOlCH: When assigning this data, zero (0) should always be entered.(CDN = 50)

IFR: Indonesia Compulsion Cut Service (0/1)(CDN = 51) 0: Out of Service

1: In Service


ARTE CM0-04

Business, Hotel

CONV: SMDR Called Number Conversion (0/1) (CDN = 52) 0: Conversion Number

1: Dialed Number

CNI: CNI Calling Number Identification format (0-3)(CDN=53) 0: No ANI

1: Feature Group D Format2: Not used3: Not used


Revision 4.0

ARTICM0-09Business, Hotel

plication

siness, tel

ARTI Assignment of Trunk Application Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign and display Trunk Application Data for Route Numbers.

Initially, all zeroes display under DT (Expansion Route Class Data) on the screen.

When a Route Number is specified and the route has been programmed, the corresponding Trunk ApData is displayed. The data can be changed when necessary.

Data entry can be changed from any Counter Display Number (CDN).

3. Precautions

None


List up: LRTEI

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route Number CDN: Counter Display Number FUNC: A function corresponding to CDN, such as RST, is displayed.DT: Data entered for Expansion Route Class

Assignment of Trunk Application Data

RT:2 CDN: 5

CDN FUNC DT CDN FUNC DT

1 RST 16 MTC 02 HMT3 TRCRST4 TRSRST5 T309LNK6 T309CON7 L;CRST8 VCM


Type the CDN number. Whenyou press ENTER, the cursorjumps to the corresponding func-tion.

Enter the data, using the choicesdisplayed on the right side of thescreen.



ARTI CM0-09

Business, Hotel

The table below shows the relationship between CDNs and Functions (Parameter Names):


1 RETMSG 20 CDCSPD

2 RST 21 DVRST

3 HMT 22 RSCT

4 TRCRST 23 ROCG

5 TRSRST 24 RICG

6 T309LNK 25 STSENQ

7 T309CON 26 ANI

8 LLCRST 27 SRV

9 VCM 28 TON

10 OVRT 29 NPI

11 POOL 30 SPMET

12 DTRT 31 ECCIS

13 TMPRT 32 ECCISTM

14 CODEC 33 ECCISOB

15 PASS 34 ECCISIB

16 IRL 35 L/T

17 MTC 36 ECCISTD

18 TC 37 OPCC

19 TS 38 MFCG2

40 CLBK


Revision 4.0


tion

alls

are

tion

Shown below are explanations of each CDN/Function combination:

RETMSG (CDN1) Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE with Analog Trunk0 = CALL PROC. + ALERT1 = CALL PROC. + ALERT or CALL PROC. + PROGRESS

RST (CDN2) Assignment of Restart0 = Restart Send per Individual Channel1 = –2 = –3 = Restart Not Send

HMT (CDN3) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

TRCRST (CDN4) Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability InformaElement

0 = No restriction1 = Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital, Restricted digital and Vido data c

are restricted.)2 = Speech call restriction (Speech, 3.1 kHz audio and 7 kHz audio calls

restricted.)3-15 = –

TRSRST (CDN5) Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability InformaElement

0 = No restriction1 = 384 Kbps (H0) call is restricted2 = 1536 Kbps (H11)/1920 Kbps (H12) call is restricted3 = 384 Kbps and 1536 (H11)/1920 (H12) Kbps calls are restricted4-15 = –

T309LNK (CDN6) Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link Failure0 = Layer 2 Alarm with T309 is Disabled1 = Layer 2 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled2 = Layer 2 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled3 = –

T309CON (CDN7) Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 Failure0 = Layer 1 Alarm with T309 is Disabled1 = Layer 1 Alarm [Temporary] with T309 is Enabled2 = Layer 1 Alarm [Permanent] with T309 is Enabled3 = –

LLCRST (CDN8) Call restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information Element0 = No restriction1-31 = Call which includes this user rate value is restricted Note

Note: User rate value is based on ITU-T Q-931.


ARTI CM0-09

Business, Hotel

.

are

are

VCM (CDN9) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

OVRT (CDN10) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

POOL (CDN11) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

DTRT (CDN12) Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm)0 = –1 = Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal as a Layer 1 alarm

TMPRT (CDN13) Temporary Route Information over CCIS0 = –1 = In CCIS, the route information can be transferred by the call control messages

Also, the call restriction can be checked referring to this route information.

CODEC (CDN14) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

PASS (CDN15) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

IRL (CDN16) Clear call when DTI alarm is detected Note

Note: This data should be set when there is no Dch in the physical DTI.

MTC (CDN17) Assignment of Timer T309 Value. Restoration timer (TCxMTC) sec.0-15 = TC (CDN 18) x MTC (Restart timer value)

TC (CDN 18) Timer T309 Counter Value0 = 4 = 30 sec.1 = 64 msec. 5 = 5 min.2 = 6 = 1 sec.3 = 2 sec. 7 =

TS (CDN19) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

CDCSPD (CDN20) Zero (0) should always be entered when assigning this data.

DVRST (CDN21) Call restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDN.0 = No Restriction1 = Speech call restriction (Speech. 3.1 kHz audio, 7 kHz audio calls

restricted.)2 = Data call restriction (Unrestricted digital, restricted digital and Video data

restricted.)3 = Both Speech and Data calls are restricted.

RSCT (CDN22) Call restriction by Temporary Route Information Note0 = No Restriction1 = Restriction

Note: This data is effective when TMPRT = 1.


Revision 4.0


ROCG (CDN23) Outgoing Call Account by Temporary Route Information Note0 = –1 = Effective


RICG (CDN24) Incoming Call Account by Temporary Route Information Note0 = –1 = Effective


STSENQ (CDN25) Status Inquiry Message Send Note0 = Out of Service1 = In Service

Note: This data is not effective in Australia.

ANI (CDN26) Timing to demand ANI Information0 = There is no ANI demand at Incoming Call1 = After receiving 1st digit2 = After receiving 2nd digit3 = After receiving 3rd digit4 = After receiving 4th digit5 = After receiving 5th digit6 = After receiving 6th digit7 = After receiving 7th digit

SRV (CDN27) Additional Service Selection NoteBit 0: Advice of Charge (AOC)

0 = Valid1 = Invalid

Bit 1: Malicious Call Trace (MCT)/Malicious Call Identification (MCID)0 = Valid1 = Invalid

Bit 2-Bit 6: -Bit 7: For TON (CDN28) and/or NPI (CDN29)

0 = Invalid1 = Valid

Note: Enter this data by a decimal.


ARTI CM0-09

Business, Hotel

TON (CDN28) Type of Number Note 0 = Unknown1 = International Number2 = National Number3 = Network Special Number4 = Subscriber Number5 = –6 = Abbreviated Number7 = Reserved for Extension

Note: This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1.

NPI (CDN29) Numbering Plan Identification Note 0 = Unknown1 = ISDN/Telephony Numbering Plan2 = –3 = Data Numbering Plan4 = Telex Numbering Plan5-7 = –8 = National Standard Numbering Plan9 = Private Numbering Plan10-14 = –15 = Reserved for ExtensionOthers = –

Note: This data is effective when ARTD CDN65 (INT) = 4 and ARTI SRV (CDN27) bit7 = 1.

SPMET (CDN30) Meter Pulse Observation Control0 = –1 = Low to High Transition2 = High to Low Transition3 = Low to High & High to Low Transition

ECCIS (CDN31) Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS)0 = Out of Service1 = In Service


Revision 4.0


ECCISTM (CDN32) Release timer for E-CCIS Line0 = 3 minutes (Default setting)1 = 15 seconds2 = 30 seconds3 = 1 minute4 = 2 minutes5 = 5 minutes6 = 10 minutes7 = 30 minutes8 = 30 minutes9 = 1 hour10-13 = Not used14 = Immediately after call completion15 = Not released

ECCISOB (CDN33) OG Billing for E-CCIS Line0 = Out of Service1 = In Service

ECCISIB (CDN34) IC Billing for E-CCIS Line0 = Out of Service1 = In Service

L/T (CDN35) Local/Toll Note 0 = Local1 = Toll

Note: Only for Russia

ECCISTD (CDN36) Addressing Information used in E-CCIS0 = Called DID Number1 = Called Sub Address

OPCC (CDN37) Optimal Call Control0 = In Service1 = Out of Service

MFCG2 (CDN38) Calling Party Category0 = Subscriber with Priority1 = Subscriber without Priority

CLBK (CDN40) Kind of Collect Call Blocking Signal0 = GB-71 = GB-3


ASAT CM0-01

Business, Hotel

le. When

siness, tel

ASAT Assignment of Specific Attendant Number


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display a specific attendant number to an attendant consothe specific attendant number is dialed, that particular attendant console will receive the call.

3. Precautions

• The specific attendant number cannot be a station number or LDN already being utilized.


List up: LSAT

-Parameter ATN- Assignment: ATRK

Deletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLEN, DSTN

List up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code

(The number of digits must be the same as the Station numbers.) ATN: Attendant Number

Assignment of Specific ATT Number

TN:1 ACC: 6001ATN:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASCLCM0-01Business

lass, and

-, use the

siness
ASCL Assignment of Station Class Data

2. Function

This command is used to change the station class (Telephone Equipment Class, Route Restriction CService Feature Restriction Class), without deleting the station number.

3. Precautions


• The Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) cannot be changed from a Dterm Class (TEC = 12) to any other Telephone Class, or vice versa. When it is necessary to change the present TEC to another type of TECASDT command to delete the present station data and assign new station data.


Assignment: ASDTDeletion: ASDTDisplay: ASDT, DLEN, DSTNList up: LLEN, LSTN

-Parameter SFC- Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFC List up: LRTC

-Parameter RSC- Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSCList up: LRTC

5. Entry Procedure


Assignment of Station Class Data

TN:1 STN:3113TEC:3 RSC:1 SFC:1

WRT?


ASCL CM0-01

Business

TEC: Telephone Equipment Class (1-31)1: DP (10 pps)2: PB 3: DP/PB4-11: Not used12: Dterm

13: Data Terminal via Dterm

14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Data terminal via data module17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used26: VPS27: Eight Conference Equipment28-31: Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) For assignment of RSC from ARSC command.

SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15) For assignment of SFC from ASFC command.


Revision 4.0

ASDCCM0-02Business, Hotel

of Flex-

ameter

Number

llowing

llowing

siness, tel

ASDC Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing


2. Function

This command is necessary when LCR six (6) digit translation is required for FX Prefix Codes, MCI, SPRINTand other applications. This command is used to assign, delete, and display this information.

3. Precautions

• Before using this command, the following must be confirmed.

• An Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (OPR) has been assigned in the AFRS (Assignment ible Route Selection) command. If it has not been assigned, error code is displayed.

Note: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error-related information.

• When the Translation Pattern is for an FX line, designate parameter KIND as “PFX”.

• When the Translation Pattern is for a Special Common Carrier (MCI, SPRINT, etc.), designate parKIND as “SCC”.

• When the route to be used is changed according to the time of day, a Time of Day Change Pattern from 1 to 7 is assigned, in accordance with the ATCP command.

• When assigning data to parameter “EFFECT” the following must be noted:

a. When parameter KIND is assigned as PFX, 0/1 assigned to parameter “EFFECT” has the fomeaning:

“EFFECT” = 0: means that an additional digit is not required for access to an FX line.“EFFECT” = 1: means that the digit “1” is required as a prefix for access to an FX line.

b. When parameter KIND is assigned as SCC, 0/1 assigned to parameter “EFFECT” has the fomeaning:

“EFFECT” = 0: means that the office code is not allowed for the area code dialed.“EFFECT” = 1: means that the office code is allowed for the area code dialed.

• When the “EFFECT” parameter is “2”, 6-digit translation is not required for the area code designated.


ASDC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

e.


List up: LSDC

-Parameter OPR- Assignment: AOPRDeletion: AOPRDisplay: AOPRList up: LOPR

-Parameter TDPTN- Assignment: ATCPDisplay: ATCPList up: LTCP

5. Entry Procedure

KIND: Kind of Selection (PFX/SCC)PFX: FX, Prefix SCC: MCI, SPRINT

TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern Number (0-7) OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number (0-255)RA: Route Advancing Order (0-7)OFFICE: Office Code (200-999) EFFECT: Designating Data (0/1)

KIND = “PFX”“EFFECT” = 0: means that an additional digit is not required for access to an FX lin“EFFECT” = 1: means that the digit “1” is required as a prefix for access to an FX line.KIND = “SCC”“EFFECT” = 0: means that the office code is not allowed for the area code dialed.“EFFECT” = 1: means that the office code is allowed for the area code dialed.

Assignment of Six Digit Least Cost Routing

KIND:PFX TDPTN:0

OPR:0 RA:0

OFFICE:200 EFFECT:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASDTCM0-01ACD, Business

s alreadyted before

riction

eature

Data

nss the

le, fol-

e

DLC/

AKYDned data

CD, siness

ASDT Assignment of Station Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display station data. If the station number designated habeen assigned, the current data is displayed. If new data is to be assigned, the old data must be delethe new data can be entered.

3. Precautions


• The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route RestData command (ARSC).

• The Service Feature Restriction Class (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service FClass command (ASFC).

• The Telephone Equipment Class (TEC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route Classcommand (ARTD), and the assignment of signaling in ASYD, SYS 2, Index 2.

• When the station to be deleted is busy, an error indication is provided.

• When assigning a station to the first circuit of the circuit card, the message “PKG CHECK” is displayed othe CRT. When this occurs confirm that the circuit card is mounted in its proper location, then preENTER key.

• When deleting a specific Station Number, ensure to check the following items. If any item is applicablow the instructions specified in that item before deleting the Station Number.

a. If the MW lamp on the station telephone set is lit (or if the Dterm is displaying “Message Waiting”), ex-tinguish the MW lamp (or MW display on the Dterm) using the CMWL command before deleting thstation data.

• When TEC = 12 (Dterm) has been assigned, assign the key data by AKYD command, or initialize the ELC circuit card concerned after assigning the station data.

• If station data is deleted, the data of the stations assigned via the AKYD command is also deleted.

Note, however, that if there is data related to Intercom among the data of the stations assigned viacommand, station data cannot be deleted by means of this ASDT command unless the above-mentioassigned by AKYD command have been deleted beforehand.


ASDT CM0-01

ACD, Business


Display: DLEN, DSTN Change (Part): ASCL, ASTN List up: LSTN, LLEN

-Parameter SFC- Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFCList up: LRTC


-Make Busy- Assignment: MBLE, MBST(Busy/Idle) Display: DMBL, DMBS

5. Entry Procedure


Assignment of Station Data

TN:1 STN:3112

LENS:000002

TEC:14 RSC:1 SFC:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASDTCM0-01ACD, Business

LENS: Line Equipment number (6 digits)

TEC: Telephone Equipment Class (1-31)1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB3: DP/PB 4-11: Not used12: Dterm

13: Data Terminal via Dterm 14: Hot Line15: CAS Line16: Data Terminal via data module17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)19-22: Not used23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used26: VPS27: Eight Conference Equipment28-31: Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15); For assignment of RSC from ARSC command.SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15); For assignment of SFC from ASFC command.


XX X XX X


ASFC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

triction

siness, tel

ASFC Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class


2. Function

This command is used to assign, and display restriction information according to Service Feature ResClass (SFC) of the Station for the Service Feature Index (SFI).

3. Precautions

• Unused data should not be assigned.



List up: LRTC

5. Entry Procedure



SFC: Service Restriction Class (0-15) SFI: Service Feature Index (1-255) RES: Restriction Data


Note: When WRT? = Y is entered the value of the SFC automatically increases by one (+1).

Assignment of Service Feature Restriction Class

DAY/NIGHT:D

TN:1 SFI:1

SFC:0 RES:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASFCCM0-02Business, Hotel

• Each index of parameter SFI (Service Feature Index) is explained below. SFI: Service Feature Index

1: Outgoing Trunk Queuing 2: Call Back 3: Executive Right-of-Way (Calling Party) 4: Executive Right-of-Way (Called Party)5: Call Waiting Originating (Calling Party) 6: Call Waiting Originating (Called Party)7: Call Forwarding-All Calls 8: Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer9: Call Forwarding - Busy Line 10: Call Hold11: Data Line Privacy / Attendant Camp on12: Speed Calling System13: Trunk Answer (TAS) 14: System Message Detail Recording (SMDR)15: Not used16: Line Load Control 17: Not used18: Not used19: Individual Speed Calling 20: Not used21: Off-Hook OG Queuing 22: Not used23: Voice Mail Password Display Elimination24: Emergency Call25: Call Forward Outside - local (0=Restricted 1=Allowed)26: Call Forward Outside - long distance (0=Restricted 1=Allowed)27: Authorization Codes 28: Digital Data29: Direct Call Pickup30: Off-Hook Alarm31: SID to Terminating user DTE 32: Line Circuit Reverse Relay (for 16LC)33: Periodic Time Indication Tone 34-35: Not used36: Special Common Battery Station/Brokerage Hot line (Dterm)37: Radio Paging Answer 38: Meet-Me Paging39: Individual Trunk Access 40: Not used41: Timed Reminder (for Business System)

Automatic Wake Up (for Hotel System)42: Group Announcement (for Hotel System)43: Maid Dial (for Hotel System)44: Last Number Call Redial45: Front Desk Terminal (for Hotel System)46: Bad Call Notify (Faulty Trunk Report)


ASFC CM0-02

Business, Hotel

47: Guest Information Display Terminal (Hotel/Motel)48: Disable Distinctive Ringing for analog ports (0/1 No/Yes)49: Not used50: Off-Premise Extension51: Boss-Secretary Features52: Voice Call using an Access Code53: Message Reminder using an Access Code54: Priority Call 1 55: Priority Call 2 56: Priority Call 357: Priority Paging 58: Station-to-station SMDR59: Not used60: Not used61: Not used62: Priority Outgoing Queue63: Outgoing Queue Override 64: Line Load Control 1, 2 and 365: Line Load Control 2 and 366: Line Load Control 367: Call Park Access and Answer 68: Call Park 69: Automatic Message Waiting Lamp Off (for Hotel System)70: Intercom Group71: Distinctive Dial Tone 72: Calling Station Switch Hook Flash Restriction 73: Not used74: MWL Setting from the ATT or Station (Called)75: Dterm Multiline Conference Add on76: Trunk Override Inhibit77: Trunk Override78: Station Barge in From a Tie Line79: Hold on Queuing From a Tie Line80: 8-Party Conference Terminal81: Recording for an Internal Call82: MWL Setting from the Station (Calling)83-86: Not used87: Multi Channel Recording (REC)88-89: Not used90: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY)91: Subscriber with priority/without priority92: Not used93: Voice Call Restrict (0=No / 1=Yes)94: Calling Party Number Display95: Direct Call Restriction (for ACD only)96: Not used97: Send Facility Message Requesting SID Information98: Send Facility Message Requesting ANI Information


Revision 4.0

ASFCCM0-02Business, Hotel

fer

is

tion

99: Call Forward I’m Here (Destination)100: Call Forward I’m Here (Origination)101-102: Not used103: Assignment of No Answer Timer for Blind Transfer to Station/Blind Trans

to Attendant Note104: Blind Transfer105-106: Not used107: Slumber Time Override108-110: Not used111: Not used112: Voice Call during Dial Intercom113: Not used114: Display on Dterm when a station is in DND (0/1 RST/DND)

(6000 version ICS and above)115-121: Not used122: Call Forward with ATT Camp-on (JO Hotel and D ver ICS)123-124: Not used125: Pad Lock126-127: Not used128: Call Forwarding - Busy Line Override129-130: Not used131: Add on Conference - 8 Party132-135: Not used136: Automatic Idle Return137: Authorization Code Display Elimination138: Hold on Consultation Hold Enhancement139: Not used140: Send Warning Tone to interrupted parties when THREE-WAY CALLING

established using Hold on Consultation Hold Enhancement141-144: Not used145: Internal Zone Paging; Answer146: Analog Caller ID-Station147: Not used148: Personal Ringer149-150: Not used151: When CF-OUT SIDE is performed, Route Restriction Class of the sta

which has set CF-OUT SIDE is used.152: Not used153: Analog Caller ID-Station

(Single Mode)154: Not used155: Call Return156: Call Forwarding - Override Indication157-255: Not used

Note: If 103=0, go to ASYD 140. If 103=1, go to ASYD 247.


ASGD CM0-02

Business, Hotel

ich has

pecific

siness, tel

ASGD Assignment of Special Group


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the specific terminating unit group for a station whalready been assigned.

3. Precautions

• The station number expansion information must be assigned before assignment in this command.

• When the specific terminating unit group information is assigned or deleted in this command, the sterminating unit information must also be assigned or deleted in the ASID command.


List up: LSGD

-Parameter STN-Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTNLisp up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberF: Function Number (0-7)

0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 15: Priority Call 26: Priority Call 37: Not used

GN: Group Number (1-7)

Assignment of Special Group

TN:1 STN:3111F:0 GN:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASHCCM0-01Business, Hotel

m of 20

, the

roup

.

siness, tel

ASHC Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Circular


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display a pilot station hunting group.

3. Precautions

• In the Assignment Mode, if no secretary station is designated, enter blank.

A maximum of 40 stations can be assigned to one group per system. For all other groups, a maximustations can be assigned.

• If the assigning group does not need secretary, enter blank.

• In the Change Mode, change and deletion of the secretary station are possible.

To delete a Station in the Hunting Group, use the DELETE key.To insert a station into the Group, use the INSERT key. To exchange a station in the group, enter a new station Number over the existing station Number.

• In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. If Y isentered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry.




List up: LSHG, LSHL

-Parameter STN-Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGSTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

KEY FUNCTION

ESCThis key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group station entry. If this key is pressed“WRT?” prompt displays.

INSERTThis key is used to insert a station ahead of the station indicated by the cursor at the time of GStation entry.

DELETE This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group station entry


ASHC CM0-01

Business, Hotel

er

5. Entry Procedure

• Enter the kind of mode

• To assign a Station Hunting Group

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station included in the CIRCULAR Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN.

Note 2: After entering the last STNs for your group, press ESC to see the ‘WRT?’ prompt. When entering othparameters, press ESC to move the cursor to the previous prompt.

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION


←←

Assignment of Station Hunting Group-CIRCULAR

TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETARY: 2401 WRT? Y


6: 2406 11: 16: 2: 2402 7: 2407 12: 17: 3: 2403 8: 2408 13: 18: 4: 2404 9: 2409 14: 19: 5: 2405 10: 2410 15: 20:


Revision 4.0

ASHCCM0-01Business, Hotel

er

• To change a Station Hunting Group

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station included in the CIRCULAR Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)



• To delete a Station Hunting Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number. SECRETARY: Station Numbers of the Secretary Station. PHANTOM: Station Number of the Phantom Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the CIRCULAR Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)


TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETAR: 2401 WRT? Y


6: 2406 11: 2411 16: 24162: 2402 7: 2407 12: 2412 17: 24173: 2403 8: 2408 13: 2413 18: 24184: 2404 9: 2409 14: 2414 19: 24195: 2405 10: 2410 15: 2415 20: 2420

Station numbers of the station be-longing in the station hunting groupare displayed automatically.


TN:1 STN:2400 SECRETARY: 2420 WRT?Y


6: 2405 11: 2410 16: 24152: 2401 7: 2406 12: 2411 17: 24163: 2402 8: 2407 13: 2412 18: 24174: 2403 9: 2408 14: 2413 19: 24185: 2404 10: 2419 15: 2414 20: 2419


ASHP CM0-01

Business, Hotel

time of

g groupstem.

r deletiontom sta-

new

, the

roup

.

siness, tel

ASHP Assignment of Station Hunting Group-Pilot


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display a pilot station hunting group.

3. Precautions

• In the Assignment Mode, the pilot station number is the one which has been entered first. At the Station Hunting Group data entry, the pilot station number is displayed as “P: 2400”, for instance.

• If the assigning group does not need secretary, enter blank. When the phantom number for the huntinis required, use the APHN command. A maximum of 40 stations can be assigned to one group per syFor all other groups, a maximum of 20 stations can be assigned.

• In the Change Mode, the designation of the pilot station cannot be changed.Change and deletion of the secretary station and phantom stations are possible. However, change oof phantom stations are limited only where phantom stations have been entered or where no phantions are assigned yet. For deletion of a station in the hunting group, use the DELETE key. For inserting astation to the Group, use the INSERT key. Exchanging a station in the group can be made by entering astation number over the existing station number.

• In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. If Y isentered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry. When the group has a phantom station, delete the phantom station number first.



KEY FUNCTION

ESCThis key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group Station entry. If this key is pressed“WRT?” prompt displays.


DELETE This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group Station entry


Revision 4.0

ASHPCM0-01Business, Hotel


List up: LSHG, LSHL

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGSTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure


ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION


←←


ASHP CM0-01

Business, Hotel

er

• To assign a Station Hunting Group

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number.SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station.CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)



Assignment of Station Hunting Group - PILOT

TN:1 STN:2400 SECRETARY: 2401 WRT? Y


P: 2400 6: 2406 11: 16: 2: 2402 7: 2407 12: 17:3: 2403 8: 2408 13: 18:4: 2404 9: 2409 14: 19:5: 2405 10: 2410 15: 20:


Revision 4.0

ASHPCM0-01Business, Hotel

er

• To change a Station Hunting Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number.SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN



TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETAR: 2401 WRT?Y


P: 2400 6: 2406 11: 2411 16: 24162: 2402 7: 2407 12: 2412 17: 24173: 2403 8: 2408 13: 2413 18: 24184: 2404 9: 2409 14: 2414 19: 24195: 2405 10:2410 15: 2415 20: 2420


ASHP CM0-01

Business, Hotel

• To delete a Station Hunting Group

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number.SECRETARY: Station Number of the Secretary Station. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the PILOT Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)


TN:1 STN: 2400 SECRETARY: 2401

DEL? Y


P: 2400 6: 2405 11: 2410 16: 24152: 2401 7: 2406 12: 2411 17: 24163: 2402 8: 2407 13: 2412 18: 24174: 2403 9: 2408 14: 2413 19: 24185: 2404 10:2409 15: 2414 20: 2419

Station numbers of the station belongingin the station hunting group are displayedautomatically.


Revision 4.0

ASHUCM0-01Business, Hotel

Group

ber

re atte-

the

, the

roup

.

siness, tel

ASHU Assignment of Station Hunting Group-UCD


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display a UCD Station Hunting Group.

3. Precautions

• In the Assignment Mode, the recommended maximum number of member stations in a UCD Huntingis 20.

• In the Change Mode, for deletion of a Station in the Hunting Group, use the DELETE key. For inserting astation into the Group, use the INSERT key. Exchanging can be made by entering a new station numover the existing station number.

• In the Deletion Mode, if there is no data for the group, “Not Assigned!! Assign?” is displayed. If Y isentered, the mode changes to Assign Mode. If N is entered, the operation returns to station number entry.

• The stations in the group are displayed in a prearranged order.

• A maximum of 63 UCD groups can be assigned on a system basis. If more than 63 UCD groups ampted, an Error Code will be displayed.

• When assigning UCD Overflow Groups (refer to AUOG command), the Tenant and Station numbers of UCD Pilot Station assigned in this Command are used to designate the overflow group.

• Special Key Table.These keys are effective in the operation mode “Assignment” and “Change” only.

KEY FUNCTION

ESCThis key is used to skip entry operation at the time of Group station entry. If this key is pressed“WRT?” prompt displays.


DELETE This key is used to delete the station indicated by the cursor at the time of Group station entry


ASHU CM0-01

Business, Hotel


List up: LSHG, LSHL

-Parameter STN-Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGSTDisplay: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

• Enter the kind of mode

ASSIGNMENT/CHANGE

DELETION


←←


Revision 4.0


er

• To assign a UCD Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the UCD Group.(CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)



Assignment of Station Hunting Group - UCD

TN:1 STN: 2400

WRT? Y


1: 2400 6: 2405 11: 16: 2: 2401 7: 2406 12: 17:3: 2402 8: 2407 13: 18:4: 2403 9: 2408 14: 19:5: 2404 10:2409 15: 20:


ASHU CM0-01

Business, Hotel

er

• To change a UCD Group

TN: Tenant Number. STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Stations included in the UCD Group. (CNT indicates the order of a station in the group.)

Note 1: ESC, INSERT and DELETE keys are effective in operating the parameter CNT STN



TN:1 STN: 2400

WRT? Y


1: 2400 6: 2405 11: 2410 16: 24152: 2401 7: 2406 12: 2411 17: 24163: 2402 8: 2407 13: 2412 18: 24174: 2403 9: 2408 14: 2413 19: 24185: 2404 10:2409 15: 2414 20: 2419


Revision 4.0


• To delete a UCD Group

TN: Tenant Number.STN: Station Number. CNT STN: Station Numbers of the Station Included in the UCD Group.



TN:1 STN:2400

DEL? Y


1: 2400 6: 2405 11: 2410 16: 24152: 2401 7: 2406 12: 2411 17: 24163: 2402 8: 2407 13: 2412 18: 24174: 2403 9: 2408 14: 2413 19: 24185: 2404 10:2409 15: 2414 20: 2419

Station numbers of the station belonging in the UCD group are displayed automatically.


ASID CM0-02

Business, Hotel

termi-

and.

riority

ansfer

siness, tel

ASID Assignment of Special Incoming


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the information for a specific terminating unit in thenating unit group which has been assigned via the ASGD command.

3. Precautions

• Data must be assigned in the ASGD command before data can be assigned or deleted in this comm

• This command must be programmed when Off-Hook Alarms, Attendant Night Transfer, and/or PCalls 1, 2, 3 are assigned.

• An Attendant Console cannot be assigned as the specific terminating unit type for ATT Night Tr(Function Number = 3). This function can only be assigned for GN = 1.


List up: LSID


Revision 4.0

ASIDCM0-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• When the call connection destination is a station:

TN: Tenant Number F: Function Number (0-7)

0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 15: Priority Call 26: Priority Call 37: Not used

GN: Group Number (1-7) S/A: Specific Terminating Equipment (Enter S.)

S: StationSSTN: Special Station Number

Assignment of Special Incoming

TN: 1 F: 0

GN:1

S/A: STA SSTN:3111

WRT?


ASID CM0-02

Business, Hotel

• When the call connection destination is an ATT:

TN: Tenant Number F: Function Number (0-7)

0: Off Hook Alarm 1: Not used 2: Not used 3: Attendant Night Transfer 4: Priority Call 15: Priority Call 26: Priority Call 37: Not used

GN: Group Number (1-7) S/A: Specific Terminating Equipment (Enter A.)

A: Attendant Console

Assignment of Special Incoming

TN: 1 F: 5

GN: 1

S/A: A

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASLUCM0-04Business, Hotel

nnectione.

not be

siness, tel

ASLU Assignment of Slumber Time Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display of the Slumber Time Group designation, and the codestinations and a time zone for each Slumber Time Group for the Slumber Time-Do Not Disturb servic

3. Precautions

• Time data should be assigned using military time.

• When assigning plural time data for a specific Slumber Time Group, the time data assigned shouldduplicated.

• When setting a 24-hour slumber time, set both FROM and TO to “00:00”.


List up: LSLU

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGSTDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

• Designation of Slumber Time Group

FUNC: Kind of Function (Enter 1) 1: Group Information

STN: Station Number G: Slumber Time Group Number (1-7)

Assignment of Slumber Time Data

FUNC: 1 STN: 2000TN: 1 G: 1

WRT?


ASLU CM0-04

Business, Hotel

• Assignment of Connection Destinations and Zone for Slumber Time Group

FUNC: Kind of function (Enter 2) 2: Transfer/Time Data

G: Slumber Time Group Number (1-7)CNT: Slumber Time Counter (1-4) TFR: Transfer Kind (1/2)

1: Attendant 2: Announcement

FROM: Slumber Time Start TimeTO: Slumber Time End Time

Assignment of Slumber Time Data

FUNC:2G: 1CNT: 2 2 TFR: 1

FROM:10:00 TO:13:00

WRT?

Input order of Slumber Time Count is displayed.

Assign as many as designated by parameter CNT.

When all the data have been entered, ‘WRT?’ displays.


Revision 4.0

ASPACM0-01Business

Special

signed.

r ACC,

essary

Code

er of

) is 8.

y digits

siness
ASPA Assignment of Special Access Code

2. Function

This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when aAccess code or Trunk Access code has been dialed.

3. Precautions


• When changing the data, the old data must be deleted before the new data can be assigned.

• When the Access Code (ACC) is for a station number, the first digit of the numbering plan must be asFor example, if the numbering plan for station numbers is 5xxx, “5” is entered as the ACC.

• The numbering plan data must be assigned before assigning the Access Code in this command.

• Unused levels should not be assigned.

• In the case of Speed Calling - System (SRV = SSC, SID = 15); assign NND as the number of digits foand NND1 as the number of digits for Abbreviated Digit Code (ADC).

• When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum number of necdigits (NND) is 5.

• When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account(SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum number of necessary digits NND is 15.

• When assigning Call Park Remote Retrieval Code (SRV = SSC, SID = 63), the ACC equals the numbnecessary digits (NND).

• When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRC=SSC, SID=17), the maximum necessary digits (NND

• When assigning individual TRR access (SRV= SSC;, SID = 17), the maximum number of necessaris eight.


ASPA CM0-01

Business


List up: LNPD


-Parameter EQP- Assignment: AAEDDeletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE

5. Entry Procedure

• For Station Number Level:

TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits) CI: Connection Status Index

N: NormalH: Hooking B: Busy

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter STN.) STN: Station Number Level


TN: 1 ACC: 3 CI: N SRV: STN

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASPACM0-01Business

-

);

);

./

./

• For Service Code:

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index


SRV: Kind of Service (Enter SSC.)SSC: Service Code

SlD: Service Feature Index

The contents of parameter SID are explained below:

1: Call Hold2: Attendant Call (OPR)3: Call Back; Entry 4: Executive Right-of-Way (Override)5: Call Waiting Originating6: Call Back (Cancel)7: Call Pick-Up Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Set9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Can

cel10: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie

Set11: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie

Cancel12: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O

Tie); Set13: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O

Tie); Cancel14: Speed Calling-Station (Program)15: Speed Calling-System 16: TAS Answer17: Individual Trunk Access 18: Not used19: OG Trunk Queuing (Set)20: OG Trunk Queuing (Cancel)21: Speed Calling-Station (Access)


TN: 1 ACC: 22 CI: H SRV: SSC SID: 1

WRT?


ASPA CM0-01

Business

22-27: Not used28: Call Forward - I’m Here (Set)29: Call Forward - I’m Here (Cancel)30-34: Not used35: Call Pick-up Direct36: Not used37: Priority Call 138: Priority Call 239: Priority Call 340: Priority Paging41: Account Code42: Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Dial Access to Lock43: Flash Signal Send (CAS-Main)44: Last Number Redial45: Not used46: Bad Call Notify (Faulty Trunk Report)47: Wake Up Call Set (Hotel, Business 6100 Series Software and above)48: Timed Reminder, Entry49: Timed Reminder, Cancel50-59: Not used60: Attendant Manual Override61: Station Call Park (Park)62: Station Call Park (Local Retrieval)63: Station Call Park (Remote Retrieval)


Revision 4.0

ASPACM0-01Business

• For Service Code Appendix:

TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index

N: NormalH: HookingB: Busy

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter SSCA) SSCA: Service Code Appendix

SIDA: Service Feature Index A (1-225)

The contents of parameter SIDA are explained below: 1-40: Not used41: Voice call 42: Message Remainder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used46: Line Load Control; Assign 47: Line Load Control; Delete 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel52: Not used53: Boss/Secretary Override54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON or Station; Set55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON or Station; Cancel 56-62: Not used63: Call Pickup Expand64-65: Not used66: Multi Channel Recording (REC)67: Not used68: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY)69-84: Not used85: Dial Access to Unlock86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry88: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Entry 89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Cancel92-95: Not used

Assignment of Special Access CodeTN: 1 ACC: 10 CI: B SRV: SSCASIDA: 41

WRT?

Note


ASPA CM0-01

Business

g is in

96: Follow Me Phone97: Call Hold Conference98: Internal Zone Paging99-105: Not used106: Call Return107-225: Not used

Note: These indexes are used when ASYD, SYS1, Index 79, bit 2 is assigned as “1” (Call Forwardinservice).

• For Outgoing Call:



SRV: Kind of Service (Enter OGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call

RT: Route Number


TN: 1 ACC: 90CI: B SRV: OGC RT: 3WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASPACM0-01Business

-T

• For Outgoing Call (Advance):


N: NormalH: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter OGCA)OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance)

CNT: Number of advanced routeRT: Route Number

• For Least Cost Route Selection:


N: NormalH: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter LCR .) LCR: Least Cost Route Selection

RT: Route Number. (Enter Dummy Route Number.)2nd DT: Second Dial Tone (0/1: -/SDT)AH: Authorization Code Dialing (0/1: -/AH)SUB: Sub Address Dialing (0/1)



TN: 1 ACC: 80 CI: N SRV: OGCA CNT:3 1-3RT: 5 WRT?

After entering CNT, enter Route No. of the alternateroutes, one after another. (If ENTER is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases by one and then the next RNo. can be entered.)

When as many RT Nos. as designated by CNT are entered, ‘WRT?’ displays.


TN: 1 ACC: 70CI: H SRV: LCRRT: 3 2nd DT: 0 AH: 0 SUB: 0

WRT?


ASPA CM0-01

Business

• For Register Sender LCR:


N: NormalH: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter LCRS.) LCRS: Register Sender LCR

RT: Route Number (Entry Dummy Route Number).2nd DT: Second Dial Tone (0/1: -/SDT)AH: Authorization Code Dialing (0/1: -/AH) SUB: Sub Address Dialing (0/1)


• For Office Termination:


N: NormalH: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter UNIF.)UNIF: Office Termination

SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from the Access Code (1-5)


TN: 1 ACC: 777CI: H SRV: LCRSRT: 3 2nd DT: 0 AH: 0 SUB: 0

WRT?


TN: 1 ACC: 888 CI: N SRV: UNIFSKIP: 0 WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASPACM0-01Business

• For Announcement Service:


N: NormalH: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter ANNC). ANNC: Announcement Service

TYPE: Announcement Equipment Type.(0/1 . . . -/Multiple Announcement)

ATN: Announcement Trunk Tenant No. (1-255)EQP: Announcement Equipment No. (1-127)

Note: When TYPE equals 1, EQP must be 122 through 125.

• For Paging Answer or Paging Cancel:


N: NormalH: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service (Enter PAGA or PAGC.) PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel

RT: Route Number


TN: 1 ACC: 11 CI: N SRV: ANNCTYPE: 1ATN: 1 EQP: 122

WRT?


TN: 1 ACC: 21 CI: N SRV: PAGART: 10 WRT?


ASPD CM0-02

Business, Hotel

breviated

er to be

ard= 131).

It

C).

e as-

siness, tel

ASPD Assignment of Speed Calling Code


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the telephone number corresponding to each AbDigit Code.

3. Precautions

• The access code for the designated outgoing trunk route must be included in the telephone numbassigned to the Abbreviated Digit Code.

• If a pause is required in the number to be assigned, P is entered where the pause is required. The standlength of a pause is 3 seconds. However, this can be changed in the ASYD command (SYS-1 INDEX

• When assigning a number in which certain digits vary, enter an M where digits are to be dialed manually. should be noted that once M is entered in any part of telephone number, all digits following the M must bedialed manually.


List up: LSDA

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberADC: Abbreviated Digit Code (Max. 4 digits) Note 1CD: Telephone number (max. 24 Digits) corresponding to the Abbreviated Digit Code (AD

Note: The data that can be assigned as ADC are limited to numbers 0 through 9, *, #, and pause.

Note 1: When the 6100-version software or earlier is installed in the system, a maximum of 3 digits can bsigned.

Assignment of Speed Calling Code

TN: 1 ADC: 23CD: 123

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASTDCM0-03Business, Hotel

.

siness, tel

ASTD Assignment of State Translation Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign and display various kinds of status translation data on a system basis

3. Precautions

• This command should only be used by NEC Engineering.

• At initialization, all the data becomes “0”.


List up: LSYD

5. Entry Procedure

STM: State Translation Main Category Number (0-31)STS: State Translation Category Number (0-31)ST: State Translation Information (0/1)

For assigning parameters STM, STS, and ST, refer to the table on the following page.

Assignment of State Translation Date

STM: 0 STS: 0 ST: 1

WRT?


ASTD CM0-03

Business, Hotel

Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD

STM STSST

*=standard settings

0

0

Processing at the time of originating an outgoing C.O. line call 0

If the calling station is that of RSC = 1, 3, the call is outgoing via LCR.

1*The call is processed by second dial tone system.

Processing for an override from a station into a connection between COT and another station.

0 Override not allowed

1* Override allowed

Passing dial tone 0 Invalid

1* Valid

Processing for warning tone sending at the moment when ATT has overridden into a connection between COT and station (Busy Verification)

0Warning tone is sent out to both the ATT and the station.

1*Warning tone is sent out to the Station, ATT, and C.O. side.

Processing for warning tone sending at the moment when ATT has overridden into busy COT (Attendant Override)

0Warning tone is not sent out to the C.O. side.

1*Warning tone is also sent out to the C.O. side.

Note 1: One setting applies to five items. (STM=0, STS 0)

1Kind of Trunk to be seized for an outgoing C.O. line call from ATT

0 BWT only

1* Either BWT or OGT

2

Tandem connection with COT included 0 Restricted

1*Allowed (depending on ARRC)

3 Enable Passing Dial Tone 0*

4Busy Verification Tone for Att. and Sta. only

0*

1

0

Trunk Release0

Station (Calling Party Release)

1* Trunk Note 2

Note 2: Valid when C. O. line has a release signal.

1 0*

2 0*

3 0*

* = standard settings

Note 1


Revision 4.0

ASTDCM0-03Business, Hotel

2

0Three-way calling with COT included 0 Restricted

1* Allowed

1Three-way calling with COT included in Executive Right of Way service

0 Restricted

1* Allowed

2Outgoing call to a C.O. Line or a Tie Line after holding the COT.

0 Restricted

1* Allowed

3Outgoing call to a C.O. Line after holding a station or a Tie Line

0 Restricted

1* Allowed

4

Processing for calling a fully-restricted station after holding the COT

0 Restricted

1*Allowed (Note: The call can be transferred.)

5

Processing in which ATT overrides to the connection between the COT and a station (Busy Verification), then Busy Verification Warning Tone is sent out periodically.

0*Warning tone is sent out to both the station and the ATT

1Warning tone is sent out to the station, ATT, and C.O. side.

6Step Call when a Tie Line incoming call encounters busy.

0 Allowed

1 Restricted

4 0Remote Access to PBX/Automated Attendant.

0 Not provided

1* In service

6

0

Type of System0*

Standard for MMG/UMG/IMGxh/IMGdxh

1* Standard for IMG/IMGx

1 0*

2 0*

3 0*

7 0 1*

Table 2-7 List for Assignment of ASTD (Continued)

STM STSST

*=standard settings

* = standard settings


ASTN CM0-01

Business

siness
ASTN Assignment of Station Number

2. Function

This command is used to change the station number assigned to a particular LEN.

3. Precautions


• If the MW lamp is lit at the station to be changed (or, in the case of a Dterm, if “Message Waiting” is dis-played), extinguish the MW lamp (or MW display on the Dterm) using the CMWL command.


Assignment: ASDTDeletion: ASDT Display: ASDT, DLEN, DSTN List up: LLEN, LSTN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberNEW STN: New Station Number

Assignment of Station Number

TN: 1 STN: 3113 NEW STN: 3666

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASTPCM0-02Business, Hotel

) in case

is com-

of Out-

ncom-

siness, tel

ASTP Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display selection translation pattern numbers (PNO, PNIdigit addition or deletion is necessary for an outgoing or incoming call on any particular route.

3. Precautions

• When a signal translation pattern number (PNO, PNI) is to be assigned or deleted by means of thmand, the following commands must be executed.

a. In the case of Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNO), the AOSP (Assignment going Selection Pattern) Command must be executed.

b. In the case of Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (PNI), the AISP (Assignment of Iing Selection Pattern) Command must be executed.


List up: LSLP

-Parameter PNI- Assignment: AISPDeletion: AISPDisplay: AISPList up: LSLP

-Parameter PNO- Assignment: AOSPDeletion: AOSPDisplay: AOSPList up: LSLP



ASTP CM0-02

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For Incoming:

IC/OG: Kind of Assignment (Enter IC .)IC: Incoming

TN: Tenant Number RT: Route NumberPNI: Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15)

• For Outgoing:

IC/OG: Kind of Assignment (Enter OG.)OG: Outgoing

TN: Tenant Number RT: Route NumberPNO: Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number (1-15)

Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern

IC/OG: IC

TN: 1 RT: 1

PNI: 1

WRT?

Assignment of Selection Translation Pattern

IC/OG: OG

TN: 1 RT:1

PNO:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASYDCM0-03Business, Hotel

siness, tel

ASYD Assignment of System Data


2. Function

This command is necessary for assigning and changing system data in the PBX.

3. Precautions

• ASYD is divided into three sections, as follows:

a. Assignment of System Data-1. (SYS 1)

b. Assignment of System Data-2. (SYS 2)

c. Assignment of System Data-3. (SYS 3)

• System data must be entered using hexadecimal numbers.Refer to “Office Data Specification” of each particular system for the applicable system data.


List up: LSYD

5. Entry Procedure

SYS: System Data Type 1: System Data 12: System Data 23: System Data 3

TN: Tenant Number INDEX: System Data Index

SYS INDEX 1 0-511 2 0-153 0-31

DATA: System Data (Hexadecimal)

Assignment of System Data

SYS: 1INDEX: 5 DATA: 00

WRT?


ATAS CM0-02

Business, Hotel

, on a

siness, tel

M0-02

ATAS Assignment of TAS Service Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display TAS (Trunk Answer from Any Station) informationper-tenant basis.

3. Precautions

None


List up: LTAS

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number MG: Module Group Number (00-31)UNIT: Mounted Unit Number (0-3)CN: Circuit Number (0/1)

Assignment of TAS Service Data

TN: 1 MG: 00 UNIT: 0 CN: 0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ATCCCM0-03Business, Hotel

t side of

anged at

siness, tel

M0-03

ATCC Assignment of Terminal Configuration


2. Function

This command is used to change the baud rate of the MAT. Any of the baud rates displayed at the righthe ATCC screen may be enabled. The baud rate in the MAT is preset to 4800 bps.

Depending on the type of connection to the system, this may have to be changed. If the baud rate is chany time, the IOC in the system must also be changed to match the new baud rate.


None

4. Entry Procedure

Data TransmissionSpeed Selection: 300 bps

600 bps 1200 bps (MODEM) 4800 bps (DEFAULT) 9600 bps

Assignment of Terminal Configuration

Program Version Number: 8.00

Program Version Date: 86/05/16

Data Transmission Speed:4800

WRT?

This section is automatically displayed.

Default data is displayed. Enter the intended data from the MAT.


ATCP CM0-02

Business, Hotel

rn Num-e

required

siness, tel

ATCP Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information


2. Function

This command is used to set or change the time period corresponding to each Time of Day Change Patteber (0-7). These Time of Day Change Patterns are used to change the routes to be used during a specific timperiod, so that trunks can be effectively utilized and call charges can be kept to a minimum.

3. Precautions

• The Data display function and data assignment function of this command are separate, and the function must be selected at the start of the command operation.


List up: LTCP

5. Entry Procedure

• To Assign Time/Pattern Change Data

WRT/DPY: Operation Mode (To assign data, enter W.)W: AssignmentD: Display

FROM-TO-: Time Data for TDPTN TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (Enter 0-7).

Note: Assignment intervals must be at least 30 minutes.

Note: The system will fill in any unassigned time patterns for a 24-hour period.

Assignment of Time/Pattern Change Information

WRT/DPY: W

FROM 00:00 TO 08:00

TDPTN: 1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ATCPCM0-02Business, Hotel

.

ll

• To Display Time/Pattern Change Data

WRT/DPY: Operation Mode(To display data, enter D.)W: AssignmentD: Display

FROM-TO-: Time Data for TDPTN TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7).

• To Delete Time/Pattern Change Data

WRT/DPY: Operation Mode (To delete data, enter W.)W: AssignmentD: Display

FROM-TO-: Time Data for TDPTN TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern (0-7).

Note: Times must be entered from 00:00 to 24:00. This deletes all assignments.

Note: To change any assignments, you must delete all assignments and then reassign the new ones


WRT/DPY: D

FROM 00:00 TO 08:00

TDPTN: 1

WRT?

Press ENTER. This number will increase by one, and aassigned patterns will be displayed.


WRT/DPY: W

FROM 00:00 TO 24:00

TDPTN: 0

WRT? Y


ATDP CM0-02

Business, Hotel

an out-

e must

iction is

siness, tel

ATDP Assignment of Toll Code Restriction


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display allowable calls or define 3/6 digit toll restriction on going connection basis and a tandem or trunk-to-trunk connection basis.

3. Precautions

• When assigning the destination (Area/Office) code (DC) all the digits plus the digits in the access codbe assigned.

• The AARP command is necessary when restriction data has been assigned to RES = 2 (Toll Restrrequired) in the ATDP command, the ARSC command or in the ARRC command.


List up: LTDP




Revision 4.0

ATDPCM0-02Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For a Tandem Connection:

a. Enter the data of TDM/OG, DAY/NIGHT.

TDM/OG: (Enter T.)T: Tandem Connection

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night ModeD: Day Mode N: Night Mode

b. Enter the remainder data.

TDM: Tandem Connection ICRT: Incoming Route NumberOGRT: Outgoing Route NumberDC: Destination (Area) Code (Max. 11 digits)TDI: Restriction Data

0: Connection is Restricted 1: Connection is Allowed2: 3/6-Digit Toll Restriction 3: C.O. Operator Call (9 + 0)

NND: Applicable only when TDI=2

Assignment of Toll Code Restriction

TDM/OG: T

DAY/NIGHT: D


TDM

ICRT: 1 OGRT: 1

DC: 44 TDI: 0

WRT?

This is displayed when T has been entered.


ATDP CM0-02

Business, Hotel

• For an Outgoing Connection:

a. Enter the data of TDM/OG, DAY/NIGHT.

TDM/OG: (Enter O.)O: Outgoing Connection

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night modeD: Day Mode N: Night Mode

b. Enter the remainder data.

OGRT: Outgoing Route Number DC: Destination (Area) Code (Max. 11 digits)RSC: Restriction Class (0-15)TDI: Restriction Data

0: Connection is Restricted 1: Connection is Allowed2: 3/6-Digit Toll Restriction 3: C.O. Operator Call (9 + 0)


TDM/OG:0

DAY/NIGHT:D


OG DAY

RSC: 0 OGRT: 1

DC: 44 TDI: 0

WRT?

This displays when 0 has been entered.However, when NIGHT has been entered forparameter DAY/NIGHT, NIGHT is displayedhere.


Revision 4.0

ATGLCM0-02Business, Hotel

onsole,

siness, tel

ATGL Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp


2. Function

• This command is used to assign, delete and display the Trunk Group Busy Lamps on the Attendant Cwhen all the trunks in a specific route are busy.

• This command allows each Attendant Console to have any route dedicated to any TG lamp.

3. Precautions

None


List up: LPAT

-Parameter ATN- Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLENList up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN


5. Entry Procedure

ATN: Attendant Console Number TGN: Trunk Group Number (1-10) RT: Route Number

Assignment of Trunk Group Busy Lamp

ATN: 1TGN: 1 RT: 1

WRT?


ATIM SYS

Business, Hotel

d sec-he hard-

siness, tel

ATIM Assignment of Date and Time


2. Function

The NEAX2400 ICS is provided with two kinds of clocks; a hardware clock showing the hour, minute anond, and a software clock. The clock information entered in this command sets both the software and tware clock. Clock information is executed when the Y key is pressed following the “WRT?” prompt.

3. Precautions

• This clock is assigned in military time.


None

5. Entry Procedure

a. Enter “YEAR”.

Note: Year must be entered in four digits: i.e., 1998.

b. Enter “MONTH”.

Assignment of Date and Time

DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE]TIME 16:16 YEAR :1998


DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE]TIME 16:16 MONTH :7


Revision 4.0

ATIMSYSBusiness, Hotel

c. Enter “DAY”.

d. Enter “HOUR”.

e. Enter “MINUTE”.


DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE]TIME 16:16 DAY :15


DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE]TIME 16:16 HOUR :16


DATE 1998/07/15 [TUE]TIME 16:16 MINUTE :16WRT? When the MINUTE data is entered, the ‘WRT?’

prompt displays.


ATMD CM0-11

Business, Hotel

ned by

e appro-

siness, tel

ATMD Assignment of Timing Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign the system timer value (ASYD,SYS1, INDEX 128-147, 149-152, 155-159, 189).

3. Precautions

• This command can assign only the typical timer value. The timer value other than this can be assigASYD (Assignment of System Data).

• When the following message appears on the lower part of the screen during data entry, please takpriate measures in accordance with the information below.


ASYD, SYS1, INDEX 128-147, 149-152, 155-159, 189

Error messages are described below.

ERROR MESSAGE DESCRIPTION RESPONSE

The existent data is invalid; therefore suitable data must be assigned.

Timer value is correct, but no indication of command.

Assign another value.

Present data is invalid.Assign correct data first.

Timer value is not correct. Enter the correct data by this command.


Revision 4.0

ATMDCM0-11Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

a. Kind of System timer selection screen

• Selection Display -1

• Selection Display - 2

Assignment of Timing Data AssignNo. Kind of Timer Index

1. Register Prepause Timer 128 2. Register Inter Digit Timer 129 3. Sender Connection Acknowledge Timer 130 4. Sender Prepause Timer 131 5. Sender Inter Digit Timer for DP 132 6. Sender Inter Digit Timer for PB 133 7. Trunk Soft Hold Timer for Attendant Console 134 8. Seizure Guard Timer 135 9. Ground Button on Hold Timer for SCB Telephone 136 10. Periodic Timer Indication Tone Timer (Starting Timer) 137 11. Periodic Timer Indication Tone Timer (Tone Interval) 13812. No Answer Timer (Station to Station Connection) 139 13. No Answer Timer for Recall on Call Transfer 140 14. No Answer Timer for Station Call from ATT using C.F.D. (via ATT) 141 15. Automatic Recall Timer for Dterm 144

< > Up < > Down <RETURN> Execution <ESC> Next Page

←

←

Assignment of Timing Data AssignNo. Kind of Timer Index

16. Attendant Automatic Recall Timer 145 17. Howler Tone Timer 146 18. DIT Supervisor Timer at Terminal Station Busy 14719. Camp On Recall Timer for CAS-Satellite Station 14920. CAS Flash Signal Sending Guard Timer for CAS-Main Station 15021. CAS Flash Signal Timer for CAS Main Station 15122. Interval for Call Waiting Indication Tone to Busy Station 15223. Attendant Sender Pre-pause Timer 155 24. Trunk Soft Hold Timer A 156 25. Trunk Soft Hold Timer B 157 26. Attendant Busy Verification Warning Tone Timer 158 27. OG Queuing, Automatic Cancel Timer 15928. ACM, UBM signal No Receiving Timer 189

< > Up < > Down <RETURN> Execution <ESC> Next Page

←

←


ATMD CM0-11

Business, Hotel

valid.

Procedure:

1. Select the kind of Timer you want to assign:

Use the ( or ) keys to move through the list.

Use the ESC key to move between Screen Display 1 and Screen Display 2.

2. Press ENTER . A screen will display for the kind of timer you have selected. [See (b).]

a. Kind of Timer Display (Example: Register of Prepause Timer, as selected on Selection Display.)

Procedure:

1. Move the cursor to the desired position.

(“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ”)

2. Press ENTER; “WRT” displays.

3. “Y”: Assign the Timer value.

“N”: Return to the Selection Display.

4. To go back to the Selection Display screen (Timer Menu), press ESC.

Note 1: Timer, Index No., and present Timer value display.

Note 2: To select another parameter, use the arrow keys.

Note 3: When the following Message appears in the lower part of the screen,“The Existing Data is InSuitable Data Must Be Assigned”, you can return to the Selection Display screen by pressing ENTER.

←

←

Assignment of Timing Data Assign

Register Prepause Timer

Index Number [128] Timing Data:12 sec. WRT? Y

Select the timer value from the following. [sec.] * Default 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18

20 22 24 26 28 30

*When this data is DEFAULT,12 sec. is to be set.

< > Up < > Down < > Right < > Left <RETURN> Execution <ESC> Timer Menu

←

←

← ←

←

← ← ←


Revision 4.0

ATNRCM0-02Business, Hotel

siness, tel

ATNR Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class


2. Function

This command is used to assign, and display tenant restriction information for each service feature.

3. Precautions

• Not used data should not be assigned.



List up: LRTC

5. Entry Procedure

DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night ModeD: Day Mode N: Night Mode

OGTN: Originating TenantTMTN: Terminating TenantTRI: Tenant Restriction Index (0-15)

0: Station to Station Call1: Assignment of Call Forwarding-All Calls from a Station2: Not used 3: Assignment of Call Forwarding-All Calls from an ATTCON4: Attendant Call, Interposition Transfer, Individual Attendant Calling 5: Day/Night Mode Change6: Not Used 7: Routing of an incoming call to a station 8-15: Not used

RES: Restriction Data (0/1)0: Restricted 1: Allowed

Assignment of Tenant Restriction Class

DAY/NIGHT: D

OGTN: 1 TMTN: 1

TRI: 0 RES: 1

WRT?


ATRF CM0-03

Business, Hotel

nt isaffic

rafficnt Out

ecified.

be ig-

siness, tel

ATRF Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order


2. Function

This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs. A request for traffic measuremeperformed when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by this command. The collected trmeasurement data can be output from the MAT printer or stored on the HD of the MAT.

3. Precautions

• If error message “12” is displayed when data “1” or “2” (Traffic measurement) is entered for “Type of TMeasurement”, it is because System Data 1, INDEX 47, Bit 7 is assigned as “0”(Traffic Measuremeof Service).

• When assigning the traffic measurement duration time, an interval of less than one hour cannot be sp

For Example:9:00 a.m. - 9:30 a.m. This input data will be ignored; but from 9:00 a.m. to 11:00 a.m., this will not nored and a traffic-study for a two-hour period will be processed.


Display: DTFl, DTF2, DTF3BackUp: TDBU


Revision 4.0

ATRFCM0-03Business, Hotel

esig-

traffic

oldest

5. Entry Procedure

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (1-16) 1: Terminal Traffic 2: Route Traffic3: Station Peg Count4: ATT Peg Count5: Route Peg Count6: Service Peg Count8: UCD Route Peg Count9: UCD Group Peg Count10: UCD Station Peg Count

PORT: Traffic Information Output Terminal No. (0-7)INTERVAL: Output Interval must be assigned by units of 10 Minutes (30-120 minutes). When d

nating output time particulary, assign 0.FROM-TO-: Measurement is to be designated.TIME: Output Time Note 1

Note 1: Enter this parameter only when INTERVAL = 0 and TYPE = 3 ~ 10 (assigning the output time of measurement information).

OUTPUT: 0: Printer1: MAT (HARD DISK) Note 2, Note 3

Note 2: The following types of Traffic Measurement can select OUTPUT=1 (MAT (HARD DISK)):1. Terminal Traffic2. Route Traffic3. Station Peg Count4. ATT Peg Count5. Route Peg Count

Note 3: A maximum of 100 files can be stored on the HD of the MAT for each type of Traffic Measurement.When the number of files exceeds 100 for each type, the new data is overwritten eliminating thedata.

Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

TYPE: 1 PORT: 0

INTERVAL:60

FROM 09:00 TO 17:00

OUTPUT: 1

WRT?


ATRK CM0-01

Business, Hotel

d trunk

dle using

CRT.

sole can

ting the

ad of

ATRK Assignment of Trunk Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display LENs information corresponding to a route (RT) annumber (TK), on a per-tenant basis.

3. Precautions

• When trunks are assigned via this command, they are in the make-busy state, and must be made ithe MBTK and MBTC commands.

• When assigning the first trunk of each circuit card, the message “PKG CHECK” is displayed on theWhen this occurs, confirm that a circuit card is mounted in the proper location; then press ENTER.

Note: If the trunk is a DCFT, the “PKG CHECK” message is always displayed.

• When an Attendant Console is assigned, enter the number of the tenants which that Attendant Conhandle. (Maximum of 10)

• When deleting an Attendant Console, unplug the handset from the Attendant Console before execucommand.

• When deleting the ClC trunk of the No.7 CCIS, message “LINE BUSY” is sometimes displayed inste“DEL?”. This message means that the CIC trunk is busy or the line concerned is not connected. Therefore,before deleting the ClC trunk, confirm the line status by means of “DCON” command.


Revision 4.0

ATRKCM0-01Business, Hotel


Display: DLENList up: LTRK, LLEN, LHEN

-Parameter RSC- Assignment: ARSCDeletion: ARSC Display: ARSC List up: LRTC

-Parameter SFC- Assignment: ASFCDeletion: ASFC Display: ASFCList up: LRTC

-Make Busy- Assignment: MBLE, MBTK, MBTC(Busy/Idle) Display: DMBS, DMBT

ROUTE No. TRUNK NAME ROUTE No. TRUNK NAME

901 Attendant Console 917 MFC Sender

902 Originating Register Trunk 918 Not used

903 Incoming Register Trunk 919 MODEM (Bus.); DLINT (H/M)

904 MF Receiver 920 MODEM

905 Sender Trunk DP/PB 921 MODEM

906PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

922MODEM

907 AMP 923 MODEM

908 Not used 924 MODEM

909 Three-Way Conference Trunk 925 MODEM

910 Not used 926 MODEM

911 Not used 927 Not used

912 Originating Register Trunk for ATTCON 928 Not used

913Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON

929Data Signaling Trunk-Option

914 Not used 930 Rate Adaptation Conversion Trunk

915 Night ATTCON 931 Not used

916 MFC Register


ATRK CM0-01

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For OG/IC Trunk:

RT: Route NumberDo not enter the following Route Numbers for OG/IC Trunk. 901: ATT 902: ORT 903: IRT 904: MFR 905: Sender906: PBR for Automated Attendant Service 907: AMP 909: DCFT912: ORT for ATT 913: DCFT for ATT915: Night ATT 916: MFCR917: MFCS919: DLINT (for H/M System); MODEM (for Business)920-926: MODEM929: DST 930: RCT 933: CRT

TK: Trunk Number (1-255)LEN: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

TN: Tenant Number

Assignment of Trunk Data

RT: 1 TK: 1 LENS: 000160TN: 1 WRT?


XX X XX X


Revision 4.0

ATRKCM0-01Business, Hotel

• For Intra-office Route

RT: Route NumberTrunk Route NumberIntra-office Route Number:901: ATT 902: ORT 903: IRT 904: MFR 905: Sender 906: PBR for Automated Attendant Service907: AMP 909: DCFT912: ORT for ATT 913: DCFT for ATT915: Night ATT 916: MFCR917: MFCS919: DLINT (for H/M System); MODEM (for Business)920-926: MODEM929: DST 930: RCT933: CRT

TK: Trunk Number (1-255) LEN: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

CNT: Number of Tenants TN: Tenant Number RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)

Assignment of Trunk Data

RT: 901 TK: 1

LENS: 000200 MASTER

CNT: 1 TN: 1

RSC: 0 SFC: 0

DEL?

This is displayed only for the master ATTCON.


XX X XX X


ATRK CM0-01

Business, Hotel

Note: Be careful when entering the LENs of the ATTCON and DCFT.

• ATT

LENS:

• DCFT

Level (0-1)Group (20)Unit (0-3)MG (00-31)

XX X XX X

LENS:

Note: DCFT cannot be assigned to Unit = 0, 2.

MG UNIT GROUP LEVEL

XX

X 21 0

X 21 3

X 21 6

X 22 1

X 22 4

X 22 7

X 23 2

X 23 5

Level (0-7)Group (21-23)Unit (1, 3)MG (00-31)

XX X XX X


Revision 4.0

ATTDCM0-03Business, Hotel

e LTST

siness, tel

ATTD Assignment of Trunk Test Data


2. Function

• This command is used to assign, delete and display trunk test data for the TTLC Command.

• Trunk Test data: Tone type of response and dial code for sending/LENS data and Access Code for thcircuit card.

3. Precautions

This data must be assigned before using the TTLC command.


Test Operation: TTLC



ATTD CM0-03

Business, Hotel

. If Test

5. Entry Procedure

• For Trunk Test Parameters:

TYPE: Information Type (Enter 1.)1: Trunk Test Parameters

RT: Route Number RESP: Response Pattern

TT: Test Tone (Continuous 1 Khz Tone)RB: Ring Back ToneTO: Time Over (No Tone) Note

Note: Each trunk is automatically tested eight seconds after the previous digits have been sent outTone (TT) or Ring Back Tone (RBT) has been acknowledged, an error is indicated.

DC: Dial Code (Max. 24 digits)

• For the LTST circuit card:

TYPE: Information Type (Enter 2.) 2: LENS of the LTST circuit card

LENS: LENS of the station connected to LTSTACC: Individual Trunk Access Code (Max. 3 digits) TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number

Assignment of Trunk Test Data

TYPE: 1 RT: 1RESP: TTDC: 3

WRT?

Assignment of Trunk Test Data

TYPE: 2 LENS: 000001 ACC: 801 TN: 1 STN: 3111

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AUADCM0-03Business, Hotel

for each

lay An-

siness, tel

AUAD Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display information relating to the delay announcement UCD group.

3. Precautions

The Control Station of the UCD Group must be designated as the UCD Group Station, when the Denouncement-UCD Data is shared by all Groups. When designating “b6 = 0/1: Common to All Groups/On anIndividual Group basis” in SYS-1, INDEX 70, take note of the following:

a. The system data cannot be changed after Delay Announcement-UCD Data has been assigned.

b. When the system data has been designated as common to all Groups (b6 = 0), “GROUP COMMON” is dis-played, and the TN and STN parameters are not displayed.


List up: LUAD


AUAD CM0-03

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control Station STN: Station Number of UCD Group Control StationDLYT: Delayed Timer (0-30 sec., 2-sec. interval) MSGT: Message Timer (0-30 sec., 2-sec. interval)RP: Number of Times Announcement is sent (0/1)

0: Once 1: Replay Announcements

INT: Replay Interval (0-30 sec., 2-sec. interval: applicable only when RP = 1)

CNT: Number of Announcement Trunks (1-8) RT: Route Number of Announcement Trunk TK: Trunk Number of Announcement Trunk

Assignment of UCD Delayed Announcement Data

TN: 1 STN: 3155

DLYT: 10 MSGT: 10

RP: 0 INT: 10

CNT: 1 1 RT: 10 TK: 1

WRT? Y

The sequence of the current data

The ‘WRT?’ prompt displays after entry of the numberof trunks designated in CNT.

Only when RP=1


Revision 4.0

AUCDCM0-04Business, Hotel

oup for

play-

siness, tel

AUCD Assignment of UCD Control Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display the Threshold Value of Call Waiting to a UCD grCall Waiting Display-UCD service.

3. Precautions

• Before assigning a Threshold Value by this command, be sure to assign the following data:

a. ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 61 b5 = 1: Call Waiting Display-UCD in Service.

b. ASHU: Assign the UCD Group for which Call Waiting Display-UCD service is to be provided.

• LAHP flashing: When the preassigned number of calls or more are waiting in the UCD queue.


List up: LUCD

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN: UCD Station Number Note QTH ACT: UCD Queing Peg Count Value Valid/Invalid (1/0)QTH: UCD Queing Peg Count Value (0-255)CWT: Threshold Value of Call Waiting (1-255)MCI: Message Center Interface Data Transfer Valid/Invalid (0/1)

Note: Enter any of the Station Numbers assigned within the UCD Group for which Call Waiting DisUCD service is to be provided.

TN: 1 STN: 2000QTH ACT: 0QTH: 0CWT: 2MCI: 0

WRT?


AUNE CM0-01

Business, Hotel

assign-

nation

siness, tel

AUNE Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display the skip data for Uniform Numbering of EPN.

3. Precautions

If error code is displayed, then the NPC is already assigned in the AFRS, and ASTP commands. (Doublement)

Note: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error supplementary explaon the screen.


List up: LUNE


Display: ARTDList up: LRTD

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number RT: Outside Route NumberNPC: Number Pattern Code (Max. 12 digits)SKIP: Skip Data (0-12)

Assignment of Uniform Numbering for EPN

TN:1 RT:11

NPC:1009

SKIP:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AUNTCM0-03Business, Hotel

siness, tel

AUNT Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the type of unit to be mounted.

3. Precautions

• There are three (3) types of mounting units (see Entry Procedure below).

• Perform system initialization without DM clear, after assigning or deleting Unit Data.


List up: LSYD

5. Entry Procedure

• For PIM:

MG: Module Group Number (00-31)TYPE: PIM Type Indication (Enter 1.)

1: Port Interface ModuleUNIT: Unit Number (0-3)

Assignment of Unit Arrangement Data

MG:00 TYPE:1 UNIT:0

WRT?


AUNT CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• For PFT


2: Power Failure Transfer PKG: Circuit Card Number (0-3)

• For LTST


4: Line Test Circuit Card


MG:00 TYPE:2 PKG:0

WRT?


MG:00 TYPE:4

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AUOGCM0-01Business, Hotel

infor-

mandalls des-nt-

siness, tel

AUOG Assignment of UCD Overflow Group


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete, and display Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Overflow Group mation.

3. Precautions

The station numbers assigned to a UCD group in the ASHU (Assignment of Station Hunting-UCD) commust be used. This command is required when all stations in one particular UCD group are busy. The cignated to that group can overflow (Hunt) to another group. They overflow from Tenant-A, STN-A, to TenaB, STN-B.


List up: LSHG, LSHL

-UCD Hunting Group- Assignment: ASHUDeletion: ASHUDisplay: ASHUList up: LSHG, LSHL

5. Entry Procedure

TN-A, STN-A: Tenant Number and Station which belongs to a UCD groupTN-B, STN-B: Tenant Number and UCD Station Number of Overflow Destination

Assignment UCD Overflow Group

TN-A:1 STN-A:3000

TN-B:1 STN-B:3100

WRT?


AVTC CM0-09

Business, Hotel

ie Line

from

siness, tel

AVTC Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display Virtual Tie Line Numbers to be used in Virtual TService.

3. Precautions

• This data is to be assigned at the terminating office.

• A Virtual Tie Line Number is a station number converted, as a number for Virtual Tie Line service,one of the subscriber numbers assigned on the ISDN line.


List up: LVTC

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN: Idle Station Number use Virtual Tie Line Call

Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Call Data

TN : 1STN: 1010

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AVTLCM0-09Business, Hotel

rvice.

not as-

oute is

s des-

nday

siness, tel

AVTL Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data


2. Function

This command is used to assign a schedule for virtual tie line implementation period in Virtual Tie Line Se

3. Precautions

• At the time of data setting, assign outgoing /incoming call data synchronously.

• The maximum input value for Route Number should be the value assigned by ASYD.

After entering Route Number, check to see if the corresponding Route Data is assigned or not. If signed, ERROR Number (ERR = 0019) is displayed.

Of the Route Class Data, the B Channel Route is valid only when LSG = 12, and the D Channel Rvalid only when LSG = 13.

• Virtual Tie Line service is valid only within the time period designated by the Time Range on the dayignated by the Week Range in the period designated by the Date Range.

Example:DATE: 09/01-09/30WEEK: MON-FRITIME: 8:30-17:30

When the above is designated, Virtual Tie Line service is valid from 8:30 through 17:30 from Mothrough Friday of every week starting from September 1st through September 30th.

• The entry range (DATE) of the Date Range is within one year.

Example:01/01-12/31: One year from January 1st to December 31st.12/01-11/30: One year from December 1st to November 30th of the following year.

• The Week Range is entered as follows.

Example:MON-FRI: Five days from Monday to Friday SAT-SUN: Two days from Saturday to SundayMON-MON: One day if the same Monday is designated.

Designation in reverse directionMON-SUN: Seven days when going back by one weekTUE-SUN: Six days when going back by two weeksSAT-WED: Five days when going back by three weeks


AVTL CM0-09

Business, Hotel

he Data

th is thend are

cessing.

• When the Date Range is one day, only the starting week is displayed. The relationship between tRange and the Week Range is as follows.

Example:|In the case of DATA; 11/08-11/22, WEEK; MON-WED

When 11/08 is Wednesday, 11/22 is Wednesday of two week after. In the designated Date Range, 8first Monday. 13th through 15th are Monday through Wednesday of next week, and 20th through 22Monday through Wednesday of the week after next. Thus, these seven days are the subject for pro

• The Time Range cannot be designated when the end time is earlier than the start time.

Example:00:10-20:00 From 0:10 to 19:59 05:20-05:30 From 5:20 to 5:29 10:10-09:10 Cannot be designated 10:50-10:10 Cannot be designated


Deletion: RVTLDisplay: RVTLList up: LVTC


Revision 4.0

AVTLCM0-09Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

If “Y” is entered to parameter NEXT, the display changes as follows.

DATE: [a]/[b] - [c]/[d]: Date Range a: Start Month (01-12)b: Start Day (01-31) c: Last Month (01-12)d: Last Day (01-31)

PTN: Pattern Number IC/OG: IC: Incoming Call

OG: Outgoing Call RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberD-LENS: LENS of Dch

CH: Bch NumberCALLING: Calling Number (max. 24 digits)

(Subscriber Number of ISDN Line of the Originating Office)

Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data

DATE : 03/27 - 03/31 PTN: 0 IC/OG : OG RT: 12 TK: 1D-LENS : 001014 CH: 6CALLING: 123456 KEYPAD : 1 NEXT? Y

Assignment of Virtual Tie Line Data

CALLED : 654321 SUB : 1 SUB NO : 1111WEEK : TUE - SUNTIME : 08:30-17:20 WRT?RESULT: 03/29


XX X XX X


AVTL CM0-09

Business, Hotel

umber

KEYPAD: Keypad Information (0/1) 0: Out of Service 1: In Service

CALLED: Called Number (Max. 24 digits) (Subscriber Number of ISDN Line of the Terminating Office) Note

Note: This Subscriber Line is the Subscriber Number of the ISDN Line corresponding to the Station Nassigned by Virtual Tie Line Call Data (AVTC) at the Terminating Office.

SUB: Kind of Sub Address (0/1) 0: Not Assign 1: Assign

SUB NO: Sub Address (Max. 12 digits)WEEK: [e]-[f]: Week Range

e: Start Week (SUN-MON)f: Last Week (SUN-MON)

TIME: [g]:[h]-[i]:[j]: Time Range g: Start Time (0-23)h: Start Minute (0-50:10 minutes)i: Last Time (0-23) j: Last Minute (0-50:10 minutes)

RESULT: [k]/[I]: Result Display k: Month (01-12)l: Day (01-31)


Revision 4.0

AVTMCM0-09Business, Hotel

siness, tel

AVTM Starting of Virtual Tie Line


2. Function

This command is used to activate Virtual Tie Line urgently.

3. Precautions

• This command is used in following conditions.

a. When a failure is occurred in a Virtual Tie Line, causing a link release.

b. When using the Virtual Tie Line urgently.


Assignment: AVTL, AVTCList up: LVTL, LVTC

5. Entry Procedure

Starting of Virtual Tie Line

Starting of Virtual tie line execute

WRT?: Y


BAID SYS

Business, Hotel

ing.

siness, tel

BAID Basic Debugging Aid [for Engineering use only]


2. Function

This command is a debugging aid that should be used only under the supervision of NECAM Engineer

3. Precautions

Call NECAM Engineering before using this command.


Revision 4.0

BKUPSYSBusiness, Hotel

loppyand:

siness, tel

BKUP Kinds of Memory B ackup [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)]


2. Function

This command administers various data using a Hard Disk mounted in the NEAX2400 IMS and FD (FDisk) of MAT. Save, Load and Verify are available. The following data can be processed by this comm

• Call Forwarding Data

• Office Data stored in DM (Data Memory)

• Individual Speed Calling Data

• Name Display Data

3. Precautions

• Parameters: The following are equipment options:

a. MEM →HDD (ΜΜΜΜΕΕΕΕΜΜΜΜ ↔ HDD: in case of verify)

b. HDD →MAT (HDD ↔ FDD: in case of verify)


None

5. Entry Procedure

• Initial Display

Each Kind of Memory Backup

Function: 1. Data Save2. Data Verify 3. Data Load

Execution Status Indication Area

Supplementary Indication Area

Parameter Input Area


BKUP SYS

Business, Hotel

or 3

• Data Save (MEM HDD)

FUNCTION: (Enter 1.) 1: Data Save

DATA (1-4): 1. Data Memory2. Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data

UNIT: (Enter 1.)1: MEM HDD

LP NUMBER: For MMG/UMG Note

Note: This parameter appears for MMG/UMG when the Processed Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data)(Speed Call Data).

←

0 50 100

0 50 100


Function: 1.Data Save Office Name:2.Data Verify Date :1992/07/22 22:003.Data Load MEM HDD0

Data: 1.Data Memory2.Call Forwarding Data3.Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data

Unit: 1. MEM HDD MEM HDD12. HDD MAT

Accessing Now!! Number of Files Remaining: 7 Files

←←←←

← ←←←←←

←


Revision 4.0

BKUPSYSBusiness, Hotel

or 3

• Data Save (HDD MAT)

FUNCTION: (Enter 1)1: Data Save

DATA(1-4): 1. Data Memory2. Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data4. Name Display Data

UNIT: (Enter 2) 2. HDD MAT

LP NUMBER: For MMG/UMG NoteHFC SELECTION: (0/1)

0: HFC01: HFC1

Note: This parameter for MMG/UMG appears when the Processed Data is 2 (Call Forwarding Data)(Speed Calling Data).

←

0 50 100


Function: 1.Data Save Office Name:2.Data Verify Date :1992/08/19 14:393.Data Load HD0(ACT) MAT

Data: 1.Data Memory2.Call Forwarding Data3.Speed Calling Data 4.Name Display Data

Unit: 1. MEM HDD2. HDD MAT Number of Files Remaining: 1

HFC Selection: 0.HFC0/1.HFC1

Accessing Now!!

←←←←

←←

←


BKUPI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

d FD

l-

siness, tel

BKUPI Kinds of Memory B ackup [for IMG x, IMGxh, IMGdxh and UMGx]


2. Function

LOAD, SAVE and VERIFY are executed as follows depending on the type of equipment.

• MEM → HDD (MEM ↔ HDD: in case of verify)

SAVE and VERIFY are executed to the both system.

• HDD → MAT (HDD ↔ MAT: in case of verify)

SAVE and VERIFY are executed to the system in operation.

• HDD → MEM

LOAD is executed to both systems.

3. Precautions

• This command administers the following data using Hard Disk mounted in the NEAX2400 ICS an(Floppy Disk) of MAT. Save, Load and Verify are available.

a. Call Forwarding Data

b. Office Data stored in DM (Data Memory)

c. Individual Speed Calling Data

d. Name Display Data

• Parameters: The following are equipment options.

a. MEM → HDD (MEM ↔ HDD: in case of verify)

b. HDD → MAT (HDD ↔ FDD: in case of verify)

• Designation of LP Number is necessary in IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. The parameter appears when the folowing equipment options are selected.

a. Call Forwarding Data

b. Speed Calling Data


Revision 4.0

BKUPICM0-10Business, Hotel

ted.

equiredsage

• Designation of CM Number is necessary in UMGx. This parameter appears in the following conditions.

a.

b.

• Designation of system (0/1) is necessary in UMGx. The parameter appears when the Data Verify is selec

• When System Data1, Index 30 is assigned as “02”, two Data Memory files are made. Two FDs are rfor saving Data Memory from HDD to MAT. When the storage capacity of FD is insufficient, a mesappears. Change the disk according to the message.


None

Data Verity Data Memory MEM ↔ HDD

Name Display Data MEM ↔ HDD

Data Load Data Memory HDD ↔ MEM

Name Display Data HDD ↔ MEM


BKUPI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• Initial Display

• Data Save

Memory Backup

Function: 1. Data Save2. Data Verify 3. Data Load

Execution Status Indication Area

Supplementary Indication Area

Parameter Input Area

Memory BackupLP Number:

Function: 1.Data Save OFFICE NAME:2.Data Verify DATE :1995/07/22 22:003.Data Load MEM HDD0

Data: 1.Data Memory2.Call Forwarding Data3.Speed Calling Data4.Name Display Data

Unit: 1. MEM→HDD MEM HDD12. HDD→MAT

LP Number: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 0708 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Accessing Now!! Number of Files Remaining: 7

←←←←

←←←←

0 50 100

0 50 100


Revision 4.0


r 3um-

Function: (Enter 1.) 1: Data Save

Data (1-4): 1. Data Memory2. Call Forwarding Data 3. Speed Calling Data 4. Name Display Data

Unit: (Enter 1.)1: MEM HDD2: HDD → MAT

LP NUMBER × (0 ~ 31): for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx Note

Note: This parameter appears for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx when “Data” is 2 (Call Forwarding Data) o(Speed Calling Data). Only even numbers can be selected. The contents of the parameter “LP Nber” vary depending on the system configuration.

• Data Verify

a. When the “Data Memory” or “Name Display” is selected.

Note: The parameter “CM Number” and “System” appears only for UMGx.

Note 1: This parameter appears when “Unit” is 1 (MEM ↔ HDD).←

[BKUPI]

Memory Backup

Function: 1.Data Save OFFICE NAME:2.Data Verify DATE :1992/08/19 14:393.Data Load HD0(ACT)→→→→MAT


Unit: 1. MEM↔HDD2. HDD↔MAT Number of files remaining: 1

CM Number: 0.CM0/1.CM1 Note 1

System: 0.SYSTEM0/1.SYSTEM1 Note 1

0 50 100


BKUPI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

meter” is 2

b. When the “Call Forwarding Data” or “Speed Calling Data” is selected.

Note 1: Designation of LP Number is necessary for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. The contents of the para“LP Number” vary depending on the system configuration. This parameter appears when “Data(Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data).

How to assign LP Number is as shown below:

Move the cursor to a desired number using arrow key.Only Even numbers can be selected.

Press the space key to select/cancel the number.Designated numbers are indicated with flashing.

After all desired numbers are designated, press the return key.LP Number entry is complete, and designated numbers are highlighted.

Note 2: This parameter appears only for UMGx.

[BKUPI]


Function: 1.Data Save OFFICE NAME:2.Data Verify DATE :1992/08/19 14:393.Data Load HD0(ACT)→→→→MAT


Unit: 1. MEM↔HDD2. HDD↔MAT Number of files remaining: 1

LP Number: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Note 108 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

System: 0.SYSTEM0/1.SYSTEM1 Note 2

Accessing now!!

0 50 100

1

2

3


Revision 4.0


• Data Load

a. When the “Data Memory” or “Name Display Data” is selected.

Note 1: Designation of CM Number is necessary for UMGx.

[BKUPI]

Memory Backup

Function: 1.Data Save OFFICE NAME:2.Data Verify DATE :1992/07/22 22:003.Data Load HDD→→→→MEM0


Unit: HDD→MEM HDD→→→→MEM1

LP Number: 0.CM0/1.CM1 Note 1

Accessing now!!Number of files remaining: 1

0 50 100

0 50 100


BKUPI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

meter” is 2

b. When the “Call Forwarding Data” or “Speed Calling Data” is selected.

Note 1: Designation of LP Number is necessary for IMGxh/IMGdxh/UMGx. The contents of the para“LP Number” vary depending on the system configuration. This parameter appears when “Data(Call Forwarding Data) or 3 (Speed Calling Data).

How to assign LP Number is as shown below:

Move the cursor to a desired number using arrow key.Only Even numbers can be selected.

Press the space key to select/cancel the number.Designated numbers are indicated with flashing.

After all desired numbers are designated, press the return key.LP Number entry is complete, and designated numbers are highlighted.

[BKUPI]


Function: 1.Data Save OFFICE NAME:2.Data Verify DATE :1992/08/19 14:393.Data Load HDD0→→→→MEM


Unit: 1. HDD→MEM HDD1→→→→MEM

LP Number: 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 0708 09 10 11 12 13 14 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 25 26 27 28 29 30 31

Accessing now!!Number of files remaining: 1

0 50 100

0 50 100Note 1

1

2

3


Revision 4.0

BOSDCM0-04Business, Hotel

e One-

ed Call

en

to see

BOSD Backup of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data


2. Function

• Save Function

Saves the data residing in the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card onto a floppy disk.

• Verify Function

Verifies the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk with the data residing in thTouch Speed Call Memory of DLC/ELC card. Note

• Load Function

Loads the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk into the One-Touch SpeMemory of DLC/ELC card. Note

3. Precautions

• Before saving One-Touch Speed Call Memory data, floppy disks must be formatted.

• Memory data for as many as 704 lines can saved in one floppy disk.

• The numbers assigned to 20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys of Dterm are the subject for backup. Also, in thcase of a Dterm on which “Page Changeover Key” (AKYD, FKY = 49) is assigned to one of the functiokeys, 40 numbers (2× 20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys) are the subject for backup.

• When “Speed Calling One-Touch key” (AKYD, FKY = 49) is assigned to a function key Dterm, the numberassigned to that function key is not the subject for backup.

• The circuit cards and the Port Microprocessor (PM) which can be backed up are as shown in Table 2-8.

Note: Error messages for Load or Verify do not display on the screen. You must turn on your printer the error messages.


BOSD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

r to

which

• Error Indications

[VR]: Data saved in the floppy disk does not match the data saved in DLC/ELC card.

[NS]: The circuit card and the Port Microprocessor concerned are not the subject of backup. (RefeTa-ble 2-8.)

[NW]: An attempt has been made to write data into a circuit card and a Port Microprocessor into data cannot be loaded. (Refer to Table 2-8.)

[RD]: Indicates occurrence of a read error.

[WR]: Indicates failure of load.

[ND]: Indicates that there is no data of the designated station number on the floppy disk.

For Example:


Display: DOSDList up: LOSD

Table 2-8 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Backed Up

CIRCUIT CARD PM NAME / PM NUMBER

PA-16ELCH SP-3005

[ TENANT : 1 - COMMON ]

ER TN STN LENS MEM SPD DAT__ __ ____ ______ _____ _____________________________ND 1 2870 032060 DLC DATA:

FD DATA: NO DATA LEFT IN FD


Revision 4.0


5. Entry Procedure

• Backup by designating a station

DRV: FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F) FUNC1: Kind of Function (S/L/V)

S: Save L: Load V: Verify

FUNC2: Designation of Processing Order (Enter S) S: Station

TN: [a] TO [b]: Tenant Rangea: Start Tenant Numberb: End Tenant Number

STN: [c] TO [d]:Station Range c: Start Station Number d: End Station Number

OFFICE: Office NameDATE: Date of File

Backup Onetouch Speed Call Memory Data

[INPUT PARAMETER] DRV :A FUNC1 : S FUNC2 : S

TN: 1-COMMONSTN: 51000 TO: 51003

[FILE INFORMATION]OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE: 95/11/01 [FRI]

IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-A AND READY (Y/N)?Y

This is displayed when the Tenant Patternis used in Common.

File Information is displayed.


BOSD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

Listed below are the messages that are displayed while this command is being executed:

OVERWRITE EXISTING ONE-TOUCH SPEED DATA ON FD (Y/N)?:The diskette in the drive already has data on it. Do you wish to overwrite?

NO SPACE LEFT ON FD!!:There is no space on the disk.

IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-[ ] AND READY (ENTER Y ONLY)?:Floppy disk must be changed.

MAKING ORIGINAL FILE, DRIVE- [ ]!!:The file is being copied to a floppy diskette. Reminder: The floppy diskette must be formatted.

FLOPPY DISK IS DIFFERENT!!:There is no One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data File on the floppy disk.

COMPLETED:Save, Load, or Verify has been completed

VERIFY ERROR:Number of Unmatched Data This data is displayed when FUNC1 = V (Verify)

RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?:Indication of next operation.Y: Return to MENU N: Restart of operation


Revision 4.0


• Backup by designating Line Equipment Number (LENS)

DRV: FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F) FUNC1: Kind of Function (S/L/V)

S: Save L: Load V: Verify

FUNC2: Designation of Processing Order (Enter L )L: LENS

LENS: [e] TO [f]: Line Equipment Number Range e: Start LENS f: End LENS

OFFICE: Office NameDATE: Date of File

Backup Onetouch Speed Call Memory Data

[INPUT PARAMETER] DRV :A FUNC1 : S FUNC2 : L

LENS: 000090 TO : 000090

[FILE INFORMATION]OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE: 95/11/01 [FRI]

IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-A AND READY (Y/N)?Y



BOSD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

Listed below are the messages that are displayed while this command is being executed:

OVERWRITE EXISTING ONE-TOUCH SPEED DATA ON FD (Y/N)?:The diskette in the drive already has data on it. Do you wish to overwrite?

NO SPACE LEFT ON FD!!: There is no space on the disk.

IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-[ ]AND READY (ENTER Y ONLY)?:Floppy disk must be changed.

MAKING ORIGINAL FILE, DRIVE-[ ]!!:The file is being copied to a floppy diskette. Reminder: The floppy diskette must be formatted.

FLOPPY DISK IS DIFFERENT!!:There is no One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data File on the floppy disk.

COMPLETED:Save, Load, or Verify has been completed.

VERIFY ERROR: Number of Unmatched DataThis data is displayed when FUNC1 = V (Verify).

RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?:Indication of next operation.Y: Return to MENU N: Restart of operation


Revision 4.0

CARRCM0-04Business, Hotel

(ICRT)

on.ial

siness, tel

CARR Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction


2. Function

This command is used to continuously assign the restriction of alternative routing of an Incoming Route to an Outgoing Route (OGRT).

3. Precautions

None


None

5. Entry Procedure

ICRT [a] To [b] : Incoming Route Range a: Start Incoming Route Numberb: End Incoming Route Number

OGRT [c] To [d]:Outgoing Route Range c: Start Outgoing Route Numberd: End Outgoing Route Number

RES: Restriction Data (0-2)0: Alternate routing is restricted1: Alternate routing is allowed2: Toll restriction is required

ARI: Alternative Route IndexATT: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via ATTCON/StatiDIAL: This allows/restricts trunk to trunk (tandem) connections via Direct D

Access from a station.

Continuous Assignment of Alternative Route Restriction

ICRT: 1 To 2 OGRT: 3 To 4 ARI : ATT RES:

DIAL RES:


CASD CM0-11

Business

play:

in the

in the

x)

.

siness
CASD Continuous Assignment of Station Data

2. Function

This command can assign many station data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers.

3. Precautions


• Line cards (LC, DLC, ELC and DTL) should be mounted on the designated LENs.

• Up to 10 blocks can be assigned at a time.

• You can assign the station data continuously from the designated LENs.

• When data entry is rejected while assigning station data, the following messages appear on the dis

Message List

Note 1: This message is applicable only when the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installedsystem.

Note 2: This message is applicable only when the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installedsystem.

INDICATED MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

PACKAGE CHECK Displays when the first circuit on the circuit card is assigned.

DIGITS UNMATCHED Discrepancy in the digits of station number Note 1

NGI DISCREPANCY Discrepancy in the digits of station number (NGI=Number Group IndeNote 2

STN ALREADY ASSIGNED The same station number has been assigned.

STN DOUBLE ASSIGNMENT The same station number has been assigned in the other NGI.

LENS ASSIGNMENT AREA NOTHING

No area exists for data entry within the designated mounting location

NUMBERING PLAN UNMATCHED Discrepancy in the numbering plan of station number Note 1

TEC DISCREPANCY TEC is not correspond to the designated location.


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

e sta- to the

or to de-

leted.

is also

When you delete station data while SMDR is in service, the system prints out the billing information of thtions which are deleted. In this case, all billing information is cleared from the system. Accordingly, priordeletion of station data, be sure to print out billing information.

Deletion of any busy station results in error number indication.

When the following message appears while deleting station data, delete the specific station number priletion of station data.

Indicated Message The related STN “Night Station exists” Night Transfer Station “Secretary exist” Secretary Station“Phantom exist” Phantom Station

• The following should be noted when you want to delete station data:

a. When you delete the pilot station in the Hunting Group, the Station Hunting-Pilot Data is also de

b. When you delete the master station of Individual Speed Calling, all speed calling information cleared.

c. When you delete the station data which has Dterm key data, the information of the key also cleared.

• When you assign initial station data to a Line Card “PKG Check” appears on the display.

4. Entry Procedure

• When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system

a. Display of Station Data Assignment

Continuous Assignment of Station Data ASSIGNMENT SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration

TN --- Range of STN --- --- Class --- --- Range and Type of LENS ---TN From- To Step TEC SEC RSC From - To Type

1. 1 2000-2005 1 2 2 2 000020-000025 12.

Is Input Data correct? (Y/N): Y


CASD CM0-11

Business

r “

a cor-

TN: Tenant Number RANGE OF STNSTN FROM: Start Station NumberSTN TO: End Station Number STEP: Size of increment (for example, step 2 increments by 2)TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)RANGE AND TYPE OF LENSLENS FROM: Start line equipment numberLENS TO: End line equipment numberTYPE: LENS increment type (assign in this order; see screen prompt for descriptions)IS INPUT DATA CORRECT?:

Confirmation of Input Data

Procedure:

1. Enter Station Data in each parameter.

2. After entering Station Data on a block basis, press ESC. “Input Data is correct? (Y/N)” is on screen.

3. When you enter “N” the cursor returns to the first parameter (= TN). When you enter “Y,” the following promptdisplays: “Do you need Data list (Y/N)?”

4. When you enter “Y” the display moves to the next one after printing out the existing one. When you enteN”the display moves to the next one without printing.

Note: Station Data can be assigned on the basis of block (up to 10 blocks). In this case “Is Input Datrect?” appears on screen without pressing “ESC”.


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

nd ).cording

Note 1: The Range of LENS data is assigned basically on a Group Number basis (See Example aWhen the Range of LENS data comprises multiple Group Numbers, input these parameter acto the following conditions (See Example and ):

From: Level Number of LENS must be “0”.To: Level Number of LENS must be “7”.

1 2

3 4

2

Example (When the shaded ports are assigned as Range of LENS data)

7654321076543210

7654321076543210

7654321076543210

76543210

7654321076543210

76543

1076543210

76543210

04

05

Unit2

Group No.

02

03

04

05

Unit0

Group No.

PIM J

4

04

Group

3

02

03

No.

PIM J

Group

2

02

03

No.

PIM J

Group

1

02

03

No.

PIM J

Level No.

Level No.

Level No.

Level No.

Level No.

From : XXX022

To : XXX0261 block

To : XXX033

To : XXX027

From : XXX030

From : XXX022

From : XXX020

To : XXX047

2 blocks

1 block

To : XX2057

From : XX0020

1 block


CASD CM0-11

Business

ed in-
Note 1: “Type” parameter determines how to arrange station data. See the following example for detailformation
Example:

• Type: 1 (Level → Group → Unit)Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.

U=2

00

PIM J

U=3

05 10 15 20

16

L

C

16

L

C

16

L

C

16

L

C

16

L

C

16

L

CPIM J

U=0 U=1

(When the 16 LC circuit cards are accommodated as shown below)

LV7LV6LV5LV4LV3LV2LV1LV0


12345678

02

9

16

03

25

32

05

17

24

04

49

56

57

64

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

33

40

00

41

48

01

73

80

65

72

1615

U=3

U=1

81

88

89

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

• Type: 2 (Level → Unit → Group)Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.

• Type: 3 (Group → Level → Unit)Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.



12345678

02

33

40

03

81

88

05

65

72

04

17

24

49

56

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

9

16

00

41

48

01

57

64

25

32

1615

U=3

U=1

73

80

89

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.



15

29

02

4

32

05

49

63

50

64

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

33

47

00

34

48

01

65

93

1615

U=3

U=1

68

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

8 35 362

03

3

04

51 52 69 72


CASD CM0-11

Business

• Type: 4 (Group → Unit → Level)Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.

• Type: 5 (Unit → Level → Group)Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.



113

85

02

4

88

05

7

91

8

92

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

5

89

00

6

90

01

9

93

1615

U=3

U=1

12

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

16 17 182

03

3

04

19 20 21 24



15

29

02

81

95

05

3

31

35

63

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

2

30

00

34

62

01

4

32

1615

U=3

U=1

82

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

83 6 3833

03

65

04

7 39 8 84

64 80

40 6836 66

37 67

61 79


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

• Type: 6 (Unit → Group → Level)Station data is arranged in the following numerical order.



113

85

02

11

95

05

3

87

7

91

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

2

86

00

6

90

01

4

89

1615

U=3

U=1

12

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

23 14 185

03

9

04

15 19 16 24

92 94

20 228 10

17 21

89 93


CASD CM0-11

Business

b. Display of Circuit Card Localization (Two units display)

MG NUMBER: MG No.UNIT NUMBER: Unit No. GROUP NUMBER: Group No. PACKAGE TYPE: Circuit Card Type

Continuous Assignment of Station Data ASSIGNMENT

SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration

MG Number: 0 UNIT Number: 0 Group Number: 2

Circuit Card Type LC Group-DLC ELC SMI DTL DeleteEND

Group- 0 6 12 20 0 6 12 20Slot- 0 4 8 12 15 19 23

- Card Selection <-,-> Group Selection <RETURN> - Execute ESC-Input Data End

←

←

PIMA3PIMA2

PIMA1PIMA0

MG-00

1 7 15 23 1 7 2315LC


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

ve the

Procedure:

1. Enter MG Number; press ENTER.

2. Enter UNIT Number; press ENTER .

3. Move the cursor (by “ ” or “ ”) to the appropriate package type.

4. Move the cursor (by “ ” or “ ”) to assign the selected type to the vacant Group No.; press ENTER. The Circuit Card information (i.e., LC) is displayed.

• When you want to eliminate the Circuit Card which you assigned by mistake, choose “Delete,” mocursor to select the Group No., and press ENTER.

5. When you want to terminate Data entry in the specific UNIT, move the cursor to “END” and press ENTER .Respond “Y” to “Is Input Data Correct?” The cursor returns to the UNIT Number.

6. Repeat the same procedure to assign another Circuit Card (even if it is located in the same Unit).

7. When finished, press ESC. The following prompt displays: “Do you need PACKAGE MOUNT DATA List? (Y/N)”.

• When you enter “Y” the current display shifts to the display (c) with a list.

• When you enter “N” the current display shifts to the display (c) without a list.

Note: Press the BACKSPACE key to move to the previous screen.

←

←

← ←


CASD CM0-11

Business

errorss its pro-

c. Display of Continuous Assignment

Procedure:

1. “Is input data correct? (Y/N)”- Confirmation of the input data“N”: Return to the display (b)“Y”: Next parameter appears.

2. “Assign vacant port?”“Y”: Enter when the mounted Circuit Card has any vacant ports. “N”: Enter when you want to assign data only to newly mounted Circuit Card.

3. “Stop on error?” - Appointment of temporary suspension in case of error“Y”: When the system detects an error “Interruption!! Cancel it?” displays and suspends processing. “Y” inter-

rupts Continuous Assignment of Station Data, returning to the display (a). “N” resumes it. “N”: Even if an error is detected the system continues its processing.

4. “Error list required? (Y/N)” “Y”: With the completion of Continuous Assignment, an error list can be obtained. When the number of

exceeds more than 250 Continuous Assignments are temporarily suspended. The system restartcessing with the completion of an output of an error list.

“N”: Error data appears only on screen.

Note: The printer must be on for either response (Y or N).

5. “Start Now? (Y/N)” “Y”: Continuous Assignments start. The data from screen (d) displays and prints out. “N”: Returns to the previous indication “Input data is correct? (Y/N)”


* Depress ‘Y’ key when all data are right. Depress ‘N’ key when data change is necessary.

Is input correct? (Y/N) : Y

Assign vacant port? (Y/N) : Y

Stop on error? (Y/N) : N

Error list required? (Y/N) : Y

Start now? (Y/N) : Y


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

d. Display of Continuous Assignment Execution

• When you press END while Continuous Assignment is being performed, “Interrupted!! Cancel it? (Y/N)” appears on screen with a warning tone resulting in a temporary half of processing. “Y” interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a).“N” restarts Continuous Assignment.

• When assignment completes, “End of order. Return to Menu? (Y/N)” is displayed.


SYSTEM TYPE: 2MG Configuration

Interrupted!! Cancel? (Y/N):Y

TN STN TEC RSC SFC LENS reference ___

1 2000 12 4 2 020010 1 2001 12 4 2 020020 1 2002 12 4 2 020030 1 2003 12 4 2 STN is already assigned 1 2004 12 4 2 0200501 2005 12 4 21 2006 12 4 2 NGI is not correct1 2007 12 4 2 TEC is not correct1 2008 12 4 2 020060 1 2009 12 4 2 020070

Complete, return to menu? (Y/N): Y

2MG Configuration

Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Y


CASD CM0-11

Business

ta Cor-

he next

• When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system

a. Display of Station Data Assignment

Note: Block Number (1-10)

TN: Tenant NumberSTN

From: Start Station NumberTo: End Station Number

Step: Digit Increment (1-10)TEC: Telephone ClassRSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)LENS

From: Start Line Equipment NumberTo: End Line Equipment Number

Group Number range (0-31) 0-23 Except TEC 18 0-31.Level Number range (0-7)TYPE: LENS Assignment (1-6)

Procedure:

1. Enter Station Data in each parameter.

2. After entering Station Data on a block basis, Example of assignment data plan (STN, LENS) and “Is Darect? (Y/N)” appears on the screen.

3. When you enter “N”, the cursor returns to the parameter TN. When you enter “Y”, the display moves to tone (= b).

Continuous Assignment of Station Data

1. TN : XXX STN : from XXXXX to XXXXX Step XX TEC : XXRSC : XX SFC : XX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXXGroup Number range : from XX to XXLevel Number range : from XX to XX TYPE : X

Example of assignment data plan

STN LENS STN LENS STN LENS STN LENS STN LENSXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX

Note


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

nds” re-

b. Display of Continuous Assignment

Procedure:

1. “List of Station and LENS Data?: (Y/N)”“Y”: Station and LENS data list can be obtained.“N”: Station and LENS data appears only on screen.

2. “Do you want to stop if an error is found?: (Y/N)”“Y”: When the system detects an error, “Interruption!! Continue the assignment?” is on screen and suspe

processing. “Y” interrupts Continuous Assignment of Station Data, returning to the display (a). “Nsumes it.

“N”: Even if an error is detected, the system continues its processing.

3. “Do you want an error list?: (Y/N)”“Y”: With the completion of Continuous Assignment, an error list can be obtained.“N”: Error data appears only on screen.

4. “Do you want to assign station data now?: (Y/N)”“Y”: Continuous Assignments start. The screen changes to the display (c).“N”: Returns to the display (a).

[CASD]

List of Station and LENS Data ? (Y/N) :YDo you want to stop if an error is found ? (Y/N) :YDo you want to an error list ? (Y/N) :YDo you want to assign station data now ? (Y/N) :Y


CASD CM0-11

Business

u wantn-ng.

c. Display of Continuous Assignment Execution

• When you press / key or the system detects an error (in the case you have entered “Y” for “Do yoto stop if an error is found?”) while Continuous Assignment is being performed, “Interruption!! Cotinue the assignment? (Y/N): N” apperas on the screen resulting in a temporary halt of processi“Y” restarts Continuous Assignment.“N” interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a).

• When assignment is complete, “Complete!! Return to the menu? (Y/N)” is displayed.


Interruption !! Continue the assignment ? (Y/N) :N

IN STN TEC RSC SFC LENS REFERENCE

XX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XX XXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXXXX XXXXX XX XX XX XXXXXX

Executing


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

”.

Example 1

When you assign data as shown above, stations are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “


1. TN : 1 STN : from 100 to 200 Step 1 TEC : 1RSC : 1 SFC : 1 LENS : from 000001 to 000237Group Number range : from 0 to 15Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1


STN LENS STN LENS STN LENS STN LENS STN LENS100 000001 104 000005 108 000011 112 000015 116 000021101 000002 105 000006 109 000012 113 000016 117 000022102 000003 106 000007 110 000013 114 000017 118 000023103 000004 107 000010 111 000014 115 000020 119 000024

L

GROUP

0 231 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

0

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

EVEL


CASD CM0-11

Business

”.

Example 2






L

GROUP

0 231 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

0

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

EVEL


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

”.

Example 3






L

GROUP

0 231 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

0

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

EVEL


CASD CM0-11

Business

”.

Example 4






L

GROUP

0 231 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

0

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

EVEL


Revision 4.0

CASDCM0-11Business

”.

Example 5






L

GROUP

0 231 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

0

7

1

2

3

4

5

6

EVEL


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

the dis-

siness, tel

CATK Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data


2. Function

This command can assign or delete many trunk data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers.

3. Precautions

• Trunk cards should be mounted on the designated LENs.

• Up to 10 blocks can be executed at a time.

• You can assign or delete the trunk data continuously from the designated LENs.

• When data entry is rejected while assigning/deleting trunk data, the following messages appear onplay.

Message List

When Trunk Data cannot be assigned

When Trunk Data cannot be deleted


Display: DLEN, ARTD, ARSC, ASFC, DMBL, DMBTList UP: LTRK, LLEN, LRTD, LRTCAssignment: ARTD, ARSC, ASFC, MBLE, MBTK


PACKAGE CHECK Displays when first circuit on the Trunk Card is assigned.

TK ALREADY ASSIGNED The same trunk number has been assigned.

TK UNMATCHED Descrepancy in the trunk number

TRUNK CLASS HAS NOT BEEN ASSIGNED

Trunk Class has not been assigned.

LENS ALREADY ASSIGNED The same LENS number has been assigned.


PACKAGE CHECK Displays when first circuit on the Trunk Card is assigned.

TK BUSY Make busy of trunks

TK NOT ASSIGNMENT Trunk has not been assigned.


Revision 4.0

CATKCM0-11Business, Hotel

es-

5. Entry Procedure

ParameterRT: Route numberTK from: Range of TK-Start Trunk number

to: Range of TK-End Trunk numberStep: Number increment (1-10)CNT: Number of Tenant (1-10) Note 1TN: Tenant number Note 2RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) Note 1SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15) Note 1LENS from: Range of LENS-Start Line Equipment Number

to: Range of LENS-End Line Equipment Number Group Number range (0-23)Level Number range (0-7)Type: Line Equipment Number Assignment (1-6) Note 4 (see page 346~349.)

Note 1: When RT number is 901(ATT) or 915 (ATT), this parameter need to be designated.

Note 2: When RT number is 0-899 (Inter-office Trunk) or 901(ATT) or 905(ATT), this parameter need to be dignated.

Note 3 (see the next page)


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

).cording

Note 3: The Range of LENS data basically is assigned on a Group Number basis (See Example andWhen the Range of LENS data comprises multiple Group Numbers, input these parameters acto the following conditions (See Example and ):

From: Level Number of LENS must be “0”.To: Level Number of LENS must be “7”.

1 2

3 4

2

Example (When the shaded ports are assigned as Range of LENS data)

7654321076543210

7654321076543210

7654321076543210

76543210

7654321076543210

76543

1076543210

76543210

04

05

Unit2

Group No.

02

03

04

05

Unit0

Group No.

PIM J

4

04

Group

3

02

03

No.

PIM J

Group

2

02

03

No.

PIM J

Group

1

02

03

No.

PIM J

Level No.

Level No.

Level No.

Level No.

Level No.

From : XXX022

To : XXX0261 block

To : XXX033

To : XXX027From : XXX030

From : XXX022

From : XXX020

To : XXX047

2 blocks

1 block

To : XX2057

From : XX0020

1 block


Revision 4.0


infor-
Note 4: “Type” parameter determines how to arrange trunk data. See the following example for detailed mation
Example:

• Type: 1 (Level → Group → Unit)Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

U=2

00

PIM J

U=3

05 10 15 20

16

C

O

16

C

O

16

C

O

16

C

O

16

C

O

16

C

OPIM J

U=0 U=1

T T T

TTT

(When the 16 COT circuit cards are accommodated as shown below)



12345678

02

9

16

03

25

32

05

17

24

04

49

56

57

64

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

33

40

00

41

48

01

73

80

65

72

1615

U=3

U=1

81

88

89

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

• Type: 2 (Level → Unit → Group)Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

• Type: 3 (Group → Level → Unit)Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.



12345678

02

33

40

03

81

88

05

65

72

04

17

24

49

56

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

9

16

00

41

48

01

57

64

25

32

1615

U=3

U=1

73

80

89

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.



15

29

02

4

32

05

49

63

50

64

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

33

47

00

34

48

01

65

93

1615

U=3

U=1

68

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

8 35 362

03

3

04

51 52 69 72


Revision 4.0


• Type: 4 (Group → Unit → Level)Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.

• Type: 5 (Unit → Level → Group)Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.



113

85

02

4

88

05

7

91

8

92

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

5

89

00

6

90

01

9

93

1615

U=3

U=1

12

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

16 17 182

03

3

04

19 20 21 24



15

29

02

81

95

05

3

31

35

63

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

2

30

00

34

62

01

4

32

1615

U=3

U=1

82

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

83 6 3833

03

65

04

7 39 8 84

64 80

40 6836 66

37 67

61 79


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

• Type: 6 (Unit → Group → Level)Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.



113

85

02

11

95

05

3

87

7

91

05 06

U=2

U=0

0302

2

86

00

6

90

01

4

89

1615

U=3

U=1

12

96

Group No.

Level No.

1MG

Slot No.

23 14 185

03

9

04

15 19 16 24

92 94

20 228 10

17 21

89 93


Revision 4.0


orrect

he next

a. Display of Trunk Data Assignment

Procedure :

1. Enter Trunk Data in each parameter.

2. After entering Trunk Data on a block basis, Example of assignment data plan (TK, LENS) and “Is Data C? (Y/N)” appears on the screen.

3. When you enter “N”, the cursor returns to the parameter TN. When you enter “Y”, the display moves to tone (b).The followings shows the display vary kinds of TK data.

• When assigning ATT


[CATK]

Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data ASSIGNMENT

1. RT : 901 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XX CNT : XX XX TN : XXXRSC : XX SFC : XX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXXGroup Number range : from XX to XXLevel Number range : from X to X TYPE : X

<Example of assignment data plan>

TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS TK LENS

XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX XXX XXXXXX




0·········10·········20·········30·········40·········50·········60·········70········79

0123456789

101112131415161718192021222324

Note


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

• When assigning the route for Inter-office Trunk


[CATK]


1. RT : 1 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XXNote TN : XXX LENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXX

Group Number range : from XX to XXLevel Number range : from X to X TYPE : X







0·········10·········20·········30·········40·········50·········60·········70········79

0123456789

101112131415161718192021222324


Revision 4.0


• When assigning the route for Intra-office Trunk


[CATK]


1. RT : 902 TK : from XXX to XXX Step XXLENS : from XXXXXX to XXXXXXGroup Number range :from XX to XXLevel Number range : from X to X TYPE : X


Is Data Correct ? (Y/N)






Note


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

spends” re-

b. Display of Continuous Assignment

Procedure :

Select Y or N in the following parameters.

1. “Do you want to stop if an error is found ? :(Y/N)”“Y”: When the system detects an error, “Interruption !! Continue the assignment ?” is on screen and su

processing. “N” interrupts Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data, returning to the display (a). “Ysumes it.

“N”: Even if an error is detected, the system continues its processing.

2. “Do you want to assign trunk data now ? :(Y/N)”“Y”: Continuous Assignments start. The screen changes to the display (c).“N”: Returns to the display (a)

[CATK]

Do you want to stop if an error is found ? (Y/N) : YDo you want to assign trunk data now ? (Y/N) : Y


Revision 4.0


e the

(c) Display of Continuous Assignment Execution

• When you press / key or the system detects an error (in the case you have entered “Y” for “Do you want tostop if an error is found ?” ) while Continuous Assignment is being performed, “Interruption !! Continuassignment ? (Y/N) : N” appears on the screen resulting in a temporary halt of processing.

“Y” restarts Continuous Assignment.

“N” interrupts Continuous Assignment and returns to the display (a).

• When assignment is complete, “Complete !! Return to the menu ? (Y/N)” is displayed.

[CATK]


Interruption !! Cotinue the assinment ? (Y/N) :N

1.

Complete !! Return to the menu ? (Y/N) :Y

RT TK TN RSC SFC LENS REMARKS

XXX XXX XXX XX XX XXXXXX











CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

Example 1

When you assign data as shown above, trunks are assigned in the following LENS indicated with “K”.

7 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

LEVEL







0 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GROUP

[CATK]


1. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1LENS : from 000001 to 000237Group Number range : from 0 to 15Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1



100 000001 104 000005 108 000011 112 000015 116 000021 120 000025

101 000002 105 000006 109 000012 113 000016 117 000022 121 000026

102 000003 106 000007 110 000013 114 000017 118 000023 122 000027

103 000004 107 000010 111 000014 115 000020 120 000024 123 000030


Revision 4.0


Example 2


7 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K K

LEVEL








0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GROUP

[CATK]


1.RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1LENS : from 001000 to 003237Group Number range : from 0 to 23Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1



100 001000 104 001004 108 001010 112 001014 116 001020 120 001024

101 001001 105 001005 109 001011 113 001015 117 001021 121 001025

102 001002 106 001006 110 001012 114 001016 118 001022 122 001026

103 001003 107 001007 111 001013 115 001017 119 001023 123 001027


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

Example 3


7

LEVEL

6





1

0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GROUP

[CATK]


1. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1LENS : from 001000 to 003237

Group Number range : from 0 to 23Level Number range : from 2 to 5 TYPE : 1



100 001002 104 001012 108 001022 112 001032 116 001042 120 001052

101 001003 105 001013 109 001023 113 001033 117 001043 121 001053

102 001004 106 001014 110 001024 114 001034 118 001044 122 001054

103 001005 107 001015 111 001025 115 001035 119 001045 123 001055


Revision 4.0


Example 4


7 K K K K K K K K K K K

LEVEL








0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GROUP

[CATK]


1. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1LENS : from 001000 to 003237

Group Number range : from 10 to 20Level Number range : from 0 to 7 TYPE : 1



100 001100 104 001104 108 001110 112 001114 116 001120 120 001124

101 001101 105 001105 109 001111 113 001115 117 001121 121 001125

102 001102 106 001106 110 001112 114 001116 118 001122 122 001126

103 001103 107 001107 111 001113 115 001117 119 001123 123 001127


CATK CM0-11

Business, Hotel

Example 5


7

LEVEL

6

5 K K K K K K K K K K K K K K




1

0

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

GROUP

[CATK]


1. RT : 1 TK : from 100 to 255 Step 1LENS : from 001000 to 003237Group Number range : from 5 to 18Level Number range : from 2 to 5 TYPE : 1



100 001052 104 001062 108 001072 112 001082 116 001092 120 001102

101 001053 105 001063 109 001073 113 001083 117 001093 121 001103

102 001054 106 001064 110 001074 114 001084 118 001094 122 001104

103 001055 107 001065 111 001075 115 001085 119 001095 123 001105


Revision 4.0

CCSECM0-08CCIS, Business, Hotel

status of

sponding

as beenn the

r thes been

CIS, siness, tel

CCSE Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment


2. Function

This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the CCH circuit card and to display the CCH.

3. Precautions

• Make-busy by this command is executed at system initialization or of a fault occurrence. Therefore, thiscommand is not to be used while the system is in operation unless there is a reason otherwise.

• CCH cannot be placed into make-busy state or cannot be released from make-busy state, the correError Number is displayed.

• If the intended make-busy setting/cancel is not executed within about 2 min. after the processing hactivated (statement “Under Processing” is already on display), “Return to Menu (Y/N)?” comes oscreen. Therefore, to retry the intended processing, return the screen display back to the menu and entecommand once again. Even if the processing has failed to complete within 2 minutes or a key hapressed, this command is not aborted. To abort the command, press “/” key.


None


CCSE CM0-08


5. Entry Procedure

a. Type 2

TYPE OF CHANGE: Specify the type of processing2 - Make Busy of Processor3 - Status Display of Processor

PROCESSOR: CCH name and accommodation location

CCH XX X XX

MB: Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy2: Not Available

CHANGE(Y/N)? Change instruction/make busy instruction

Y: ExecuteX: Not execute

Note: During processing, “UNDER PROCESSING” displays.

Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment

TYPE OF CHANGE:2

PROCESSOR: CCH00005

MB:1

CHANGE? Y

Group (00-20)Unit (0-3)MG (00-31)


Revision 4.0

CCSECM0-08CCIS, Business, Hotel

b. Type 3

TYPE OF CHANGE: Specify the type of processing2 - Make Busy of Processor3 - Status Display of Processor

PROCESSOR: Processor SelectionLINK: Link Status

0: Link Open1: Link Close2: Not Available

MB: Make Busy Information 0: Make Idle 1: Make Busy2: Not Available

Change of Common Channel Signaling Equipment

TYPE OF CHANGE:3 PROCESSORMBLINKPROCESSOR MBLINK

PROCESSOR: MG 00 LP00-00 LP00-10CCH0000022CCH0000122CCH0000222CCH0000322CCH0000400CCH0000522


CDSD CM0-11

Business

number

siness
CDSD Continuous Deletion of S tation Data

2. Function

This command deletes all station data within the specific numeric range by designating both start stationand end station number.

3. Precautions


• When deletion of station data is rejected, the following messages display on the screen:


List up: LRTC

MESSAGE MEANING

Secretary exists Deletion is not allowed because the station is a secretary

Intercom exists Deletion is not allowed because the station is a member of Intercom Group

Night STN exists Deletion is not allowed because the station is a night station.

Phantom exists Deletion is not allowed because the station has a phantom number.

Digits mismatch The number of digits is not correct

NGI is not correct Number Group discrepancy (NGI=Number Group Index)

LENS not assigned LENS have not been assigned yet.

STN BUSY Deletion is not allowed because of Line Busy

Package Check Circuit Card is OFF LINE

STN not found Information appointed does not exist


Revision 4.0

CDSDCM0-11Business

5. Entry Procedure

a. Display of Continuous Deletion [Entry]

TN: Tenant Number STN FROM: Start station numberSTN TO: End station number

Procedure:

1. Enter tenant number.

2. Enter initial station number to be deleted.

3. Enter terminal station number to be deleted.

4. “Is input data correct? (Y/N)” - Confirmation of Input Data“Y”: Shifts to next parameter.“N”: Return to procedure (3)

5. “Stop on error? (Y/N)” “Y”: Each detection of error suspends the processing.“N”: Any detection of error does not stop the processing.

6. “Error list required? (Y/N)”“Y”: With the completion of Continuous Deletion, an error list is printed.“N”: No list will appear.

7. “Start Now? (Y/N)”“Y”: Starts the processing“N”: Returns to the procedure (4).“I”: Abort

Note: To return the cursor to the previous parameter while you are entering data, press the “ ” key.

Continuous Deletion of Station Data Deletion

System Type: Consists of 2MG TN: 1 STN: 2000 TO: 2009Is Input data correct? (Y/N): Y

* Depress Y key when all data are right. Depress N key when change is necessary.

Stop on error? (Y/N): NError List required? (Y/N) : Y

Start Now? (Y/N): Y

←


CDSD CM0-11

Business

sus-

Dele-

b. Display of Continuous Deletion [While Printing]

STN From: Start Station NumberSTN To: End Station Number

• “Break Now!! Cancel? (Y/N)” displays when you cannot delete a station. Continuous Deletion ispended temporarily.“Y”: Interrupts continuous Deletion; returns to display (a)“N”: Restarts Continuous Deletion

• “End of order, return to menu? (Y/N)” appears on the screen with the completion of Continuoustion.“Y”: Returns to menu. “N”: Returns to the display (a)

Note: The information of the station which is under processing always appears on the screen.When the deletion is rejected, the reasons display under Remarks.

Continuous Deletion of Station Data Deletion

System Type: 2MG Configuration TN: 1 STN: 2000 TO: 2070

Break Now!! Cancel? (Y/N):Y

TN STN TEC RSC SFC LENS Remarks

1 2000 12 4 2 020010 1 2001 12 4 2 020020 STN is busy1 2002 12 4 2 020030 1 2003 12 4 2 STN not found1 2004 12 4 2 0200501 2005 12 4 2 0200601 2006 12 4 2 0200701 2007 12 4 2 0201001 2008 12 4 2 0201101 2009 12 4 2 020120

End of Order. Return to menu? (Y/N): Y

2MG Configuration

Input Data is correct? (Y/N): Y


Revision 4.0

CMODSYSBusiness, Hotel

er dis-

system

verified

/STBY

tion, ory into the

er. The

siness, tel

CMOD Change of System Mode


2. Function

This command is used to execute ACT/STBY change of the processor (CPU)/TSW.ACT system numbplay.

3. Precautions

• Note that the contents of this command vary slightly according to the system type.

• This command can be executed only with a dual system configuration.

• ACT/STBY change can be executed only in the case of dual system configuration. When CPU/TSW change is executed, the current ACT-side CPU/TSW number is displayed.

• When CPU change is executed, the ACT-side data memory and the STBY-side data memory are with each other. If an error exists in the data memory, CPU change is not executed.

• ACT/STBY change by this command is executed only when the system is initialized or when an error hasoccurred. Otherwise, a bit error may occur at a terminal engaging in data communications when ACTchange is executed.

• When the processor and the TSW designated by ACT system change is of single system configurawhen the processor designated by ACT system change happens to be in operation, parameter entrMAT is restricted.

• If an attempted ACT/STBY change has failed, the reason for the failure is indicated by an error numbcontents of error numbers can be viewed if F1 (Help) is pressed.


None


CMOD SYS

Business, Hotel

e appro-

5. Entry Procedure

The entry procedure varies depending on the system you are using. Refer to the table below to locate thpriate entry procedures for your system.

a. For IMG (ICS):

Note: Different colors represent different states, as follows:Red = Make BusyGreen = ActiveBlue (***) = ChangingBrown = Standby

System See

IMG (ICS) (a)

IMGx (b)

IMGxh, IMGdxh (c)

MMG (ICS)(d)

UMG (ICS)

UMGx (e)

CPU 1MB

CPU 0ACT

Display (Example only)

TDSW0 TDSW1

Change of System Mode

Function:Change CPU System ACT.Change TDSW System ACT.Set / Cancel HFC.Change Copy / Separate Mode.Change HFC Connection.

Change CPU System ACT.


Revision 4.0


b. For IMGx

Note: Parameters are to be entered using the cursor.

[Input Parameters and Supplementary Explanations]

• Equipment Selection: CPU

• Equipment Selection: TDSW

INPUT PARAMETER SUPPLEMENTARY EXPLANATION

Execution? (YES/NO) * Execute change ACT system for CPU


Execution? (YES/NO) * Execute change ACT system for TDSW

CPU 0ACT

CPU 1ST-BY

TDSW 1ST-BY

TDSW 0ACT


Equipment : CPU : TDSW

Supplementary Explanation Display Area

Display State

“In Execution” Display Area


CMOD SYS

Business, Hotel

c. For IMGxh and IMGdxh:

• To change the operating mode

• To make busy the TDSW (one card at a time)

SSW: Secondary switchTSW: TDSW

Note: Different colors represent different states, as follows:Red =Make BusyGreen = ActiveBlue (***) = ChangingBrown = Standby

Note 1: This parameter appears when TSW is selected.

Note 2: When status is “MB”, “Cancel MB? (YES/NO)” appears


Function: Change of Operating Mode.Make Busy of TDSW.

Device (CPU/TDSW)

Display ACT System: 0

CHANGE? (YES/NO)

PLO CLK TDSW CPUSTBY STBY STBY STBY 1ACT ACT ACT ACT 0


Function: Change of Operating Mode.Make Busy of TDSW.

Switch (SSW/TSW)

Switch No: 1 Note 1

System (0/1) Status: STBY

SET MB? (YES/NO) Note 2

PLO CLK TDSW CPUSTBY STBY STBY STBY 1ACT ACT ACT **** 0


Revision 4.0


d. For MMG (ICS) and UMG (ICS):

• To change operating mode

• To make busy the processor

Note: If the processor is already in a make-busy state, you are prompted, “CANCEL MB? (YES/NO).”


Function:Change Operating Mode.Make Busy of Processor.Displaying other MG.Change COPY/SEPA Mode.Change HFC Connection.

Device (Processor/TDSW/CM)

Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP)

Display Area



Device (Processor/TDSW/CM/HC)

Display Area


CMOD SYS

Business, Hotel

• To display other MGs

Note: The Display on the right will change for each module group selected.

Note: You can display only eight (8) module groups at a time.

• To change Copy/Separate mode

Change of System Mode Function:

Change Operating Mode.Make Busy of Processor.Displaying other MG.Change COPY/SEPA Mode.Change HFC Connection.

Displaying other MG:LP00-07 & AP0 & IP0LP08-15 & AP1 & IP1LP16-23 & AP0 & IP2LP24-31 & AP1 & IP2

Display Area

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7



Processor (SP/ LP /AP/IP)Processor No: 0CHANGE SEPARATE MODE? (YES/NO)

Display Area


Revision 4.0


• To change the HFC (hard drive controller) connection



Select HFD (0/1)Connect HFC Display: 0CHANGE? (YES/NO)

Display Area


CMOD SYS

Business, Hotel

e. For UMGx:

• To change Operating Mode

Note 1: AP is not used.

Note 2: This parameter appears when the Processor is LP or AP or IP.



Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Note 1 Processor No: Note 2

Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Device (Processor/TDSW/CM)

CHANGE? (YES/NO)

Selected Processor, TDSW, CM Change ACT System

0 71 2 3 4 5 6

SP

ACT

STBY

ACT

0

0

ACT

CM

ACT

STBY

IP0

ACT

STBY

ACT

1

1

ACT

AP0

ACT

STBY

2

ACT

HP

ACT

STBY

3

ACT

PLO

ACT

STBY

CLK

ACT

STBY

TDSW

ACT

STBY


Function:Change operating Mode.Make Busy of Processor.Displaying other MG.

Supplementary Explanation Display Area

ACT

STBY

LP

MP

MODULE GROUP

1

0

1

0

Note 1

P BUS

SWITCH NUMBER:0


Revision 4.0


• To Make Busy/Make Busy Cancel of Processor

Note 1: AP is not used.

Note 2: This parameter appears when the processor is LP or AP or IP.

Note 3: This parameter appears when the switch is TSW.

• To displaying other Module Group (MG)



Device (Processor/TDSW/CM) Processor (SP/LP/AP/IP) Note 1 Processor No: Note 2Device (Processor/TDSW/CM)

Switch (SSW/TSW)Switch No.: Note 3System (0/1)

Device (Processor/TDSW/CM)System (0/1)

SET MB? (YES/NO)CANCEL MB? (YES/NO)

Selected Processor, TDSW, CM Make Busy Set/Cancel.

TDSW Switch No. Corresponds to Module Group No.


Displaying other MG.LP00-07 & AP0 & IP0LP08-15 & AP1 & IP1LP16-23 & AP0 & IP2LP24-31 & AP1 & IP2

Display other Module Group Status.


CMWL CM0-03

Business, Hotel

(MW

n the

rvice.

tatus of

in thee re-

entered

siness, tel

CMWL Control Message Waiting Lamp


2. Function

This command is used to indicate ON/OFF status and to control the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFFLamp) at the station telephone set.

If the station telephone set is a Dterm, this command can also be used to control Message Waiting Display oDterm.

3. Precautions

• This command should not be used to control the ON/OFF of the MW lamp while the system is in se

If the need arises to use this command for this purpose while the system is in service, the current ssystem operation must be confirmed.

This command can control ON/OFF of the MW lamp independent of the call processing status withPBX itself. If this command has been used to control ON/OFF of the MW lamp without performing thquired procedures thereafter, synchronization may be lost.

• If the station telephone set to be designated is a Dterm, the input data for Dterm designation is Station/LEN atthe Voice Port, not Station/LEN at the Data Port.

• If the designated station data has been entered by LEN, lamp control cannot be executed if the LENis not that of a station.


None


Revision 4.0

CMWLCM0-03Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TYPE: Type of Input1: Station Designation2: LENS Designation

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number Information (6 digits)

(Enter the data only when TYPE = 2 has been entered.)MWLAMP: Message Waiting Lamp Status

0: Lamp Off1: Lamp On

Names of MW Lamp Controlling SideMCI: Message Center MW StatusATT: Attendant Console MW StatusSTA: StationVMM: Voice Mail Module

MW Lamp Control Side Status Indication0: Off1: On

CONTROL FOR MW LAMP:MW Lamp Processing Directive Code0: Lamp Off1: Lamp On8: Details of Lamp Control Side9: Only Display

Control Message Waiting Lamps

TYPE: 1 TN: 1 STN: 3500 MWLAMP: 1

MCI: 0 ATT: 0STA: 1 VMM: 0

CONTROL FOR MW LAMP: READY (Y/N)?

MW Lamp Control side status is displayed.

When CONTROL FOR MW LAMP = 9 has beenentered, this prompt is not displayed.


CPRS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

between

RSCs

ata setmmand

siness, tel

CPRS Controlled Alternate PRSCs


2. Function

This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. It either selects the class usedtwo priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent), or indicates the class used.

3. Precautions

• This command is allowed only when Bit 1 of System Data 1, Index 59 is “1” (Controlled Alternate Pin service).

• When the Priority Restriction Class is specified as normal in this command, the Day/Night control din the AEFR command is used. If urgent is specified, the urgent control data assigned in the AEFR cois used.

• Priority Restriction Class control is also possible by operation of the ATTCON key.


None

5. Entry Procedure

FACILITY RESTRICTION LEVELN: NormalU: Urgent

Controlled Alternate PRSCs

NORMAL/URGENT: N

READY?


Revision 4.0

CSCLCM0-11Business

e station

siness
CSCL Continuous Change of Station Class

2. Function

This command can change the station class information (TEC, RSC, SFC) by designating the range of thnumber (TN / Tenant Number, STN < From > /first station number, STN < To > /last station number).

3. Precautions


• Change of TEC is refused when Circuit Cards are a different type.

• When change of the station data is rejected, the following message appears on the screen.


ASCL

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

STN not found Station data is not assigned yet.

LEN not assigned LEN is not assigned yet.

Numbering Plan Mismatch Numbering Plan Mismatch

NGI discrepancy NGI discrepancy (numbering group)

Digit discrepancy Digits discrepancy

TEC discrepancy Telephone Class discrepancy

RSC discrepancy Restriction Class discrepancy

SFC discrepancy Service Feature discrepancy

Package Check Circuit Card OFF LINE


CSCL CM0-11

Business

, old

r the

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberSTN FROM: Start Station NumberSTNTO: End Station NumberOLD TEC: Old Station’s Telephone ClassOLD RSC: Old Station’s Route Restriction ClassOLD SFC: Old Station’s Service Feature Restriction ClassNEW TEC: New Station’s Telephone ClassNEW RSC: New Station’s Route Restriction ClassNEW SFC: New Station’s Service Feature Restriction Class

Note: If you want to change all existing classes, enter “**” for each parameter (present TEC, old RSCSFC).You can return the cursor to the previous parameter during data entry by pressing the “ ” key oBACKSPACE key.

6. Related Commands

ASCL

Continuous Change of Station Class

TN: 1 STN: 1000 TO: 1005Old TEC: 3 New TEC: 24Old RSC: 2 New RSC: 1Old SFC: 3 New SFC: 1

Is input data correct? (Y/N) : Y Stop on error? (Y/N): N Error list required? (Y/N): Y

Start now?(Y/N) : Y

←←←

←


Revision 4.0

CSTNCM0-11Business

en when

siness
CSTN Continuous Change of Station Number

2. Function

This command can change the consecutive station numbers by designating the initial station number.

3. Precautions


• In the process of Continuous Change of Station Number, the following message appears on the screchange of station number is rejected.


ASTN

MESSAGE DESCRIPTION

Present STN not found The station has not assigned yet.

New STN **** already assigned New station number is already used.

LENS not assigned yet LENS is not assigned yet.

Numbering Plan Mismatch Numbering Plan is mismatching

NGI Discrepancy Numbering Group Discrepancy

Present STN busy Deletion is not allowed because of Line Busy

Digits Discrepancy Digits Discrepancy

PKG Check Circuit Card Off Line


CSTN CM0-11

Business

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number OLD STN FROM: Old Start Station NumberOLD STN TO: Old End Station NumberNEW STN FROM: New Start Station NumberNEW STN TO: New End Station Number

Note 1: You can return the cursor to the previous parameter during data entry by pressing the “↑” key.

Note 2: Numbers which can be renewed are “0-9”. “*” and “#” cannot be renewed.

Continuous Change of Station Number

TN: 1 Old STN: 1000 TO: 1005New STN:2000 TO: 2005Is input data correct? (Y/N) : Y Stop on error? (Y/N) : Y Error list required? (Y/N) : Y

Start now? (Y/N): Y


Revision 4.0

CTDKCM0-03Business, Hotel

siness, tel

CTDK Connection of Test-Desk and LTST


2. Function

This command is used to connect and disconnect the LTST with the Test-desk.

3. Precautions

The printer must be on.


None

5. Entry Procedure

• To Connect:

FUNC: Function Code (Enter CN.)CN: Connection

LENS: LENs of LTST

• To Disconnect:

FUNC: Function Code (Enter CO.)CO: Cut-off

LENS: LENS of LTSTThe displayed FUNCTION (CN/CO) indicates the current status.By changing the function, connection status will be changed.

Connection of Test-Desk and LTST

FUNC:CN LENS:000001

READY (Y/N)?

Connection of Test-desk and LTST

FUNC:CO LENS:000001

READY (Y/N)?


DCON CM0-03

Business, Hotel

is busy,

siness, tel

DCON Display of Connection Status


2. Function

This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks. If the specified station or trunk the connected party is displayed.

3. Precautions

• One of the following messages is displayed, depending on the connection status.IDLE: Idle stateBUSY: Busy stateMAKE BUSY: Made-busy state LOCKOUT: Lockout state

• STN (Station No.) or LENS of Dterm must be for the prime line.


None

5. Entry Procedure

• To display connection status of Station:

TYPE: Kind of Connection Status: (Enter 1.)1: Station’s Connection Status


Display of Connection Status

TYPE: 1

TN: 1 STN: 3111

IDLE Line status is displayed here (Common to TYPE = 1, 2, 3)


Revision 4.0

DCONCM0-03Business, Hotel

• To display connection status of Trunk:

TYPE: Kind of Connection Status (Enter 2.) 2: Trunk Connection Status

RT: Route Number Trunk Route Number Intra office Route Number

TK: Trunk Number

• To display connection status of LENS:

TYPE: Kind of Connection Status (Enter 3.)3: LENS Connection Status

LENS: Line Equipment Number


TYPE:2

RT:1 TK:1 LENS:O00160

IDLE Line status is displayed here.

LENS of the designated Trunk isdisplayed.


TYPE:3

LENS:000160

IDLE


DDA1 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

is not

siness, tel

DDA1 Display of DTE Attribute Data-1


2. Function

This command is used to display designated DTE Attribute Data-1.

3. Precautions

• When the input Station Number is not a DTE, “error code” is displayed and DTE Attribute Data-1 displayed.

Note: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display error-related information.


Assignment: ADA1 List up: LDA1

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AASTDeletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DLEN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number

Note: LENS of the entered STN is automatically displayed.

The contents of DTE Attribute Data-1 are explained in the command ADAl. Refer to ADA1.

Display of DTE Attribute Data-1

TN:1 STN:3555 LENS:000036

MEDIA:1 CNTP:0 TCP:0 FCY:3 PRI:0

RST:0 SRP:0 CI:0


Revision 4.0

DDA2CM0-02Business, Hotel

al with

.

siness, tel

DDA2 Display of DTE Attribute Data-2


2. Function

This command is used to display designated DTE Attribute Data-2, which is assigned at a DTE terminmanual operation.

3. Precautions

• When the data cannot be read from P.M, “error code” is displayed. (Made Busy or not mounted).

Note: When an error code is displayed, press the F1 (Help) key to display supplementary information


Assignment: ADA2List up: LDA2

-Parameter STN- Assignment: ASDT, AASTDeletion: ASDT, RAST Display: ASDT, RAST, DSTN, DLEN List up: LSTN, LHST, LLEN, LHEN

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number

Note: The LENS of the entered STN is automatically displayed.

The contents of DTE Attribute Data-2 are explained in the command ADA2. Refer to ADA2.

Display of DTE Attribute Data-2

TN:1 STN:3555 LENS:000036

DTR: 0 AUT0:0 MDM1:0 MDM2:0 SPD: 0 PRTY:0ASYC:0 HDX: 1 STOP:0 CODE:0 PRFN:4 HL: 0HTL: 0 RA: 0


DFSN CM0-04

Business, Hotel

c-

er serial

whethers to the

siness, tel

DFSN Display File Serial Number


2. Function

This command is used to display and print the serial numbers of the files in the HD.

3. Precautions

• Enter parameter “Generation (0/1)”. If the back tab key is pressed, the operation returns to the System Seletion.

• If the back tab key or “N” key is pressed when the inquiry message has been displayed as to whethnumber display is to be made or not, the operation returns to the entry of “System”.

• If the back tab key or “N” + ENTER is pressed when the inquiry message has been displayed as to the command is to be terminated or not after display of Display End message, the operation returnentry of “System”.


None

5. Entry Procedure

• Designate the equipment.

a. HDD File Serial Number Display Screen

SYSTEM: HFC/HDD System (0/1)GENERATION: Program File Area Number

• To start the display, enter Y.

Display File Serial Number

SYSTEM : 0 (0/1) SYSTEM : HFC/HDD System (0/1)GENERATION: 0 (0/1) GENERATION : Program file area numberStart display (Y/N)? Y

FILE NAME SERIAL NO. FILE NAME SERIAL NO.

\MMLM\00\MMLM0l. PRG 73OEU97518 \UPDR\00\UPDR0l.PRG 73OEU97518

Display completed!! Return to the MENU (Y/N)? Y


Revision 4.0

DFTDSYSBusiness, Hotel

ams.

siness, tel

DFTD Display of System Message With Details


2. Function

This command is necessary for printing system messages detected by the PBX Fault Diagnostic progr

3. Precautions

• To end this command, press the “/” key.

• Refer to the Maintenance Manual for information on how to interpret each System Message.

• Refer to the Maintenance Manual if no details are available.


None

5. Entry Procedure

• The following messages may be displayed during and following execution of this command.

a. Messages print out completed.

b. No message

c. Printer not ready (1: continue 2:end)

Note: If 2 is pressed, messages will display on the screen only.

Display of System Message With Details

List New or Previous Message (N/P)?

Are details necessary (Y/N)?

Stop on next message display (Y/N)?


DFTD SYS

Business, Hotel

Example of System Message:

SYSTEM MESSAGE O-C [MN] RESTORATION FROM CCS LINK FAILURENEC TOKYO JUL 15 13:05 LP00-0-ACT

1:EC00 F063 4004 0000 2:0109 0000 0000 0000 3:0000 0000 0000 0000 4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5:0000 0000 0000 0000 6:0000 0000 0000 0000 7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8:0000 0000 0000 0000 9:0000 0000 0000 0000

Denotes Package mounting locationModule Group number: 01Unit number: 03Group number: 12


Revision 4.0

DHDFCM0-10

DHDF Display of File Information [for Engineering use only]


2. Function

This command should be used only under the supervision of NECAM Engineering.

3. Precautions

Call NECAM Engineering before using this command.


DISS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

o. andr mem-

ory.

play:

siness, tel

DISS Display of Program Issue


2. Function

This command outputs to the printer and displays at the MAT, the program information (version, issue Ndate) in the main memory and the program information (SP No. and issue No.) in the port microprocessoory mounted in each circuit card in the PBX.

3. Precautions

• The main memory program issue No. display does not occur in the following cases:

a. The program information is not stored at the specified location in the main memory.

b. The corresponding processor has been made busy.

• The port microprocessor program issue No. display does not occur in the following cases:

a. The program information is not stored at the specified location in the port microprocessor mem

b. The circuit card has been made busy.

c. The circuit card is not mounted.

d. The circuit card is not assigned in the ASDT or ATRK command.

• Any of the following specifications is allowed for port microprocessor memory program issue No. dis

a. Display of one port microprocessor

b. Display of all port microprocessors mounted in one unit

c. Display of all port microprocessors mounted in the system


Revision 4.0

DISSCM0-03Business, Hotel


None

5. Entry Procedure

a. Main Memory

MM/PM: Main Memory/PM Memory (Enter M .) VERSION: Program Version ISSUE: Program Issue No. DATE: Program Issue Date PMN: Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits)

Generic version installed in the switch.Boot RAM version and issue.

Display of Program Issue

PBX TYPE V7.0: IMG

MP/PM/IP/ACDP: M

VERSION ISSUE DATEx xx.xx 94/12/27x xx.xx xx/xx/xx

The applicable system type displays.

Main Memory/PM Memory/IP/ACDP Memory


DISS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

b. Display of one processor of main memory

MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter M .) PROCESSOR: Processor Number.

PMN: Port Microprocessor Equipment Number

PROCESSOR No. SYSTEM

SP -- 0/1

MP 00 -15 --

LP 00 - 07 0/1


MM/PM/BT:M MMG

PROCESSOR: SP-0

VERSION ISSUE DATEx xx.xx xx/xx/xx

The applicable system type displays


Revision 4.0


c. Display of all Main Memory processors mounted in the system

MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter M .) PROCESSOR: Processor Number (Enter ALL .)CONTINUE(Y/N)?: This displays if the list of processors (with version, issue, and date) fills the screen.

To display data of other processors, press Y. To stop further display, press N.


PBX TYPE V7.0: MMG

MM/PM/BT:M

PROCESSOR: ALL

PROCESSOR VERSION ISSUE DATESP-X X XX.XX XX/XX/XX

CONTINUE (Y/N)?

The system type displays.--

----

---

----

----

-

----

----

-

----

----

-

Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot Program.

Processor Number/MPXX/LPXX/SP/AP/IP/ACDPAll= All processors.


DISS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• For Port Microprocessor (example for MMG system):

a. Display of one port microprocessor

MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter P.)

Note: BT will not display for the IMG system.

PMN: Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits)

SP No.: Firmware Number ISSUE: Program Issue No.

Display of Program Issue MM/PM/BT:P

PMN: 00150

SP No. ISSUEXX.XX XX

The applicable system type displays.

----

--

----

--

Line Group NumberUnit NumberModule Group Number

XX X XX


Revision 4.0


b. Display of all port microprocessors mounted in one Unit

MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM? (Enter P.)



GROUP No.: Group Number (0-23)SP No.: Firmware Number ISSUE: Program Issue No.


M/PM/BT:P MMG

PMN: 001

GROUP No. SP No. ISSUE 0 XXXX XX 1

System type is displayed here.

----

----

-

----

----

-

----

--

Enter the Unit Number.

Unit NumberModule Group Number

XX X


DISS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

c. Display of all port microprocessors mounted in system

MM/PM/BT: Main Memory/PM Memory/Boot RAM (Enter P.)


PMM: Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (Input ALL .)GROUP No.: Group Number (0-23) SP No.: Firmware Number ISSUE: Program Issue No. CONTINUE (Y/N): This parameter is displayed every time the data of one PIM is displayed.

When the data of another PlM is to be displayed, press Y. Otherwise, press N.


MM/PM/BT:P MMG

PMN: ALL

GROUP No. SP No. ISSUE 0 XXXX XX 1

CONTINUE (Y/N)

System type is displayed here.

----

--

----

----

-

----

----

-

Enter ALL .


Revision 4.0

DLENCM0-01Business, Hotel

Floor

s pro-

siness, tel

DLEN Display of LENS Data


2. Function

This command is used to display the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN.

For the Hotel system, Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G),(FLR)] will also be displayed.

3. Precautions

• Floor Service data are displayed only in the case of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165, b7=1 (Floor Service ivided).


Assignment: ASDT, AAST, AGST, ATRKDeletion: ASDT, RAST, RGST, ATRK Display: ASDT, RAST, RGST, DLEN, ATRK, DSTN

List up: LSTN, LHST, LTRK, LLEN, LHEN.

-Parameter RSC- Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSC List up: LRTC

-Parameter SFC- Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFC List up: LRTC


DLEN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

played.ill show

5. Entry Procedure

• For Business System


Note: When the LENS is entered, the following parameters are displayed.

Note: When the designated LENS is for a station, parameters TN, STN, TEC, RSC, and SFC are disWhen the designated LENS is for a trunk, parameters TN, RT, and TK are displayed. The ATT wRSC and SFC.

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number TEC: Telephone Class (1-31)

1: DP(10 pps)2: PB3: DP/PB 4-10: Not used11: Not used12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal via Dterm

14: Hot line15: CAS Line16: Data terminal via data module17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance19-22: Not used23: ISDN Terminal 24-25: Not used26: VPS27: Eight Conference Equipment28-31: Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15)RT: Route numberTK: Trunk Number

Display of LENS Data

LENS:000001

TN:1 STN:3111

TEC:3 RSC:1 SFC:1


Revision 4.0

DLENCM0-01Business, Hotel

played.

• For Hotel System

a. Enter the data for parameter LENS

Note: When the LENS is entered; the following parameters are displayed.

Note: When the designated LENS is for a station, parameters TN, STN, TEC, RSC, SFC, NXT are disWhen the designated LENS is for a trunk parameters TN, RT, and TK are displayed.

LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number TEC: Telephone Equipment Class (TEC)

1: Admi. DP (10 pps)2: Admi. PB 3: Admi. DP/PB4: Admi. DP (20 pps)5: Guest DP (10 pps)6: Guest PB 7: Guest DP/PB8: Guest DP (20 pps)9: Admi. House Phone10: Guest House Phone 11: Not used 12: Dterm

13: Data Terminal (via Dterm) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance19-22: Not used23: ISDN Terminal24-31: Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command.SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command.NXT: NEXT

Enter Y, and cause the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR to be displayed[See (b)].

LENS:010201 TN: 1 STN: 3000TEC:1 RSC:2 SFC:3

NXT?


DLEN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

b. Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR

ROOM CLASS:Room Class (0-15) ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground

0: Ground 1: Underground

FLR: Floor (1-127)

LENS: 010201

ROOM CLASS: 1 ANX:0 G:0 FLR:1

The LENS entered in (a) is displayed.


Revision 4.0

DLSLCM0-03Business, Hotel

siness, tel

DLSL Display of Lock Out Station-LENS


2. Function

This command is used to print out the LENS of stations in lockout mode.

Note: All LENS numbers display, but only those LENS in lockout stations will print out.

3. Precautions

If there are no lockout stations to be displayed, “NOTHING” is printed out.


None

5. Entry Procedure

• To display the LENS of all lockout stations in the system:

TYPE: Type of printout (Enter 1.)1: Printout of all Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)in lockout LENS.

• To display the LENS of the lockout stations in a specific MG:

TYPE: Type of printout (Enter 2.) 2: Printout of MG indication in LENS

MG: Module Group Number

Display of Lockout Station-LENS

TYPE:1 LENS: XXXXXX


TYPE: 2 LENS: XXXXXX

MG:0


DLSL CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• To display the LENS of the lockout stations in a specific unit:

TYPE: Type of printout (Enter 3.) 3: Printout of unit indication in LENS

MG: Module Group NumberUNIT: Unit Number (0-3)


TYPE:3 LENS: XXXXXX

MG:0 UNIT:0


Revision 4.0

DLSSCM0-03Business, Hotel

siness, tel

DLSS Display of Lock Out Station-Number


2. Function

This command is used to print out stations in lockout mode by station number.

3. Precautions

If there are no lockout stations to be displayed, “NOTHING” is printed out.


None

5. Entry Procedure

• To display the Station Numbers of all lockout stations in the System:

TYPE: Type of Print out Number (Enter 1.) 1: Print out of all lockout stations

• To display the Station Numbers of the lockout stations in a specific Tenant:

TYPE: Type of Print out Number (Enter 2.)2: Indication of lockout stations by tenant.

TN: Tenant Number

Display of Lockout Station-Number

TYPE: 1 XXXX Station number displays afterENTER is pressed.


TYPE: 2 TN: 1 XXXX Station number displays.


DLSS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

s:
• To display the Station Numbers of the lockout stations within a designated range of Station Number
TYPE: Type of Print out Number (Enter 3.)3: Print out of lockout stations within a specified range of station numbers.

TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]:Station Numbers

a: Start Station Numberb: Last Station Number


TYPE: 3 TN:1 XXXX

STN:3111 TO 3113

Station number displays.


Revision 4.0

DMBLCM0-03Business, Hotel

ach unit.

siness, tel

DMBL Display of Make Busy LENS Data


2. Function

This command is used to print out LENS in make busy state on a system-wide basis or for each MG or e

3. Precautions

If there are no LENS in make busy state, “NOTHING” is printed out.


Assignment(Busy/Idle): MBLE, MBST, MBTK Display: MBLE, MBST, MBTK, DMBS, DMBT

5. Entry Procedure

• To display all LENS:

TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 1.) 1: Print out of all LENS in make busy state.

• To display the LENS for a specific MG:

TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 2.)2: Print out of LENS in make busy state for a specific MG.

MG: Module Group number

Display of Make Busy Lens Data

TYPE: 1 XXXXXX LENS number displays.

Display of Make Busy Lens Data

TYPE:2 XXXXXX

MG:0

LENS number displays.


DMBL CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• To display the LENS related to a specific unit:

TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 3.)3: Print out of LENS in make busy state for a specific unit.

MG: Module Group number UNIT: Unit Number (0-3)

Display of Make busy Lens Data

TYPE:3 XXXXXX

MG:0 UNIT:0

LENS number displays.


Revision 4.0

DMBSCM0-03Business, Hotel

e make-

siness, tel

DMBS Display of Make Busy Station


2. Function

This command is used to print out all stations in the make-busy state, or to print out specific stations in thbusy state by tenant or station numbers.

3. Precautions

If there are no stations in the make-busy state to be displayed, “NOTHING” is printed out.


Assignment(Busy/Idle): MBST, MBLE Display: MBST, MBLE, DMBL

5. Entry Procedure

• For all stations:

TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 1.)1: Print out of make-busy stations in all tenants.

Note: In a multi-tenant environment, all stations will print out under tenant 1.

• For stations in a specific tenant:

TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 2.)2: Print out of make-busy stations in a specific tenant.

TN: Tenant Number

Display of Make Busy Station

TYPE:1 XXXXStation number displays.


TYPE:2 TN:1 XXXXStation number displays.


DMBS CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• For specific stations:

TYPE: Type of Print out (Enter 3.)3: Print out of make-busy stations in a specific tenant and station range.

TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]: Station Numbers

a: Start Station Number b: Last Station Number


TYPE:3 TN: 1 XXXX

STN:3111 TO 3113

Station number displays.


Revision 4.0

DMBTCM0-03Business, Hotel

runks in

out.

siness, tel

DMBT Display of Make Busy Trunk


2. Function

This command is used to display the numbers and locations of trunks in the make-busy state, for all tthe system, trunks in a specific route, or trunks in a specific range of routes.

3. Precautions

If there are no trunks in the make-busy state “NOTHING” is printed out.


Assignment(Busy/Idle): MBTK, MBLE Display: MBTK, MBLE, DMBL

5. Entry Procedure

• For all trunks:

TYPE: Kind of Print Out (Enter 1.)1: All of the Trunks

Note: All route numbers and trunk numbers will display; but only those in a make-busy state will print

Display of Make Busy Trunk

RT: XXX

TYPE: 1 TK: XXX


DMBT CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• For trunks in a specific route (single route):

TYPE: Kind of Print out (Enter 2.)2: All trunks of a specific route number.

RT: Route Number

• For trunks in a specific range of routes:

TYPE: Kind of Print out (Enter 3.)3: All trunks of a specific trunk number range.

RT [a] TO [b]: Route Numbersa: First Route Number b: Last Route Number


TYPE:2 RT: XXX

RT: 1 TK: XXX

Enter route number.


TYPE:3 RT: XXX

RT:1 TO 3 TK:XXX Enter a range of route numbers.


Revision 4.0

DOSDCM0-04Business, Hotel

h One-

num-

ed from

below.

siness, tel

DOSD Display of One-Touch Speed Call Memory


2. Function

This command is used to display One-Touch Speed Call Memory data either from the floppy disk in witTouch Speed Call Memory data has been saved by “BOSD” command or from the DLC/ELC card.

3. Precautions

• The numbers assigned to 20 Speed Calling-One-Touch keys of Dterm are displayed. Also, where a Dterm onwhich “Page Changeover Key” (AKYD, FKY = 55) is assigned to one of the function keys, up to 40 bers (2×20 Speed Calling One-Touch keys) are displayed.

• When “Speed Calling One-Touch key” (AKYD, FKY = 49) is assigned to a function key of Dterm, the num-ber assigned to that function key is not displayed.

• For displaying One-Touch Speed Call Memory data, both station number and LENS can be designatDLC/ELC card, but only station number can be designated from the floppy disk.

• The circuit cards and the Port Microprocessor (PM) which can be displayed are as shown in the table

• Error Indications

“NS”: Indicates that the circuit card and the Port Microprocessor concerned are not backed up.“RD”: Indicates occurrence of a read error“ND”: Indicates that there is no data of the designated station number on the floppy disk.


Back up: BOSDList up: LOSD

Table 2-9 Circuit Cards and Port Microprocessors (PM) Which Can Be Displayed

CIRCUIT CARD PM NAME/PM NUMBER

PA-16ELCH SP-3005, SP-3033


DOSD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

nated

5. Entry Procedure

• When displaying the data by designating station from DLC/ELC card.

a. Designating a station:

FUNC1: Kind of Function (Enter P). P: Circuit Card

FUNC2: Kind of Function (Enter S). S: Station


b. If “Y” is entered to parameter “READY”, the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the desigstation is displayed.

Display One-Touch Speed Call Memory

[INPUT PARAMETER] FUNCl: P

FUNC2: STN: 1 -COMMON STN: 2000

READY (Y/N)?Y This is displayed when the TenantPattern is used in common.

NO. SPEED CALLING DATA NO. SPEED CALLING DATA

01 : XXXXX 11 : XXXXX02 : XXXXX 12 : XXXXX03 : XXXXX 13 : XXXXX04 : XXXXX 14 : XXXXX05 : XXXXX 15 : XXXXX06 : XXXXX 16 : XXXXX07 : XXXXX 17 : XXXXX08 : XXXXX 18 : XXXXX09 : XXXXX 19 : XXXXX10 : XXXXX 20 : XXXXX


Revision 4.0

DOSDCM0-04Business, Hotel

nated

• When displaying the data by designating Line Equipment Number (LENS) from DLC/ELC card.

a. Designating a LENS:

FUNCl: Kind of Function (Enter P). P: Circuit Card

FUNC2: Kind of Function (Enter L ).L: LENS


b. If “Y” is entered to parameter “READY”, the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of the desigLENS is displayed.


[INPUT PARAMETER] FUNCl: P

FUNC2: L LENS: 000012

READY (Y/N) ?Y




DOSD CM0-04

Business, Hotel

all

• When displaying the data from floppy disk.

a. Designating a station:

FUNC1: Kind of Function (Enter F). F: Floppy Disk

DRV NO: FD Drive No. (A/B/C/D/E/F)FUNC2: Station onlyTN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberOFFICE: Office NameDATE: Date of File

b. If “Y” is entered to “IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-xx AND READY (Y/N)”, the One-Touch Speed CMemory data of the designated station is displayed.


[INPUT PARAMETER] FUNC1: FDRVNO: B FUNC2: STATION ONLY TN: 1 STN: 2000

[FILE INFORMATION]OFFICE: NEC TOKYO DATE :91/11/1 [FRI]

IS A FD SET IN DRIVE-B AND READY (Y/N) ?Y





Revision 4.0

DPKGCM0-11Business, Hotel

,

on the

siness, tel

DPKG Display Setting on Port Package


2. Function

This command displays information of Circuit Cards accommodated in the specific PIM or in all PIMs.

3. Precautions

• If a Circuit Card is in operation, the circuit card name is displayed. If a circuit card is in make-busy statusit is displayed with an asterisk and the card type (e.g., *TRK, *DLC).

• Even if the Circuit Cards do not belong to the table below, the type of the Circuit Card will appear display. In this case, “*” is attached before the type of Circuit Card. (ex. ELC→*DLC)

• The Type of Circuit Cards which is printed out from MAT are shown below.


None

Table 2-10 Reference Table for Type of Circuit Cards

TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARDS

FUNCTION

LC Line Circuit

TRK Trunk

DTI Digital Trunk Interface

RST Register Sender Trunk

ATI Attendant Interface

DLC Digital Line Circuit

CFT 3 party Conference Trunk

MODEMT Modem Pool Trunk

GWT DST (Digital Signaling Trunk)


DPKG CM0-11

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system

MG: Module Group Number (When displaying all circuit cards mounted in all PIMs, enter All .)

UNIT: Unit Number

Display Setting on Port Package Display

MG : 00 MG: Module Group Number

UNIT: 0 UNIT: Unit Number

Group Number

Group NumberSlot Number

231571 231571

201260 20126015105 20 230

16

L

C

B

H

8

R

S

T

J


Revision 4.0

DPKGCM0-11Business, Hotel

is as-

• When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system(Unit 0 of PIMJ is used in the following example.)

MG: Module Group NumberUNIT: Unit Number

Note 1: Indicates the 8RST card is mounted in Slot 4. “###” is displayed on Group 00 because no datasigned.

Note 2: Indicates the 16LC card is mounted in Slot 6.

Note 3: Indicates the 24DTI card is mounted in Slot 9.

Display Port Package Location DISPLAY

MG : 00 MG : Module Group Number

UNIT : 0 UNIT : Unit Number

Group Number 0 5 10 15 20 23

###

R L L D D D DST

C C TI

TI

TI

TI

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3


DPSW CM0-11

Business, Hotel

circuitilable.

nly the

me. In

siness, tel

DPSW Display Package Switch


2. Function

This command displays the status and function of all switches on each Circuit Card (control and linecards) which are accommodated in the PBX. Only explanations of function of each circuit card are ava

3. Precautions

• When you choose the display of the status and function, without connecting MAT to the system, ofunction of the switches appears on the screen.

• When the Circuit Card has plural switch information, you can see only one switch information at a tithis case, you can scroll the display to obtain another switch information.


None.

5. Entry Procedure

a. Selection of Display Type

Display of Both Status and Function:Shows actual settings in the switch and explanations of switch settings

Display of Function:Provides explanations of switch settings

Display Package Switch

Selection of Display Type: Display of Both Status and FunctionDisplay of Function

Select using the up ordown arrow keys.


Revision 4.0

DPSWCM0-11Business, Hotel

• Specify package type and package name:

Package Type: Select type of package by (←) Package Name: Type in Circuit Card Name (number of characters will vary)

Display Package Switch Switch Status and Function Explanation

Package Type: Control Package Line/Trunk Package

Package Name:

Ready? Yes/No

Depending on the package name entered, additional information may display, such as MG# or Processor selection.


DPSW CM0-11

Business, Hotel

? Yes/

Example

a. EMA Card (for UMGx)

Package Type: Select Control Package by (←)Package Name: Type in Circuit Card NameProcessor Select: Select the ProcessorProcessor Number: Enter LP Number

Note 1: This parameter appears when the “Processor Select” is LP.See Figure entitled “System Configuration (UMGx)” for the LP number.

Note 2: With the completion of display of status and function this indication changes to “Return to menuNo”.

[DPSW]Display Package Switch Switch status and Function Explanation


Package Name: XXXXXXXXXX Processor Select : SP LP

Processor Number : X Note 1

Ready? Yes/No

Display Switch Status Area Display Switch Function Area

Continue Display? Yes No BeforeNote 2


Revision 4.0


? Yes/

b. PBI, CPU KEY Card (for UMGx)

Package Type: Select Control Package by (←)Package Name: Type in Circuit Card NameProcessor Select: Select the kind of ProcessorProcessor Number: Enter the selected Processor No.Select System: Select the system of Circuit Card

Note 1: This parameter appears when the Processor Select is LP or MP.See Figure “System Configuration (UMGx)” on page 424 for the LP number.

Note 2: This parameter appears when the “Processor Select” is LP.




Package Name: PH-BS21 Processor Select : SP LP MP

Processor Number : 0 Note 1 Select System : Zero One Note 2

Ready? Yes/No




DPSW CM0-11

Business, Hotel

? Yes/

c. DTMC Card (for UMGx)

Package Type: Select Control Package by (←)Package Name: Type in Circuit Card NameProcessor Number: Enter the MP

Note 1: This value is the MP number.See Figure “System Configuration (UMGx)” on page 424 for the MP number.




Package Name:

Processor Number : 0 Note 1

Ready? Yes/No




Revision 4.0


System Configuration (UMGx)

MP3

MPM

HSWM

HSWM

SPM

MP2MP1MP0

HSWM

HSWM

MISCM

PMG0PMG1

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

HSWM

PIM

PIM

LPM

IMG1IMG0

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

HSWM

PIM

PIM

HSWM

IMG3IMG2

PIM

PIM

PIM

PIM

LP00

PIM

PIM

LPM

IMG4

PIM

PIM

LP08

PIM

PIM

LPM

IMG8

PIM

PIM

LP16

PIM

PIM

LPM

IMG12

PIM

PIM

LP24

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Note 1

Note 1: One LP is in charge of four IMGs.

. . . . . . .


DPSW CM0-11

Business, Hotel

? Yes/

• Specify PMN number (Additional information displays.)

• Displayed information varies depending on the Package Name.

Note: With the completion of display of status and function, this indication changes to “Return to menuNo.”



PMN Number: XXXXX Package Name: XX-XXX XPackage Edition: X

Firm information: XX-XXXX V.X

Ready? Yes/No



Package Name:

Continue Display? Yes/No

Switch Status Area(display of actual switch settings)

Switch Function Area

(explanation of functions of specific settings)


Revision 4.0

DSTNCM0-01Business, Hotel

the

ific sec-

er

station

.

siness, tel

DSTN Display of Station Data


2. Function

This command is used to display the registered Station Data.

The command can also be used to display the following data related to Number Group.

• Specific Attendant Number(ASAT command)

• Remote Access Code(ARAC command)

• Listed Directory Number(ALDN command)

• Individual Phantom Number(APHN command)

• Group Phantom Number(ASHP command)

In addition, the information of Hot Line, Dterm Key Layout, Hunting, and Call Pickup is also displayed as data related to the designated stations. Room data is also displayed in Hotel.

3. Precautions

• When a secretary station has been designated, the details of the Hunting Group to which that specretary station belongs cannot be displayed.

• When the Station Number of TEC = 13 (Data terminal via Dterm) has been designated, the Station Numbassigned to Voice port and the key data of the Dterm are displayed.

• When the station number belonging to a group (Pilot, UCD DSTN or Call Pickup) is designated, the of the group is displayed in a preassigned order.However, in UCD Hunting Group display, the designated station is usually displayed as the first one


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

istered

ameter

4. Parameters

TN: Tenant Number STN: Presently Assigned Station Number

-Station Number-EFFECTIVE TN:

Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

MG: Module Group NumberUNIT: Unit NumberG: Group Number

LEVEL: Level Number TEC: Telephone Class (Message display at the same time too) RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15) SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15)ROOM CLASS:

Room Class (for Hotel system) PHANTOM TYPE:

Phantom Number Type (“NOTHING”/“INDlVIDUAL”/“GROUP”) NUMBER: Individual Phantom Number HOT CON TN, STN:

Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Tenant Number and Station Number

Note: When the registered destination of hot line connection of the designated station is a station regfor Speed Calling-System service, parameter “HOT ADC” is displayed.

HOT ADC: Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Abbreviated Digit Code.

Note: When the registered destination of hot line connection of the designated station is a station, par“HOT CON TN, STN” is displayed.

HUNTING: Kind of Hunting (“PILOT”/“CIRCULAR”/“UCD”/“SECRETARY”)

CALL PICKUP:Belonging to Call Pickup Group or not.(“BELONG”/“BLANK”)

VOICE STN: Station Number of Voice Port corresponding to the Data Port.

[To be displayed only when TEC = 13 (Data terminal via Dterm)]Detail Data The following detail data can be displayed:

• Next Station Display

• Dterm key Position

• Hunting Group

• Call pickup Group


Revision 4.0


Dterm key Position The following detail data can be displayed:

• Detail Data Change

• Key Position (1-16)

• Key Position (17-40)

• Flexible key position (1-8)

-Parameters after detail data has been requested- PILOT: Pilot NumberSECRETARY: Secretary NumberPHANTOM: Phantom NumberCNT: Enter the number of Group Station NumberSTN: Enter the lead station Number of the Hunting Group

-Specific Attendant Number- EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)MG: Module Group NumberUNIT: Unit NumberG: Group Number LEVEL: Level Number RT: Route Number (901 or 915)TK (ATK): Trunk Number (Attendant Number) CNT: Number of handling TNsTN: Handling TNs (Smaller number first)TRSC: Trunk Route Restriction Class TSFC: Trunk Service Feature Restriction Class

-Listed Directory Number/Remote Access Code-EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number

-Individual Phantom Number -EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number TN: Tenant Number of Master Station STN: Master Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number of Master Station MG: Module Group Number UNIT: Unit Number G: Group NumberLEVEL: Level NumberTEC: Telephone Class of Master Station (Message is to be displayed simultaneously)RSC: Route Restriction Class of Master Station SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class of Master Station ROOM CLASS: Room Class (for Hotel system)


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

s

-Group Phantom Number-

EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant NumberThe following parameters are the data of a Pilot Group for which a Phantom Number is registered.

PILOT: Pilot NumberSECRETARY: Secretary NumberPHANTOM: Phantom NumberCNT: Enter the number of Group Station NumberSTN: Enter the lead station Number of the Hunting Group

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number, Specific Attendant Number, Listed Directory Number, Remote Acces

Code, Individual Phantom Number, Group Phantom Number

Data are displayed of the Number Group of the number entered.

TN: 1 STN: 5000


Revision 4.0


elect

tationation.

• For Station Number

a. Station Data

When a Station Number has been entered, the above data are displayed. If there are Dterm key data, Station Hunting Group data, and Call Pickup data to be displayed, sthe desired item with the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.

Note: When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm), the corresponding SNumber of VOICE port displays. The key position on the Dterm at this time is the VOICE-side st

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system)PHANTOM: Phantom Number Type NUMBER: Individual Phantom Number HUNTING: Kind of Hunting PICKUP: Belonging to Call Pickup Group or notHOT CON TN: Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Tenant NumberHOT CON STN:Hot Line-Opposite Party’s Station Number

Display of Station Data Display

TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN:LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC: TEC MESSAGERSC: ROOM CLASS: SFC: <Related data>PHANTOM: NUMBER: HUNTING: CALL PICKUP: HOT CON TN: STN:

Detail Data?

Next Station Display Dterm key Position MODE SELECTION: Up ArrowHunting Group MODE ACTIVATION: Down ArrowCall Pickup Group

↑ ↑

↑ ↑


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

,

tationICE-

The following explains a request for detail data.

b. When a Dterm key Position has been entered in display (a), the following information displays:

When a Dterm key Position has been entered, the above data is displayed.

If there are Dterm key data, Dterm Add on Module key data, and Dterm Flexible key data to be displayedselect the desired item with the (Up Arrow) or (Down Arrow); then press ENTER.

Note: When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm), the corresponding SNumber of VOICE port is displayed. The key position on the Dterm at this time is that of the VOside station.

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system)

Display of Station Data DISPLAY

TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN:LENS: MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: ROOM CLASS:SFC:

Dterm Position Type?

Detail Data Change

Key Position (1-16) MODE SELECTION: Up ArrowKey Position (17-40) MODE ACTIVATION: Down ArrowFlexible Key Position (1-8)

↑ ↑

↑ ↑


Revision 4.0


ICE-


c. When key position (1-16) has been entered as the answer for the question “Dterm Position Type?” indisplay (b), the following displays.

With the Enter key pressed, the screen returns to display (a).

Note: When the TEC of the designated station is 13 (Data terminal via Dterm), the corresponding StationNumber of VOICE port is displayed. The key position on the Dterm at this time is that of the VOside station.

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class ROOM CLASS: Room Class (Displayed in Hotel system)PRI: From of Line PreferenceSPK: Line Preference of Speaker ButtonANS: Line Preference of Answer ButtonORG: Line Preference of Originating ButtonMWD: Waiting Message*: Dterm Key Data


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN:LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X TEC: TEC MESSAGERSC: ROOM CLASS: SFC:

Note VOICE STN:<Dterm key position> PRI: SPK: ANS: ORG: MWD:

ENTER RETURN KEY!!

41 2 3 5 7 86

129 10 11 13 15 1614*


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

isplayed.


d. When key position (17-40) has been entered in reply to the question “Dterm Position Type?” in the dis-play (b), the following will display.

After a detail data request has been entered, the contents of key data for Keys 17 through 40 are dWhen Enter is pressed, the screen returns to display (a).

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class PRI: From of Line PreferenceSPK: Line Preference of Speaker ButtonANS: Line Preference of Answer ButtonORG: Line Preference of Originating ButtonMWD: Waiting Message*: Dterm Key Data


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN:LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X)TEC: TEC MESSAGERSC:SFC:

<Dterm key position> PRI: SPK: ANS: ORG: MWD:

ENTER RETURN KEY!!

3633 34 35 37 39 4038

2825 26 27 29 31 3230

2017 18 19 21 23 2422

*


Revision 4.0


wing
e. In reply to the question “Detailed Data?” in the display (a), when you set Hunting Group, the followill display. [Station Hunting-Pilot]
[Station Hunting-Circular]


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN:LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL: X)TEC: TEC MESSAGE RSC: SFC:<HUNTING-PILOT>PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT:

STN:

ENTER RETURN KEY!!

**

<HUNTING-CIRCULAR>SECRETARY: CNT:

STN:

**


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

Group- the

[Station Hunting-UCD]

After a detail data request has been entered, the stations belonging to either one of Station HuntingPilot/-Circular/-UCD are displayed there depending on the case involved. When the Enter key is pressed,screen returns to display (a).

Note: No display is made if UCD Overflow Group is not assigned.

CNT: Number of Stations in the Group**: Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group

<HUNTING-UCD>CNT:STN:

Note <UCD OVERFLOW GROUP> TN: STN:

**


Revision 4.0


y
f. When you answer by Call Pick-up Group in reply to the question “Detailed Data?” in the displa(a),the display scrolls to the following.
After a detail data request has been entered, the stations belonging to the Call Pickup Group are displayed.

When the Enter key is pressed, the screen returns to display (a).

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment Number TEC: Telephone class RSC: Route Restriction Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class CNT: Number of Stations in the Group**: Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN:LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G:XX LEVEL: X)TEC: TEC MESSAGERSC:SFC: <CALL PICKUP>CNT:

STN:

ENTER RETURN KEY!!

**


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

ATT,

• For Specific Attendant Number

When a Specific Attendant Number is entered, the following displays.

Note: This “MASTER” is displayed for Master ATT with respect to the Effective TN. For Night Master “NIGHT MASTER” is displayed here.

TN: Tenant Number STN: Specific Attendant NumberEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number LENS: Line Equipment NumberRT: Route NumberTK(ATN): Trunk Number (Attendant Number)CNT: Number of ending TNTN: Handling TNs (Smaller Number first)TRSC: Trunk Route Restriction ClassTSFC: Trunk Service Feature Restriction Class

• For LDN Number

When an LDN Number is entered, the following displays.

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Listed Directory NumberEFFECTIVE TN:Effective Tenant Number


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Specific Attendant Number (ASAT)LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL: X) RT: TK(ATN): MASTER Note CNT: TN:

TRSC: TSFC:


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Listed Directory Number (ALDN)


Revision 4.0


• For Remote Access Code

When a Remote Access Code is entered, the following displays.

TN: Tenant Number STN: Remote Access CodeEFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number

• For Individual Phantom Number

When an Individual Phantom Number is entered, the data of the Master Station displays.

TN (line 1): Tenant Number STN (line 1): Individual Phantom Number EFFECTIVE TN: Effective Tenant Number TN (line 3): Tenant Number of Master Station STN (line 3): Master Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number of Master StationTEC: Telephone class of Master StationRSC: Route Restriction Class of Master StationSFC: Service Feature Restriction Class of Master StationROOM CLASS: Room Class (H/M only)


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Remote Access Code (ARAC)


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Individual Phantom Number (APHN) <MASTER>TN: STN:LENS: (MG:XX UNIT:X G(SLOT):XX LEVEL:X)TEC: TEC MESSAGERSC: ROOM CLASS:SFC: TRSC:i TSFC:j


DSTN CM0-01

Business, Hotel

hantom

• For Group Phantom Number

When a Group Phantom Number is entered, the data are displayed of the Pilot Group to which that pis assigned.

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Group Phantom Number (2nd) TN: Effective Tenant Number PILOT: Pilot Station Number SECRETARY: Secretary Station Number PHANTOM: Group Phantom Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Group**: Lead Station Number of the Hunting Group


TN: STN: EFFECTIVE TN: Group Phantom Number (APHN)<HUNTING-PILOT> PILOT: SECRETARY: PHANTOM: CNT: STN:

**


Revision 4.0



-Station Number-Assignment/Deletion:ASDT, AAST, AGST/RAST, RGST APHNASHPASHCASHUACPGAHLS AKYD

-Specific Attendant Number- Assignment/Deletion:ATRKASATAMAT

-Listed Directory Number- Assignment/Deletion: ALDN-Remote Access Code-Assignment/Deletion:ARAC

-Individual Phantom Number- Assignment/Deletion:APHNASDT, AAST, AGST/RAST, RGST

-Group Phantom Number-Assignment/Deletion:ASHP


DTF1 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

.

tained.

not in

ceeded

DTF1 Display of Traffic Data


2. Function

This command is used to display the traffic data recorded in the system. The traffic information which can be displayed by this command is as follows:

• Terminal Traffic

• Route Traffic

• Station Peg Count

• Attendant Console Peg Count

• Route Peg Count

3. Precautions

• System Data 1, Index 47, Bit 0, determines whether traffic data is to be printed out in Erlang or CCS

• If Type of a Traffic Measurement is requested, the following messages may be displayed.WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned, but no traffic data has been ob

NOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned, or Traffic Measurement isservice in System Data 1, Index 47, Bit 7.

• In the display of Station Peg Count and Attendant Console Peg Count, if the number of calls has ex1,000,000, the data will be displayed as 999,999.


Assignment: ATRF


Revision 4.0

DTF1CM0-03Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement1: Terminal Traffic 2: Route Traffic3: Station Peg count4: ATT Peg Count5: Route Peg Count

6. Examples of Printout

• For Terminal Traffic (CCS)

The total traffic for each Unit or MG is printed out.

Display of Traffic Data

TYPE:5

PRINTING OUT NOW

This message is displayed while print-out of the traffic information is inprogress.

* TERMINALTRAFFIC(CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00

LENS LVO LV1 LV2 LV3 LV4 LV5 LV6 LV7

000000 0.00 0.49 0.99 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00

000010 0.00 0.99 0.49 21.21 28.11 0.00 0.00 0.00

000020 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00


DTF1 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• For Route Traffic (CCS)

• For Station Peg Count

* ROUTE TRAFFIC (CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00

ROUTE NUMBER OF TRUNKS TRAFFIC

902 20 8.38

905 20 0.00

909 4 0.00

1 4 0.00

2 4 0.00

3 32 0.00

4 12 0.00

5 12 0.00

6 8 0.00

7 8 0.00

8 8 0.00

9 4 0.00

* STATION PEG COUNT * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00

TENANT 1 ORIGINATOR : 13

STA TO STA-OG : 9

OUTGOING : 1

OTHER : 3

STA TO STA-IC : 6

INCOMING : 0

RINGING : 6

NO ANSWER

(30 SEC) : 0

ANSWER : 1

NO ANSWER : 5

OTHER : 0


Revision 4.0


ttendant

mind-

number

C, OG-

nk group

from

es.

m-

onds).

ot count-

alls.

An explanation of the output results is given below:

ORIGINATOR (Number of times call origination is attempted).Number of times a station went off-hook for call origination.

STA TO STA-OG (Number of Station to Station calls)a. Number of times a station went off-hook and dialed a station number, a dead number or a specific a

number.b. Last number calls, Hot Line calls, Priority Calls, Off-Hook Alarm calls and Calls Back of Message Re

er, are counted. c. When a station, while engaged in a call, places the call on hold, and dials a station number, a dead

or a specific attendant number, such calls are counted.d. Stop calls are not counted.e. Calls back from Call Back or Call Waiting are not counted.

OUTGOING (Number of Outgoing Attempts)a. Number of times a station went off-hook and dialed an access code for an outgoing trunk group (OG

CA, LCR, LCRS).b. Last number calls and Hot Line-Outside calls, are counted.c. When a Dterm user presses the Trunk Line button and makes an outgoing trunk call, such calls are counted. d. When a station engaged in a call places the call on hold and dials an access code for an outgoing tru

(OGC, OGCA, LCR, LCRS), such calls are counted.

OTHER (Others-Outgoing) The number obtained by subtracting the number of “STA TO STA-OG” and the number of “OUTGOING”“ORIGINATOR”. Examples of “OTHER” are:a. A station lifted the handset but did not dial any digits.b. A station started dialing but replaced the handset before dialing was completed.

STA TO STA-IC (Number of terminations of Station to Station calls)Same as “STA TO STA-OG”.

INCOMING (Number of terminated C.O. line, tie line incoming calls)a. Number of station calls attempted by direct dialing (not via the Attendant) from C.O. lines or TIE linb. Number of terminated DIT (Direct-In Termination) calls.

RINGING (Number of terminated station calls) Add “STA TO STA-IC” and “INCOMING” above for the nuber of terminated station calls.

NO ANSWER (30 SEC) (Number of times a call is unanswered for a predetermined period of time)Of the “RINGING”, number of times a call is unanswered within a predetermined timing (standard 30 sec

Note that even if a station user answers the call after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is ned as ‘ANSWER”.

Note: Number of Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is not included in the count.

ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) Of the “RINGING”, number of answered terminated c

NO ANSWER (Number of unanswered calls) Of the “RINGING”, number of unanswered calls.(Number obtained by subtracting “ANSWER” from “RINGING”)


DTF1 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

m thend

OTHER (Others-Incoming)

The number obtained by subtracting the number of “RINGING” (Number of terminated station calls) forsum of “STA TO STA-IC” and “INCOMING” (Number of terminated C.O. line/tie line incoming calls), athere are the following cases. a. The cases where the calls encountered line busyb. The cases where the calls were transferred to ATTCON

• For Attendant Peg Count

* ATTENDANT PEG COUNT (CCS) * FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00

(1) Number of incoming calls on each Tenant basis * ATTENDANT ANSWER *

7. Number of incoming calls on each ATTCON

TM LDN ATND RCL FX WATS CCSA TIE BUSY NANS ICPT SCB TF TOTAL 1 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

ATN LDN ATND RCL FX WATS CCSA TIE BUSY NANS ICPT SCB TF TOTAL 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 03 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 04 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 05 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 16 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0


Revision 4.0


The following table explains how to interpret the output results.

SYMBOL NAME OF KEY ON ATTCON DESCRIPTION

LDN Listed Directory Name CALL termination from C.O. line

ATND Attendant Operator access from C.O. line

RCL Recall Recall from station

FX Foreign Exchange Outside prefix

WATS Wide Area Telephone Service Wide Area Telephone Service

CCSA Common Channel Signaling Arrangement

Direct Inward Dial Trunk

TIE Tie Line Call termination from Tie line

BUSY Busy Call which encountered called line busy has terminated toATTCON

NANS Don’t Answer Call which encountered no answer has terminated to ATTCON

ICPT Intercept Call which was restricted has terminated to ATTCON

SCB Special Common Battery Not Used

TF Inter-Position Transfer Call termination by Inter-Position Transfer


DTF1 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

not in-

btained

s. Ing hase.

• For Route Peg Count

Below is an explanation of the output results:

a. For Intra office Trunks (ex. Route 901, 902, etc.)

ATTEMPTSNumber of times a trunk selection was attempted.

BLOCK Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk.

ESTABLISHED Number of connections to specific intra-office trunks. (Connections to Attendant Consoles are cluded).

b. For IC/OG Trunks

ATTEMPTSNumber of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk.

BLOCK Number of times trunk busy was encountered when accessing a trunk.

OUTGOING (Number of call originations)Number of times trunks were accessed. The count does not always coincide with the number oby subtracting “BLOCK” from “ATTEMPTS”.

INCOMINGNumber of terminated incoming trunk call arrivals.

REGISTER ACCESS This value, from the count in “INCOMING”, is the number of actual ORT/IRT register connectionthe case of Bothway C.O. Trunks (CBWT), the count becomes “0”. Also, when register blockinoccurred, the count in INCOMING and the count in REGISTER ACCESS do not always coincid

ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07/28 09:00 TO 07/28 10:00

ROUTE902 ATTEMPTS : 18BLOCK : 0ESTABLISHED : 18

ROUTE 1 ATTEMPTS : 5BLOCK : 5OUTGOING : 0INCOMING : 0REGISTER ACCESS: 0ATT : 0STATION : 0TANDEM : 0OTHER : 0


Revision 4.0


di-

sta-

going

ATT (Number of Connections to Attendant Consoles) This value is calculated from “REGISTER ACCESS” and “INCOMING” only when the calls arerected to the ATTCON.

STATION (Number of Station to Station calls)This value is calculated from “REGISTER ACCESS” and “INCOMING” only when the calls are tion-to-station (not via the Attendant Console).

TANDEM (Number of Tandem Connections) This value, from the count in “REGISTER ACCESS”, is the number of calls that received an outtrunk group access code (OGC, OGCA, LCR, LCRS) through an incoming trunk.

OTHERThe number obtained by subtracting “ATT”, “STATION”, and “TANDEM” from “INCOMING”.These calls include the following:

• Incoming calls terminated but released before the connection was made.

• Calls to unused numbers

• Calls that encountered station busy


DTF2 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

d

tained.

splayed

. Print-

siness, tel

DTF2 Display of Traffic Data


2. Function

This command is for printing out the result of traffic measurement data for Type 6 (Service Peg Count) assignein the Assignment of Traffic Measurement (ATRF) command.

3. Precautions

• When Type of Traffic Measurement is requested, the following messages may be displayed.

WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned, but no traffic data has been obNOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned.

• In the display of Service Peg Count, if the number of calls has exceeded 1,000,000, the data will be dias 999,999.

• Printout of the traffic measurement results by this command is applicable only to Service Peg Countout of other traffic measurement data is performed either by command DTF1 or DTF3.


Assignment: ATRF

5. Entry Procedure

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement6: Service Peg Count

Display of Traffic Data

TYPE:6

PRINTING OUT NOW! This message is displayed while output oftraffic measurement result data to the printeris in progress.


Revision 4.0


tion.

xternal

6. Example of Printout

An explanation of the output results is given below:

CALL HOLD CountNumber of calls originated by a station while keeping the original call on hold.

CALL BACK (ENTRY) CountNumber of times a busy station has called back to the calling station.

CALL BACK CANCEL CountNumber of times Call Back is canceled.

EROW (EXECUTIVE RIGHT OF WAY Count)Number of times a specific station has entered a busy stations call using EROW.

CALL WAITING-ORIGINATING CountNumber of times a busy station is automatically called by camp-on tone being sent from another sta

CALL WAITING-TERMINATING CountNumber of times a busy station is automatically called by a camp-on tone being sent to indicate an ecall waiting.

SERVICE PEG COUNT FROM 07/24 09:00 TO 07/24 10:00

TENANT 1CALL HOLD : 0 CALL BACK : 0CANCEL : 0 EROW : 0 CALL WAITING-ORIGINATE : 0 CALL WAITING-TERMINATE : 0 CALL PICK UP : 0 DIRECT CALL PICK UP : 0CF ALL CALLS-ENTRY : 0CF ALL CALLS-CANCEL : 0 CF-BUSY LINE-ENTRY : 0 CF-BUSY LINE-CANCEL : 0 CF-DON’T ANSWER-ENTRY : 0 CF-DON’T ANSWER-CANCEL : 0 SPEED CALLING ACCESS SYSTEM : 0 SPEED CALLING ACCESS INDIVIDUAL : 0 SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL-ENTRY : 0 TAS ANSWER : 0 OFF HOOK OG QUEUING : 0ON HOOK OG QUEUING-ENTRY : 0 ON HOOK OG QUEUING-CANCEL : 0 CONSULTATION HOLD : 0 CALL TRANSFER : 0 ADD ON CONFERENCE : 0


DTF2 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

ling the

nd the

trunks

CALL PICK UP - (GROUP) CountNumber of times a terminating call is answered by another station in the same pick-up group by diacall pick-up code.

DIRECT CALL PICK UP CountNumber of times a terminating call is answered by another station by dialing a call pick-up code aterminating station number.

CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-ENTRY CountNumber of times Call Forwarding-All Calls is set by a station.

CALL FORWARDING-ALL CALLS-CANCEL CountNumber of times Call Forwarding-All Calls is canceled by a station.

CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE-ENTRY CountNumber of times Call Forwarding-Busy Line is set by a station.

CALL FORWARDING BUSY LINE-CANCEL CountNumber of times Call Forwarding-Busy Line is canceled by a station.

CALL FORWARDING DON’T ANSWER ENTRY CountNumber of times Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is set by a station.

CALL FORWARDING DON’T ANSWER-CANCEL CountNumber of times Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer is canceled by a station.

SPEED CALLING ACCESS SYSTEM CountNumber of times a System Speed Calling number is dialed.

SPEED CALLING ACCESS INDIVIDUAL CountNumber of times an individual Speed Calling number is dialed.

SPEED CALLING INDIVIDUAL-ENTRY CountNumber of times an individual Speed Calling number is registered.

TAS ANSWER CountNumber of calls answered via Trunk Answer from Any Station.

OFF-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING CountNumber of times trunk is seized after a station is getting Off-Hook Queuing upon encountering all busy.

ON-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-ENTRY CountNumber of times the Off-Hook Queuing feature is set after encountering all trunks busy.

ON-HOOK OUTGOING TRUNK QUEUING-CANCEL CountNumber of times Off-Hook Queuing feature is canceled.

CONSULTATION HOLD CountNumber of times CONSULTATION HOLD is executed.


Revision 4.0


terven-ated in

CALL TRANSFER-ALL CALLS CountNumber of times a station and attendant console are called out by dialing, by hooking, without the intion of attendant console operator, the office originating/terminating calls as well as busy calls generself-office.

ADD ON CONFERENCE (THREE-WAY CALLING count)Number of three-party conference calls.


DTF3 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

tained.

Uni-will be

siness, tel

DTF3 Display of Traffic Data 3


2. Function

This command is used to display the traffic data recorded in the system.The traffic information which can be displayed by this command is listed below.

• UCD Route Peg Count

• UCD Group Peg Count

• UCD Station Peg Count

3. Precautions

• If Type of Traffic Measurement is requested, the following messages may be displayed.WAIT: A request for traffic measurement has been assigned, but no traffic data has been obNOT ASSIGN: A request for traffic measurement has not been assigned.

• In the Uniform Call Distribution Route Peg Count, Uniform Call Distribution Group Peg Count and form Call Distribution Station Peg count, if the number of calls has exceeded 1,000,000, the data displayed as 999,999.


Assignment: ATRF

5. Entry Procedure

• For UCD Route Peg Count:

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 8.)8: UCD Route Peg Count

Display of Traffic Data 3

TYPE:8


Revision 4.0


• For UCD Group Peg Count

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 9.)9: UCD Group Peg Count

• For UCD Station Peg Count:

TYPE: Type of Traffic Measurement (Enter 10.)10: UCD Station Peg Count

6. Example of Printout

• For UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT:

An explanation of the output is given below:INCOMING (Number of terminated calls)

ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls) ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls)


TYPE:9


TYPE:10

UCD ROUTE PEG COUNT FROM 07:24 09:00 T0 07:24 10:00

ROUTE UCD GROUP INCOMINGANSWER ABANDON1 1 XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX

234567

ROUTE TOTAL XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX2 1 XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX 2 3

4 5


DTF3 CM0-03

Business, Hotel

• For UCD GROUP PEG COUNT:

An explanation of the output is given below:

INCOMING (Number of terminated calls)ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls)

ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls)

• For UCD STATION PEG COUNT:

An explanation of the output is given below:

TN (Tenant Number)STN (Station Number)

INCOMING (Number of terminated calls)ANSWER (Number of answered terminated calls)

ABANDON (Number of abandoned calls)


UCD GROUP INCOMING ANSWERABANDON1 XXXXXX XXXXX XXXXX234567

TOTAL XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXXX


UCD GROUP TN STN INCOMING ANSWER ABANDON 1 XXX XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXX

XXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX XXXXXX XXXX

GROUP TOTAL2 XXXX XXXXX


Revision 4.0

INSTSYSBusiness, Hotel

rding of the

Error,

stored

siness, tel

INST System Install [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)]


2. Function

This command is used to install various data from Floppy Disks (FDs), including office data, Call Forwadata, Speed Calling-Station Data and Name Display Data, to the Hard Disk (HD) of the HFC.The FDDMAT is used for installing this data.

3. Precautions

• Data installation is to be made on FD basis.

• Installation is executed to the ACT-side HD.

• Verify must be executed after Install. If an HD copy processing has resulted in an error such as Verifyetc., be sure to install data on an FD basis.


AIOCBKUPSINZ

5. Entry Procedure

• Input Parameters

Select the data to be installed.Data Memory/CF/SPD/Name Display Data/Main Memory

Select the equipment to be installed.MAT/FDD

Is data to be installed on HD basis? Yes/No

Is verify to be executed at the time of installation? Yes/No(This prompt displays if “Yes” was entered above.)

• Data installation on an HD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item isonce on the MAT HD from the FD(s) before loading the data to the PBX.

Copy the target file into the HD of the MAT.Is the file to be verified after copying? Yes/NoPlace the target FD into Drive: X.If ready, press any key.Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No The number of copied FDs is X.When confirmed, press any key.

If NO, repeat


INST SYS

Business, Hotel

di

HDD initialization? Yes/No

Set the FD (Basic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X.When ready, press any key.

• Data Installation on an FD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item is rectlyloaded to the PBX from FD.


Place the FD (Basic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X.When ready, press any key.

Installation will start.Place the FD with the target file into Drive: X.When ready, press any key. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No

a. Initial Display

If NO, repeat

DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND

Install data Select (Multiple selections possible)( Selection: [↔] Choose: [RETURN] Cancel: [SPACE] Start: [S] )

Data Memory / Call Forwarding Data / Speed Calling Data / Name Display Data

DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM

Select Install Type HD_BASE/FD_BASE

HD_BASE : This Function copies all install FD to MAT-HDthen installs from MAT to HD in PBX

FD_BASE : This Function does not use MAT-HDinstalls from MAT to HD in PBX


Revision 4.0

INSTSYSBusiness, Hotel

b. When Install data is selected

c. When HFC number is selected

[INST]DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND

Install HFC number select HFC0 / HFC1

System Install DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND

Selected HFC: HFC0

Data Install

Set install FD in drive: A.

If you are ready, Hit the return key.

InstallPassage

0:end


INST SYS

Business, Hotel

System Install DATA: DM / CF / SPD / ND

Selected HFC : HFC0

Data Install

Office Name: ICS RAM-SYSTEM Date: 1995/03/10 15:19

File Number: 1x

InstallPassage

0:end

0 25 50 75 100%xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx xxxxxxxxxx


Revision 4.0

INSTICM0-10Business, Hotel

d Call-trolled

Error,

siness, tel

INSTI System Install [for IMG x, IMGxh, IMGdxh, and UMGx]


2. Function

In the PBX, various data (program, office data, call Forwarding data, name display, and individual Speeing Data) need to be installed to the HDD. Using this command, the following installations can be confrom the MAT. Note that the FDD of the MAT is used when installing the program.

• Formatting of HDD

• Data installation from MAT to HDD

• Data installation from FDD to HDD

3. Precautions

• When data is not to be installed on an HD basis, data installation is to be made on FD basis.“HD basis” indicates the method to install data after copying all target FDs onto the HD of the MAT.

• When installing the data from the MAT, only the ACT side HDD should be installed.

• Verify must be executed after Install. If an HD copy processing has resulted in an error such as Verifyetc., be sure to install data on an FD basis.


AIOCBKUPISINZ

5. Entry Procedure

• Input Parameters

Select the data to be installed.Data Memory/CF/SPD/Name Display Data/Main Memory

Select the equipment to be installed.MAT/FDD

Is data to be installed on HD basis? Yes/No

Is verify to be executed at the time of installation? Yes/No(This prompt displays if “Yes” was entered above.)


INSTI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

stored

di

• Data installation on an HD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item isonce on the MAT HD from the FD(s) before loading the data to the PBX.

Copy the target file into the HD of the MAT.Is the file to be verified after copying? Yes/NoPlace the target FD into Drive: X.If ready, press any key.Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No The number of copied FDs is X.When confirmed, press any key.


Set the FD (Generic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X.When ready, press any key.

• Data Installation on an FD Basis: When this type of install is used, the data of the selected item is rectlyloaded to the PBX from FD.


Place the FD (Generic Software #1) of the system management files into Drive X.When ready, press any key.

Installation will start.Place the FD with the target file into Drive: X.When ready, press any key. Has copying of all the FDs been completed? Yes/No

If NO, repeat

If NO, repeat


Revision 4.0


a. Initial Data

b. When Call Forwarding Data or Speed Calling Data or Name Display, or Data Memory is selected.

[INSTI]


Install data Select (Multiple selections possible)(Select: [↔] Choose: [RETURN] Cancel: [SPACE] Start: [S])

Data Memory / Call Forwarding Data / Speed Calling Data / Name Display Data /Main Memory

When “Main Memory” is selected,the display changes to (l).


Select Install Type HD_BASE/FD_BASE

HD_BASE : This Function copies all install FD to MAT-HDthen installs from MAT to HD in PBX

FD_BASE : This Function installs from MAT-FDto HD in PBX

When “FD_BASE” is selected, thedisplay changes to (h).


INSTI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

c. When “HD_BASE” is selected

d. When files exist on the HD of the MAT

e. When “No” is selected

[INSTI]


MAT-HD file reference now! !

When no files exist on the HD of theMAT, the display changes to (f).

[INSTI]


Do you want to install files on MAT - HD? Yes / No

When “Yes” is selected, the displaychanges to (g).

[INSTI]


Delete Files in MAT - HD

Deleting Files Now ! !

Files are being deleted.


Revision 4.0


f. When files on the HD have been deleted or when no files exist on the HD of MAT

g. When the Return Key is pressed

[INSTI]


Install Files copy to MAT - HD

Files copy with verify? Yes / No

Set Install FD in drive: X

If you are ready, Hit the Return Key

Are all the FD copied? Yes / No

Copied FD number : n

If you are ready, Hit the Return Key

Note: Select “No” to install another FD.

Note

[INSTI]

System Install Data: DM / CF / SPD / ND / MM

ACT System : 0 System

Install Now! !


File Number: 1x

InstallProgress

0: end

0 25 50 75 100%

DM CF SPD

**************************************

When the install is completed,the display changes to (k).


INSTI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

h. When “FD_BASE” is selected on display (b)

i. When the Return Key is pressed

[INSTI]


ACT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM

Data Install

Set install FD to drive : x

If you are ready, Hit the return key

[INSTI]


ACT System : 0 System

Install Now! !


File Number: 1x

InstallProgress

0: end

0 25 50 75 100%

DM CF SPD

**************************************

The data of the FD is being installed.


Revision 4.0


j. When the install is completed

k. When “Yes” is selected

[INSTI]



Install Normal end! !

Are all FD loaded? Yes / No

When “No” is selected, the displayreturns to (h).

[INSTI]



Install all end! !

Return to menu? Yes / No

When “No” is selected, the displayreturns to (a).

When “Yes” is selected, the displayreturns to the menu.


INSTI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

l. When Main Memory” is selected on display (a)

m. When a system of the HD is selected

[INSTI]


Select system to install 0 SYSTEM / 1 SYSTEM

[INSTI]


SELECT SYSTEM : 0 SYSTEM

Do you want to initialize the HD in the PBX? Yes / No

When “No” is selected, the displayreturns to (r).


Revision 4.0


n. When “Yes” is selected

o. When the Return key is pressed

p. When formatting is completed

[INSTI]



Set System management FD (basic software #1) in PBX FDD


[INSTI]



Format HD in PBX

Format now ! !

The HD is being formatted.

[INSTI]



System management file install to PBX HD

Install now ! !


INSTI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

q. When the system management fifle has been installed

r. When the directory has been created on the HD

[INSTI]



Create directory on HD in PBX

Creating now ! !

Creating a directory on the HD.

[INSTI]



Data install

Set install FD to FDD in PBX



Revision 4.0


s. When the Return key is pressed

[INSTI]



Install Now! !

Installpassage

0: end

The data of the FD is being installed.


INSTI CM0-10

Business, Hotel

t. When Data Install is completed

u. When “Yes” is selected

[INSTI]



Are all FD loaded? Yes / No

When “No” is selected, the displayreturns to (r).

[INSTI]



Install all end

Return to menu? Yes / No

When “No” is selected, the displayreturns to (a).

Select “Yes” to return to the menu.


Revision 4.0

LPROCM0-11

LPRO Processor Occupancy List


2. Function

This command provides occupancy statistics for the local processor, including:

• Occupancy data for the past 24 hours, recorded at either 10-minute or 1-hour intervals

• Maximum occupancy for the past 24-hour period

• Average occupancy over the same 24-hour period

The results can be printed but not displayed.

3. Precautions

None


None

5. Entry Procedure

• Example for the IMG

Processor Occupancy List

INTERVAL: 1 INTERVAL: Measurement information for output interval1 - Every ten minutes2 - Every one hour

Ready?


LPRO CM0-11

• Example (for the IMG)

LP OCCUPANCY LIST

TIME MM SYSTEM

17:00 0.0 0.018:00 13.7 13.719:00 19.3 19.3

AVERAGE XX.XX XX.XX

- - - - - -Maximum occupancy ratio of 10 seconds - - - - - -(94/10/2315:49 to 94/10/24 16:50

MAXIMUM 26.7DATE 10/24TIME 15:25


Revision 4.0

MBBSCM0-03Business, Hotel

e UMG

ake

system

siness, tel

MBBS Make Busy of Processor Bus


2. Function

This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the processor bus. This command is for thxonly.

3. Precautions

• If the BUSR circuit card corresponding to a Specified processor bus is made busy by the MB switch, mbusy resetting in software is not allowed, and an error is indicated. In this case, the make busy state can bereset using the MB switch of the BUSR circuit card.

• The system will not allow all processor buses to be made busy at the same time. Accordingly, if the is operating with one processor bus, any attempt to make busy that bus will result in an error.


None.

5. Entry Procedure

PBUS No.: Processor Bus Number (0/1)MB: Make Busy Information

0: Idle1: Busy

Note: When the Processor Bus Number is entered, the current status is displayed.

Make Busy of Processor Bus

PBUS NO:0

MB:1

WRT? Y


MBLE CM0-01

Business, Hotel

ed after

usy by

siness, tel

MBLE Make Busy of LENS


2. Function

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of LENS (Line Equipment Numbers).

3. Precautions

• If the LENS of a trunk or station which is busy on a call is entered, the make busy request is executthe call is completed.

• When “PKG CHECK” is displayed, it means that the circuit card is not mounted or has been made bthe MB switch. Proceed to the next operation by pressing the ENTER key.

• When the designated LENS is a port of the SMINT, “SMINT: XXXXX-X” is displayed.(Ex. “SMINT: EMM00-0”)


Assignment: MBTK, MBSTDisplay: DMBL, DMBS, DMBT

5. Entry Procedure

LENS: Line Equipment NumberMB: Make Busy Information

0: Make Idle1: Make Busy

Note: When the “LENS” is entered, the current status of the entered LENS is displayed.

Make Busy of LENS

LENS:000001

MB:1

WRT? Y


Revision 4.0

MBPMCM0-03Business, Hotel

essor iscircuitit cards

in soft-

empt

een exe-rformed

ed, this

ever,

layed.

siness, tel

MBPM Make Busy of Port Microprocessor


2. Function

This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the circuit card in which the port microproccontained. This setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. If the location of the card containing the port microprocessors is specified in this command, the operating state of all circumounted in the associated unit is displayed.

3. Precautions

• If the specified circuit card is made busy by the MB switch, any attempt to reset the make-busy stateware will result in an error. In this case, the MB switch can be used to place the circuit card in operation. Ifthe circuit card is not mounted, the make busy state will be displayed; but, an error will result if an attis made to reset the circuit card.

• When specifying the PMN (Port Microprocessor Location Number) of a multiple-width circuit card (suchas the DTI, etc.), be sure to specify the actual mounting location.

• If setting of the make busy state is specified, this command also checks whether the request has bcuted as specified. This confirmation occurs once, after two seconds. If the request has not been peas specified, “UNDER PROCESSING” is displayed. To check whether execution has been completcommand must be input again.

• The following messages are displayed during and after execution of this command.

EXIST BUSY PORT:If any circuits (line/trunk) of the specified circuit card are busy, this message will be displayed. Howsetting of the make busy state is allowed even if this message is displayed.

UNDER PROCESSING: If make busy has not been executed two seconds after inputting the command, this message is disp


Assignment Line/Trunk: MBST, MBTK, MBLE Display Line/Trunk: DMBS, DMBT, DMBL


MBPM CM0-03

Business, Hotel

enter

5. Entry Procedure

• When the E-version Series 6100 software or earlier is installed in the system:


MB: Make Busy Information (0/1).0: Make Idle1: Make Busy

Note: When “PMN” is entered, the current status of the entered Port Microprocessor is displayed, thusthe data from the MAT.

PMN:00100 LC

MB:1

WRT? Y

The type of circuit card is displayed here.

CIRCUIT CARD TYPE

LCTRKDTIRSTATIDLCMODEM TGWT

Group NumberUnit NumberModule Group Number

XX X XX


Revision 4.0

MBPMCM0-03Business, Hotel

. “##”

tate.

te.

• When the F-version Series 6100 software or later is installed in the system(Unit 0 of PIMJ is used in the following example.)

PMN: Port Microprocessor Equipment Number (5 digits)MB: Make Busy Information (0/1)


Note 1: Indicates a circuit card using 8 ports (e.g. 8 RST) is mounted in Slot 4 and is in make busy stateis displayed on Group 00 because no data is assigned.

Note 2: Indicates a circuit card using 16 ports (e.g. 16 COT) is mounted in Slot 6 and is in make busy s

Note 3: Indicates a circuit card using 24 ports (e.g. 24 DTI) is mounted in Slot 9 and is in make busy sta

Make Busy of Port MicroprocessorPMN : Port Microprocessor

PMN :00000 XXXX Equipment Number (5 digits)MB : Make Busy Information (0/1)

MB :X 0 : Make Idle1 : Make Busy

GROUP NO.

OPEN-OPE

0 5 10 15 20 23

###

* * * * * * *

Note 1 Note 2 Note 3


MBRT CM0-04

Business, Hotel

ing) is

d mes-

in the

ated.

tion.

siness, tel

MBRT Make Busy of Route


2. Function

This command is used for assigning IDLE/BUSY status for all the trunks in the route designated.

3. Precautions

• Even if there is any trunk under Make-Busy (or Idle) status in the route, Make-Busy setting (or clearexecuted with respect to all the trunks in the route.

• While execution of this command is in progress, the Trunk Number of the trunk under processing ansage “Making Busy Now!!” or “Making Idle Now!!” are displayed on the CRT screen.

• When a specific circuit card is not mounted or is under “Make Busy” status with its MB switch set UP position, the message “PKG CHECK” is printed in the list.


None

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberMB: Make Busy Information (0/1)

0: Idle1: Busy

Note: The parameters of the data to be provided to the printer are as follows.- TK: Trunk Number- LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)- Make Busy OK (Make Idle OK): The trunk concerned has been made busy (or idle) as design- Already Busy (Already Idle): Before this command has been executed, the trunk concerned wasalready under “Make Busy” (or “Make Idle”) status as designated.- PKG CHECK: The circuit card is not mounted or MB switch on the circuit card is in the UP posiThus, “Make Busy” status cannot be changed by means of this command.

RT: 1MB: 0

WRT? Y


Revision 4.0

MBSMCM0-03Business, Hotel

ssage

siness, tel

MBSM Make Busy of System Message Printout


2. Function

This command allows or inhibits the automatic printout of system messages on the stand-alone printer.

3. Precautions

• This command is allowed only when bit 4 of System Data 1, Index 86 is “1” (automatic system meprinting function in service).

• Port specification by this command has priority over the following data:

a. System Data 1, Index 38 (printer installation specification)

b. System Data 1, Index 39 (system message output port specification)

c. System Data 1, Indexes 116 to 121 (port type specification)


None

5. Entry Procedure

PORTNO.: Port Number (0-7)MB: Make Busy Information


Note: When “PORT No.” is entered, the current status of the entered PORT No. is displayed.

Make Busy of System Message Printout

PORT NO.: 0

MB: 0

WRT? Y


MBST CM0-01

Business, Hotel

n of the

usy by

siness, tel

MBST Make Busy of Station


2. Function

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations.

3. Precautions

• Make busy assignment is executed even if the specified station is engaged in a call. Upon completiocall, the make busy assignment will be put into effect.

• When “PKG CHECK” is displayed, it means that the circuit card is not mounted or has been made bthe MB switch. Press ENTER to return to TN to enter new data.


Assignment: MBLEDisplay: DMBL, DMBSList up: LLEN, LHEN, LSTN, LHST

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberMB: Make Busy Information


Note: When “TN” and “STN” are entered, the current status of the specified station is displayed.

Make Busy of Station

TN:1 STN:3155

MB:1

WRT? Y


Revision 4.0

MBTCCM0-04

MBTC Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous


2. Function

This command is used to display trunks that are busy and to make busy a range of trunks.

3. Precautions

• Be sure not to make all trunks busy.


None

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberMB: Make Busy Information (0/1)

0 - Make Idle1 - Make Busy

Note: In the example above, trunks 1, 2, and 23 are busy.

Make Busy of Trunk - Continuous

RT:10 TK:1 TO

MB: 0

TK 01234,56789 TK 01234,56789 TK 01234,56789MB MB MB

X: 1100 00000 10X: 20X:1X:00000 00000 11X: 21X:2X: 0001 12X: 22X:3X: 13X: 23X:4X: 14X: 24X:5X: 15X: 25X:6X: 16X:7X: 17X:8X: 18X:9X: 19X:


MBTK CM0-01

Business, Hotel

n of the

usy by

siness, tel

MBTK Make Busy of Trunk


2. Function

This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks.

3. Precautions

• Make busy assignment is executed even if the specified trunk is engaged in a call. Upon completiocall, the make busy assignment will be put into effect.

• When “PACKAGE” is displayed, it means that the circuit card is not mounted, or has been made bthe MB switch. Proceed Press the Backspace key to go back to TK.


Assignment: MBLEDisplay: DMBL, DMBTList up: LLEN, LHEN, LTRK

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberMB: Make Busy Information

0: Make Idle1: Make Busy (outgoing) (depends on setting of ARTD)

Outgoing make busyPackage make busyBlocking make busy

2: Make busy (bothway)

Note: When “RT” and “TK” are entered, the current status of the specified trunk is displayed.

Make Busy Trunk

RT:1 TK:3

MB:1

WRT? Y


Revision 4.0

MMNFCM0-11

MMNF Make Menu File


2. Function

This command is used to make menu files.

3. Precautions

• Make sure the appropriate disk is loaded before making an addition.


None

5. Entry Procedure

MENU Addition (0/1)0: Not Addition1: Addition

Make Menu File

CCIS : 0ACD : 0PSM : 0VMM : 0FMM : 0TMM : 0OAI : 0AEP : 0ISDN : 0ACD (OAI) : 0

Change MENU (Y/N)?


NDBU CM0-04

Business, Hotel

D com-

y Data

(LNDD

ve been loading

rs and thers before

siness, tel

NDBU Name Display Data Back Up


2. Function

• Name Display Data Save

This parameter is necessary to save into a floppy disk the Name Display Data assigned by the ANDmand.

• Name Display Data Verify

This parameter is necessary to verify the Name Display Data in the system with the Name Displastored in a floppy disk.

• Name Display Data Load

This parameter is necessary to load the Name Display Data stored in a floppy disk into the system.

3. Precautions

• Before saving the Name Display Data, the floppy disk to be used must be formatted (initialized).

• When executing data Save/Load using this command, list up the data using the List Up command in advance to save.

When loading the data, be sure to load the data after listing up check errors. Also, after the data haloaded, list up the data by the List Up command. Be sure to perform data corrections before and afterin this manner.

• Since data loading is executed as per the LEN number, the correspondence between station numbeuser information cannot be guaranteed when the correspondence between LEN and Station Numbedata loading and after data loading differ from each other.


For Name Display Data- Assignment: ANDDDeletion: ANDDDisplay: ANDDList up: LNDD


Revision 4.0

NDBUCM0-04Business, Hotel

TION

5. Entry Procedure:

Function: Operation ModeS: SaveL: LoadV: VerifyP: Verify with Error List

OFFICE: Office NameDATE: Date of the File

The following messages are displayed during execution or upon completion of this command:

FLOPPY DISK IS FILLED:There is no space in the floppy disk.

COMPLETED: Save, Load or Verify has been completed.

ERRORS: Number of Unmatched Data. This message is displayed only in the case of FUNC= V (Verify).

Name Display Data Backup

[INPUT PARAMETERS](S:Save L:Load V:Verify P:Verify with Error List)

FUNCTION: S

[FILE INFORMATION IN FD] OFFICE: NEC CORPORATIONDATE: 85/01/01

FLOPPY DISK SET IN DRIVE-A READY FOR OPERATION (Y/N) ?Y

File Information displays.


PMBU CM0-11

Business, Hotel

forma-

er n.

siness, tel

PMBU Port Microprocessor Back Up [for Engineering use only]


2. Function

This command saves the contents of PM (port microprocessor) into FD (floppy disk) or verifies them. Intion of firmware (program code) also appears on the screen.

3. Precautions

• When an error message appears on the screen after data entry, see Table 2-11.

• The FD (floppy disk) in which you are going to save the PM memory should be formatted.

• When you cannot read out the information of the firmware in the PM memory, by entering SP numb( = firmware number), ISSUE ( = issue of software) and office name, you can take out the informatio


None

Table 2-11 Counteraction Table against Command Execution Error

ERROR MESSAGE CAUSE OF ERROR RESPONSE

Disk I/O Error • Flaw on the FD• The contents of the FD have been

destroyed, rejecting Data writing.

< In SAVE Mode >• Format FD. • If you have the same result even

using the formatted FD, change the FD.

< In VERIFY Mode >• Data stored in the FD is invalid.

Write Protect Error • FD is protected by write protect notch.

• Confirm the data stored in the FD is necessary or not. If it is unnecessary data put a protect seal on the notch, then use it afterformatting.

File Not Found • There is no file in the FD which is inserted into the Drive.

• Replace it with the proper one.


Revision 4.0

PMBUCM0-11Business, Hotel

rma-

5. Entry Procedure

Function: ModesS: Save V: Verify P: Verify with Error list

PMN: The location of the Circuit Card on which the firmware program is mounted.

Capacity: Capacity of Port Microprocessor’s memory to save into FD (2/4/8/16/32/64).Floppy Disk is set in the Drive-A? (Y/N): Set a formatted FD into Drive-A.

Note: Enter the capacity of PM memory which you are going to save into a FD. Parameters of File infotion appear on the display.

SP Number: Firmware ISSUE: Software ISSUEPMN: displayed again OFFICE: Office Name DATE: xx/xx/xx

Port Microprocessor Memory Backup[Input Parameter]

Function: v (S:Save V:Verify P:Verify with Error list) PMN : 00010 (PM Number) Capacity: 64 (K Byte) Note

[File Information]SP Number: 0455ISSUE : 06PMN : 00010 Office : NEC CorporationDate : xx/xx/xx

FLOPPY DISK SETTING ON DRIVE-A READY (Y/N)?

COMPLETED!RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?

XX X XX

Group NumberUnit NumberModule Group Number


RALM SYS

Business, Hotel

any

siness, tel

RALM Release Alarm


2. Function

This command is used for clearing the fault indications.

3. Precautions

• When an alarm is indicated and the MAT is initially powered on, the MAT will automatically print outFault Data in the system. (The printer must be turned on.)


None

5. Entry Procedure

When processing has been completed, the following displays:

RELEASED: Completion of alarm release.

RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?: Indication of next promptY: Return to MENU.N: Start operation again.

Release Alarm

RELEASE (Y/N)? Y

RELEASE (Y/N)? Y

RELEASED! !

RETURN TO MENU (Y/N)?


Revision 4.0

RLSTCM0-03Business, Hotel

tation or

d.

is

siness, tel

RLST Release of Station/Trunk


2. Function

This command is used to release a station or trunk.

3. Precautions

• One of the following messages is displayed, depending on the connection status of the specified strunk.

IDLE: Idle state BUSY: Busy state MAKE BUSY: Make busy stateLOCKOUT: Lockout state

The busy tone (reorder tone) state is displayed as “BUSY”.

• When the trunk number is input (Type 2), the line equipment number (LENS) of the trunk is displaye

• If this command is used to force the release of a station, and that station is in the off-hook state, recallindicated.

• The STN (Station No.) or LENS of a Dterm must be designated for the prime line.


None


RLST CM0-03

Business, Hotel

,

5. Entry Procedure

• For a Station

Destination is a station: LENS: XXXXXX TN: X STN:XXXXDestination is a trunk: LENS: XXXXXX RT: XXX TK: XXX

1: Stations for Release2: Trunk for Release 3: LENS for Release

TYPE: Kind of Release 1: Station Release2: Trunk Release3: LENS Release

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number RT: Route Number

Trunk Route NumberIntraoffice Route Number

TK: Trunk NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number

Release of Station/Trunk

TYPE:1

TN:1 STN:3111

IDLE

RELEASE (Y/N)? Y

Connection status is displayed here.In the case of Busy Tone state or Reorder Tone state“BUSY” is displayed.When the status is “BUSY” and the station/trunk isconnected to a certain destination, the information ofthe connected destination is displayed as follows.


Revision 4.0

RLSTCM0-03Business, Hotel

• For a Trunk:

TYPE: Kind of Release (Enter 2.)2: Release of a Trunk

TN: Tenant Number RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number

• For LENS:

TYPE: Kind of Release (Enter 3.)3: Release of a LENS



TYPE:2

RT:1 TK:1 LENS:000160

IDLE

RELEASE (Y/N)? Y

LENS of the designated trunk is displayed.


TYPE:3

LENS:000001

IDLE

RELEASE (Y/N)? Y


RVTL CM0-09

Business, Hotel

rvice.

he Data

e Range,hrought for pro-

(desig- of thatignatedd, Error

siness, tel

RVTL Remove Virtual Tie Line Data


2. Function

This command is used to delete a schedule for virtual tie line implementation period in Virtual Tie Line Se

3. Precautions

• The entry range (DATE) of the Date Range is within one year.

Example:

01/01-12/31: One year from January 1st to December 31st.12/01-11/30: One year from December 1st to November 30th of the following year.

• The Week Range is entered as follows.

Example:

MON-FRI: Five days from Monday to Friday SAT-SUN: Two days from Saturday to SundayMON- MON: One day if the same Monday is designated.

Designation in reverse direction

MON- SUN: Seven days when going back by one weekTUE-SUN: Six days when going back by two weeks SAT-WED: Five days when going back by three weeks

When the Date Range is one day, only the starting week is displayed. The relationship between tRange and the Week Range is as follows.

Example:

In the case of DATA; 11/08-11/22, WEEK; MON-WED

In a case where 11/08 is Wednesday, 11/22 is Wednesday of two weeks after. In the designated Dat8th is the first Monday, 13th through 15th are Monday through Wednesday of next week, and 20th t22nd are Monday through Wednesday of the week after next. Thus, these seven days are the subjeccessing.

• When displaying the currently assigned data by designating a specific date or by batch designationnation of a specific period), the data is displayed as follows. If only one day is to be deleted, the dataspecific day is displayed. If a specific period is designated, the data of only the first date of the desperiod is displayed. Note, however, that if no data is assigned on the first day of the designated periois displayed.


Revision 4.0

RVTLCM0-09Business, Hotel


Assignment: AVTLList up: LVTL

5. Entry Procedure

TL / SPC: Kind of Tie Line (T/S)T - Time LinkS - Semi Permanent Connection

• For T (Time Link) selection

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data

TL / SPC:

NEXT? Y

Remove Virtual Tie Line DataDATE : 03/27-03/31 PTN: 0WEEK : TUE-SUN IC/OG : OG RT: 12 TK: 1D-LENS : 001014 CH: 6CALLING: 1111NEXT? Y


RVTL CM0-09

Business, Hotel

a. If “Y” is entered after “Next?” the display changes as follows:

DATE: [aa]/[bb]-[cc]/[dd]: Date Range aa: Start Month (01-12)bb: Start Day (01-31)cc: Last Month (01-12)dd: Last Day (01-31)

PTN: Pattern Number (0-15)WEEK: [ee]-[ff]: Week Range

ee: Start week (SUN, MON, TUES, WED, THURS, FRI, SAT)ff: Last week (SUN, MON, TUES, WED, THURS, FRI, SAT)

IC/OG: King of Assign (IC/OC)IC: Incoming CallOG: Outgoing Call

RT: Route Number DisplayTK: Trunk Number DisplayD-LENS: LENS of Dch CH: Bch Number DisplayCALLING: Calling Number Display KEYPAD: Keypad Information (0/1) CALLED: Called Number Display SUB NO: Sub Address Number Display (Only Assign Data is) TIME: [aa]:[bb]-[cc]:[dd]: Time Range

aa: Start Time Display bb: Start Minute Display cc: Last Time Displaydd: Last Minute Display

RESULT: [aa]/[bb]: Result Displayaa: Monthbb: Day

Remove Virtual Tie Line DataKEYPAD: 1CALLED : 2222 SUB NO : 123 TIME : 08:30-17:20 DEL?

RESULT : 03/27


Revision 4.0

RVTLCM0-09Business, Hotel

• For S (Semi Permanent Connection) selection

PTN: Pattern Number (0-15)IC/OG: Kind of Assign (IC/OG)

IC - IncomingOG - Outgoing

RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberD-LENS: Lens of DchCH: Bch Number (6-24: every 6ch/1-30)CALLING: Calling Number (Max. 24 digits)CALLED: Called Number (Max. 24 digits)SUB: Kind of Sub Address (0/1)

0 - Not Assigned1 - Assign

SUB NO: Sub Address (Max. 12 digits)

Remove Virtual Tie Line Data

PTN: 0IC/OG: RT: TK:D-LENS: CH:CALLING:SUB:


SINZ SYS

Business, Hotel

com-

te of the

m.

nationroceeds

cuted

siness, tel

SINZ System Initialize


2. Function

This command is used to initialize the PBX from the MAT. Also, at the time of system initialization, this mand allows the programs and the office data to be loaded from a hard disk into the RAM. If no office data file exists in the hard disk, the system starts off-line.

3. Precautions

• This command is used to initialize the system. It is generally not used during system operation.

However, if this command is used during system operation, it is necessary to check the operating stasystem.

• During system initialization, “UNDER-PROCESSING” is displayed on the screen.

• In some cases, when the operation returns to MENU, a password is necessary to access the syste


None

5. Entry Procedure

a. Using digit keys, “ ” key, and “ ” key, select a mode. With a mode selected a supplementary explacorresponding to the selected mode will be displayed. When the Enter key is pressed, the operation pto the next step.When the “/” key is pressed, the screen returns to MENU screen.

b. Using “→” key and “←” key, select whether the processing designated by this command is to be exeor not (Yes/No). When the Enter key is pressed, the processing will be executed.With No selected, the operation returns to mode selection.

System Initialize

1. System Initialize 2. Office Data Load & System Initialize3. Program Load & System Initialize4. Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize

Ready?: Yes/No

←

←


Revision 4.0

SPTSCM0-11Business, Hotel

odule

s, On-atus)

r when

siness, tel

SPTS Scanning of Port Status


2. Function

This command displays momentarily the working status of PM (= Port Micro processor) on MG (= MGroup), Unit and Group basis.

• By entering Module Group Number, you can see the following status on a Module Group basis.(BY): All Busy(ID): Idle at least one(MB): Under Make Busy Status(- -): Not mounted Note

• By entering Unit Number, you can obtain the following information on a circuit card basis.[On a circuit card basis]

(ON): On-Line status

(MB): Make Busy/Not mounted [On a circuit level basis]

(I): Idle

(M): Line Busy/Not programmed

• By entering the Group number, you will see the type of the Circuit Card (ISSUE, Type, Group StatuLine, MB, and not mounted). Each circuit level information (TN number, STN number, TEC, Stappears.

Note: This information appears when the Circuit Card is in make busy status (MB key is set upward) othe designated location has no Circuit Card.

3. Precautions

• To interrupt the processing while PM status is being observed, use the following keys:


Make Busy: MBST, MBTK, MBLE, MBPMDisplay: DLEN, DISS

KEY FUNCTION

/ All processing halts returning to menu.

ESCYou can resume the processing or return to PM designation.


SPTS CM0-11

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• Display of Scanning (by designating MG)

Type: Display Type (Enter 1) 1: MG

MG Number: Module Group Number

Type of Circuit Cards and the working status of PM in each Group appear on the display. (Refer to Table 2-12 below.)

Table 2-12 Type of Circuit Cards

TYPE OF CIRCUIT CARDS FUNCTION NAME

LC Line Circuit

TK Trunk

RS Register Sender

AI Attendant Interface

DL Digital Line Circuit

CF 3 party conference

MO Modem Pool Trunk

DT Digital Interface Trunk

DS DST

Scanning of Port Status Scanning

Type? (l:MG/2:Unit/3:Group):1 Package StatusID : Idle MB: Make Busy

MG Number?: 0 BY : Busy --: Not Mounted <ESC>Abort

Group 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

LC LC LC LC DL DL LC LC LC DL DL KT TK AI KS RS LC LC LC LCUnit 0 ID ID ID BY BY .. MB MB MB MB BY BY ID ID ID MB MB BY BY BY ID .. .. .. LD LC LC DL DL DL DL LC LC LC LC TA AI RS RS CF SM DT AI RS DS MOUnit 1 BY MB BY .. .. ID ID ID ID MB MB MB MB BY BY BY ID ID ID ID ID BY ID ID HU DT SM CF AI TK DL DL DL CF MO MOUnit 2 MB BY MB .. .. ID ID ID . . . . . . . . . . . . ID ID ID MB . . . . . . . . . . ID BY

Unit 3


Revision 4.0


• Display of Scanning (by designating Unit)

Type: Display Type (Enter 2)2: Unit Note

Unit Number: Unit Number

The status of Circuit Cards in each Unit can be displayed.

Note: The entire PIM (two units) will display.


PORT STATUSScan Type ? (1:MG 2:UNIT 3:GROUP) : 2 I = IDLE L = LOCK OUT

B = BUSY M = MAKE BUSY

MG No. ? : b UNIT No : c <ESC> - Abort

LC

LC

LC

LC

LC

LC

DL

DL

LC

LC

TK

RS

RS

TK

AI

ON

MB

MB

ON

ON

ON

ON

MB

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

MB

MB

ON

MB

MB

ON

ON

ON

MB

MB

MB

B M M I B B I I M B I I I MB M M I B B I I M B M I B MB M M I B B I I M B M M I BB M M I B B I B M B M B I II B M B I B I B M B I B I BI B M B I B I B M B M L I BB B M B I B I B M B M L I BI B B M I B I I M B M I I B

PKG Kind –>

Status –>

Level-76543210

0 5 10 12 16 20 22


SPTS CM0-11

Business, Hotel

• Display of Scanning (by designating Group)

Type: Display Type (Enter 3) 3: Group

MG Number: Module Group NumberUnit Number: Unit Number Group Number: Group Number

The Issue and Type of Circuit Cards, the status of the Group, Terminal data of each circuits and their statusappear on the display.

Note: Unassigned ports are displayed as “space.”


SCAN TYPE ? (1:MG 2: UNIT 3:GROUP) : 3

MG No. ? : d UNIT No. ?: e GROUP No. ? : f <ESC? - Abort

SP No. : 0100 ISSUE: 01 KIND OF PACKAGE: L 16LCC

PACKAGE STATUS: O ON LINETN STN TEC (TELEPHONE CLASS) : N

Level - 7 1 2400 1=DP (10PPS) : I IDLE6 1 2410 1=DP (10PPS) : B BUSY5 2 2415 1=DP (10PPS) : B BUSY4 2 2420 1=DP (10PPS) : L LOCK OUT3 5 2431 2=BP : M MAKE BUSY2 5 2444 2=BP : B BUSY1 7 2451 1=DP (10PPS) : I IDLE0 15 2460 3=DP/PB : B BUSY


Revision 4.0


el) and

• Display of Scanning (by designating Group-Trunk)

Type: Display Type (Enter 3) MG Number: Module Group Number Unit Number: Unit Number Group Number: Group Number

The issue and Type of Circuit Cards, the status of the group, the terminal data of each circuits (= levtheir status are appeared.

Note: Unassigned ports are displayed as “space.”


SCAN TYPE ? : (1:MG 2:UNIT 3:GROUP) : 3

MG No. ? : D UNIT NO. ?: e GROUP No. ? : f <ESC> - Abort

SP No. : 0100 ISSUE : 01 KIND OF PACKAGE : T 4COT: O

PACKAGE STATUS : O ON LINERT TK TCL (TRUNK CLASS) : N

Level- 7 :6 :5 :4 :3 1 15 1 = DDD LINE : M MAKE BUSY2 2 20 2 = FX LINE : B BUSY1 3 22 3 = WATS LINE : I IDLE0 4 25 10 = DICTATION TRUNK : B BUSY


SRTS CM0-11

Business, Hotel

routes)

e effec-

siness, tel

SRTS Scanning of Route Status


2. Function

This command displays the designated trunk status (busy/idle) at predetermined intervals. (maximum 15

3. Precautions

• When you want to interrupt the processing while trunk status is being observed, the following keys artive.

• Make busy and lockout status do not belong to idle status nor to busy status.

• Any route status does not appear when the number of trunking in the designated route is 0.

• While entering route number which is to be observed, you can use the following keys.


None

KEY FUNCTION

/All processing halts.This takes you out of the command and returns you to the Main menu.

ESC You can resume the processing or return to route designation.

KEY FUNCTION

ESC Stop entering the data before reaching 15 routes.

INSERT Insert additional data at the cursor location.

DELETE Delete data at the cursor location.


Revision 4.0

SRTSCM0-11Business, Hotel

-

ks and

5. Entry Procedure

• Display of Route Observation Entry

RT Number: Observed Route NumberInput Data is correct? (Y/N):

Confirmation of Observed Route Number Trunk Configuration:

XXX= Trunk Number

• Display of Route Observation Status

RT: Route NumberNumber of Trunk: Number of Trunks in each RouteTime: Sampling TimeIdle: Number of idle trunks Busy: Number of busy trunks

• To return to the display (1) while Route Status is on the screen, press ESC. “Stop display? (0: stop, 1: continue)” displays. 0: Return to Display of Route Observation Entry1: Route Observation Status restarts

Note: On the screen, at one minute interval, the designated route status (Number of trunks, idle trunbusy trunks) is displayed with time indication.

Display Route Number? (Max 15) <ESC>-Input Data EndRT Number: <INS>-Insert

<DEL>-Delete 1: 1 6: 62: 2 7: 73: 3 8: 84: 4 5: 5

Input data is correct? (Y/N): YPrint out Required? (Y/N): YChecking Trunk Configuration (XXX)

Route Status Scanning

RT/Number of Trunk Time10:00 Time10:05 Time10:10 Time10:15 Time10:20Idle Busy Idle Busy Idle Busy Idle Busy Idle Busy

1/ 15 10 5 10 5 2/ 203/ 16 4/ 1 5/ 186/ 307/ 22


TDBU CM0-03

Business, Hotel

floppy

TDBU Traffic Data Back Up


2. Function

This command is used to back up traffic data which has been stored on the hard disk of the MAT onto adisk on the basis of type of traffic measurement data such as Terminal Traffic, Route Traffic, Station Peg Count,ATT Peg Count and Route Peg Count.

3. Precautions

• The following types of traffic measurement can be backed up:

a. Terminal Traffic

b. Route Traffic

c. Station Peg Count

d. ATT Peg Count

e. Route Peg Count

• MS-DOS formatted FDs are required.


Display: DTF1, DTF2, DTF3, PTF1Assignment: ATRF

5. Entry Procedure

Traffic Data Back Up

Selection of back up data:1.Terminal Traffic2. Route Traffic3. Station Peg Count4. ATT Peg Count5. Route Peg Count

Please insert floppy disk.

Selection of drive (FDD): A B set OK? Yes/No


Revision 4.0

TSTLCM0-03Business, Hotel

In accor-

r given

. If a

siness, tel

TSTL Test Station Line


2. Function

• This command causes the CPU to execute line tests and displays the results of the tests performed.dance with the Line Test Start Order given from the CPU, the three kinds of tests shown in Table 2-13 beloware executed in sequence in the time periods shown in Figure 2-7.

• As shown in Figure 2-7, the results of the tests can be known in about 500 msec. by Test Scan Ordeby the CPU. Figure 2-8 shows the functional block diagram.

Figure 2-7 Line Test Sequence

Table 2-13 Kind of Tests

ITEM No. TEST ITEM CONTENT OF TEST

1Ground Test (GT) Test as to whether ground exists on either A wire or B wire.

If ground has been detected at less than 25 Ω resistance, the test result becomes invalid.

2False Cross and Ground Test (FCG)

Test as to whether -48 V exists on either A wire or B wire. If -48 V via less than 25 Ω resistance has been detected, the test result becomes invalid.

3Continuity Test (CON)

Test as to whether a telephone set is connected to the line being testedtelephone set is connected to the line via more than 10 Ω resistance, the test result becomes invalid.

0-133 ms 133 ms 133 ms 133 ms

400-532 msec

START CON TESTFCG TESTGT TEST

Command Input GT RESULT CON RESULTFCG RESULT


TSTL CM0-03

Business, Hotel

t ending

arting and

Figure 2-8 Functional Block Diagram of TSTL

3. Precautions

• The starting and ending test station numbers must consist of the same number of digits, and the tesstation number must be a higher number than the test starting station number.

• If tests are to be executed for a single station, the station to be tested must be entered as both the stending station number.

• For the line test sequence and the functional block diagram, refer to Figure 2-7 and Figure 2-8, respectively.


None

TEL LC

CR

RELAY CONTROL

SEQUENCE CKT.

LINE TEST START

CON

FCG

LTST

CR DETECT CKT.

-48 V/G DETECT CKT.

CON RESULT OK/NG

GT RESULT

FCG RESULT

LTST (PH-M16)LTST

LTST

CON

CON

FCG-48V

G


Revision 4.0

TSTLCM0-03Business, Hotel

r [b] are

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number STN [a] TO [b]: Station Number

a: First Station Number b: Last Station Number

When only one station number is to be tested, the first station number [a] and the last station numbethe same.

GT: Ground Test (OK/NG) FCG: False Cross and Ground Test (OK/NG)CON: Continuity Test (OK/NG)

These parameters are automatically displayed after the test has ended.

Test Station Line

TN:1

STN:3111 TO 3113

GT:OK FCG:OK CON: OK


TTLC CM0-03

Business, Hotel

siness, tel

TTLC Test Trunk Line Connection


2. Function

This command is used to test the operation of trunk routes (OGT, BWT, etc.), using the LTST.

3. Precautions

• The following must be assigned before using this command.

a. Assignment of Individual Trunk Access service.

b. Assignment of Trunk Test data for this command. The ATTD command is used to set the Trunk Test Data.

• If the designated trunk is not assigned, its test result is not printed out.

• This trunk test can only be used for trunks which can receive PB. (The LTST can only send PB signal.)

• Other commands cannot execute during waiting for start time on TYPE = 2.


None


Revision 4.0

TTLCCM0-03Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• For Immediate Execution

TYPE: Test Type (Enter 1.)1: Immediate Execution

RT: [a]TO[b]: Range of Routesa: Start Route Number b: Last Route Number

TK: [c]TO[d]: Range of Trunksc: Start Trunk Numberd: Last Trunk Number

RESULT [e] to [f]: Tested Route & Trunke: RT at the end of testf: TK at the end of test

• For Schedule Execution

TYPE: Test Type (Enter 2.)2: Schedule Execution

RT: [a]TO[b]: Range of Routesa: First Route Number b: Last Route Number

TYPE:1 RT:1 TO:10

TK:1 TO:2 RESULT: 2-1

CONNECTION OK!

While the test is in progress, the Route and Trunk Number of the trunk which was last tested are dis-played.

TYPE:2 RT:1 TO:10 TK:1 TO:2RESULT: 2-1

CONNECTION OK!START TIME: xx:xx PRESENT TIME: xx:xxREADY?

While the test is in progress, the Route and Trunk Number of the trunk which was last tested are dis-played.

START TIME initially displays the same time as PRESENT TIME.Change the START TIME as needed. (WAITING flashes until the clock reaches the specified start time.)


TTLC CM0-03

Business, Hotel

.

TK: [c]TO[d]: Range of Trunksc: First Trunk Number d: Last Trunk Number

RESULT [e] to [f]: Tested Route & Trunke: RT at the end of testf: TK at the end of test

CONNECTION OK!: Processing completed correctly.

CONNECTION NG (XX): Processing is aborted. XX indicates aborted status.Refer to the following table.

TRUNKS IS NOT ASSIGNED: Designated trunk is not assigned.

LTST PKG ERROR:LTST Circuit Card is not mounted, MB switch is ON or LTST is not active.

Note: One of the followings message is printed out when the status code is “FF”in CONNECTION NG

PROCESSING ERROR: Test processing has failed. • Trunk test was not executed • Internal parameter error• Last order is being executed.

CODE (XX) MEANING

01 Test function of subscriber is invalid.

02 Designated route number is incorrect.

03 Designated trunk number is incorrect.

04 Designated trunk is busy.

05 SENDER is busy.

06 Charging is impossible

07 Origination is restricted.

08 REGISTER is busy.

09 Designated trunk number is incorrect for Hooking.

10 Designated trunk is busy for Hooking.

11 Inter-digit is time over at sending dial code.

15 Test processing error has occurred.

FF Note

Contents output through printer. (Refer to message following and printed out message.)

The test result of the trunk dis-played in parame-ter RESULT is automatically dis-played.


Revision 4.0

TTLCCM0-03Business, Hotel

LTST NOT ASSIGNED: LTST is not assigned.

LTST PKG BUSY: LTST is being used in another test.

TRUNK BUSY/MAKE BUSY: Designated trunk has been made busy, and test cannot be executed.

LTST MAKE BUSY:STA connected to LTST has been made busy.

SENDING HOWLER:Howler is being sent.

LIST BUSY: STA connected to LTST is busy. NO RESPONSE:

There is no response. • Time out with no answer.• Time out because test tone response has not been assigned in ATTD.

DIAL FORMAT NG: Dialing format is incorrect.

RECEIVE RBT: Ring Back Tone is received. (Illegal response)

RECEIVE TEST TONE: Test Tone is received. (Illegal response)

RECEIVE DIAL TONE: Dial Tone is received. (Illegal response)

PB IS SENDING:PB signal is being sent.• LTST is busy under illegal condition.

TEST DATA NOT ASSIGNED:Trunk test data for the route is not assigned in the ATTD command.

ROUTE NOT ASSIGNED:Designated route is not assigned.


XATM CM0-10

Business, Hotel

XATM X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis


2. Function

This command is used for readout of the Cell Traffic information on the following circuit cards:

• PA-SC40 (CLAD)

• PA-SC41 (CIFP)

3. Precautions


• 6100 version software or later must be installed in the system.

• The ATM module must be connected with the PBX.


AIOC


Revision 4.0

XATMCM0-10Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• When the CLAD circuit card is mounted on the designated LENS:

1: CELL MonitoringAssign “1” only.

LENS: Line Equipment NumberXX X XX

Group Number (00-23)Unit Number (0-3)Module Group Number (00-07)

PKG - TYPE: “CLAD” or “CIFP” is displayed according to LENS information.

Read number of send cell:“Yes”: Reads out the number of send cell.

Read number of receive cell:“Yes”: Reads out the number of received cell.

Read error counter:“Yes”: Reads out the error counter. Designation of VPI and VCI is required.

VPI: Virtual Path IdentifierVCI: Virtual Circuit Identifier

X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis

1 :CELL Monitoring

LENS :XXXXX

PKG-TYPE : CLAD

Read number of send cell : YES /NORead number of receive cell : YES /NORead error counter : YES /NO

VPI :XXXVCI :XXXX

READY? Y

Diagnosis Results Indication Area

Number of send cell.: XXXXXXXXXXNumber of receive cell.: XXXXXXXXXXNumber of scrap cell by celldetection of insert mistake.: XXXXXNumber of scrap cell by SN missingdetection.: XXXXXNumber of scrap cell by SNP error.: XXXXXNumber of SN correction cell by SNPerror.: XXXXX


XATM CM0-10

Business, Hotel

• When the CIFP circuit card is mounted on the designated LENS:

1: CELL MonitoringAssign “1” only.

LENS: Line Equipment NumberXX X XX

Group Number (00-23)Unit Number (0-3)Module Group Number (00-07)

PKG - TYPE: “CLAD” or “CIFP” is displayed according to LENS information.

Read number of send cell:“Yes”: Reads out the number of send cell.

Read number of receive cell:“Yes”: Reads out the number of received cell.

Read error counter:“Yes”: Reads out the error counter.

X-RAY ATM Module Diagnosis

1 :CELL Monitoring

LENS :XXXXX

PKG-TYPE : CIFP

Read number of send cell : YES /NORead number of receive cell : YES /NORead error counter : YES /NO

READY? Y

Diagnosis Results Indication Area

Number of send cell.(circuit → ATM Module): XXXXXXXXXXNumber of receive cell.(ATM Module → circuit): XXXXXXXXXXNumber of undefine cell fromcommunication line.: XXXXXNumber of undefine cell from ATMModule.: XXXXXNumber of mistaken cell fromcommunication line.; XXXXXNumber of mistaken cell from ATMModule:: XXXXX


Revision 4.0

XHFCCM0-10Business, Hotel

e HFC

displayed

floppy

ion on

drive

inishes,

siness, tel

XHFC X-ray HFC [for IMG (ICS), MMG (ICS), and UMG (ICS)]


2. Function

This command is used to execute the following diagnoses:

• HFC Card Diagnosis

By executing a read/write check of the RAM and ROM sum check, etc., this command diagnoses thcard for its normality.

If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command causes its detailed data to be on the MAT screen and printed out by the printer.

• Hard Disk Diagnosis

By executing a read/write check on the files on the hard disk of the PBX, this command diagnoses thedisk drive for its normality.

If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command displays and prints the informatthe fault logical drive and the number of faulty sectors.

• Floppy Disk Drive Diagnosis

By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy diskfor its normality.

If the cleaning has not finished normally, a diagnosis error is displayed or printed.

3. Precautions

• While a diagnosis is being executed, a message “In Execution” is displayed. When the diagnosis fthe diagnosis result is displayed.


None


XHFC CM0-10

Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

• HFC card diagnosis

FUNCTION: Enter 1: Diagnosis of PKGHFC (0/1): 0. HFC 0

1. HFC1

• Hard disk diagnosis

FUNCTION: Enter 2: Diagnosis of HDAREA (1-3): 1. All Files

2. Program File 03. Program File 1

HFC: 0. HFC01. HJFC1

X-Ray of HFC

Function: 1. Diagnosis of PKG Execute the following diagnosis:2. Diagnosis of HD * RAM read/write check3. Diagnosis of FDD * ROM sum check

* MINF, IOPP loop-back testHFC: 0. HFC0 /1. HFC1

Ready?: Yes /No

Diagnosis Process of HFC Package: Executing

X-Ray HFCFunction: 1. Diagnosis of PKG

2. Diagnosis of HD Execute read test for hard disk file.3. Diagnosis of FDD

Area: 1. All Files Execute read test for all files.2. Program Files

HFC: 0. HFC0 /1. HFC1

Ready?: Yes /NoDiagnosis Process of Hard Disk: Executing

Diagnosis Process of HFC Package: Executing


Revision 4.0

XHFCCM0-10Business, Hotel

• Floppy disk drive diagnosis

FUNCTION: Enter 1: Diagnosis of PKGHFC (0/1): 0. HFC 0

1. HFC1

X-Ray HFC

Function: 1. Diagnosis of PKG2. Diagnosis of HD3. Diagnosis of FDD Execute cleaning of floppy disk drive.

HFC: 0. HFC0 /1. HFC1

Ready?: Yes /No

Diagnosis Process of Floppy Disk Drive

Please insert cleaning floppy disk. Set OK? Yes/No


XHFD CM0-10

Business, Hotel

e hard

e faulty

drive

sis, thise printer.

inishes,

siness, tel

XHFD X-RAY HD or FDD [for IMG x, IMGxh, and IMGdxh ]


2. Function

This command is used to execute the following diagnoses.

• Hard Disk Diagnosis

By executing read/write check on the files in the hard disk of the PBX, this command diagnoses thdisk for its normality.

If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command causes the information of thlogical drive and the number of faulty sectors to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by the print-er.

• Floppy Disk Drive Diagnosis

By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy diskfor its normality.

If the cleaning has not finished normally, a diagnosis error has been found as a result of the diagnocommand causes a diagnosis error message to be displayed on the MAT screen and printed out by th

3. Precautions

• While a diagnosis is being executed, a message “In Execution” is displayed. When the diagnosis fthe diagnosis result is displayed.


None


Revision 4.0

XHFDCM0-10Business, Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

a. Hard disk diagnosis

FUNCTION: Enter 1: Diagnosis of HDAREA: Area Designation (1-2)

1: All Files2: Program File

SYSTEM: zero one

b. Floppy disk drive diagnosis

FUNCTION: Enter 2: Diagnosis of FDDSYSTEM: zero one

X-ray HD or FDD

Function: 1. Diagnosis of HD Execute read test for hard disk file.2. Diagnosis of FDD

Area: 1. All Files 2. Program File

System: zero one

Ready?: Yes /No

Diagnosis Process of Hard Disk: Executing

X-ray HD or FDD Diagnosis

Function: 1. Diagnosis of HD 2. Diagnosis of FDD Execute cleaning of floppy disk drive.

System: zero one

Ready?: Yes/No

Diagnosis Process of Floppy Disk Drive: Executing


le

CHAPTER 3 HOTEL SYSTEM ASSIGNMENT COMMANDS

The following Assignment Commands are used for the Hotel/Motel System only. Commands which are applicabto other systems as well as to the Hotel System are documented in Chapter 2.


Revision 4.0

AACLCM3-01Hotel

nt Classe Data

nd.

tel
AACL Administration Station Class Change

2. Function

This command is used to change the data assigned to an Administration Station: Telephone Equipme(TEC), Service Feature Class (SFC), Route Restriction Class (RSC), ROOM CLASS and Floor Servic(Annex (ANX),Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)).

3. Precautions

• This command is used for Hotel system only.

• Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 1-4, 12-15, 18 and 23 may be assigned via this comma

• Floor Service Data is displayed only in the case of ASYD, SYS1 INDEX 165, b7 = 1(Floor Service is provided).


Assignment: AASTDeletion: RAST Display: RAST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LHEN, LHST

-Parameter SFC- Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFCList up: LRTC

-Parameter RSC- Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSC List up: LRTC


AACL CM3-01

Hotel

) can-e as the

.

5. Entry Procedure

• For general Administration Station:

a. Enter data for parameters TN through SFC.

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1: DP (10 pps)2: PB 3: DP/PB Note 4: DP (20 pps)5-8: Not used 9: House Phone10-11: Not used 12: Dterm

13: Data Terminal (via Dterm) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line 16: Not used 17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal24-31: Not used

Note: lf stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TEC = 3 (DP/PBnot be assigned. Assign either “PB” in such case. The data used for the class must be the samdata used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NXT: NEXT

Entering Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS [See (b)].

TN:1 STN:2000

TEC:2 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? This is displayed when the data for pa-rameters up to SFC have been entered


Revision 4.0

AACLCM3-01Hotel

6. Change the data of ROOM CLASS.

ROOMCLASS: Room Class (0-15)

0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm)1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma)3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment)4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (Dterm and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment)7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8: Not used9: House Phone-Admin 10-15: Not used

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

WRT?

TN and STN entered in (a) areautomatically displayed.


AACL CM3-01

Hotel

) can-e as the

• When Floor Service is provided:


TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB3: DP/PB Note4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used9: House Phone 10-11: Not used12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal (via Dterm) 14: Hot Line 15: CAS Line16: Not used17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal24-31: Not used

Note: If stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TEC = 3 (DP/PBnot be assigned. Assign either “PB” in such case. The data used for the class must be the samdata used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).


Entering Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)].

TN:1 STN:2000

TEC:2 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? This is displayed when the datafor parameters up to SFC havebeen entered.


Revision 4.0

AACLCM3-01Hotel

b. Change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.


0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (Dterm and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment)7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8: Not used9: House Phone-Admin 10-15: Not used

ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground


FLR: Floor (1-127)

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

ANX:0 G:0 FLR:1

WRT?

The TN and STN entered in (a)are automatically displayed.


AANP CM3-01

Hotel

the ser-

t station

ata need

ed. (0/

signed.

ing plan

ice”

tel
AANP Assignment of Administration Numbering Plan Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determinevice which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation)

3. Precautions


• If the Guest and Admin. Numbering are separated, use the AGNP command for assigning the Guesnumbering plan.


Note: This type of assignment will only function correctly is ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assign1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for All Tenants)

• When changing any of the numbering plan data, the old data must be deleted before new data is as

• When a first digit of a particular numbering plan is to be deleted and the first DC (Digit Code) is already inuse (i.e. Station Number) the Station Numbering data must first be deleted before the new numberdata can be assigned via this command.

• When entering the Connection Status Index (Cl) information, “Normal,” “Hooking,” or “Busy Servmust be designated by entering of the character N, H, or B.


List up: LAPD


Revision 4.0

AANPCM3-01Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number 1st DC: 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #)CI: Connection Status Index

N: Normal ServiceH: Hooking Service B: Busy Service

NND: Number of necessary Digits (1-6)BLF: Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT

0: Out of Service 1: Inservice

Note: BLF is not applicable to Hotel Attendant Console.

Assignment of Area Code Numbering Plan Data

TN:1 1st DC:5

CI:H

NND:2 BLF:0

WRT?


AASN CM3-01

Hotel

ssigned

the key.

tel
AASN Administration Station Number Change

2. Function

This command is used to change a currently assigned Administration Station Number.

3. Precautions


• Input a number which is not currently assigned. If a station number currently being used is to be aas a new number, delete the station first via the RAST command.

• When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed during assignment, confirmLENS location of the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) accommodating the station, then press the ENTER


Assignment: AASTDeletion: RAST Display: RAST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LHEN, LHST

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Old Station Number NEW STN: New Station Number

TN:1 STN:2500 NEW STN:3500

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AASPCM3-01Hotel

Special

st num-

de and

(NND)

ND) is

Code

er of

ASPF

S com-

tel
AASP Assignment of Administration Special Access Code

2. Function

This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when aAccess code or Trunk Access code has been dialed for the Administration Station.

Note: If the numbering plan for Admi. and Guest is common, this command is used to assign the guebering plan as well. (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 160 b6 = 1).

3. Precautions




• Unused levels should not to be assigned.

• When assigning speed calling (SRV = SSC, SID = 15), the total number of digits of the access coabbreviated digit code equals the NND.i.e.: ACC for speed calling = 1 digit Abbreviated digit codes = 00-99 (2 digits)

Total Number of Necessary Digits (NND) is 3.

• When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum necessary digits is 5.

• When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 17), the maximum necessary digits (N8.

• When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account(SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum necessary digits NND is 15.


• After assigning Floor Service (SRV = SSC, SID = 56), Floor Service data must be assigned in thecommand. When Floor Service data is to be deleted, the number must first be deleted in the ASPF.

• After assigning Split Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 57), Split Access data must be assigned in the ASPmand. When Split Access data is to be deleted, the number must first be deleted in the ASPS.


AASP CM3-01

Hotel


List up: LASP


-Parameter EQP-Assignment: AAEDDeletion: AAEDDisplay: AAEDList up: LPAE

5. Entry Procedure

• For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56, and 57)

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index:

N: Normal H: HookingB: Busy

SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.)SSC: Service Code

NND: Number of Necessary Digit (1-15)SID: Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56, 57.)

1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call)3: Call Back; Entry4: Executive Right of Way5: Call Waiting-Originating6: Call Back; Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group 8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

(for C.O./Tie); Entry9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls

(for C.O./Tie); Cancel

TN:1 ACC:10

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:15 NND:2

WRT?

The NDD parameter is displayed only when re-quired by SID. When displayed, enter the data.


Revision 4.0

AASPCM3-01Hotel

);

);

./

./

10: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./TieEntry

11: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./TieCancel

12: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.OTie); Entry

13: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.OTie); Cancel

14: Speed Calling-Station; Entry 15: Speed Calling-System; Access 16: TAS Answer 17: Individual Trunk Access18: Not used 19: OG Trunk Queuing; Entry20: OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel 21: Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access 22-27: Not used28: Call Forwarding-I’m Here; Entry29: Call Forwarding-I’m Here; Cancel30-34: Not used35: Call Pickup Direct 36: Hotel Service37: Priority Call 138: Priority Call 239: Priority Call 340: Priority Paging41: Account Code Dial42: Authorization Code/Forced Account Code/Dial Access to Lock43: Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office)44: Last Number Call 45: Not used 46: Faulty Trunk Report47: Not used 48: Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry49: Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel 50: Group Announcement; Entry51: Group Announcement; Cancel 52: Do Not Disturb; Entry (via Guest Station) 53: Do Not Disturb; Cancel (via Guest Station)54: Not used 55: Not used 56: Floor Service57: Split Access 58-59: Not used 60: Attendant Manual Override 61: Call Park Access Code 62: Call Park Local Retrieval Code63: Call Park Remote Retrieval Code


AASP CM3-01

Hotel

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 36: (Hotel/Motel Service)

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index: (Enter N.)

N: Normal SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.)

SSC: Service CodeSID: Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 36.)36: Hotel ServiceSTATE: Hotel Service Code

1: To be cleaned without ID Code2: Cleaning Completed without ID Code3: Ready for Occupancy without ID Code 4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code5-8: Not used 9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-110: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-211: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-312: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-413: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-514: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-615: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-716: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code20: Use Not Allowed with ID 21-24: Not used25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-126: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-227: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-328: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-429: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-530: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-631: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-732: Not used33: Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code 34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling35-37: Not used

TN:1 ACC:20CI:N SRV:SSCSID:36 STATE:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AASPCM3-01Hotel

3 = 0)

= 1)

38: Automatic Wake-Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop39: Automatic Wake-Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel 40: Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT)41: Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT) 42: Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization43: Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval 44: Direct Data Entry-Station (via Guest Station)45: Alert Service Start (Special Admin. Station)46: Alert Service Stop (Special Admin. Station) 47: Not used48: 2nd Wake-Up Call (Automatic) Set49: 2nd Wake-Up Call (Semi-Automatic) Set50: 2nd Wake-Up Call Cancel51: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 52: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 53: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 54: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 55: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 56-62: Not used63: Dummy Number

Note: STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b

Note: STATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service)

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits) CI: Connection Status Index: (Enter N.)


SSC: Service CodeSID: Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 56.)

56: Floor ServiceNO: Kind of Assignment Number (0-15)

Note: This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPF.

TN:1 ACC:30

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:56NO:1


AASP CM3-01

Hotel

mutual

to be

sifts, orn or

minis-

s.

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 57 (Split Access):

a. Enter the data for parameter TN through SID.


N: NormalSRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.)

SSC: Service CodeSID: Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter 57.)

57: Split Access

(a) Enter the data for parameters NO and KIND.

NO: This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned forAccess. This parameter serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.

Note: This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPS.

KIND(0-3): This parameter specifies the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data

assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated.Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate tons, rests, and/or they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as AdministratioGuest.0: Class: assign this if the access code is to be shared between Guest and A

tration with no correspondence to TN, RSC, or SFC. 1: TN: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified TNs. 2: RSC: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified RSC3: SFC: assign this if the access code is to be shared among specified SFCs.

TN:1 ACC: 30

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:57

NO:1 KIND:0

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AASPCM3-01Hotel

• For SSCA (Other than SID = 56):

TN: Tenant Number ACC: Access Code (1-6 digits) CI: Connection Status Index:


SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.)SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary)

SIDA: Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.) 1-40: Not used41: Voice Call42: Message Reminder (Dterm)43-45: Not used46: Line Load Control; Entry 47: Line Load Control; Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel52: Not used53: Boss-Secretary Override54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Set (for Admin)55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Cancel (for Admin)56: Guest/Admin. Service 57-65: Not used66: Multi Channel Recording (REC)67: Not used68: Multi Channel Recording (REPLAY)69-84: Not used85: Dial Access to Unlock86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry88: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Entry89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used96: Follow Me Phone 97: Call Hold Conference98-105: Not used106: Call Return107-255: Not used

TN:1 ACC:10

CI:N SRV:SSCA

SID:46

WRT?


AASP CM3-01

Hotel

• For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin. Service):

TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index:

N: Normal H: HookingB: Busy Service

SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary)

SIDA: Service Feature Index A: (Enter 56.)56: (Guest/Admin. Service)

PNO (1-15): This Parameter specifies the Admin./Guest Numbering Parameter Classification

Note: For this parameter, enter the PNO assigned by command AOSP.

A/G: Admin./Guest0: Admin.1: Guest

• For SRV = OGC, PAGA, PAGC:

TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits) CI: Connection Status Index:

N: Normal H: Hooking

SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA or PAGC.) OGC: Outgoing Call PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel

RT: Route Number

TN:1 ACC:15CI:N SRV:SSCASIDA:56 PN0:1 A/G:A

WRT?

TN:1 ACC:9

CI:N SRV:OGC

RT:2


Revision 4.0

AASPCM3-01Hotel

-

• For SRV = OGCA:



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance)

CNT: Number of advanced routeRT: Route Number

• For SRV = LCR, LCRS:



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.)LCR: Least Cost Route Selection (Flag Route) LCRS: Register Sender LCR

RT: Route Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone (0/1)

0: – 1: Second Dial Tone

AH: Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization code)

TN:1 ACC:25

CI:N SRV:OGCA

CNT:3 3RT:5

WRT?

Following entry of CNT, enter Route No. of the alter-nate routes one after another. (If RETURN key ispressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead ofRT increases by one and then next RT No. can be en-tered.)

“WRT?” appears on the display after specifying all alternative routes in the preceding parameter.

TN:1 ACC:15

CI:N SRV:LCR

RT:2 2nd DT:1 AH:0


AASP CM3-01

Hotel

• For SRV = UNIF:



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF.)UNIF: Office Termination

SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access code

• For SRV = ANNC:


N: Normal Service H: Hooking Service B: Busy Service

SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.)ANNC: Announcement Service

EQP: Announcement Equipment Number (2-15)

TN:1 ACC:40

CI:N SRV:UNIF

SKIP:0

TN:1 ACC:19

CI:N SRV:ANNC

EQP:3


Revision 4.0

AASTCM3-01Hotel

display

nd.

riction.

s Com-

uits on

thatber

INDEX

tel
AAST Assignment of Administration Station Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign Administration Station data. The RAST command is used to delete orthis data. The DSTN command can be used to display this data as well.

3. Precautions


• Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 1-4, 12-15, 18 and 23 may be assigned via this comma

• The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route RestData Command (ARSC). RSC = 0 cannot be assigned here because it is reserved for an attendant

• The Service Feature Class (SFC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Clasmand (ASFC).

• If the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) on which the station is assigned is made busy, all other station circthat circuit card will also be made busy.

• When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message appears during station assignment, confirmthe circuit card is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Num(LEN) assigned for the station. Press the ENTER key after confirming the location.

• When assigning the stations for Floor Service, the data must have been assigned as “ASYD, SYSl, 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided)”.


Deletion: RAST Display: RAST, DLEN, DSTNChange: AACL, AASN (Part) List up: LHEN, LHST

-Parameter SFC-Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFCList up: LRTC

-Parameter RSC-Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSCList up: LRTC


AAST CM3-01

Hotel

) can-e as the

-Make Busy- Assignment: MBLE, MBST(Busy/Idle) Display: DMBL, DMBS

5. Entry Procedure

• For general Administration station:


TN: Tenant Equipment NumberSTN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1: DP (10 pps)2: PB3: DP/PB Note4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal (via Dterm) 14: Hot Line15: CAS Line16: Not used17: Not used 18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal24-31: Not used


Enter Y and enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS. (See (b)).


TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:2 RSC:1SFC:1

NXT? NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters upto SFC have been entered.


Revision 4.0

AASTCM3-01Hotel

b. Enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS.


0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment) 4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (Dterm and External Equipment)6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS)8-15: Not used

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

WRT?

The TN and STN entered in (a) are automaticallydisplayed.


AAST CM3-01

Hotel

) can-e as the


a. Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1: DP (10 pps)2: PB 3: DP/PB Note4: DP (20 pps)5-8: Not used9: House Phone10-11: Not used12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal (via Dterm)14: Hot Line15: CAS Line16: Not used17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance19-22: Not used23: ISDN Terminal24-31: Not used


Enter Y, and enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b)].


TN:1 STN:3333

LENS:001010

TEC:2 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT?NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters upto SFC have been entered.


Revision 4.0

AASTCM3-01Hotel

b. Enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR.


0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm)1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma)3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment)4: Not used5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (Dterm and External Equipment) 6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment)7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS) 8-15: Not used


0: Ground1: Underground

FLR: Floor (1-127)

TN:1 STN:3333

ROOM CLASS:0ANX:0 G:0 FLR:10

WRT?

The TN and the STN entered in (a) are automaticallydisplayed.


ADLI CM3-02

Hotel

Trunk

ADLI Assignment DLINT Package


2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the LENS information for Data Link Interface (DLINT) in the case of Fixed Connection.

3. Precautions


• Data Link Interface Trunk is a dummy trunk.

• The Route Number of Data Link Interface Trunk is 919.


List up: LTRK

5. Entry Procedure

RT: Intra-office Route Number (919)TK: Trunk Number (1-32) LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)

Assignment DLINT Package

RT:919 TK:1LENS:003080

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ADNRCM3-02Hotel

to dis-

restric-

will

period

e input

tel
ADNR Assignment of Day/Night Connection Restriction

2. Function

This command is used to assign the specific Start and End times pertaining to Day/Night Restriction orplay the Day/Night Restriction classification of a specific time.

3. Precautions


• The ARSC command may be affected, if the day and night tables are used.

• Restriction is assigned in military time (24 hour cycle) in units of 10 minutes.

• End time must not be earlier than Start time. If the same time is specified for both Start and End, thetion period will be 10 minutes.

• When Data “1” is assigned for bit 6 of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 170, Day/Night Connection Restriction take place regardless of ATTCON night mode changeover.

• Because midnight is assigned as hour 00:00, Night assignment should be input twice: once for thebefore midnight, and once for the period after midnight. Refer to the example below for clarification:

Example: If the time period from 9:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. is to be assigned as Night, the assignment must bas follows: 00:00-07:00 = Night 07:10-20:50 = Day21:00-23:50 = Night


None

5. Entry Procedure

• When data are assigned anew:

a. Set “ASSIGN” mode.

ASSIGN/ CHECK: Enter A when entering the data.

ASSIGN/CHECK:A


ADNR CM3-02

Hotel

nection

me-

b. Enter the data for each parameter.

TN: Tenant Number D/N: Day/Night Mode


RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)

Note: Remember that RSC11 through 15 are used in the “Same Special Code Time Zone ConChange” service.

START TIME: Restriction Start Time END TIME: Restriction End Time

• For checking (displaying) the data:

a. Set “CHECK” mode.

ASSIGN/ CHECK: Enter “C” when causing the data to be checked (displayed).

b. Enter the data necessary for displaying the data.

TN: Tenant Number RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15)CHECK TIME: The specific time to be checked when displaying D/N Restriction data. CLASS: The Restriction Class (Day or Night) of the time specified in the CHECK TIME para

ter.

TN:1 D/N:D RSC:1 START TIME:0800 END TIME: 1900

WRT?

ASSIGN/CHECK:C

TN: 1 RSC: 1

CHECK TIME: 1200

CLASS: DAY Day or Night is displayed.


Revision 4.0

ADSSCM3-02Hotel

ttendant

siness

DSS pa-

tel
ADSS Assignment of Direct Station Select Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the called number data corresponding to the Hotel AConsole’s Direct Station Select (DSS) keys.

3. Precautions

• This command is used for Hotel System only.

• The DSS function is only valid for the Hotel/Motel Attendant Console and may not be assigned for BuSystem Consoles.

• DSS Function Key Numbers are 1 to 10. These ten numbers correspond to values 1 to 10 for the rameter of this command.

• This feature must be enabled in ASYD SYS1 INDEX 161 BIT5 in order to operate.


List up: LDSS

5. Entry Procedure

ATN: Attendant NumberDSS: DSS Key Number (1-10) DC: Called Number (1-14 digits)

Assignment of Direct Station Select Data

ATN: 1 DSS:1

DC: 3000

WRT?


AFXC CM3-02

Hotel

e Trunk

LI.

(Fixed

tel
AFXC Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the data path between the Data Link Interfac(DLINT) and Dterm pertaining to Fixed Connection.

3. Precautions


• When assigning data by this command, the data must have already been assigned by command AD

• When assigning data by this command, the data must be assigned to ASYD SYS1 INDEX 60 b4 = 1Connection Service is provided).

• The LEVEL of LENS-B must be 4-7.

• LENS-A should not be smaller than LENS-B.

• The message of EXECUTING is displayed while a fixed connection processing is being executed.


List up: LFXC

5. Entry Procedure

LENS-A: Line Equipment Number of Data Link Interface TrunkLENS-B: Line Equipment Number of Dterm EAD-A: Always assign data “00”. EAD-B: Always assign data “00”.

Assignment of Fixed Connection Data for Hotel System

LENS-A:003083 EAD-A:00

LENS-B:013084 EAD-B:00

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AGCLCM3-01Hotel

EC), Ser-(Annex

pro-

tel
AGCL Guest Station Class Change

2. Function

This command is used to change the data assigned to a Guest Station: Telephone Equipment Class (Tvice Feature Class (SFC), Route Restriction Class (RSC), ROOM CLASS and Floor Service Data (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)).

3. Precautions

• Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 5-8, and 10 may be assigned via this command.

• Floor Service Data is displayed only in the case of ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165 b7 = 1 (Floor Service isvided).


Assignment: AGSTDeletion: RGSTDisplay: RGST, DLEN, DSTNList up: LHEN, LHST

-Parameter SFC-Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFC List up: LRTC

-Parameter RSC-Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSCList up: LRTC

5. Entry Procedure

• For general Guest Station:



TN:1 STN:2000

TEC:2 RSC:1 SFC:1



AGCL CM3-01

Hotel

C = 7e same

LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1-4: Not used5: DP (10 pps)6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps)9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used

Note: When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TE(DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign “PB” in such case. The data used for the class must be thas the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).

RSC: Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. SFC: Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NXT: NEXT

Enter Y, and change the data of ROOM CLASS. [See (b)].

b. Change the data of ROOM CLASS.

ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15) Example: 1: Single Room2: Twin Room

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS: 1

WRT?



Revision 4.0

AGCLCM3-01Hotel

C = 7e same



TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1-4: Not used5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB7: DP/PB Note8: DP (20 pps)9: Not used 10: House Phone 11-31: Not used

Note: When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TE(DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign “PB” in such case. The data used for the class must be thas the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).

RSC: Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC. SFC: Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC. NXT: NEXT

Enter “Y”, and change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)].

TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:O01010

TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1 NXT? NXT? is displayed when the data for parameters

up to SFC have been entered.


AGCL CM3-01

Hotel

b. Change the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.

ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15)Example: 1: Single Room2: Twin Room

ANX: Annex (0-3)G: Ground/Underground

0: Ground1: Underground

FLR: Floor (1-127)

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1ANX:O G:O FLR:1

WRT?



Revision 4.0

AGNPCM3-01Hotel

the ser-

i. Num-ommon,

ata need

ed. (0/

ice”

ave al-st DC by num-d.

tel
AGNP Assignment of Guest Numbering Plan Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display the minimum number of digits needed to determinevice which is required according to the first digit received (pre-translation).

3. Precautions


• This command is only used to set up the Numbering Plan for Guest Stations, if the Guest and Admbering Plans are separated. To Assign Admi. Stations or Guest Stations if the Numbering Plans are cAANP is used.


Note: This type of assignment will only function correctly if ASYD SYS-1, Index 92 is properly assign1 = Separate Number Plan per Tenant/Common Number Plan for all Tenants)

• Previous data should be deleted prior to changing the numbering plan data.

• When entering the Connection Status Index (CI) information, “Normal”, “Hooking”, or “Busy Servmust be designated by entry of the character N, H, or B.

• When deleting a 1st Digit Code (lST DC) pertaining to station numbers, access codes, etc. which hready been assigned in the system, delete the data pertaining to the number before deleting the 1this command. For example, if “7” is the 1st DC of Guest station numbers of Level “7”, those stationbers must first be deleted by the RGST command before the 1st DC can be deleted in this comman


List up: LGNP


AGNP CM3-01

Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant Number 1ST DC: 1st Digit Code (0-9, *, #) CI: Connection Status Index:

N: Normal Service H: Hooking ServiceB: Busy Service

NND: Number of Necessary Digits (1-6)BLF: Busy Lamp Field Display Activated on ATT

0: Out of Service 1: In service

Note: BLF is not applicable to Hotel/Motel Attendant Console.

TN:1 1ST DC:1 CI:N NND:3 BLF:O

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AGSNCM3-01Hotel

ssigned

the key.

tel
AGSN Guest Station Number Change

2. Function

This command is used to change a currently assigned Guest Station Number.

3. Precautions


• Input a number which is not currently assigned. If a station number currently being used is to be aas a new number, delete the station first via the RGST command.

• When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed during assignment, confirmLENS location of the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) accommodating the station, then press the ENTER


Assignment: AGSTDeletion: RGST Display: RGST, DLEN, DSTN List up: LHEN, LHST

5. Entry Procedure

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Old Station Number NEW STN: New Station Number

Guest Station Number Change

TN: 1 STN:4000NEW STN:5000

WRT?


AGSP CM3-01

Hotel

Special

e num-

de and

essary

digits

Code

er of

ASPF

S com-and.

tel
AGSP Assignment of Guest Special Access Code

2. Function

This command is used to determine the Kind of Service to be executed or the route to be used when aAccess code or Trunk Access code has been dialed for the Guest Station.

This command is only used when the data in ASYD SYS1 INDEX 160 b1 is assigned as “1” for separatbering plan for Admi. and Guest.

3. Precautions




• Unused levels should not to be assigned.

• When assigning speed calling (SRV = SSC, SID = 15), the total number of digits of the access coabbreviated digit code equals the NND.

• i.e.: ACC for speed calling = 1 digit Abbreviated digit codes = 00-99 (2 digits)

• Total Number of Necessary Digits (NND) is 3

• When assigning Attendant Manual Override (SRV = SSC, SID = 60), the maximum number of necdigits (NND) is 5.

• When assigning Individual Trunk Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 17), the maximum number of necessary(NND) is 8.

• When assigning Account Code Dial (SRV = SSC, SID = 41) or Authorization Code/Forced Account(SRV = SSC, SID = 42), the maximum number of necessary digits NND is 15.


• After assigning Floor Service (SRV = SSC, SID = 56), Floor Service data must be assigned in thecommand. When Floor Service data is to be deleted, the number must first be deleted in the ASPF.

• After assigning Split Access (SRV = SSC, SID = 57), Split Access data must be assigned in the ASPmand. When Split Access data is to be deleted the number must first be deleted in the ASPS comm


Revision 4.0

AGSPCM3-01Hotel

;

-


List up: LGSP


-Parameter EQP-Assignment: AAED Deletion: AAED Display: AAED List up: LPAE

5. Entry Procedure

• For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56 and 57):




NND: Number of Necessary Digit (1-15)SID: Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56, 57.)

1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call)3: Call Back; Entry4: Executive Right of Way5: Call Waiting-Originating6: Call Back; Cancel 7: Call Pickup Group8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie)

Entry9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Can

cel

TN:1 ACC:10

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:15 NDD:2

WRT?

This parameter is displayed only when required bySID. When it displays, enter the data.


AGSP CM3-01

Hotel

);

);

./

./

10: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./TieEntry

11: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./TieCancel

12: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.OTie); Entry

13: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.OTie); Cancel

14: Speed Calling-Station; Entry15: Speed Calling-System; Access16: TAS Answer17: Individual Trunk Access18: Not used19: OG Trunk Queuing; Entry 20: OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel21: Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access22-34: Not used 35: Call Pickup Direct36: Hotel/Motel Service 37: Priority Call 1 38: Priority Call 239: Priority Call 3 40: Priority Paging 41: Account Code Dial 42: Authorization Code/Forced Account Code43: Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) 44: Last Number Call45: Not used46: Faulty Trunk Report 47: Not used48: Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry 49: Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel50: Group Announcement; Entry 51: Group Announcement; Cancel52: Do Not Disturb; Entry 53: Do Not Disturb; Cancel54: Not used55: Not used56: Floor Service 57: Split Access58-59: Not used 60: Attendant Manual Override61: Call Park Access Code62: Call Park Local Retrieval Code 63: Call Park Remote Retrieval Code


Revision 4.0

AGSPCM3-01Hotel

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 36 (Hotel Service):

TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits) CI: Connection Status Index: (Enter N.)


SSC: Service CodeSID: Service Feature Index: (Enter 36.)

36: Hotel ServiceSTATE: Hotel Service Code (SID = 36)

1: To be cleaned without ID Code2: Cleaning Completed without No ID Code3: Ready for Occupancy without No ID Code4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code 5-8: Not used9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-1 10: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-2 11: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-3 12: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-4 13: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-5 14: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-6 15: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-7 16: Not used17: To be cleaned with ID Code18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code 19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code20: Use Not Allowed with ID Code21-24: Not used 25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-126: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-227: Maid Dial Answer Back With ID Code-328: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-429: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-530: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-631: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-732: Not used33: Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling

TN:1 ACC:20CI:N SRV:SSCSID:36 STATE:1

WRT?


AGSP CM3-01

Hotel

3 = 0) = 1)

35-37: Not used 38: Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop39: Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel40: Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) 41: Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT)42: Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization 43: Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval44: Direct Data Entry-STA 45: Alert Service Start (Special Admin. Station) 46: Alert Service Stop (Special Admin. Station)47-50: Not used 51: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change52: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 53: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 54: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 55: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change56-62: Not Used 63: Dummy Number

Note: STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, bSTATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service)

TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits)CI: Connection Status Index: (Enter N.)

N: Normal B: Busy Service


SID: Service Feature Index: (Enter 56.) 56: Floor Service

NO: Kind of Assignment Number (0-15)


TN = 1 ACC = 30

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:56 NO:1


Revision 4.0

AGSPCM3-01Hotel

mutual

to be

SFCs, or

d

. SCs.s.

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 57 (Split Access):

a. Enter the data for parameters TN through SID.




57: Split Access

b. Enter the data for parameters NO and KIND.

NO: This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned forAccess. This parameter serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.

Note: This parameter is used when assigning the details of the service by command ASPS.

KIND(0-3): This parameter specifies the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data

assigned here depends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated.Guest and Administration phones may be assigned to separate TNs, RSCs, and/oror they may only be differentiated by their respective designations as AdministrationGuest.0: Class: assign this if the access code is to be separated between Guest an

Administration with no correspondence to TN, RSC, or SFC.1: TN: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified TNs2: RSC: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified R3: SFC: assign this if the access code is to be separated among specified SFC

TN:1 ACC:15

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:57

NO:1 KIND:0

WRT?


AGSP CM3-01

Hotel

rding is

• For SRV = SSCA (Other than SIDA = 56):



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.)SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary)

SIDA: Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.)1-40: Not used41: Voice Call (Dterm)42: Message Reminder (Dterm) 43-45: Not used46: Line Load Control; Entry47: Line Load Control; Cancel 48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel52-55: Not used56: Guest/Admi Service57-85: Not used86: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry87: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry 88: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Entry89: Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel 91: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used96: Follow Me Phone97-255: Not used

Note: These indexes are used when ASYD, SYS1, Index 79, bit 2 is assigned as “1” (Split Call Forwain service.).

TN:1 ACC:10

CI:N SRV:SSCA

SID:50

WRT?

Note


Revision 4.0

AGSPCM3-01Hotel

• For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin. Service):



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary)

SIDA: Service Feature Index (1-255): (Enter 56.) 56: (Guest/Admin. Service)

PNO (1-15): This Parameter specifies the Admin/Guest Numbering Parameter Classification


A/G: Admin/Guest0: Admin 1: Guest


TN: Tenant NumberACC: Access Code (1-6 digits) CI: Connection Status Index:

N: Normal ServiceH: Hooking ServiceB: Busy Service

SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA or PAGC.)OGC: Outgoing Call (without Route Advance) PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel

RT: Route Number

TN:1 ACC:15CI:N SRV:SSCASIDA:56 PN0:1 A/G:0

WRT?

TN:1 ACC:9

CI:N SRV:OGC

RT:2


AGSP CM3-01

Hotel

)

• For SRV = OGCA:



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.) OGCA: Outgoing Call (with Route Advance)

CNT: Number of Routes to be enteredRT: Route Number




SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.)LCR: Least Cost Route Selection (Flag Route)LCRS: Register Sender LCR

RT: Route Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone (0/1 = -/SDT) AH: Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization code)

TN:1 ACC:25

CI:N SRV:OGCA

CNT:3 3 RT:5

WRT?

Following entry of CNT, enter Route No. of the alter-nate routes one after another. (If RETURN key ispressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RTincreases by one and then next RT No. can be entered.

“WRT?” displays after specifying all alternative routesin the preceding parameter.

TN:1 ACC:15

CI:N SRV:LCR

RT:2 2nd DT:1 AH:0


Revision 4.0

AGSPCM3-01Hotel

• For SRV = UNIF:



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF ) UNIF: Office Termination

SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access code

• For SRV = ANNC:



SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.) ANNC: Announcement Service

EQP: Announcement Equipment Number (2-15)

TN:1 ACC:40

CI:N SRV:UNIF

SKIP:0

TN:1 ACC:19

CI:N SRV:ANNC

EQP:3


AGST CM3-01

Hotel

this data.

rictionion Class

s Com-

uits on

thatber

INDEX

tel
AGST Assignment of Guest Station Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign Guest Station data. The RGST command is used to delete and displayThe DSTN command can be used to display this data as well.

3. Precautions


• Only Telephone Equipment Classes (TECs) 5-8, 10, 12 and 18 may be assigned to Guest stations.

• The Route Restriction Class data (RSC) works in conjunction with the Assignment of Route RestData Command (ARSC). RSC = 0 cannot be assigned because it is reserved as an outgoing Restrictfor the attendant only.

• The Service Feature Class (SFC) work in conjunction with the Assignment of Service Feature Clasmand (ASFC).

• If the circuit card (PA-16LC, etc.) to which the station is assigned is made busy, all other station circthat circuit card will also be made busy.

• When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message appears during station assignment, confirmthe circuit card is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Num(LEN) assigned for the station. Press the ENTER key after confirming the location.

• When assigning the stations for Floor Service, the data must have been assigned as “ASYD, SYS1,165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).


Revision 4.0

AGSTCM3-01Hotel


Deletion: RGSTDisplay: RGST, DLEN, DSTN Change: AGCL, AGSN(Part)List up: LHEN, LHST

-Parameter SFC-Assignment: ASFCDisplay: ASFCList up: LRTC

-Parameter RSC-Assignment: ARSCDisplay: ARSC List up: LRTC

-Make Busy-Assignment: MBLE, MBST(Busy/Idle) Display: DMBL, DMBS


AGST CM3-01

Hotel

C = 7e same

5. Entry Procedure

• For general Guest Station:


TN: Tenant Number STN: Station NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1-4: Not used5: DP (10 pps)6: PB 7: DP/PB Note 8: DP (20 pps)9: Not used 10: House Phone11: Not used12: Dterm 13-17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi Line)19-31: Not used

Note: When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TE(DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign “PB” in this case. The data used for the class must be thas the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).

RSC: Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC.SFC: Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC.NXT: NEXT

Enter Y, and enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS [See (b)].

TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1



Revision 4.0

AGSTCM3-01Hotel

C = 7e same

b. Enter the data for parameter ROOM CLASS.

Example: 1: Single Room2: Twin Room

Note: When the Dterm is used, ROOM CLASS is fixed to “15”.

• When Floor Service is Provided.

Enter the data for parameters TN through SFC.


1-4: Not used5: DP (10 pps)6: PB7: DP/PB Note8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used10: House Phone 11: Not used12: Dterm 13-17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi Line)19-31: Not used

Note: When Guest Stations will be accessing routes designated as “PB” in the ARTD command, TE(DP/PB) cannot be assigned. Assign “PB” in this case. The data used for the class must be thas the data used in the ARTD command CDN2 (ONSG).

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

WRT?


TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? NXT? is displayed when the data for parametersup to SFC have been entered.


AGST CM3-01

Hotel

RSC: Route Restriction Class, as assigned in ARSC.SFC: Service Feature Class, as assigned in ASFC.NXT: NEXT

Enter Y, and enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR [See (b)].

c. Enter the data for parameters ROOM CLASS through FLR.

ROOM CLASS: (0-15) NoteANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground


FLR: Floor (1-127)

Note: When the Dterm is used, ROOM CLASS is fixed to “15”.

TN:1 STN:3333

ROOM CLASS:0

ANX:0 G:0 FLR:10

WRT?



Revision 4.0

AHKPCM3-02Hotel

swer-

bers.

-

tel
AHKP Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern

2. Function

This command is used to set the functions of the top row of ICI (Incoming Call Identification) keys for aning incoming calls at the Hotel Attendant Console.

3. Precautions


• The following shows the location of the keys which can be set by this command, and their Key Num

In the above, the function indicated in each ( ) is the default function, which becomes valid if no other function has been set by this command, or if the function set has been deleted. Therefore when the default func-tion indicated in ( ) is to be used, data entry is not necessary.

• This command can be executed under one of the following conditions.

a. The 2ATI circuit card is not mounted or is made busy.

b. The ATT has been made busy by means of the MB switch on the 2ATI circuit card.

c. The DAY/NIGHT key on the ATT is set to the NIGHT position.


List up: LHKP

-Parameter ATN-Assignment: ATRKDeletion: ATRKDisplay: ATRK, DLEN List up: LTRK, LHEN

CCSA WATS FX (NANS) (BUSY) (TIE)

(ICPT) OT EMG DND

TF GST (HP) RCL ADM LDN

KEY NUMBER 4 5 6

3

1 2


AHKP CM3-02

Hotel

5. Entry Procedure

ATN: Attendant Number KYN: Key Number (1-6)FUNC: FUNCTION CODE (1-16)

1: CAS Line 2: Not used 3: Priority Call 14: Priority Call 25: Priority Call 36: GST2 7: Wake-Up Call 8: Interposition Transfer 29-16: Not used

Assignment of Hotel Attendant Key Pattern

ATN:1

KYN:1 FUNC:1

WRT?


Revision 4.0

AHSUCM3-02Hotel

as a suite

Roomnging

tion.

tel
AHSU Assignment of Suite Room S tation

2. Function

When the system provides Suite Room Service, this command is used to assign a specific guest stationroom station.

3. Precautions


• Ensure to confirm beforehand the system data (AHSY, INDEX = 187, 188, 189) pertaining to Suite Service inclusive of “Suite Room Service Provided/Not Provided”, “the number of Guest Stations beloto one Suite Room”, etc.

• The station to be assigned as a suite room station must have already been assigned as a guest sta

• A phantom number can be assigned to the master guest station of a suite room.

• Branch stations are not included in the number of suite room stations.

• The master guest station of a suite room must be assigned without exception.


Delete: RHSUList up: LHSU

5. Entry Procedure

a. Enter the data for parameters TN and TYPE.

TN: Tenant Number TYPE: Suite Room Type

S: Single Suite Room D: Double Suite Room

TN:1 TYPE:S


AHSU CM3-02

Hotel

b. Enter the data for parameters SING PHANTOM through S4.

SING PHANTOM: Phantom Number NoteMl: Master Guest Station Number S2-S4: Slave Guest Station Number

Note: When a Phantom Number is not necessary, enter “****”.

SING PHANTOM:3000

M1:2000 S2:2001

S3:2003 S4:2003


Revision 4.0

AHSYCM3-01Hotel

ts of the

tel
AHSY Assignment of Hotel System Parameter

2. Function

This command is used to assign and display the Hotel System parameters.

3. Precautions


• Data of Hotel System parameters must to be entered using hexadecimal numbers. For the contenHotel System parameters, refer to the “Office Data Specification”.


List up: LHSY

5. Entry Procedure

INDEX: Hotel System Parameter Index (0-2047) DATA: System Parameter (Hexadecimal)

Assignment of Hotel System Parameter

INDEX:5 DATA:00

WRT?


ASCR CM3-02

Hotel

e Route

and.

ed),

tel
ASCR Assignment of STA-STA Connection Restriction

2. Function

This command is used to assign and display station to station connection restriction data based on thRestriction Class (RSC) of respect tenants.

3. Precautions


• Inter-tenant station to station connection will allowed for each RSC until it is restricted via this comm


List up: LSCR

5. Entry Procedure

a. Enter the data for parameters CALLING TN, RSC and CALLED TN, RSC.

ASSIGN/ CHECK: When entering the data, enter A, and when causing the data to be checked (display

enter C.CALLING TN:

RSC: Calling Tenant Number respective Route Restriction Class (0-15). CALLED TN:

RSC: Called Tenant Number respective Route Restriction Class (0-15).

ASSIGN/CHECK:A

CALLING TN:1 RSC:1

CALLED TN:2 RSC:2


Revision 4.0

ASCRCM3-02Hotel

b. Enter the data for parameters D/N, DIAL/ATT, RES

D/N: Day/Night ModeD: Day Mode N: Night Mode

DIAL/ATT: Designates whether restriction applies to stations or attendantD: Stations A: Attendant

RES: Restriction Data 0: Restricted 1: Allowed

D/N:D DIAL/ATT:A

RES:1

WRT?


ASPF CM3-01

Hotel

e.

ed)”

d by the

e by the

el
ASPF Assignment of Special Access Code Floor Data

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display Floor Data for the Access Code of the Floor Servic

3. Precautions


• When assigning data by this command, “ASYD SYS1 INDEX 165; bit 7 = 1 (Floor Service is providmust have been assigned.

• When assigning data by this command, the Access Code for Floor Service must have been assigne“AASP” or “AGSP” command.

• When deleting data by this command, the Access Code for Floor Service must be deleted in advanc“AASP” or “AGSP” command.


List up: LSPF

5. Entry Procedure

D/N: Day/Night D: Day Mode N: Night Mode

TN: Tenant Number ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Under Ground

0: Ground 1: Under Ground

NO: Kind of Assignment Number (0-15)FLR: Floor (1-127) DC: Called Number (Max. 6 digits)

D/N:D TN:1 ANX:0

G:0 NO:0 FLR:1

A/G:G DC:0905

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASPSCM3-01Hotel

d for this when

ore an

AASP ormmand

ed here

by their

tel
ASPS Assignment of Special Access Code for Same Number

2. Function

This command is used to assign, delete and display Split Access Data when an Access Code is Assignefeature in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC, SID = 57). This command is programmedaccess codes for trunks and features and/or station numbers are to be shared between Guest and Administrationstations.

3. Precautions


• Split Access must be specified in either the AASP or AGSP command (SRV = SSC, SID = 57) befaccess code can be assigned via this command.

• When data is to be deleted in this command, the data assigned for the access code in either the AGSP command (SRV = SSC, SID = 57) must be deleted as well, but be sure to delete the this cofirst.

• For parameter “NO”, enter the data assigned by command AASP or AGSP.

• Parameters “KIND” and “F” specify the Split Access Parameter Classification. The data to be assigndepends upon how the Guest and Administration phones are differentiated. Guest and Administrationphones may be assigned to separate TNs, RSCs, and/or SFCs, or they may only be differentiatedrespective designations as Administration or Guest.

The relationship between “KIND” and “F” is shown below:

a. For “KIND = 0 (Administration/Guest)”F = 0: Administration1: Guest 2-15: Not used

b. For “KIND = 1 (TN (Tenant))” F = 0: TN = 0

| |15: TN = 15

c. For “KIND = 2 (RSC)” F = 0: RSC = 0

| |15: RSC = 15

d. For “KIND = 3 (SFC)” F = 0: SFC = 0

| |15: SFC = 15


ASPS CM3-01

Hotel

ed for


List up: LSPS


-Parameter EQP- Assignment: AAEDDeletion: AAEDDisplay: AAEDList up: LPAE

5. Entry Procedure

• For Station Number:

D/N: Day/NightNO: This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the station number being assign

mutual access and serves as a counter for the station numbers being assigned. KIND: Kind of Class (0-3):

0: Administration/Guest 1: TN 2: RSC3: SFC

F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter STN.)

STN: Station Number LevelSTN: Station Number

D/N: DNO:0 KIND:0 F:0SRV:STN STN:2

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ASPSCM3-01Hotel

mutual

;

-

);

);

./

./

• For SRV = SSC (Other than SID = 36, 56):

D/N: Day/NightNO: This Parameter specifies the number (0-63) of the access code being assigned for

access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned. KIND: Kind of Class (0-3)

0: Administration/Guest 1: TEC2: RSC3: SFC

F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.)

SSC: Service CodeSID: Service Feature Index (1-63): (Enter other than 36, 56.)

1: Call Hold 2: Operator Call (Guest Call) 3: Call Back; Entry 4: Executive Right of Way 5: Call Waiting-Originating 6: Call Back; Cancel7: Call Pickup Group8: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie)

Entry9: Call Forwarding-All Calls/Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for C.O./Tie); Can

cel 10: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie

Entry11: Call Forwarding-Busy Line/Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for C.O./Tie

Cancel12: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O

Tie); Entry 13: Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer/Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for C.O

Tie); Cancel 14: Speed Calling-Station; Entry 15: Speed Calling-System; Access 16: TAS Answer 17: Individual Trunk Access18: Not used 19: OG Trunk Queuing; Entry20: OG Trunk Queuing; Cancel

D/N: DNO:0 KIND:0 F:0SRV:SSC SID:15 NND:

WRT?

The NDD parameter is displayed only when required bySID. When displayed, enter the data.


ASPS CM3-01

Hotel

21: Speed Calling-Station, Group; Access22-27: Not used28: Call Forwarding-I’m Here; Entry29: Call Forwarding-I’m Here; Cancel30-34: Not used 35: Call Pickup Direct36: Hotel/Motel Service 37: Priority Call 1 38: Priority Call 2 39: Priority Call 3 40: Priority Paging 41: Account Code Dial 42: Authorization Code/Forced Account Code43: Switch Hook Flash Sending (CAS Main Office) 44: Last Number Call45: Not used46: Faulty Trunk Report 47: Not used48: Automatic Wake Up Call; Entry 49: Automatic Wake Up Call; Cancel50: Group Announcement; Entry 51: Group Announcement; Cancel52: Do Not Disturb; Entry (via Guest Station)53: Do Not Disturb; Cancel (via Guest Station)54: Not used55: Not used56: Floor Service 57-59: Not used 60: Attendant Manual Override 61: Call Park Access Code 62: Call Park Local Retrieval Code63: Call Park Remote Retrieval Code


Revision 4.0

ASPSCM3-01Hotel

mutual

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 36 (Hotel Service):


access and serves as a counter for the access codes being assigned.KIND: Kind of Class (0-3)

0: Administration/Guest1: TN 2: RSC3: SFC

F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-5) SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.)


36: Hotel/Motel ServiceSTATE: Hotel/Motel Service Code

1: To be cleaned without ID Code2: Cleaning Completed without ID Code 3: Ready for Occupancy without ID Code4: Use Not Allowed without ID Code5-8: Not used9: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-110: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-211: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-312: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-413: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-514: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-615: Maid Dial Answer Back without ID Code-716: Not used 17: To be cleaned with ID Code 18: Cleaning Completed with ID Code19: Ready for Occupancy with ID Code 20: Use Not Allowed with ID Code21-24: Not used22: Use Not Allowed, Under Repair; Clear with ID Code 23: Not Used24: Repair Needed with ID Code25: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-126: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-2

D/N: DNO:3 KIND:0 F:0SRV:SSC SID:36 STATE:1

WRT?


ASPS CM3-01

Hotel

3 = 0) = 1)

27: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-328: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-429: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-530: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-631: Maid Dial Answer Back with ID Code-732: Not used33: Automatic Wake Up Setting, Cancel; Same Special Code 34: For Guest Station Secretary Telephone; Boss/Secretary Calling 35-37: Not used38: Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop39: Automatic Wake Up-Hotel Attendant Assistance Stop Cancel 40: Alert Service Start (Hotel ATT) 41: Alert Service Stop (Hotel ATT)42: Guest Service Telephone Screen Initialization 43: Guest Service Telephone Guest Room Information Retrieval44: Direct Data Entry-STA 45: Alert Service Start (Special Administration Station)46: Alert Service Stop (Special Administration Station) 47-50: Not used 51: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 52: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 53: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 54: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 55: Same Special Code Time Zone Connection Change 56-62: Not used 63: Dummy Number

Note: STATE = 1-9 are used when Maid ID Code Service is not provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, bSTATE = 17-25 are used when Maid ID Code Service is provided; (ASYD SYS1 INDEX 164, b3


Revision 4.0

ASPSCM3-01Hotel

mutual

mutual

• For SRV = SSC, SID = 56 (Floor Service):




F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSC.)

SSC: Service CodeSID: Service Feature Index (Enter 56.)

56: Floor Service NO: Kind of Assignment Number (0-15) Note


• For SRV = SSCA (Other than SID = 56):




F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)

D/N: DNO:1 KIND:0 F:0

CI:N SRV:SSC

SID:56 NO:1

WRT?

D/N: DNO:1 KIND:0 F:0SRV:SSC SID:50

WRT?


ASPS CM3-01

Hotel

SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.) SSCA: Service Code Appendix

SIDA: Service Feature Index A (1-255): (Enter other than 56.)1-40: Not used41: Voice Call42: Message Reminder (Dterm)43-45: Not used46: Line Load Control; Entry47: Line Load Control; Cancel48: Data Privacy on Demand; Entry 49: Data Privacy on Demand; Cancel50: Busy Out (UCD); Entry 51: Busy Out (UCD); Cancel52: Not used53: Boss/Secretary override tone54: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Set (for Admin)55: Message Waiting Lamp Setting from ATTCON; Cancel (for Admin)56: Guest/Admin Service57-65: Not used66: Multi Channel Recording-DAT (Record)67: Not used68: Multi Channel Recording-DAT (Replay)69-85: Not used86: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Entry87: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Entry88: Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Entry89: Split Call Forwarding-All Calls (for Station); Cancel 90: Split Call Forwarding-Busy Line (for Station); Cancel91: Split Call Forwarding-Don’t Answer (for Station); Cancel 92-95: Not used96: Follow Me Phone 97: Call Hold Conference98-105: Not used106: Return Call107-255: Not used


Revision 4.0

ASPSCM3-01Hotel

mutual

• For SRV = SSCA, SIDA = 56 (Guest/Admin Service):



0: Administration/Guest1: TN 2: RSC3: SFC

F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter SSCA.)

SSCA: Service Code Appendix (Auxiliary) SIDA: Service Feature Index A: (Enter 56.)

56: (Guest/Admi Service)PNO (1-15): This Parameter specifies the Admi/Guest Numbering Parameter classification Note



CI:N SRV:SSCA

SIDA:56 PNO:1 A/G:0

WRT?


ASPS CM3-01

Hotel

mutual

mutual

-





F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15) SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter OGC, PAGA , PAGC.)

OGC: Outgoing Call PAGA: Paging Answer PAGC: Paging Cancel

RT: Route Number

• For SRV = OGCA:




F: Deployment Parameter Value: (0-15) SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter OGCA.)

OGCA: Outgoing Call (Advance) CNT: Number of advanced route RT: Route Number

D/N: DNO:4 KIND:0 F:0SRV:OGCRT:3

WRT?


SRV:OGCA

CNT:3 3 RT:5

WRT?

After entering CNT, enter Route No. of the alternateroutes one after another. (If ENTER is pressed after entering a RT No., the number ahead of RT increases byone and the next RT No. can be entered.)

When as many RT Numbers as designated by CNT areentered, ‘WRT?’ displays.


Revision 4.0

ASPSCM3-01Hotel

mutual

mutual





F: Deployment Parameter Value: (0-15) SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter LCR or LCRS.)

LCR: Least Cost Route Selection LCRS: Register Sender LCR

RT: Route Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone (0/1 = -/SDT) AH: Authorization Code Dialing (0/1 = -/Authorization Code)

• For SRV = UNIF:




F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter UNIF.)

UNIF: Office TerminationSKIP: Number of Digit to be skipped from Access Code.

D/N: DNO:6 KIND:0 F:0SRV:LCRSRT:10 2nd DT:0AH:0

WRT?

D/N: DNO:7 KIND:0 F:0SRV:UNIFSKIP:0

WRT?


ASPS CM3-01

Hotel

mutual

• For SRV = ANNC:


access and serves as a counter for the access code being assigned.KIND: Kind of Class (0-3)


F: Deployment Parameter Value (0-15)SRV: Kind of Service: (Enter ANNC.)

ANNC: Announcement ServiceEQP: Announcement Equipment number (2-15)

D/N: DNO:6 KIND:0 F:0SRV:ANNCEQP:3

WRT?


Revision 4.0

ATCRCM3-02Hotel

nt Class-

tel
ATCR Assignment of TEC-TEC Connection Restriction

2. Function

This command is used to assign or display restriction data for connections between Telephone Equipmees (TECs).

3. Precautions


• Connections between TECs will be allowed until they are restricted via this command.


List up: LTCR

5. Entry Procedure

• When assigning new data:

a. Set “ASSIGN” mode.

CHECK: Enter “A” when entering data.

b. Enter data for each parameter.

CALLING TEC: Calling Telephone Equipment Class NoteCALLED TEC: Called Telephone Equipment Class Note D/N: Day/Night Mode


RES: Restriction Data0: Restricted 1: Allowed

Note: The attendant must be entered as TEC: 31

ASSIGN/CHECK:A

CALLING TEC:1 CALLED TEC:1 D/N:D RES:O

WRT?


ATCR CM3-02

Hotel

• For checking (displaying) the data:

a. Set “CHECK” mode.

ASSIGN/CHECK: Enter “C” when causing the data to be checked (displayed).

b. Enter the data necessary for data display.

CALLING TEC: Calling Telephone Equipment ClassCALLED TEC: Called Telephone Equipment ClassD/N: Day/Night Mode


RES: Restriction DataRES: Restricted ALL: Allowed

ASSIGN/CHECK:C

CALLING TEC:1

CALLED TEC:1

D/N:D RES:RES Restriction Data. Allow or Restrict will be displayed.


Revision 4.0

HISSCM3-02Hotel

tel
HISS Display of Hotel Program Issue

2. Function

This command is used to display the program issue of the HP/MRC in the Hotel System.

3. Precautions

• This command cannot be used in the Business System.

• In the case of the HP, the program issue of the ACT-side HP is read out.

4. Related Reference Command: None

5. Entry Procedure

• Enter the type of the processor.

PROCESSOR: HP/MR

VERSION: Program Version

ISSUE: Program Issue Number

DATE: Program Issue Date

Display of Hotel Program Issue

Processor:

Display of Hotel Program Issue

Processor:

VERSION ISSUE DATE

The system type is displayed here.


HMBU CM3-02

Hotel

floppy

.

isk

tel
HMBU Hotel Main Memory Backup

2. Function

• Main Memory Save

This command is necessary for saving the data in main memory of HP onto a floppy disk.

• Main Memory Verify

This command is used to verify that the data in Main Memory of HP is identical to that stored on the disk.

3. Precautions


• Before saving the Main Memory of HP, the initialization (formatting) of the Floppy Disk is necessary

• Error Indications “FILE NOT FOUND?”: There is no MM file on the floppy disk. (Incorrect floppy dwas inserted into the unit.)

• DISK I/O ERROR!?”: There is a scratch, flaw, etc. on the floppy disk.


None


Revision 4.0

HMBUCM3-02Hotel

yed:

t

5. Entry Procedure

FUNCTION: Operation Mode A: Save V: Verify P: Verify with Error List

EXEC COUNT: Number of Processor to be Specified (Max. 11) SEGMENT: Main Memory SEGMENT Address of ProcessorOFFICE: Office NameDATE: File Date ERRORS: Number of Unmatched Data

This data is displayed for Function = V (Verify).

When this command is being processed or has been completed, the following messages are displa“FLOPPY DISK IS FULL!”:

This message means that the floppy disk is full. When the ENTER key is pressed, the nexmessage is displayed.

“NEXT FLOPPY DISK SETTING ON DRIVE-II (Y/N)?”: This message is displayed when the ENTER key is pressed following the “FLOPPYDISK IS FULL!” message. If Y + ENTER is entered after changing the Floppy Disk, processing is resumed.

COMPLETED:Save, Verify have been completed.

RETURN TO MENU (Y/N): Indication of next jobY: Return to MENUN: Start operation again.

[INPUT PARAMETERS]FUNCTION:S (S:Save V:Verify P:Verify with Error List)EXEC COUNT:1 (Max. 11)PROCESSOR:HP-O (HP Only) SEGMENT:0000 (Hexadecimal)

[FILE INFORMATION IN FD]OFFICE:NEC TOKYO DATE:93/06/25 [FRI]

IS A FLOPPY DISK SET IN DRIVE-B AND READY FOR OPERATION (Y/N)? Y

FILE Informationis displayed

This line meansmemory area of 256Kbytes and showsthe progress of theprocessing.


RAST CM3-01

Hotel

and and

lso befor that

(PA-(LEN)

t-

case

tel
RAST Remove Administration Station Data

2. Function

This command is used to delete Administration Station data. The data is assigned in the AAST commdisplayed via the DLEN or DSTN command.

3. Precautions


• If the pilot station of a station hunting group is deleted, the station hunting data for that group will adeleted. Similarly, if the master station of a speed calling group is deleted, the speed calling data group will be deleted.

• If an attempt is made to delete a station which is busy, an error message will be displayed.

• When the “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed, confirm that the circuit card 16LC, etc.) is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number of the station. Depress Enter key after confirming the location.

• If “NIGHT EXIST”, “SECRETARY EXIST”, or “PHANTOM EXIST” is displayed after a station is deleed, the corresponding Night, Secretary, or Phantom station must also be deleted.

• Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)) are displayed only in theof ASYD, SYSl, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).


Assignment: AASTDisplay: DLEN, DSTNList up: LHEN, LHST


Revision 4.0

RASTCM3-01Hotel

quent to

5. Entry Procedure

• For general Administration station:

a. Enter the data for parameters TN, STN, LENS. (With these parameters entered, the data subseTEC are displayed.)

TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits)TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1: DP (10 pps) 2: PB3: DP/PB 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: Dterm

13: Data Terminal (via Dterm)14: Hot Line15: CAS Line16: Not used17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used 23: ISDN Terminal24-31: Not used


Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS. [See (b)].

TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:2 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? “NXT?” displays when the data for up to SFC havebeen displayed.


RAST CM3-01

Hotel

b. Display the data of ROOM CLASS.

ROOM CLASS: Room Class (0-15)0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm)2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm and Plasma)3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment)4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (Dterm and External Equipment)6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS)8-15: Not used

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

DEL?

The TN and STN entered in (a) display.


Revision 4.0

RASTCM3-01Hotel

quent to


a. Enter the data for parameters TN, STN, LENS. (With these parameters entered, the data subseTEC are displayed)

TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number LENS: Line Equipment Number (6 digits) TEC: Telephone Equipment Class

1: DP (10 pps)2: PB3: DP/PB 4: DP (20 pps) 5-8: Not used9: House Phone 10-11: Not used 12: Dterm 13: Data Terminal (via Dterm)14: Hot Line15: CAS Line16: Not used17: Not used18: Virtual Line Appearance 19-22: Not used23: ISDN Terminal 24-31: Not used


Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b)].

TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:2 RSC:1SFC:1

NXT? “NXT?” displays when the data for up toSFC have been displayed.


RAST CM3-01

Hotel

b. Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.


0: General Administration (Ordinary Telephone, Dterm) 1: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm) 2: Guest Service Telephone (Dterm V and Plasma) 3: Guest Service Telephone-ESC Sequence (Dterm and External Equipment)4: Not used 5: Guest Service Telephone-Text (Dterm and External Equipment)6: Guest Service Telephone-CR/LF (Dterm and External Equipment) 7: Guest Service Telephone (PMS)8-15: Not used



FLR: Floor (1-127)

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1ANX:0 G:0 FLR:1

DEL?

TN and STN entered in (a) display.


Revision 4.0

RGSTCM3-01Hotel

isplayed

lso befor that

(PA-(LEN)

t-

se of

tel
RGST Remove Guest Station Data

2. Function

This command is used to delete Guest Station data. This data is assigned in the AGST command and dvia the DLEN or DSTN command.

3. Precautions


• If the pilot station of a station hunting group is deleted, the station hunting data for that group will adeleted. Similarly, if the master station of a speed calling group is deleted, the speed calling data group will be deleted.

• If an attempt is made to delete a station which is busy, an error message will be displayed.

• When the or “PKG CHECK” or “HP PKG CHECK” message is displayed, confirm that the circuit card16LC, etc.) is mounted in the proper location (slot) in accordance with the Line Equipment Number of the station. Depress RETURN key after confirming the location.

• If “NIGHT EXIST”, “SECRETARY EXIST”, or “PHANTOM EXIST” is displayed after a station is deleed, the corresponding Night, Secretary, or Phantom station must also be deleted.

• Floor Service Data (Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FR)) are displayed only in the caASYD, SYSl, INDEX 165, b7 = 1 (Floor Service is provided).


Assignment: AGSTDisplay: DLEN, DSTN List up: LHEN, LHST


RGST CM3-01

Hotel

quent to

5. Entry Procedure

• For general guest Station:



1-4: Not used5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB7: DP/PB 8: DP (20 pps) 9: Not used10: House Phone 11-31: Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command. NXT?: NEXT

Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS data. [See (b).]

b. Display of the data of ROOM CLASS


TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? “NXT?” displays when the data up toSFC have been displayed.

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

DEL?



Revision 4.0

RGSTCM3-01Hotel

quent to




1-4: Not used5: DP (10 pps) 6: PB7: DP/PB 8: DP (20 pps)9: Not used10: House Phone 11-31: Not used

RSC: Route Restriction Class (0-15), as assigned in the ARSC command. SFC: Service Feature Class (0-15), as assigned in the ASFC command.NXT?: NEXT

Enter Y to display ROOM CLASS through FLR. [See (b).]

TN:1 STN:2000

LENS:001010

TEC:5 RSC:1 SFC:1

NXT? “NXT?” displays when the data upto SFC have been displayed.


RGST CM3-01

Hotel

b. Display the data of ROOM CLASS through FLR.

ROOM CLASS:Room Class (0-15) ANX: Annex (0-3) G: Ground/Underground


FLR: Floor (1-127)

TN:1 STN:2000

ROOM CLASS:1

ANX:0 G:0 FLR:1

DEL?



Revision 4.0

RHSUCM3-02Hotel

assigned

ber hasst station

tel
RHSU Remove Suite Room Station

2. Function

When the system provides Suite Room Service, this command is used to delete a specific guest stationas a suite room station.

3. Precautions


• The station to be deleted must already be assigned as a suite room station.

• The suite room station must be deleted by designating the phantom number when a phantom numbeen assigned at the time of the suite room station assignment or by designating the master guenumber when a phantom number has not been assigned.


Assignment: AHSU Display: AHSU List up: LHSU

5. Entry Procedure

• When Phantom Number has been assigned:

a. Enter the data for parameters TN through P-STN.

TN: Tenant Number TYPE: Suite Room type (Enter S.)

S: Single Suite RoomPHANTOM/ MASTER: Phantom Number/Master Guest Station Number (P/M) (Enter P.)

P: Phantom Number P-STN: Phantom Number

TN:1 TYPE:S

PHANTOM/MASTER:P

P-STN:3000


RHSU CM3-02

Hotel

b. Display the data of SING PHANTOM through S4.

SING PHANTOM: Phantom NumberM l: Master Guest Station S2- S4: Slave Guest Station

• When Phantom Number has not been assigned:

a. Enter the data for parameters TN through M-STN.

TN: Tenant Number TYPE: Suite Room type (Enter S.)

S: Single Suite Room PHANTOM/MASTER: Phantom Number/Master Guest Station Number (P/M) (Enter M .)

M: Master Guest Station Number M-STN: Master Guest Station Number

(a) Display the data of SING PHANTOM through S4.

SING PHANTOM: Phantom NumberMl: Master Guest StationS2-S4: Slave Guest Station

SING PHANTOM:3000MI:2000 S2:2001S3:2002 S4:2003

DEL?

TN:1 TYPE:S

PHANTOM/MASTER:M

M-STN:2000

SING PHANTOM: ****

M1:2000 S2:2001S3:2002 S4:2003

DEL?

Asterisks (****) display when no phantom number hasbeen assigned.


Revision 4.0

ds, in al-

The Listt

CHAPTER 4 LIST UP COMMANDS

List Up commands print out data that has already been assigned. This section covers all List Up commanphabetical order, including the Output Item and the meaning.

The illustration below shows the relationship between List Up commands and Data assignment commands.Up commands and their associated assignment commands are included in Table 4-1, “Reference Table between LisUp Commands and Assignment,” on Page 610.

COMMAND COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME

LABD CM0-06

< Output Item >

TENANT: Tenant Number ADC: Abbreviated Digit Code

Output Item Meaning

Command Name Floppy Disk Name


Revision 4.0

Table 4-1 Reference Table between List Up Commands and Assignment

LIST UP COMMAND

ASSIGNMENT COMMAND

LABD AABD

LAKP AAKP

LAND AAND

LANI AANI

LANP AANP

LARP AARP

LASP AASP

LATC AATC

LCBC ACBC

LCDN ACDN

LCEG ACPE

LCEL ACPE

LCFC ACSI, ACFO, ANCD

LCFS ACFS

LCIC ACIC

LCID ACID

LCMO ACMO

LCND ACND

LCNP ACNP

LCOC ACOC

LCPG ACPG

LCPL ACPG

LCSA ACSA

LCSC ACSC

LDA1 ADA1

LDA2 ADA2

LDID ACDD

LDIM ADIM

LDNR ADNR

LDPC ADPC


LDSS ADSS

LEFR AEFR

LEKD AEKD

LEVT AEVT

LFCD AFCD

LFCP AFCP

LFRS AFRS

LFXC AFXC

LGNP AGNP

LGSP AGSP

LHEN AAST, AGST, ATRK

LHKP AHKP

LHLS AHLS

LHMS AHMS

LHMS2 AHMS2

LHST AAST, AGST

LHSU AHSU

LHSY AHSY

LICD AICD

LIZP AIZP

LKYD AKYD

LLEN ASDT, ATRK

LLMG ALMG

LLPE ALPE

LMAT AMAT

LMDD AMDD

LNDD ANDD, AMND

LNND ANND

LNPD ANPD, ASPA

LNPT ANPT


LIST UP COMMAND

ASSIGNMENT COMMAND


Revision 4.0

LOPR AOPR

LOSD BOSD

LPAE APHN, AAED

LPAT APAT, ATGL

LPCR APCR

LRAC ARAC

LRCF ACFR, ARRC

LRDN ARDN

LREF AREF

LRNP ARNP

LRPC ARPC

LRTC ARSC, ASFC, ATNR

LRTD ARTD

LRTE ARTE

LRTI ARTI

LSAT ASAT

LSCR ASCR

LSDA AISA, ASPD

LSDC ASDC

LSGD ASGD

LSHG ASHC, ASHP, ASHU

LSHL ASHC, ASHP, ASHU

LSID ASlD

LSLP ASTP, AISP, AOSP

LSLU ASLU

LSMD ASMD

LSPF ASPF

LSPS ASPS

LSTN ASDT, ASTN

LSYD ASYD, AUNT, ASTD


LIST UP COMMAND

ASSIGNMENT COMMAND


LTAS ATAS

LTCP ATCP

LTCR ATCR

LTDP ATDP

LTRK ATRK

LUAD AUAD

LUCD AUCD

LUNE AUNE

LVTC AVTC

LVTL AVTL


LIST UP COMMAND

ASSIGNMENT COMMAND


Revision 4.0

LABDCM0-06

NAME COMMAND FULL NAME FD NAME

LABD ACC Restriction Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant NumberADC: Abbreviated

LAKP Attendant Key Information Data List (for Business System) CM0-05

< Output Item > ATTENDANT: Attendant Console NumberFUNCTION CODE:Function CodeKEY NUMBER: Key Number

LAND Automatic Number Identification Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > ROUTE: Route numberAT: STA Outgoing/ATT OutgoingCC: Main Central/Satellite Central STNL: STA Number LengthsCOC: Central Office CodeSKIP: Call Originator Digit to be SkippedADD: Office Code to be AddedDC: Office Code

LANI ANI Data List CM0-06

<Output Item>TN: Tenant Range (a to b)

a - Start Tenant Numberb - End Tenant Number

LARP Area Code Restriction Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > OGRT: Outgoing Route numberDC: Destination CodeRSC: Route Restriction ClassRES: Restriction Data

LATC Authorization Code Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant NumberAUTHORIZATION CODE: Authorization CodeACR: Authorization Code Restriction Pattern NumberSFC: Service Feature Restriction ClassRSC: Route Restriction Class


LCBC CM0-09

LCBC Call By Call Service Data List CM0-09

< Output Item > TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern NumberOPR: Outgoing Route Selection PatternRA: Order of Route AdvanceMN: Service ModeINT: National/InternationalNET: Kind of NetworkSERV: Feature/ServiceCODE: Facility Coding ValueBAND: WATS Band NumberSCC: SCC Distinguish No.

LCCD Compulsion Cut / Amp Pool Data List CM0-06

FUNC: Kind of FunctionA/C: Amp/Compulsion cutTN [a]TO [b]: Tenant Range

LCDN Number of Digits for Consecutive Dialing List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant NumberDC: Destination CodeCDN: Number of Digits of Consecutive Dialing

LCEG List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group Data CM0-11

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant NumberCNT: Number of Stations in the Group1ST-STN: 1st Station NumberSTN: Station Number

LCEL List Up of Call Pickup Expand Group with Sort Data CM0-11

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant NumberCNT: Number of Stations in the Group1ST-STN: 1st Station NumberSTN: Station Number



Revision 4.0

LCFCCM0-05

LCFC Call Forwarding /Connection Service Index Data List CM0-05

1. For Connection Service Index DataROUTE: Route Number NSI: Night Connection Service IndexTENANT: Tenant NumberADC: Abbreviated Digit CodeTRUNK: Trunk NumberSTN: Station Number

2. For Night Connection DataMG: Module Group NumberNCU PKG: PFT Circuit Card NumberPORT: Port NumberROUTE: Route NumberTRUNK: Trunk Number

3. For Call Forwarding Data TENANT: Tenant NumberATTENDANT/STATION: Call Forwarding DestinationCALL FORWARDING: Call Forwarding ServiceSTATION NUMBER: Station Number

LCFS Call Forwarding Station Data List CM0-04

< Output Item > TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberTRK/STN: Receive Call KindCF-V: Transfer Destination of C.F.-All Calls CF-B: Transfer Destination of C.F.-Busy LineCF-D: Transfer Destination of C.F.-Don’t Answer

LCIC CIC Data List CM0-08

< Output Item > DETERMINATE POINT CODE:Determinate Point CodeCSC GROUP NUMBER: CSC Group NumberCIC NUMBER: CIC NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number

LCID Caller ID Data List CM0-08

< Output Item > TYPE: 1 (Fixed)TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station NumberCID: Calling ID Number (Max. 28 digits)SRV: Service Kind (5/6)



LCMO CM0-06

LCMO Clock Manual Override Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > BLOCK NUMBER: Block NumberSTART TIME: Start TimePATTERN NUMBER: Pattern NumberEND TIME: End Time

LCND Calling Number Data List CM0-09

< Output Item >CNP: Calling Number PatternADD: Number of Digits of the Additional NumberSKIP: Skip DigitDC: Digit Code of the Additional Number

LCNP Calling Number Pattern Data List CM0-09

< Output Item > OG/IC: Kind of Connection CNP: Calling Pattern NumberRT: Route Number

LCOC Central Office Code Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number DIGIT CODE: C.O. NumberTRUNK: Trunk Number

LCPG Call Pickup Group Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the GroupCNT: Number of Stations in the Group

LCPL Call Pickup Group Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the GroupCNT: Number of Stations in the Group

LCSA Connection Service Index A List CM0-05

< Output Item > ROUTE NUMBER:Route NumberCSIA: Connection Service Index ATENANT: Tenant NumberTRUNK NUMBER:Trunk NumberADC: Abbreviated Digit CodeSTATION NUMBER:Station Number



Revision 4.0

LCSCCM0-08

LCSC CSC Data List CM0-08

< Output Item > CSC GROUP NUMBER: CSC Group NumberCIC GROUP NUMBER: CIC Group NumberCCH LENS: CCH Accommodate Location

LDA1 DTE Attribute Data 1 List CM0-06

< Output Item > CDN: Counter Display Number STN: Station Number CNTP: Connection ProtocolFCY: Facility RST: RestrictionCI: Calling IndicatorTN: Tenant Number MEDIA: MediaTCP: Transmission Control ProtocolPRI: PrioritySRP: Send Receive Priority

LDA2 DTE Attribute Data2 List CM0-06

L< Output Item > TN: Tenant NumberCDN: Counter Display NumberAUTO: Auto AnswerMDM2: Incoming MODEM NumberPRTY: Parity AdditionHDX: Half/Full DuplexCODE: Kind of DataHL: Hot LineRA: Kind of RASTN: Station NumberDTR: DTR (ER) ControlMDM1: Originating MODEM NumberSPD: Bit Speed RateASYC: AsynchronousSTOP: Stop BitPRFN: Profile NumberHTL: Hot Line Originate Condition



LDID CM0-06

LDID Dial In Service Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night ModeROUTE NUMBER: Route NumberRECEIVE DIGIT CODE: Receive Digit Code CHANGE DIGIT CODE: Change Digit Code ADD DIAL SERVICE: Additional Dialing TRANSFER SERVICE: Transfer Service

LDIM Dial Intercom Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > MGNO: Module Group Number G-ID: Group ID Number Per MG N: Dial Intercom Digit Number BCR: Bridge Call RestrictionICMCT: Number of Intercom STNTN: Tenant NumberICM STN: lntercom Station Number

LDNI Day/Night Information List CM0-04

<Output Item>TN [a] TO [b]: Tenant Range

LDPC Determinate Point Code Data List CM0-08

< Output Item > ROUTE: Route NumberDETERMINATE POINT CODE: Determinate Point Code

LEFR EPN Facility Restriction Data List CM0-06

< Output Item >DAY/NIGHT/URGENT: Day, Night, Urgent Mode TENANT: Tenant Number RSC1: Calling Route Restriction ClassRES: Restriction Data FRI: Facility Restriction Index RSC2: Called Route Restriction Class



Revision 4.0

LEKDCM0-05

LEKD External Key Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > MG: Module Group Number NCU PKG: RFT Circuit Card NumberCP: Change Control Pattern ROUTE: Route NumberCNT: Count of Input TenantsCTN: External Key Number TENANT: Tenant NumberTRUNK: Trunk Number

LEVT List Up of Virtual Tie Line Data for Event Based CCIS CM0-09

< Output Item > RT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberDESTINATION: Destination Number (Max. 6 digits)CALLING: Calling Number (Max. 24 digits)CALLED: Called Number (Max. 24 digits)C_RT: CCIS Signal Route NumberC_TK: CCIS Signal Trunk NumberVRY: Verification of ConnectionOPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number of CBC ServiceRA: Order of Route Advance of CBC Service

LFCD Fixed Connection (Nailed Down Connection) Data List CM0-06

< Output Item> LENS-A: Line Equipment Number (Side-A) LENS-B: Line Equipment Number (Side-B) EAD-A: Equipment Additional DataEAD-B: Equipment Additional Data

LFCP Call Forwarding by Calling Service List CM0-09

< Output Item >D/N: Day/Night Mode CFSI: Call Forwarding Service Feature Index TN: Tenant NumberCALLING PARTY: Calling Party Number and Called Party NumberITC: Information Transfer CapacityCFD: Call Forwarding DestinationSTN: Station Number



LFRS CM0-06

LFRS Flexible Route Selection Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number NUMBER PATTERN CODE: Number Pattern Code OPR: Outgoing Pattern RoutingROUTE: Route NumberOTHER OPR: Other Outgoing Pattern Routing

LHLS Hot Line Data List CM0-05

<Output Item>HOT LINE TENANT: Hot Line Tenant NumberHOT LINE STATION: Hot Line Station NumberCON: Call party’s Tenant NumberCON ADC: Called party’s Abbreviated Digit CodeCON TRUNK: Called party’s Trunk NumberCON: Called party’s Station NumberCON ROUTE: Called party’s Route Number

LHMS Hold Music Data List CM0-06

<Output Item>RT: Route NumberHMSC: Hold Music Data

LHMS2 Hold Music Data List CM0-06

<Output Item>TN: Tenant NumberRT: Route NumberHMSC: Hold Music Data

LICD Intercom Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > MGNO: Module Group NumberA/M: Automatic/Manual Signaling ICMCT: Number of Intercom STN ICM STN: lntercom Station NumberG-ID: Group ID Number per MGBCR: Bridge Call Restriction TN: Tenant Number SIG STN: Signaling Station Number

LIZP Internal Zone Paging Data List CM0-11

TN: Tenant number of calling partyIZPG: Internal Zone Paging group number (01-99)IZPTN: Tenant number of IZPSTNIZPSTN: Station number assigned to the Internal Zone Paging group



Revision 4.0

LKYDCM0-05

LKYD Key Data for Dterm List CM0-05

< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number TP: Type of Dterm RING: Ringing Data for Multilines PRI: Priority of Answering a Call ICM: Kind of Intercom G-ID: Group ID NumberSPK: SpeakerANS: AnswerORG: OriginatingMWD: Message Waiting Data Display Selection S: OG from Prime Line KEY NO.: Key NumberKEY INDEX: Kind of ServiceFUNC: Function Key NumberPRIME/MULTI LINE TENANT, STN: Tenant Number and Station Number of Prime LineKD: Kind of LineRG: Ringing Data for each individual line of the MultilinesICM: Kind of IntercomG-ID: Group ID Number

LLEN LENS Data List (for Business System) CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Station

LENS: Line Equipment NumberSTATION NUMBER: Station Number RSC: Route Restriction ClassTENANT: Tenant Number TEC: Telephone Class SFC: Service Feature Restriction Class

2. For TrunkROUTE: Route Number TRUNK: Trunk Number

LLMG Alarm Grade Data List CM0-11

<Output Item>1. ALL DATA FK-FI: System Message2. CHANGE DATA ALM: Alarm Kind3. DEFAULT DATA GR: Grade



LLPE CM0-06

LLPE Line Privacy Expansion Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > TN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number

LMAT Master Attendant Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number MASTER ATTENDANT: Master Attendant NumberNIGHT MASTER ATTENDANT: Night Master Attendant OTHER ATTENDANT: Attendant Number

LMDD MODEM Data List CM0-05

< Output Item >MODNO: MODEM Number DR: Data Ready HDX: Half/Full Duplex2W/4W: 2W MODEM / 4W MODEM ASYNC: Asynchronous RSGT: RS-CS Guard Timer CDN: Counter Display NumberR: Modem RingingM/D: MODEM/DST SPEED: Bit SpeedFCY: Facility

LNDD Name Display Data List CM0-06

< Output Item >TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number NAME: User’s Office Name



Revision 4.0

LNNDCM0-05

LNND Necessary Digit Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Number of Necessary Digits Data

ROUTE: Route Number IN COMING: Incoming Call NECESSARY DIGITS: Number of Necessary DigitsOUT GOING: Outgoing Call

2. For Maximum Number of Digits DataTENANT: Tenant Number MND: Maximum Necessary Digits AN: Account Number A/D: Analog/Digital Line Data DIAL CODE: Dial CodeTOLL: Toll Code IdentificationRATE: Option Service Data

LNPD Numbering Plan/Special Access Code Data List (for Business System)

CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Numbering Plan Data

TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status IndexBLF: Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON1ST DC: 1st Digit CodeNND: Number of Necessary Digits

2. For Special Access Code Data TENANT: Tenant Number CI: Connection Status IndexNND: Number of Necessary DigitsCNT: Number of Input of Alternative Routes SKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access Number EQP: Announcement Equipment Number 2nd DT: Second Dial Tone AH: Authorization Code DialingSID: Service Feature Index SIDA: Service Feature Index AACCESS CODE: Access Code SRV: Kind of ServiceRT: Route NumberSUB: SUB Address

LNPT Numbering Data List for PTT Network CM0-06

DC: Digit Code (starting and ending)



LOPR CM0-06

LOPR Outgoing Pattern Routing/Additional Translation Data List CM0-06

<Output Item>TDPTN: Time of Day Change PatternOPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern NumberRA: Order of Route AdvanceE: Route Advance End IndicationRT: Outgoing Route NumberSKIP: Number of Digits to be SkippedPNL: Pattern Number LocationOVFT: Overflow tonePRSC: Priority Restriction Class

LOSD List Up of One-Touch Speed Call Memory Date CM0-04

< Output Item > • Circuit CardTN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number and Speed Calling Data LENA: Line Equipment Number

< Output Item > • FDTN: Tenant NumberSTN: Station Number and Speed Calling Data

LPAE Phantom Number/Announcement Equipment Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Phantom Number Data

TENANT: Tenant NumberPHANTOM NUMBER: Phantom Number STATION NUMBER: Station NumberPHANTOM KIND: Kind of Phantom

2. For Announcement Equipment Data TENANT: Tenant NumberROUTE: Route NumberCONNECT TIME: Duration of Connection MULTI SIGNAL: Multiple ConnectionEQUIPMENT NUMBER: Equipment Number TRUNK: Trunk Number REMOTE ANSWER: Answer Signal Sending SENDING RBT: Sending RBT



Revision 4.0

LPATCM0-05

LPAT PAD Data /Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For PAD Data

TDM/ST: Tandem Connection/Station Connection INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route NumberSERVICE CLASS: Service Feature Restriction Class INCOMING PAD: Incoming Pad Data OUTGOING PAD: Outgoing Pad DataROUTE: Route Number

2. For Trunk Group Busy Lamp Data ATTENDANT NUMBER: Attendant Number TRUNK GROUP NUMBER: Trunk Group NumberROUTE: Route Number

LPCR Primary Call Restriction Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number BLOCK NUMBER: Block Number PRIMARY CALL DIGIT CODE: Primary Call Digit CodeRSC: Route Restriction ClassRES: Restriction Data

LRAC Remote PBX Access Code Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > INCOMING TRUNK TENANT: Incoming Trunk Tenant NumberACCESS CODE: Access Code TENANT: Tenant Number

LRCF List Up of Alternative Route/Call Forwarding Restriction Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Alternative Route Restriction Data

INCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route Number ALTERNATIVE ROUTE INDEX: Alternative Route Index (ATT/DIAL) RESTRICTION DATA: Restriction Data

2. For Call Forwarding Restriction DataTENANT: Tenant Number TRANSFER SERVICE FEATURE INDEX:

Transfer Service Feature IndexCALL CATEGORY INDEX (CCI):

Call CategoryRES: Restriction Data



LRDN CM0-08

LRDN Remote Control Day/Night List CM0-08

< Output Item > INDEX: Point Code for Satellite Day/Night Mode POINT CODE: Point Code

LREF Reference Number Information Data List CM0-09

<Output Item>REF: Reference Number (Start, End)

LRNP Reverse Numbering Plan Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code

LRPC Remote Point Code for Centralized Service CM0-08

< Output Item > CSN: Centralized Service Number RPC: Remote Point Code

LRTC Route/Service Feature Class Data and Tenant Restriction Class/Tenant Restriction Data List

CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Route Restriction Class Data

TENANT: Tenant Number RSC CODE: Route Restriction ClassRRI: Route Restriction Index DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ROUTE: Route NumberRES: Restriction Data

2. For Service Feature Restriction Data TENANT: Tenant Number SERVICE INDEX: Service Feature Index RES: Restriction DataDAY/NIGHT: Day/Night ModeSERVICE RESTRICTION CLASS:Service Feature Restriction Class

3. For Tenant Restriction Class DataDAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode ORIGINATING: Originating TenantTERMINATING TENANT: Terminating TenantTENANT RESTRICTION INDEX: Tenant Restriction IndexRES: Restriction Data



Revision 4.0

LRTDCM0-05

LRTD Route Class Data List CM0-05

<Output Item>ROUTE: Route NumberOSGS: Signal Interface for OutgoingONSG: Signal Selection for OutgoingISGS: Signal Interface for IncomingINSG: Signal Selection for IncomingTF: Type of Trunk FunctionTCL: Trunk ClassL/T: Line/Trunk IdentificationRLP: Trunk Release PatternTQ: Outgoing Trunk QueuingSMDR: Detailed Billing InformationTD: Toll Denial Battery ReversalDR: Distinctive Ringing PatternAC: Flexible Routing Pattern DesignationTNT: Tenant Number CheckLSG: Line SignalSMDR2: Detailed Billing InformationH/M: Always output “0”MC: Always output “0”EANI: E911-ANI ServiceD: Always output “0”MSB: Always output “0”BT: Busy ServicePRV: Line Trunk PrivacyA/D: Analog/Digital Line DataCW: Call Waiting ServiceTPQ: OG Trunk Queuing-DeluxeBL: Detection of Blocking SignalTRKS: Trunk Selection SequenceDPLY: Number Display of Dterm between officesACD: ACD Service2W/4W: 2 Wires/4 WiresFAAT: Authorization Code of ATTCONDC: Dialed Number CoMSW:Always output “0”SCF: Split Cal ForwardingMSW: Always output “0”TR: Always output “0”OC: Always output “0”R/L: Attendant-Identification of Incoming Trunk DisplayRVSD: Trunk Reversal IdentificationTL: Tone LevelANS: Answer Signal from Trunk Side



LRTD CM0-05

LRTD, continued

TELP: Time Elapse Identification ServicePAD: PAD Control DataOGRL: Release Timing for Outgoing Trunk ConnectionsICRL: Release Timing for Incoming Trunk ConnectionsHD: Trunk Hold TimingGUARD: Outgoing Inhibit Timing after Trunk ReleaseWINK: Width of Wink SignalVAD: Always output “0”CLD: Always output “0”FA: Always output “0”BC: Always output “0”TCM: Terminal Class MarkTDMQ: Tandem Off Hook OG QueuingTRSC: Trunk Restriction ClassGW: Gate WayTCMA: Always output “0”SMDR3: Always output “0”HDT: Heterogeneous Data TrunkCD: Consecutive DialingCCH: Common Channel HandlerTC/EC: Always output “0”IRE: Always output “0”SCR: Step Call Restriction for Tie Line CallLYER1: Layer 1NET: USER/NET IdentificationINT: Interface SpecificationHKS: Trunk Hooking SignalSCF: Split Call ForwardingSMDR4: Always output “0”



Revision 4.0

LRTECM0-06

d

LRTE Print Out of Expanded Route Class Data CM0-06

<Output Item>RT: Route NumberTCMN: Number of Digit of TCM (S Code)TCMC: TCM and Sending SequenceMFSP: Sending SpeedKPST: Duration of KP SendingKPPT: Pause after KP SendingSTC: Stop CodeMC: MP Start CauseMT: MF FrequencyTONE: TONE Designation for TRK Call TerminationPPTM: Sender PrepauseMPTM: Sender Minimum PauseLPTM: Sender Inter-Digit Pause IndexRSAX: Always output “0”CST: Always output “0”CSEG: Always output “0”CSEU: Always output “0”CSEL: Always output “0”CMP: Always output “0”TALK: Always output “0”FOT: Always output “0”RST: Always output “0”TOCI: Trunk Override CallingTOCD: Trunk Override CalledODGD: Always output “0”RLS: Always output “0”GWD: Gate Way Data ServiceH1: Always output “0”DT: Always output “0”CI: ISDN Sending InformationOID: Always output “0”TKS: Always output “0”PAD2: Pad Control Data 2TRM: Always output “0”TRPX: Always output “0”LDR: Always output “0”TSC: Always output “0”SATS: Always output “0”RVPX: Always output “0”DQ: Always output “0”SLOV: Slumber Time Override SDTO: System Message automatic output when Connection Acknowledge Signal not receiveADVPRA: ISDN PRI Fail safe Routing Service



LRTE CM0-06

LRTE, continued

IND: Inter-office Name DisplayUU2: Always output “0”DCH: Always output “0”CMRT: Common use of Route Numbers of ISDN trunksPREF: Always output “0”DFS: Always output “0”BOB: Always output “0”HO1CH: Always output “0”IFR: Indonesia Compulsion Cut ServiceCONV: SMDR Called Party’s Number ConversionCNI: Calling Number Identification Format



Revision 4.0

LRTICM0-09

LRTI Trunk Application Data List CM0-09

<Output Item>RETMSG: Return Message for Connect ISDN LINE WITH Analog TrunkRST: Assignment of RestartHMT: Always output “0”TRCRST: Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information ElementTRSRST: Call Restriction by Information transfer rate in Bearer Capability Information ElementT309LNK: Assignment of Timer T309 for Data Link FailureT309CON: Assignment of Timer T309 for Layer 1 FailureLLCRST: Call Restriction by user rate in Low Layer Capability Information ElementVCM: Always output “0”OVRT: Always output “0”POOL: Always output “0”DTRT: Detection of ALL 1 alarm signal (DTI Layer 1 alarm)TMPRT: Temporary Route Information over CCISCODEC: Always output “0”PASS: Always output “0”IRL: Clear call when DTI alarm is detectedMTC: Assignment of Timer T309 Value. Restoration timer (TC × MTC) sec.TC: Timer T309 Counter ValueTS: Always output “0”CDCSPD: Always output “0”DVRST: Call Restriction while Tie Line is backed up on ISDNRSCT: Call Restriction by Temporary Route InformationROCG: Outgoing Call Account by Temporary Route InformationRICG: Incoming Call Account by Temporary Route InformationSTSENQ: Status Inquiry Message SendANI: Timing to demand ANI InformationSRV: Additional Service SelectionTON: Type of NumberNPI: Numbering Plan IdentificationSPMET: Meter Pulse Observation ControlECCIS: Event Based CCIS (E-CCIS)ECCISTM: Release Timer for E-CCIS LineECCISOB: OG Billing for E-CCIS LineECCISIB: IC Billing for E-CCIS LineL/T: Local/Toll (for Russia)ECCISTD: Addressing Information used in E-CCISMFCG2: Calling Party CategoryCLBK: Kind of Collect Call Blocking Signal



LSAT CM0-05

LSAT Specific Attendant Number Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > ATTENDANT NUMBER: Attendant Number ACCESS CODE: Access Code of Specific Attendant Number TENANT: Tenant Number

LSDA Speed Calling Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Speed Calling Data

TENANT: Tenant Number CD: Telephone NumberADC: Abbreviated Digit Code

2. For Individual Speed Calling Entry Area Data TENANT: Tenant Number MASTER/SLAVE: Station Type (Master Station/Slave Station)BLOCK: Number of Blocks STN: Station Number REMARK: Remarks

LSDC Six Digit Least-Cost Routing Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > KIND: Kind of Selection OPR: Outgoing Route Selection Pattern Number OFFICE: Office Code TDPTN: Time of Day Change Pattern NumberRA: Route Advancing OrderEFFECT: Designing Data

LSGD Special Group List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number FUNCTION NUMBER: Function Number STATION NUMBER: Station NumberGROUP NUMBER: Specific Terminating Device Group Number



Revision 4.0

LSHGCM0-05

LSHG Station Hunting/UCD Data List CM0-05

<Output Item>1. For Station Hunting-Terminal Group

TN: Tenant NumberPILOT STN: Pilot Station NumberCNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting GroupSTN: Station Number in the Hunting GroupSCRET: Secretary Number

2. For Station-Hunting Circular Group DataTN: Tenant NumberCNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting GroupSTN: Station Number in the Hunting GroupSECRET: Secretary Number

3. For Station Hunting-UCD Group DataTN: Tenant NumberCNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting GroupSTN: Station Number in the Hunting GroupADD: Number of Stations to be AddedTN-B: Tenant Number of the UCD Overflow GroupSTN-B: Station Number of the UCD Overflow GroupTNA, STNA: Tenant Number and Station Number of the UCD GroupTNB, STNB: Tenant Number and Station Number of the UCD Group (To be Hunted)

LSHL Station Hunting/UCD Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For Station Hunting - Terminal Group Data

TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group SECRET: Secretary Number PILOT STN: Pilot Station NumberSTN: Station Number in the Hunting GroupPHANTOM: Phantom Number

2. For Station Hunting - Circular Group DataTENANT: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the Hunting Group CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting GroupSECRET: Secretary Number

3. For Station Hunting - UCD Group Data TENANT: Tenant Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting GroupSTN: Station Number in the Hunting Group



LSID CM0-06

LSID Special Incoming List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number GROUP NUMBER: Specific Terminal Device Group NumberFUNCTION NUMBER: Function TypeSTATION/ATT: Type of Specific Terminating Device (Station/ATT)

LSLP Selection Translation Pattern Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > 1. For Selection Translation Pattern Data

IC/OG: Incoming/Outgoing ROUTE: Route Number TENANT: Tenant NumberPATTERN NUMBER: Selection Translation Pattern Number

2. For Incoming Selection Pattern Number Data INCOMING PATTERN NUMBER: Incoming Selection Translation Pattern Number DIGIT INFORMATION: Additional Digit Information

3. For Outgoing Selection Pattern Number Data OUTGOING PATTERN NUMBER: Outgoing Selection Translation Pattern Number SKIP: Number of Skipped Digits ADD: Number of Added Digits DIGIT INFORMATION:Additional Digit Information

LSLU Slumber Time Data List CM0-04

< Output Item > FUNC: Kind of Function TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number G: Slumber Time Group NumberCNT: Slumber Time Counter TFR: Transfer kind (ATT/Announcement)FROM: Slumber Time Start Time TO: Slumber Time End Time

LSMD Service Module Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > KOSM: Kind of SM NOSM: Logical Number of each SM SMPN: SM Port NumberSMI: Mounting Position of SMINT



Revision 4.0

LSTNCM0-05

LSTN Station Data (Number Group) List(for Business System)

CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. Station Number

TENANT: Tenant NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction ClassSTATION NUMBER: Station NumberTEC: Telephone ClassSFC: Service Feature Restriction Class

• The following data is printed out when it belongs to Station Hunting-Terminal or Circular Group SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group

• The following data is printed out when it belongs to Call Pick Up Group. CNT: Number of Station in the Call Pick up Group

• When Phantom Number is assigned, the following data appears PILOT: Pilot Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number SECRETARY: Secretary NumberCNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group

< Output Item > 1. Station Number

TENANT: Tenant NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction ClassSTATION NUMBER: Station NumberTEC: Telephone ClassSFC: Service Feature Restriction Class

• The following data is printed out when it belongs to Station Hunting-Terminal or Circular Group SECRETARY: Secretary Number CNT: Number of Stations in the Hunting Group

• The following data is printed out when it belongs to Call Pick Up Group. CNT: Number of Station in the Call Pick up Group

• When Phantom Number is assigned, the following data appears PILOT: Pilot Number PHANTOM: Phantom Number SECRETARY: Secretary NumberCNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group



LSYD CM0-05

LSTN (Continued)

• In case of Hot Line the following appears.CON TN: Called Party’s Tenant Number ADC: Called Party’s Abbreviated Digit Code STN: Called Party’s Station Number

• In case of Dterm the following data appears Dterm Key Position: Dterm Key Data

• The following data is printed out when it belongs to UCD GroupCNT: Number of Station in the Hunting Group TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number in the UCD Group

2. Specific Attendant NumberRT: Route Number CNT: Number of Trunks (Attendant) TN (ATN): Trunk (Attendant) NumberTN: Tenant Number

3. For Listed Directory NumberTN: Tenant Number LDN: Listed Directory Number

LSYD System/Unit/Status Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > 1. For System Data

SYS: System Data Type HEXA: Data (00-FF) in Hexadecimal Format TN: Tenant Number (Only SYS = 2) INDEX: System Data IndexBINARY: Data in Binary Format

2. For Unit Data MODULE GROUP: Module Group Number UNIT TYPE: Unit Type Indication UNIT/PKG NUMBER: Unit/Circuit Card Number

3. For State Translation DataSTATE TRANSLATION MAIN CATEGORY NO.: State Translation Main Category No. STATE TRANSLATION CATEGORY NO.: State Translation Category No.STATE TRANSLATION INFORMATION: State Translation Information



Revision 4.0

LTASCM0-05

LTAS TAS Service Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number MODULE GROUP NUMBER:Module Group Number UNIT NUMBER: Unit Number CIRCUIT NUMBER: Circuit Number

LTCP Time/Pattern Information Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > START TIME: Start Time END TIME: End Time PATTERN: Pattern Number

LTDP Toll Code Restriction Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > DAY/NIGHT: Day/Night Mode TDM/OG: Tandem/Outgoing ConnectionRSC: Route Restriction Class OUTGOING ROUTE: Outgoing Route NumberINCOMING ROUTE: Incoming Route Number DIGIT CODE: Destination CodeTDI: Restriction Data

LTRK Trunk Data List CM0-05

< Output Item > ROUTE: Route Number TRUNK: Trunk NumberLENS: Line Equipment Number RSC: Route Restriction ClassSFC: Service Feature Restriction Class CNT: Number of TenantsTENANT: Tenant Number

LUAD UCD Delayed Announcement Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > GROUP COMMON:Announcement Data is Common to all GroupTN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control StationSTN: Station Number of UCD Group Control Station DLYT: Delay TimerMSGT: Message TimerRP: Designation of Number of Times Announcement is heard. lNT: Repeating Interval CNT: Number of Announcement Trunks RT: Route Number of Announcement Trunk TK: Trunk Number of Announcement Trunk



LUCD CM0-06

LUCD UCD Control Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number of UCD Group Control StationSTN: Station Number of UCD Group Control StationQTH ACT: UCD Queing Peg CountQTH: UCD Queing Peg Count ValueCWT: Threshold Value of Call WaitingMCI: Message Center Interface Data Transfer

LUNE Uniform Numbering for EPN Data List CM0-06

< Output Item > TENANT: Tenant Number NUMBER PATTERN CODE:Number Pattern CodeSKIP: Number of Possible Skipped DigitsROUTE: Route Number

LVTC Virtual Tie Line Call Data List CM0-09

< Output Item > TN: Tenant Number STN: Station Number use Virtual Tie Line Call

LVTL Virtual Tie Line Data List CM0-09

< Output Item > DATE: Date RangePTN: Pattern Number IC/OG: Kind of AssignRT: Route NumberTK: Trunk NumberD-LENS: LENS of DchCH: Bch Number CALLING: Calling NumberCALLED: Called NumberKEYPAD: Keypad Information SUB: Kind of Sub AddressSUB No.: Sub Address WEEK: Week RangeTIME: Time RangeRESULT: Result



Revision 4.0

LANP CM3-03

CHAPTER 5 HOTEL SYSTEM LIST UP COMMANDS

The following List Up commands are used for hotel/motel applications only.


LANP Administration Numbering Plan Access Code Data List CM3-03

< Output Item >TENANT: Tenant NumberCI: Connection Status IndexNND: Number of Necessary Digits1 ST DC: 1st Digit CodeBLF: Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON

LASP Administration Special Access Code Data List CM3-03

< Output Item >TENANT: Tenant NumberCI: Connection Status IndexNND: Number of Necessary DigitsCNT: Number of Input of Alternative RoutesSKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access NumberEQP: Announcement Equipment Number2nd DT: Second Dial ToneAH: Authorization Code DialingSID: Service Feature IndexSIDA: Service Feature Index AACCESS CODE: Access CodeSRV: Kind of ServiceRT: Route NumberSUB: SUB Address

LDNR Day/Night Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03

< Output Item >TN: Tenant NumberDAY: DayHOUR: HourRSC: Route Restriction ClassNIGHT: NightMINUTE: Minute

LDSS Direct Station Select Data List CM3-03

< Output Item >ATN: Attendant NumberDC: Called NumberDSS: DSS key Number


Revision 4.0

LFXCCM3-03

LFXC List Up of Fixed Connection (Nail Down Connection Data) CM3-03

< Output Item > LENS-A: Line Equipment Number of Data Link Interface TrunkLENS-B: Line Equipment Number of Dterm

LGNP Guest Numbering Plan Access Code Data List CM3-03

<Output Item>TENANT: Tenant NumberCI: Connection Status IndexBLF: Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON1 ST DC: 1st Digit CodeNND: Number of Necessary Digits

LGSP Guest Special Access Code List CM3-03

<Output Item>TENANT: Tenant NumberCI: Connection Status IndexBLF: Busy Lamp Field Display activated on ATTCON1 ST DC: 1st Digit CodeNND: Number of Necessary Digits

LHEN LENS Data List CM3-03

<Output Item>FUNC: FunctionUNIT: Unit NumberMG: Module Group Number

LHKP Hotel Attendant Key Pattern Data List CM3-03

<Output Item>ATTENDANT: Attendant Console NumberFUNCTION CODE:Function CodeKEY NUMBER:Key Number

LHST Station Data (Numbering Group) List CM3-03

< Output Item >TN: Tenant NumberLENS: Line Equipment NumberRSC: Route Restriction ClassCLASS: Room ClassSTN: Station NumberTEC: Telephone ClassSFC: Service Feature Restriction Class



LHSU CM3-03

LHSU Suite Room Data List CM3-03

< Output Item > TN: Tenant NumberTYPE: Suite Room TypeLENS: Line Equipment NumberRSC: Route Restriction ClassROOM CLASS: Room ClassMSTN: Master Guest Station NumberSTN: Slave Guest Station NumberTEC: Telephone ClassSFC: Service Feature Restriction ClassPHANTOM: Phantom Number

LHSY Hotel System Parameter List CM3-03

< Output Item > INDEX: Hotel System Data IndexBINARY: Data in Binary FormatHEXA: Data (00-FF) in Hexadecimal Format

LSCR Station to Station Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03

< Output Item > CALLING TN: Calling Tenant NumberCALLING RSC: Route Restriction Class of Calling SideCALLED RSC: Route Restriction Class of Called SideCALLED TN: Called Tenant Number

LSPF Special Access Code Floor Data List CM3-03

< Output Item > D/N: Day/Night NO.: Kind of Assignment Number G: Ground/UndergroundDC: Called NumberTENANT: Tenant NumberANX: Annex FLR: Floor Range



Revision 4.0

LSPSCM3-03

d for

LSPS Same Number Special Access Code Data List CM3-03

< Output Item >NO.: This Parameter Specifies the number (0-63) of the station number being assigne

mutual access and serves as a counter for the station numbers being assigned.F: Development Parameter Value (0-15)KIND OF SERVICE: Kind of ServiceNND: Number of Necessary DigitsCNT: Number of Input of Alternative RoutesSKIP: Number of Digits to be skipped from Access NumberEQP: Announcement Equipment Number2nd DT: Second Dial ToneAH: Authorization Code DialingSID: Service Feature IndexSIDA: Service Feature Index AACCESS CODE: Access CodeSRV: Kind of ServiceRT: Route NumberSUB: SUB Address

LTCR TEC-TEC Connection Restriction Data List CM3-03

< Output Item > D/N: Day/NightCALLING TEC: Telephone Class of Calling SideCALLED TEC: Telephone Class of Called Side



ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200705 - TeleComceptstelecomcepts.com/old_site/downloads/Neax2400/ICS...

Documents

Transcript of ND-45687 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200705 - TeleComceptstelecomcepts.com/old_site/downloads/Neax2400/ICS...